1 of 1 Rev. 12/31/17

CURRENT DATE OF REVISION MT 100 SECTION

CONCRETE Test Date of Method Publication No. Title Pages or Revision MT 100 Contractor Submitted Concrete Mix Design .................................................. 3 pp Dec 2017

MT 101 Making and Curing Compressive and Flexural Strength Test Specimens in the Field ..................................................................................................... 1 pp Dec 2015

MT 102 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 152 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method)

MT 103 Measuring the Thickness of In-Place Concrete by Use of Concrete Thickness Gauge ........................................................................................... 3 pp Mar 2007

MT 104 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 119 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete)

MT 105 Eliminated (Use AASHTO R 60 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete)

MT 106 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 148 Measuring Length of Drilled Concrete Cores)

MT 107 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 196 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method)

MT 108 Sampling and Certification of Portland Cement ............................................ 2 pp Jun 2004

MT 109 Method for Sampling Water ........................................................................... 1 pp Jun 2004

MT 110 Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Other Precast Items ..................................... 4 pp Jan 2012

MT 111 Sampling, Inspection and Reporting on Prestressed Structural Members... . 3 pp Jan 2012

MT 112 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 24 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete)

MT 113 Eliminated (Use ASTM E965 Measuring Pavement Macrotexture Depth Using a Volumetric Technique)

MT 114 Sampling for Chloride Content of Bridge Deck Concrete .............................. 3 pp Feb 2010

MT 115 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 121 Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete)

MT 116 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 347 Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC))

MT 117 Making and Curing Concrete Compressive and Flexural Strength Specimens in the Field for Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC) ....................................... 1 pp Jun 2017

MT 118 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 152 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method)

MT 119 Moisture Correction for Concrete Mix Designs (formerly MT 506)…………… 1 pp Jun 2004

MT 120 Vacant

MT 121 Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar .......... 1 pp Jun 2016

MT 122 Optimized Aggregate Gradation for Hydraulic Cement Concrete Mix Designs (formerly MT 215) ............................................................................ 6 pp Jan 2017

MT 100-17 (12/31/2017)

1 of 3

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING

MT 100-17 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTED CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

1 Scope 1.1 This document describes required mix design procedures for independent concrete mix designs

and establishes the information required for a mix design submittal. 1.2 This procedure applies to the Montana Department of Transportation (MDT) projects requiring an

approved concrete mix design. It is to be used for preparation of a mix design by the contractor for submission to MDT’s Materials Bureau for final approval.

1.3 It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide mix designs meeting the required specifications

of Section 551, plans, supplemental requirements, and any special provisions included in the contract. The testing of the contractor’s proposed mix design must be performed by a certified

laboratory or performed by a certified technician with a Professional Engineer as the signature of record. A certified laboratory is any laboratory meeting the requirements of ASTM C1077. A certified technician will have current ACI Field, Laboratory and Strength Testing certifications or corresponding current WAQTC certifications. Perform concrete mix designs in conformance with Montana, AASHTO, ACI and ASTM procedures. Mix Designs submitted by Certified Precast or Prestressed concrete plants are exempt from this subsection. A Certified plant is any concrete plant listed on the MDT’s Qualified Products List (QPL).

2 Referenced Documents ASTM

C1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation

MT Materials Manual

MT 601 Materials Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Guide Index 3 Procedure 3.1 A mix design must be submitted for each class of concrete to be used on an MDT project to the

Project Manager. Mix designs, including all required information, must be submitted 15 working days prior to concrete placement. Mix designs are to be submitted as either a new mix design or a mix design transfer.

3.2 Materials: All materials proposed are subject to approval. Refer to MT 601 for sampling and

testing requirements. 3.3 New Mix Design (Trial Batches): When submitting a new mix design, trial batches must be

performed. Batches must be based on the same materials and proportions proposed for the project. Trial batches must be completed 15 working days before concrete placement. The Materials Bureau will review all documentation and accept or reject the mix design.

Create at least one trial batch for each concrete mix design. Simulate haul time and mixing conditions to ensure proper workability at the jobsite. It is also recommended that a larger, more representative trial batch be made in the same manner as intended for project placement. For each trial batch, test in accordance with Annex A.1. All mix designs must include aggregate properties testing information for each aggregate size in accordance with Annex A.2. For alternative mix designs, per contract specifications, test in accordance with Annex A.3. Include data sheets for cementitious materials and admixtures with the design submittal. The trial batch will be subject to rejection if any test results fail to meet specified ranges and a new trial batch will

MT 100-17 (12/31/2017)

2 of 3

be requested. For each trial batch, cast a minimum of three sets of three test cylinders in 4” x 8” molds. Test and average one set at 3 days, one set at 7 days, and one set at 28 days. If earlier strength information is needed for de-tensioning prestressed applications, post tensioning, form removal, etc., submit strength data for the anticipated work. The average of the cylinders at 28 days must meet the minimum strength requirements of the contract. When permeability testing is required, perform testing of three cylinders cast from the trial batch in accordance with either AASHTO T 277 or AASHTO T 358. Cylinders used for AASTHO T 358 testing may be subsequently used for compressive strength determination. Based on the anticipated application of the mix design, cast and test as many specimens as needed to supply sufficient information.

3.4 Mix Design Transfer: Concrete mix designs used on MDT projects are valid for three years,

provided they are transferred within 12 months of their previous use. Any request for transfer after three years will require new trial batches and resubmittal of the mix design. The contractor may request, in writing, the transfer of a concrete mix design to another project. There will be no substitutions of any materials or changes in mix proportions under this method. The Department may deny the transfer for any reason including, but not limited to, past performance, failing materials test results, raw material property changes, etc.

4 Acceptance 4.1 Approval: A representative of the MDT’s Materials Bureau will verify and sign off approval of the

new or transferred concrete mix design provided required information, test results, and proper forms are submitted, and all required MDT specifications are met. When a signed copy of approval is issued to the contractor, concrete placement may begin. Any time before or after approval of the design, the Material’s Bureau may request additional materials for testing. Throughout the project, MDT may request additional tests be performed by the contractor to ensure proper placement and satisfactory test results.

4.2 Rejection: If a mix design produces failing results, a new mix design must be submitted for

approval. The Materials Bureau may reject any design on the basis of any one failing test result. 4.3 In no case will the approval of a concrete mix design relieve the contractor of producing material

meeting the contract requirements. Any changes or modifications to a mix design needed in the field must be approved by the Project Manager. A halt in production may be required for additional testing. Review and approval of the concrete mix design by a representative of the MDT’s Materials Bureau does not constitute acceptance of the concrete. Acceptance of concrete will be based solely on the test results of concrete placed on the project.

MT 100-17 (12/31/2017)

3 of 3

ANNEX A.1 The following tests are required for all concrete mix design submittals:

• AASHTO R 39 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory • AASHTO R 60 Sampling Fresh Concrete • AASHTO T 22 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens • AASHTO T 119 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete • AASHTO T 121 Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete • AASHTO T 152 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method • AASHTO T 347 Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete (if applicable) • AASHTO T 345 Passing Ability of Self-Consolidating Concrete by J-Ring (if applicable) • AASHTO T 351 Visual Stability Index of Self-Consolidating Concrete (if applicable) • ASTM C1064 Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic Cement Concrete • MT 101 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

A.2 The following tests are required for aggregates for all concrete mix design submittals:

• AASHTO T 2 Sampling of Aggregates • AASHTO T 11 Materials Finer Than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing • AASHTO T 21 Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete • AASHTO T 27 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates (Including Fineness Modulus) • AASHTO T 84 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate • AASHTO T 85 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate • AASHTO T 96 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and

Impact in the Los Angeles Machine • AASHTO T 104 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate • AASHTO T 112 Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregate • AASHTO T113 Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate • MT 121 Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength Of Mortar*

*As required per Specification 701.01.1(D) A.3 The following tests are required for alternative mix designs and for specific classes of concrete:

• AASHTO T 277 Electrical Indication of Concrete’s Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration • ASHTO T 358 Surface Resistivity Indication of Concrete’s Ability to Resist Chloride Ion

Penetration • ASTM C157 Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar

and Concrete • ASTM C512 Standard Test Method for Creep of Concrete in Compression • ASTM C469 Standard Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson's Ratio of

Concrete in Compression • ASTM C457 Standard Test Method for Microscopical Determination of Parameters of the Air-

Void System in Hardened Concrete

MT 101-15 (12/30/15)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 101-15

MAKING AND CURING CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE AND FLEXURAL STRENGTH TEST SPECIMENS IN THE FIELD

(Modified AASHTO T 23) MT 101 is identical to AASHTO T 23 except for the following stipulations: 1. Include the following Montana Materials Manual references.

MT Materials Manual MT 609 Field Numbering Concrete Cylinders

2. Replace the 1st sentence in Section 10.1.3.1 with the following:

Cylinders – Upon receipt in the Materials Bureau, store specimens in a moist condition with free water maintained on their surfaces at all times at a temperature of 73 ± 3ºF (23 ± 2ºC) using water storage tanks or moist rooms complying with the requirements of AASHTO M 201, except when capping with sulfur mortar compound and immediately before testing.

3. Replace Section 11.1 with the following:

Prior to transporting, cure and protect specimens as required in Section 10. Specimens shall not be transported until at least 8 h after final set. For transporting, efforts shall be made to protect the specimens from jarring, extreme changes in temperature, freezing, and moisture loss. Before transporting specimens from the field to the laboratory for testing, place specimens in sturdy boxes surrounded by a suitable cushioning material to prevent damage from jarring. During cold weather, protect the specimens from freezing with suitable insulation material. Prevent moisture loss during transportation by wrapping the specimens in plastic or wet burlap and by surrounding them with wet sand or sawdust or using tight-fitting plastic caps for plastic molds.

1 of 1

MT 103-07 (03/23/07)

1 of 3

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 103-07

METHOD FOR MEASURING THE THICKNESS OF IN-PLACE CONCRETE BY USE OF CONCRETE THICKNESS GAUGE

(Montana Method) 1 Scope 1.1 This method covers the procedure for measuring the thickness of concrete pavements. Thickness

is determined by using a concrete thickness gauge to measure the time required for an echo to bounce off the backside of the concrete member being tested. The thickness is a product of the velocity of sound in the material and one half the transit time (round trip) through the material.

2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO T 148 Measuring Length of Drilled Concrete Cores MT Materials Manual MT 606 Selecting Sampling Locations by Random Sampling Technique

3 Apparatus 3.1 Standard Surveying Equipment – EDM, mirrors, level, rod, etc. 3.2 Concrete Thickness Gauge 3.3 Core Drill – for obtaining cylindrical core specimens 3.4 Measuring Tape 4 Vertical Control 4.1 When possible, it is recommended that at least one vertical control point be established for each

day’s placement of concrete, using survey methods prior to placement. After the concrete has hardened sufficiently, remeasure the same control point to determine the depth of the finished concrete. Use this point as a calibration point for the concrete thickness gauge. (Pre-established reference points and grade control points may also be used to determine concrete thickness).

5 Gauge Calibration Methods 5.1 Gauge Calibration Place the concrete thickness gauge on the concrete, at the pre-established vertical control point,

and calibrate according to the manufacturers instructions. The gauge will now establish the velocity for the particular concrete being tested.

5.2 Direct Input Method Following the manufacturer’s instructions, a direct input method may be used to calibrate the

concrete thickness gauge. For the purpose of this method, a core will be taken to determine the actual thickness of the placed concrete. The concrete thickness gauge will then be calibrated using the core thickness.

MT 103-07 (03/23/07)

2 of 3

6 Procedure 6.1 Calibrate the gauge according to one of the procedures described above. The gauge must be

calibrated on the concrete to be tested or the correct velocity entered into the gauge. The calibration should be done on a smooth, clean surface to obtain the best data possible. (See Note 1) This data will be used for all subsequent tests and all tests must be completed on the same day as the gauge calibration.

6.2 Randomly select test locations (see Note 1) according to MT 606 Random Sampling Technique or

as directed by the Engineering Project manager. 6.3 At the test location, take four measurements by rotating the gauge around a center point,

collecting readings every 90 degrees. Average the results. Note 1 – Make certain that the test head of the concrete thickness gauge is in good contact with the

concrete surface. Testing should be done on a smooth clean surface to obtain the best data possible.

7 Calculation 7.1 Record gauge readings to the hundredth of a foot or (mm) on lab form 7.2 Record the average of the four (4) readings from each test location to a hundredth of a foot or

(mm). 7.3 Determine and record the concrete thickness variation by subtracting the average of the four

readings from the design thickness and record to the nearest hundredth of a foot (mm). 8 Report 8.1 Project Number Project Name Name of Tester Title Address Date Measurements made Test Location/Station Test results

MT 103-07 (03/23/07)

3 of 3

MT 103-07BLS

Montana Department of Transportation Materials Division

REPORT ON DEPTH OF PCCP CONCRETE

Lab No. Project No. Project Name Gauge No. Tested by Title District Submitted By Date Tested Sta. of section Date Placed Depth measurement at four points Sta. Cal or Tested Average Depth

Remarks: Design thickness of PCCP ( in / mm ) Avg. variation from design ( in / mm ) Distr. 1-Materials Bureau 1-Constr Bureau 1-Pavement Analysis Sec. 1-EPM 1-Dist/Area Lab

MT 108-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING

MT 108-04 SAMPLING AND CERTIFICATION OF PORTLAND CEMENT

1 Scope 1.1 This method covers the requirements for sampling and certification of Portland cement. 2 General 2.1 Cement samples shall weigh a minimum of 6.8 Kg (15 pounds). Such samples shall be placed in

air-tight plastic bags which shall in turn be placed in canvas bags to protect against breakage during shipment. The bin or silo number and the grind number shall be shown on the Lab. Form No. 55 to accompany the sample.

3 Procedure 3.1 A sample of cement shall be submitted to the Materials Bureau, prior to construction, for all

projects which involve bridge construction or projects which involve 114.3 cubic meters (125 cubic yards) of concrete. The sample may be taken from existing stock at the ready mix plant. On many projects this will be the only sample required unless the provisions of Section 4 make additional sampling necessary.

4 Sampling Frequency 4.1 Project Sampling 4.1.1 Bridge Projects 4.1.1.1 Minimum of one sample taken prior to the start of concrete production. 4.1.1.2 One sample for each additional 458.6 cubic meters (600 cubic yards) of concrete used. 4.1.1.3 This procedure shall be used regardless of the number of structures involved in the project. 4.1.2 Paving Projects 4.1.2.1 One sample taken prior to the start of concrete production. 4.1.2.2 Additional samples taken for each 4572.0 cubic meters (5,000 cubic yards) of concrete produced. 4.1.3 Cement Treated Base Projects 4.1.3.1 One sample taken at the start of the project. 4.1.4 Miscellaneous Projects (cattle guards, sign bases, etc.) 4.1.4.1 One sample taken prior to the start of concrete production on jobs involving 114.3 cubic meters

(125 cubic yards) of concrete or more. 4.1.4.2 Samples need not be submitted for projects involving less than 114.3 cubic meters (125 cubic

yards) of concrete.

MT 108-04 (06/01/04)

2 of 2

4.2 Random Sampling 4.2.1 Each district shall, in addition to samples taken in accordance with Section 4.1 above, submit a

random sample of each brand of cement used in that district during the year. These samples may be taken at any time during the year.

5 Cement Certification 5.1 The cement plants shall furnish the Materials Bureau with certified test results for each new grind

or bin of cement produced for use within the state. 5.2 Each shipment of cement from the manufacturing plant to a highway project shall be

accompanied by a certificate of compliance. This certificate shall state that the cement complies with all the requirements of AASHTO M 85 or ASTM C150, low alkali cement, and shall be signed by a responsible representative of the cement plant. Two copies of this certification shall accompany the shipment, one for the consignee and one for the Engineering Project Manager.

MT-109 (06/01/04)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 109-04

METHOD OF SAMPLING WATER 1 Scope 1.1 This method covers the sampling of water for determination of its suitability for use in concrete, for

determination of corrosivity, and for chemical testing for potability. It does not include sampling for biological testing.

2 Referenced Documents MT Materials Manual MT 601 Materials Sampling, Testing, and Acceptance Guide Index 3 Application 3.1 This method is applicable to sampling industrial and domestic water supplies from sources such

as wells, rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, reservoirs, pipelines and conduits for chemical or physical tests.

4 Point of Sampling 4.1 Where the water in a stream is mixed so as to approach uniformity, a sample taken at any point in

the cross section is satisfactory. 4.2 For bodies of water such as ponds or reservoirs, avoid surface and/or bottom sampling and

attempt to obtain an integrated sample containing water from all points in a vertical section. Depending upon the nature of the source being sampled, it may be desirable to sample at several points and to combine the samples to obtain a representative sample of the source.

4.3 In sampling from pipelines, conduits, pump discharge, etc., make certain that all conduits have

been flushed. In the case of water wells, initial pumping for well cleaning purposes shall have been completed so the sample represents the sustained output of the source.

5 Frequency of Sampling 5.1 A sample of the water proposed for use shall be submitted in accordance with the frequency

specified in MT 601. 6 Volume of Sample and Type of Container 6.1 Furnish a one liter (quart) sample in a clean glass or plastic bottle or jar with a screw cap lid with

liner. Fill almost to the top, but allow a small space to allow for possible expansion due to temperature change.

7 Labeling 7.1 Label with identifying source data and state the purpose for which the sample is taken.

MT 110-12 (01/13/12)

1 of 4

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING

MT 110-12 METHOD OF ACCEPTANCE FOR

REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE AND OTHER PRECAST ITEMS (Montana Test Method)

1 Scope 1.1 This procedure defines inspection responsibilities and verification processes applicable to all suppliers of

pre-cast concrete pipe and associated items. 2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO M 55 Steel, Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete M 85 Portland Cement M 170 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe M 206 Reinforced Arch Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe M 207 Reinforced Elliptical Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe M 259 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culvert, Storm Drains, and Sewers T 24 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete T 119 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete T 152 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method T 347 Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete ASTM C361 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head Pressure Pipe MT Materials Manual MT 101 Making and Curing Compressive and Flexural Strength Test Specimens in the Field MT 108 Sampling and Certification of Portland Cement MT 117 Making and Curing Concrete Compressive and Flexural Strength Specimens in the Field for

Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC) MT 118 Method of Determining Air Content of Freshly Mixed Self Consolidating Concrete by the

Pressure Method MDT Construction Bureau Manual for Culvert and Pipe Installation and Inspection

3 Definitions ACPA – American Concrete Pipe Association NPCA – National Precast Concrete Association

4 Inspection Process for ACPA and NPCA Certified Plants 4.1 Each participating manufacturer must maintain sufficient procedures and documentation to assure that

their products are manufactured and tested in accordance with the guidelines of ACPA and/or NPCA certification programs. An MDT Inspector will conduct a thorough inspection of each Certified Plant to verify compliance with these requirements. Plants meeting these requirements will be listed on the Qualified Products List.

MT 110-12 (01/13/12)

2 of 4

4.1.1 Yearly

Inspection Checklist

• Verify ACPA and/or NPCA certification.

• Verify that certified manufacturing plants have a Quality Control Manual, applicable AASHTO, ASTM standards, organizational chart, and personnel training and qualification records.

• Verify that production and testing equipment has been properly calibrated according to the calibration

requirements as stated in the Quality Control manual.

• Verify mix designs are approved.

• Verify that the manufacturers detailed design information meets MDT requirements.

• Verify that documents are maintained for all suppliers of materials for the months the plant is producing.

o Admixture Certifications o Gasket and Joint Sealant Material Certifications and Test Reports

Verify 12” to 33” have been sampled/tested at 1/300 frequency Verify 36” and larger have been sampled/tested at 1/100 frequency

• Verify that test reports are maintained per ACPA and/or NCPA testing frequencies for the

following: o Absorption Test Results o Three Edge Bearing Test

• Conduct Monthly or Frequency Based Inspection outlined in Sec. 4.2

• Sample concrete cylinders and reinforcing steel for Department testing.

• Verify that any deficiencies recorded from the previous inspection have been addressed.

4.2 Monthly or Frequency Based Approximately once a month, unless another frequency is defined, inspect the fabricating plant’s certification reports, test results, and other records from the previous inspection date to present. Ensure that the plant is ‘Buy America’ compliant for all steel products. Witness concrete cylinder testing is being performed correctly on certified equipment and meets MDT requirements.

Inspection Checklist

• Verify that any deficiencies recorded from the previous inspection have been addressed.

• Verify the following documentation has been maintained:

o Buy America Certification o Cement Mill Reports o Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates (once every 3 months) o Fly Ash Certifications o Other Cementitious Material Certifications and Test Reports o Cylinder Break Strength Results and Frequencies

• Verify fabricated cages and reinforcement conforms to MDT specifications.

• Verify a dimensional test report on one pipe size to ensure that they match the dimensions shown on the

detailed drawings or AASHTO Standard Specifications.

MT 110-12 (01/13/12)

3 of 4

• Observe or perform the following concrete tests: o Slump o Air Content o Temperature of the mix o Making of cylinders o Cylinder compression testing o Slump Flow (when applicable) o J Ring (when applicable) o Three Edge Bearing Test including Destructive Testing outlined in Section 4.3 (once every 3

months) 4.3 Observe destructive testing in the form of crushing precast pipe and other precast items in conjunction

with the three edge bearing tests. Inspector will randomly select precast pipe sample to be tested. Verify the size, amount, and origin of the reinforcing steel. Coring and random inspections will be performed on Concrete Box culverts and miscellaneous precast items such as cutoff walls, cattle guard bases, FETS, and sound walls as directed by MDT.

5 Inspection Process for Non-Certified Plants 5.1 Inspect non-certified plants to confirm the products meet MDT specifications. Sample components i.e.

concrete, reinforcing steel and other items. Check fabrication drawings and inspect the final product for quality. The plant’s quality control program must be sufficient that MDT can confirm quality of materials and processes used. MDT level of inspection will vary according to Department needs.

• Verify personnel training and qualification records.

• Verify production and testing equipment has been properly calibrated.

• Verify mix designs are approved.

• Verify that the manufacturers detailed design information meets MDT requirements.

• Verify fabricated cages and reinforcement conforms to MDT specifications.

• Verify a dimensional test report on product to ensure that they match the dimensions shown on the

detailed drawings or AASHTO Standard Specifications.

• Verify rate and frequency of testing is adequate and Quality Control records are maintained.

• Verify the following documentation has been maintained and required samples have been acquired:

o Buy America Certifications and reinforcing steel samples o Cement Mill Reports o Aggregate samples for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates o Fly Ash Certifications o Other Cementitious Material Certifications and Test Reports o Cylinder Break Strength Results and Frequencies o Admixture Certifications o Gasket and Joint Sealant Material Certifications and Test Reports

• Observe or perform the following concrete tests:

o Slump o Air Content o Temperature of the mix o Making of cylinders o Cylinder compression testing o Slump Flow (when applicable) o J Ring (when applicable) o Concrete Absorption o Three Edge Bearing Test or verification of test results

MT 110-12 (01/13/12)

4 of 4

• Verify concrete cylinders are made and tested periodically to represent the concrete placed in all items.

• Concrete items other than concrete pipe will be entered on Form 19A. These items, together with pipe too large to test, are represented by cylinder tests as outlined above.

6 Mark of Inspection 6.1 Products manufactured at a certified plant will not carry the mark of inspection. Non-certified

manufacturers of concrete pipe and other concrete items must notify MDT when producing products for a project so that inspection arrangements can be made. All concrete products produced by a non-certified plant must carry a mark of inspection. (see Figure 1). This will be stamped on each section of product, by the inspector, where it will be clearly visible. The circle M indicates the product was inspected. Final acceptance will be made in the field.

6.2 If a product is to be rejected in the field, place an X next to the product identification stamp. This mark

indicates that the product is rejected for all MDT projects. If the product requires repairs, but is not necessarily rejected; mark areas requiring repair to clearly designate and track what needs correction prior to acceptance.

Figure 1 CIRCLE M STAMP

MT 111-12 (01/13/12)

1 of 3

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 111-12

SAMPLING, INSPECTION AND REPORTING ON PRESTRESSED STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

1 Scope 1.1 This method is written to the individuals completing inspection and establishes a uniform

procedure for the sampling, inspecting, and reporting of pre-stressed structural members. 1.2 Inspection Process Overview 1.2.1 Provide data to the field as it becomes available. Send original test results and reports to MDT

Helena Materials Lab (to be placed in the job file), keep one copy in the Inspectors personal file, and send one copy to the Project Manager for the project file.

1.2.2 Send an inspection report with each beam to the project. Provide copies to the EPM, District

Materials Lab, the Construction Bureau, and the Materials Bureau. This report must state that all of the materials used in the completed beams have been sampled, tested, and documented within reports that are in the possession of the Plant Inspector. Identify the beams by number and place in the report file as an indication that the beams are complete and acceptable subject to final field inspection.

1.2.3 The following links provide access to the Department’s most current forms to be used during

Prestress Inspection:

Strand Tensioning & Cylinder Breaks Form 45 – Rebar or Strand Sample Form 48 – Shipping & Final Approval Form 48A – Final Plant Inspection Ready Mix Pour Record Fabrication Inspection Report Miscellaneous Inspection Report

2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO Methods T 24 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete T 119 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete T 152 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method T 347 Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete MT Materials Manual MT 101 Making and Curing Compressive and Flexural Strength Test Specimens MT 108 Sampling and Certification of Portland Cement MT 117 Making and Curing Concrete Compressive and Flexural Strength Specimens in the Field

for Self Consolidating Concrete (SCC) MT 118 Method of Determining Air Content of Freshly Mixed Self Consolidating Concrete by the

Pressure Method MT 201 Sampling Roadway Materials

3 Materials 3.1 Materials used in the manufacture of pre-stressed beams are covered individually to avoid any

misunderstanding on the part of the Plant Inspectors. 3.2 Sample and test aggregates will be sampled and tested quarterly in accordance with MT 201. If

new sources or deviations in material properties are apparent, resample aggregates as necessary for quality assurance.

MT 111-12 (01/13/12)

2 of 3

3.3 Cementitious materials and admixtures are listed on the Department’s Qualified Products. Verify that the mix design has been approved by the Helena Materials Bureau and appropriate material types and quantities are used.

3.4 Wire strand is tested in the Materials Bureau. Submit samples with a Form 45, a copy of the mill

test results of the load elongation curve, and associated documentation to meet Buy America requirements. The pre-stress plant is responsible for notifying the Plant Inspector when shipments of strand are received at the pre-stress plant. Sample strand by obtaining two 5 foot (1.5 m) long sections from a reel in the shipment. Submit these samples together with reel numbers, heat numbers, and all available information such as size, strength, etc., to the Materials Bureau for testing. Strand or any other item or ingredient used in the manufacture of a structural member prior to test results being received by the Plant Inspector are at the plant’s risk. Reject members constructed with strand that does not meet Department requirements.

3.5 Sample reinforcing steel as each new shipment arrives at the plant. The pre-stress plant is

responsible for notifying the Plant Inspector when shipments of rebar are received at the pre-stress plant. Submit two 3 foot (1.0 m) long samples of each bar size to the Materials Bureau with a Form 45 and associated documentation required to meet Buy America requirements. Verify that all of the pertinent information is shown on the accompanying reports.

3.6 Witness the casting of cylinders representing release breaks by the pre-stress plant personnel.

Witness or cast the cylinders for acceptance of twenty-eight day strength testing in accordance with MT 101. Ensure that a set of at least 3 cylinders are fabricated for each pour in addition to release cylinders of a sufficient number to perform the required tests prior to release of the strand per Specification Subsection 553.03.11 Transfer of Pre-stress (minimum of 3 cylinders).

4 Plant Inspection and Acceptance 4.1 Review all documentation to verify conformity with contract requirements. For typical documentation

requirements, see Specification Subsections 553.02 and 553.03. 4.2 Verify that the bed layout measurements have been checked by plant personnel and are in agreement

with the approved shop drawings. 4.3 Verify strand patterns are in agreement with the approved shop drawings prior to tensioning. Check

strands for strength and elongation (temperature correction) as provided on the approved shop drawings. Document and notify pre-stress plant personnel of any materials used in the beam that have not been sampled and tested in accordance with Section 3.1.3.

4.4 Verify that the rebar cage layout has been checked by pre-stress plant personnel and is in

accordance with contract requirements. Document and notify pre-stress plant personnel of any materials used in beam that have not been sampled and tested in accordance with Section 3.1.4.

4.5 Verify that a final pre-pour inspection occurs prior to forms being set. Obtain a copy of the plant’s pre-

pour inspection form which must include details on the placement of inserts, bulkheads, bearing plate locations, and all other applicable details.

4.6 Visually check forms for proper placement. Verify that remaining steel and lift hooks have been

included in accordance with approved shop drawings prior to concrete placement. 4.7 Witness concrete tests and cylinder breaks to verify requirements of Section 3.1.5 and Specification

Sections 553.03.10 and 553.03.11 are met. After forms are removed, visually inspect before allowing the strand release (cutting of strands). If repairs are necessary, do not allow strand release until repairs are completed and are cured for a minimum of 24 hours.

4.7.1 Record pour placement times and field verification information using the “Ready Mix Pour Record”

when pre-stress items are constructed using ready mix concrete.

MT 111-12 (01/13/12)

3 of 3

4.8 Perform Final Inspection to ensure the finished member meets plan dimensions. Document the Final Inspection on Form 48-A.

4.8.1 Mark each pre-stress member that conforms to specification requirements in all respects with a Circle

M stamp (see Fig.1) before shipment from the plant. This identifying mark indicates that fabrication procedures, quality of materials and workmanship are satisfactory and the member is complete at the plant.

4.8.2 If deficiencies are identified, notify the Physical Testing Engineer, Bridge Bureau and Project Manager

of the concerns and determine the corrective actions that are required. Do not mark these members with a Circle M stamp unless corrective actions have been completed and no additional concerns exist. Absence of a Circle M stamp indicates that the member is not complete or deficiencies have been observed by the Plant Inspector and additional corrective actions may be required. Note any deficiencies on the Pre-stress Beam - Final Plant Inspection Check List (Form 48-A). Noted defici-encies not corrected before shipment will be transmitted to the field with the Pre-stressed Beam Report Lab Form 48.

Figure 1 CIRCLE M STAMP

5 Field Inspection and Acceptance

5.1 When the product arrives at the job site, inspect members for shipping and handling damage or other

defects. Notify the Project Manager of any damage or defects observed in the field. 5.2 Final acceptance of the member is made in the field in accordance with the contract. Ensure any

deficiencies identified on the Pre-stressed Beam Report (Form 48) are addressed before final acceptance. Project Manager may reject any product that does not serve the necessary function or fails to meet contract requirements.

MT 114-10 (02/15/10)

1 of 3

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 114-10

METHOD OF SAMPLING FOR CHLORIDE CONTENT OF BRIDGE DECK CONCRETE

1 Scope 1.1 This is a method of sampling bridge deck concrete for chloride content. 1.2 See MDT Safety Policies and Procedures Manual. 2 Apparatus 2.1 Coring Machine 2.2 Pachometer - A pachometer is available upon request from the Materials Bureau 2.3 Gas powered (110-115 Volt A.C.) Generator with transport cart for operating drill 2.4 Rotary Impact Drill of heavy duty construction 2.5 Bit - 3/4 inch (19mm) diameter carbide steel bit 2.6 Vacuum cleaner 2.7 Pliable sampling spoon - Copper or flexible spoon 3 inches (7.5mm) in length and less than 3/4

inch (19mm) in width 2.8 Plastic bottles - Approximately 2 inches (50mm) tall and 1 inch diameter with sealable caps 2.9 Ruler with 0.10" increments and millimeters 2.10 Paper labels 2.11 Fast Setting Grout - "Set 45", "Rockite" or other fast setting grout 2.11 Personal Protective Equipment - Plastic goggles, hearing protection, gloves 2.12 Plastic bottle containing one of the following: distilled water, deionized water, ethanol (denatured)

or methanol (technical grade) 3 Sampling 3.1 Chloride samples shall be taken before coring and in an area as close as possible and with the

same types of distress (i.e. delaminations or cracking) as that intended for coring. 3.2 When coring or sampling for chlorides extreme caution will be required due to traffic hazards and

use of power equipment. For standard safety practices refer to the MDT Safety Policies and Procedures Manual.

4 Procedure 4.1 The Bridge Plans are used to find approximate rebar location, cover over rebar, and thickness of

concrete. 4.2 The pachometer is used to locate top layer of reinforcing steel and its depth.

MT 114-10 (02/15/10)

2 of 3

4.3 Drill a hole 1/4 inch (6mm) deep and discard this portion of the sample by using the Vacuum cleaner. (See Note 1)

4.4 Drill the hole to a depth corresponding to the top of the rebar (see Note 1 and 2) and use copper

or plastic spoon to collect minimum 10 g sample in plastic bottle labeled "A". 4.5 Clean the hole out with the Vacuum cleaner. 4.6 Drill hole to a depth of one inch below the top layer of reinforcing steel. Secure minimum 10 g

sample of pulverized concrete with copper or plastic spoon and place into plastic bottle labeled as "B". (See Note 1 and 2)

4.7 Clean holes and fill with high strength epoxy grout patching compound such as "Set 45" or

"Rockite". Note 1 - The sketch as shown below defines the drilling depth for sampling:

Cross Section Through Slab

Note 2 - During sample collection and pulverizing, personnel shall use caution to prevent contact of the

sample with hands or other sources of body perspiration or contamination. Further, all sampling tools (drill bits, spoons, bottles, sieves, etc.) shall be washed with alcohol or distilled water and shall be dry prior to use on each separate sample. Alcohol is normally preferred for washing because of the rapid drying which naturally occurs.

MT 114-10 (02/15/10)

3 of 3

5 Labeling 5.1 The following data will be written on each label and attached to each sample bottle:

• Project number and termini • E.B. or W.B. lane • Position in lane measured from curb • Depth range of sample measured from top of deck and labeled as "A" or "B"; (See Note 1) • Depth of reinforcing steel • Core number cross reference • Brief description of condition of area (i.e., delaminations, cracks).

6 Submittal 6.1 Cores with chloride samples will be submitted to the Materials Bureau.

MT 117-17 (06/30/2017)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 117-17

MAKING AND CURING CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE AND FLEXURAL STRENGTH TEST SPECIMENS

IN THE FIELD FOR SELF-CONSOLIDATING CONCRETE (SCC) (Modified AASHTO T23)

MT 117 is identical to AASHTO T 23 except for the following stipulations: 1. Include the following Montana Materials Manual references.

MT Materials Manual MT 609 Field Numbering Concrete Cylinders

2. In general, tamping via rodding or vibration is eliminated from the method for the testing of self-

consolidating concrete. Specifically: A. Replace Section 1.1 with the following: “This method covers procedures for making and curing cylindrical and beam specimens from

representative samples of fresh self-consolidating concrete (SCC) for a construction project.” B. Eliminate Sections 5.4 and 5.5 C. Replace Section 5.9 with the following: “Slump Flow Apparatus--The apparatus for measurement of slump flow shall conform to the

requirements of AASHTO T 347”. D. Eliminate Section 9.4

3. Replace Section 11.1 with the following:

Prior to transporting, cure and protect specimens as required in Section 10. Specimens shall not be transported until at least 8 h after final set. For transporting, efforts shall be made to protect the specimens from jarring, extreme changes in temperature, freezing, and moisture loss. Before transporting specimens from the field to the laboratory for testing, place specimens in sturdy boxes surrounded by a suitable cushioning material to prevent damage from jarring. During cold weather, protect the specimens from freezing with suitable insulation material. Prevent moisture loss during transportation by wrapping the specimens in plastic or wet burlap and by surrounding them with wet sand or sawdust or using tight-fitting plastic caps for plastic molds.

MT 119-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 119-04

MOISTURE CORRECTION FOR CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS (Montana Method)

1 Scope 1.1 This method describes the procedure for making a correction in the moisture requirement of a

concrete mix, due to absorbed moisture. Concrete mix designs furnished by the Materials Bureau are based on saturated surface dry aggregate and the moisture correction must be made when concrete is produced. Moisture may be figured on a one sack basis or on a one cubic meter (one cubic yard) basis. A typical Class "A" mix for one sack of cement would be shown as: 94 - 213 - 190 - 190.

2 Moisture Requirement 2.1 The example mix makes no mention of water as it is controlled by slump requirements, but for the

purpose of mix designs it is assumed to be 22.7 liters (6 gallons) per sack of cement. 22.7 liters (6 gallons) is not a specified amount to be used, and in fact, a lesser amount will most generally obtain the required slump. 22.7 liters (6 gallons) per sack is the maximum net amount of water which may be used under Montana Specifications, and includes free water in excess of water absorbed by the aggregates, additives, air entraining agents, etc.

2.2 It is impossible for the Materials Bureau to know in advance what the moisture condition of the

aggregate stockpiles will be when concrete is ultimately produced, so the following procedure is to be observed.

3 Absorption of Fine Aggregate 3.1 Fine aggregate will always require an adjustment for the moisture content. Moisture content will

seldom be less than 3% or more than 7%. The moisture correction is made by multiplying the aggregate weight shown by 100 plus the percentage of moisture in the material. If a moisture determination shows that the sand has 5% total moisture, multiply the sand weight shown by 105%. This would make the new sand weight about 102 Kg (224 pounds), which would total about 5 Kg (11 pounds) of water (free and absorbed) or approximately 5.0 liters (1-1/3 gallons) per sack.

3.2 If the fine aggregate has an absorption of 1.0%, the amount of water that can be counted as free

water (mix water) would be computed as follows: 3.2.1 5.0% (total moisture) minus 1.0% (absorption) equals 4.0% free water. 3.2.2 96.6 Kg (213 lbs.) x .04 (4% free water) equals approximately 3.9 Kg (8.5 lbs.) free water. 3.2.3 Therefore, only 3.9 Kg (8.5 lbs.) of water would be counted as mix water. 4 Absorption of Coarse Aggregate 4.1 Medium and coarse aggregate are open-graded and free draining and will not usually require a

correction for moisture unless they are being used directly from a washing plant or are being heated with live steam.

4.2 If a correction is deemed necessary, the procedure shown for fine aggregate will be followed. 5 Corrected Mix 5.1 The corrected mix would be: 94 - 224 - 190 - 190.

MT 121-16 (06/28/16)

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 121-16

EFFECT OF ORGANIC IMPURITIES IN FINE AGGREGATE ON STRENGTH OF MORTAR

(Modified AASHTO T 71) MT 121 is identical to AASHTO T 71 except for the following stipulations: 1. Section 5.5.2 – Remove 2. Section 5.5.4 – Replace with the following:

“Rinsing the Aggregate – Continuously rinse the aggregate in a compact aggregate drum washer for two hours. Set the flow rate and angle of the wash water such that there are no losses of fine materials during the washing cycle.”

3. Section 5.5.5 – Remove 4. Section 6.3 – Remove 5. Sections 7.5 and 7.6 – Remove

1 of 1

MT 122-17 (01/31/17)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 122-17

OPTIMIZED AGGREGATE GRADATION FOR HYDRAULIC CEMENT CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS

1 Scope 1.1 This method outlines the procedure for analyzing combined aggregate gradations for optimized

concrete mix designs. 2 Referenced Documents MT Materials Manual MT 201 Sampling Roadway Materials MT 202 Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate 3 Apparatus 3.1 The apparatus required for sampling aggregates and performing sieve analysis will be as stated in

MT 201 and MT 202. 4 Procedure: 4.1 Submit sieve analysis reports showing the cumulative combined percent passing, the cumulative

combined percent retained, and the combined percent retained as shown in the sieve analysis Table 1. Include in the report, each individual aggregate gradation starting with the largest appropriate sieve for that material and including all the consecutive smaller sieve sizes through the #200 (75-μm) sieve. They are to include: 1 1/2-in. (37.5-mm), 1-in. (25-mm.), 3/4-in. (19-mm), 1/2-in. (12.5-mm), 3/8-in. (9.5-mm), #4 (4.75-mm), #8 (2.3-mm), #16 (1.18-mm), #30 (60-μm), #50 (300-μm), #100 (150-μm), and #200 (75-μm) sieves. For coarse and intermediate aggregates, the #16 (1.18-mm) through #100 (150-μm) sieves may be determined mathematically.

4.2 Submit the following charts used to perform aggregate gradation analysis:

• Coarseness Factor Chart (Figure 1)

• 0.45 Power Chart (Figure 2)

• Percent Retained Chart (Figure 3)

4.3 Perform a sieve analysis according to MT 202 for each aggregate that will be used in the optimized mix design. Complete a sieve analysis with the percent passing and the relative percent volume of each aggregate used in the proposed mix design as shown in Table 1.

1 of 6

MT 122-17 (01/31/17)

Table 1: Sieve Analysis % Passing

Agg (P) Coarse Aggregate Mid Fine Aggregate Combined Aggregate

Each Sieve

1 2 3 1 1 2

Sieve % Passing % Passing % Passing % Passing % Passing % Passing % Passing

(CP) % Retained

(CR) % Retained

(C) 2 in. 100.0% 0.0% 0.0% 100.0% 100.0% 0.0% 100.0% 0.0% 0.0% 1 1/2 in. 100.0% 0.0% 0.0% 100.0% 100.0% 0.0% 100.0% 0.0% 0.0% 1 in. 100.0% 0.0% 0.0% 100.0% 100.0% 0.0% 100.0% 0.0% 0.0% 3/4 in. 96.0% 0.0% 0.0% 100.0% 100.0% 0.0% 97.8% 2.2% 2.2% 1/2 in. 63.0% 0.0% 0.0% 100.0% 100.0% 0.0% 79.7% 20.4% 18.2% 3/8 in. 28.0% 0.0% 0.0% 95.0% 100.0% 0.0% 60.0% 40.1% 19.7% No. 4 9.0% 0.0% 0.0% 65.0% 100.0% 0.0% 46.8% 53.2% 13.2% No. 8 2.0% 0.0% 0.0% 3.0% 96.0% 0.0% 35.9% 64.1% 10.9% No. 16 1.0% 0.0% 0.0% 1.0% 76.0% 0.0% 28.0% 72.0% 7.9% No. 30 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 45.0% 0.0% 16.2% 83.8% 11.8% No. 50 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 17.0% 0.0% 6.1% 93.9% 10.1% No. 100 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 6.0% 0.0% 2.2% 97.8% 4.0% No. 200 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 1.0% 0.0% 0.4% 99.6% 1.8% Pan 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 100.0% 0.4%

Blend % (R) 55.0% 0.0% 0.0% 9.0% 36.0% 0.0% 100.0%

5 Calculations 5.1 Calculate the cumulative combined percent passing each sieve using the following equation:

𝐶𝐶𝑃𝑃 = �{(𝑃𝑃𝐴𝐴)(𝑅𝑅𝐴𝐴)} where: CP = Cumulative Combined % Passing PA = % Passing of Aggregate RA = Relative % of Aggregate 5.2 Calculate the cumulative combined percent retained on each sieve using the following equation:

𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅 = 100% − 𝐶𝐶𝑃𝑃 where: CR = Cumulative Combined % Retained CP = Cumulative Combined % Passing

2 of 6

MT 122-17 (01/31/17)

5.3 Calculate the combined percent retained on each sieve using the following equation:

𝐶𝐶 = 𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅 − 𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 where: C = Combined % Retained CR = Cumulative Combined % Retained CRx = Cumulative Combined % Retained of next larger sieve size 6 Charts 6.1 Coarseness Factor Chart—Use the cumulative combined sieve analysis to determine the coarseness

and workability factors. Plot the coarseness and workability factors on the Coarseness Factor Chart (Figure 1).

Determine the coarseness factor using the following equation:

CF = �ST� x 100

where: CF = Coarseness Factor S = Cumulative % Retained on the 3/8 in. Sieve T = Cumulative % Retained on the No. 8 Sieve The workability factor is the cumulative combined percent passing the No. 8 sieve. Increase the

workability factor by 2.5 percentage points for every 94 lb. per cubic yard of cementitious material used in excess of 564 lb. per cubic yard in the mix design. Decrease the workability factor by 2.5 percentage points for every 94 lb. per cubic yard of cementitious material used below 564 lb. per cubic yard in the mix design. Do not adjust the workability factor if the amount of cementitious material is 564 lb. per cubic yard.

For Class Pave concrete, the coarseness factor and workability factor must plot within the workability

box defined as follows:

• coarseness factor must not be greater than 68 or less than 52

• workability factor must not be greater than 38 or less than 34 when the coarse factor is 52

• workability factor must not be greater than 36 or less than 32 when the coarseness factor is 68. For other classes of concrete the Workability Factor must plot within Zone II.

Aggregate blends that plot in Zone III may be considered for approval of a mix design if a ¾-inch nominal maximum or smaller size aggregate is utilized.

3 of 6

MT 122-17 (01/31/17)

Figure 1: Coarseness Factor Chart 6.2 0.45 Power Chart—The 0.45 Power Chart (Figure 2) is created by plotting the cumulative percent

passing (y-axis) vs. the sieve sizes raised to the power of 0.45 (x-axis). The cumulative percent passing should generally follow the maximum density line and should not deviate beyond the maximum and minimum tolerance lines. There may be a “hump,” beyond the tolerance line and above the maximum density line around the No. 16 sieve. There will always be a dip below the maximum density line around the No. 30 sieve. These deviations are typical and should not be cause for rejection of a gradation unless results from trial batches indicate workability problems.

The maximum density line is a straight line calculated with the following equation:

𝑃𝑃 = �𝑑𝑑𝐷𝐷�0.45

where: P = % Passing d = sieve size being considered D = nominal maximum sieve size The nominal maximum sieve size is one sieve larger than the first sieve to retain ≥10%. The tolerance lines are straight lines drawn on either side of the maximum density line. Draw the

tolerance lines from the origin of the chart to 100% of the next sieve size smaller and larger than the maximum density sieve size.

4 of 6

MT 122-17 (01/31/17)

Figure 2: 0.45 Power Chart 6.3 Percent Retained Chart—Create the Percent Retained Chart (Figure 3) by plotting the combined

percent-retained (y-axis) vs. the sieve sizes (x-axis). The sum of the percent retained on any two adjacent sieves, excluding the first and last sieve that retains material, must not be less than 13%.

Figure 3: Percent Retained Chart

5 of 6

MT 122-17 (01/31/17)

6.4 MDT Optimized Gradation Worksheet — May be used to perform the aggregate gradation analysis. It allows the user to input sieve analysis results and aggregate percentages, generating all of the previous charts.

MDT Optimized Gradation Charts.XLS

6.5 Selection of Optimized Aggregate Gradation — Use the aggregate gradations and proportions that plot within the limits of the three charts described above as the basis for trial batches. Perform trial batches with varying aggregate proportions meeting the limits of the three previous charts to determine which concrete mix proportions meet contract requirements.

The Materials Bureau may allow the use of aggregate gradations and proportions that exceed the

limits of the 0.45 Power Chart and the percent-retained chart. This may be permitted if the coarseness and workability factors plot within the workability box on the Coarseness Factor Chart and the trial batch results meet all contact requirements.

6.6 Aggregate Gradation Monitoring and Aggregate Proportion Adjustment — Monitor the aggregate

gradation by plotting the results of each sieve analysis on the three previous charts. Perform sieve analysis on a lot by lot basis determined by MT 601.

Any adjustments to the aggregate proportions during concrete production to keep the coarseness factor and workability factor plotted within the workability box on the Coarseness Factor Chart are subject to the Project Manager’s approval.

6 of 6

1 of 2 Rev. 12/28/16

CURRENT DATE OF REVISION MT 200 SECTION

SOIL AND AGGREGATE Test Date of Method Publication No. Title Pages or Revision MT 200 Vacant (Use AASHTO R 58 Dry Preparation of Disturbed Soil and

Soil-Aggregate Samples for Test)

MT 201 Sampling Roadway Materials ........................................................................ 7 pp Oct 2013

MT 202 Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate ............................................. 9 pp Nov 2011

MT 203 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 19 Bulk Density (Unit Weight) and Voids in Aggregate)

MT 204 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 84 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate)

MT 205 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 85 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate)

MT 206 Vacant (ELIMINATED)

MT 207 Centerline Soil Survey ................................................................................... 10 pp Jun 2004

MT 208 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 89 Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils and AASHTO T 90 Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils)

MT 209 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 96 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine)

MT 210 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12 In. Drop . 1 pp Dec 2016

MT 211 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 134 Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures)

MT 212 Determination of Moisture and Density of In-Place Materials ....................... 5 pp Dec 2016

MT 213 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 176 Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test)

MT 214 Eliminated (Use AASHTO M 145 Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes)

MT 215 Vacant (moved to MT 122)

MT 216 Method of Sampling and Testing Cement Treated Base .............................. 5 pp Oct 2013

MT 217 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 335 Determining the Percentage of Fracture in Coarse Aggregate)

MT 218 Determining Relative Compaction and Percent Moisture .............................. 2 pp Jun 2004

MT 219 Controlling Compaction Using a Control-Strip Test-Section Technique with Nuclear Gauges ................................................................... 3 pp Jun 2004

MT 220 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 100 Specific Gravity of Soils)

MT 221 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 255 Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying)

MT 222 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 191 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method)

MT 223 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 112 Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregate)

MT 224 Vacant (ELIMINATED)

MT 225 Vacant (ELIMINATED)

MT 226 Maximum Acceptable Deviations in Sieve Analysis of IA Samples .............. 1 pp Dec 2016

MT 227 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 265 Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soils)

2 of 2 Rev. 12/28/16

CURRENT DATE OF REVISION MT 200 SECTION

SOIL AND AGGREGATE Test Date of Method Publication No. Title Pages or Revision MT 228 Method of Establishing Field Target Density for Cement Treated Base

Density Control .............................................................................................. 1 pp Oct 2013

MT 229 Procedure for Solids-Water-Voids Relations of Soil Masses…………………. 12 pp Sep 2015

MT 230 Moisture-Density Relation of Soils Using a 10 lb Rammer and 18 In. Drop .. 1 pp Dec 2016

MT 231 Vacant (ELIMINATED)

MT 232 Soil Corrosion Test ........................................................................................ 3 pp Dec 2016

MT 233 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 327 Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus)

MT 201-13 (10/21/13)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 201-13

SAMPLING ROADWAY MATERIALS

1 General

1.1 Sampling for evaluation of potential aggregate sources should be performed by a responsible, trained and experienced person. Because of the wide variety of conditions under which sampling may be done, it is not possible to describe detailed procedures applicable to all circumstances.

1.2 The sample bags must be tightly-woven and durable so that the required amount of sample can be shipped without rupture of the bag or loss of fine material through the fabric. Also, when tied, as in 1.3, the bag must be sealed tightly enough to prevent loss or contamination of the material.

1.3 Samples shall be double-tied as close to the gravel as possible with the necessary papers between the double tie. This procedure insures a good sample together with a legible laboratory sheet.

2 Referenced Documents

MT Materials Manual MT 101 Making and Curing Concrete Compressive and Flexural Strength Field Test Specimens MT 202 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate MT 207 Centerline Soil Survey MT 210 Moisture Density Relation of Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer MT 218 Determining Relative Compaction and Percent Moisture MT 230 Moisture Density Relation of Soils Using a 10 lb. Rammer MT 601 Materials Sampling, Testing and Acceptance Guide MT 607 Procedure for Reducing Filed Samples to Testing Size

3 Number of Samples

3.1 The frequency of sampling as described in this procedure is the minimum required and more should be taken if deemed necessary.

4 Pre-construction Proposed Surfacing Sampling

4.1 Proposed surfacing samples should represent a vertical cross-section of the proposed source.

4.1.1 Describe each site or area investigated with each test hole, boring or test pit clearly located (horizontally and vertically) with reference to some established coordinate system or permanent monument on an area map or sketch.

4.1.2 Log each test hole, boring, test pit or cut-surface exposure with the field description and location of each material encountered clearly shown by Montana Department of Transportation symbols and word descriptions used on Form 30. An example of Form 30 is in MT 207.

4.1.3 Each aggregate layer that is included in the sample should be noted along with the depth of the water table if it is encountered should be shown on the log of test holes.

4.2 Overburden or clay seams may be sampled separately.

4.3 Rocks larger than 6 inches (150mm) in diameter shall not be included in the sample. However, the estimated percentage of rock larger than 12 inches (300mm); between 6 and 12 inches (150 and 300mm); between 4 and 6 inches (100 and 150mm); and less than 4 inches (100mm) in diameter shall be shown on the Prospected Area Report.

1 of 7

MT 201-13 (10/21/13)

4.4 Representative samples shall be taken on the following basis: 4.4.1 Each sample shall be a minimum of 150 pounds (68 Kg). 4.4.2 Not less than 3 samples shall be taken from any proposed source. 4.4.3 Up to 50,000 cubic yards (38,230 cubic meters) - a minimum of 3 samples. 4.4.4 50,000 to 100,000 cubic yards (38,230 to 76,460 cubic meters) - 3 to 5 samples. 4.4.5 100,000 to 150,000 cubic yards (76,460 to 114,690 cubic meters) - 5 to 8 samples. 4.4.6 150,000 to 200,000 cubic yards (114,690 to 152,920 cubic meters) - 8 to 10 samples. 4.4.7 Providing the material is uniform, one sample may represent material from as many as ten test

holes in large areas if provisions 4.4.1 through 4.4.6 above are met. 4.4.8 For large sources, a suggested sampling sequence is to take samples around the perimeter of

the source with additional samples taken toward the middle to check for uniformity. Each proposed source is unique, however, and the final sampling sequence shall be determined by the District Materials Supervisor or Area Lab Supervisor.

4.5 The District or Area laboratory will determine the gradation, LL, PL, PI, soil class and 24-hour

volume swell and submit to the Materials Bureau on a form 123. Also, a visual examination by the Materials Supervisor will be made. An interpretation of these results will determine if the material in the proposed source is worthy of further consideration.

4.5.1 Predominately Unacceptable - If the tests show the material to be predominately unsatisfactory

and material of a better quality is available, no further consideration shall be given this source. 4.5.2 Uniformly Acceptable - If the tests indicate the material is uniformly satisfactory, at least one

sample for every six tested in the District or Area laboratory (a minimum of three) shall be sent to the Materials Bureau. Each sample shall consist of 1-75 lb. (34 Kg) split for wear, gradation and other correlations (see note 1). Also, a 300 lb. composite sample for Mix design testing shall be submitted for these areas. Additionally, one 180 lb. (32 Kg) composite sample per source is required for Sodium Sulfate and Micro-Deval testing.

4.5.3 Spotty sources - If the tests indicate the material is spotty, at least one sample for every six tested

in the District or Area laboratory (a minimum of one) for each of the areas (satisfactory, questionable, and unsatisfactory) shall be sent to the Materials Bureau for wear test, gradation check, evidence of disintegration, and other correlations. Also, a 300 lb. composite sample for Mix design testing shall be submitted for these areas. Additionally, one 180 lb. (32 Kg) composite sample per source is required for Sodium Sulfate and Micro-Deval testing.

Number of Representative Pounds from Each Hole to Make Composite

Holes Sodium Sulfate Micro Deval

Lbs. Kg Lbs. Kg 2 120 54 60 27 5 24 11 12 5 10 12 5 6 3 15 8 4 4 2

Note 1 – Each area within a source that exhibits different physical characteristics should be sampled

completely as per 4.5.2. In a large volume area one sample may be a composite of a series of holes of uniform material (example: sample number 1 may be a composite of holes 1 through 6; sample number 2 - holes 7 through 12; sample number 3 - holes 13 through 20, etc.) The example cited above is to be used as a guide only.

2 of 7

MT 201-13 (10/21/13)

4.5.4 Material for each portion of the composite sample shall be obtained by quartering, splitting, recombining and splitting again according to MT 607 so that a homogenous mix is obtained. The material will be split so that no more than 77 lbs. (35 Kg) are placed in one bag.

4.5.5 The Core Drill Section, under the direction of the Geotechnical Section, can be utilized in problem

areas where conventional equipment is inadequate. Assistance, either geologic or drilling, can be provided usually within a period of a month or six weeks.

5 Laboratory Form No. 99 5.1 The "Field Sample Analysis Report" Form No. 99 is to be used in reporting district or area

laboratory tests. This information will be transferred to the "Available Surfacing Material Report" in Helena and will be available to prospective bidders, along with the usual Materials Bureau test results.

5.2 The District Materials Supervisor or Area Lab Supervisor is to use his experience and engineering

judgment to give a summation of all information such as the past history of the source and his comments and recommendations regarding the laboratory test data which would include a statement as to which holes were represented by the Sodium Sulfate and Micro-Deval samples. This information will be placed on the bottom portion of Lab Form No. 99. However, the accep-tance or rejection of the source will be the responsibility of the Materials Bureau in Helena when all testing is complete.

6 Laboratory Form No. 92 6.1 The field information on Laboratory Form No. 92 shall include a correct legal description of the

deposit. In some cases, it may be necessary to have a survey party retrace the boundary lines and make section line ties before right-of-way negotiations can be completed. Where deposits are located adjacent to the highway right-of-way, the boundary lines of the deposit should be tied to the centerline and shown on Laboratory Form No. 92 so that a legal description can be prepared without any further field work. Under some circumstances, the Department of Transportation will obligate by purchase or option surfacing material sources for future construction projects and maintenance use.

6.2 Form No. 92 "Prospected Area Report" must be completely filled out especially with reference to

definite location, total yardage represented by the samples, ownership, and depth of overburden. The haul distance shall be reported to the nearest one-tenth mile over the shortest and most practical route from the deposit to a definite station on the project.

6.3 A sketch shall be attached Form No. 92 showing the boundary lines of the deposit with all

dimensions and ties neatly plotted to a scale that is indicated on the sketch. All test holes shall be numbered and shown in their correct location.

6.4 In those cases where areas are being explored on which data has been previously submitted, a

new "Prospected Area Report" shall accompany the new sampling showing any laboratory numbers previously assigned.

7 Reports on Proposed Surfacing Sources 7.1 The Materials Bureau will issue a final report based on an evaluation of the district or area

laboratory test data, the recommendations of the District Materials Supervisor or Area Lab Supervisor, and an interpretation of tests performed by the Materials Bureau.

8 Preconstruction Binder Samples 8.1 Binder samples shall be taken incidental to all proposed gravel source exploration. A 25 lb. (11

Kg) sample from each distinct type proposed for use shall be taken and tested in the district or area laboratory. Binder samples need not be sent to the Materials Bureau unless an unusual problem arises.

3 of 7

MT 201-13 (10/21/13)

9 Size of Samples: Required for District, Area and Materials Bureau Testing 9.1 The sample size depends on 100% of the aggregate passing the specified sieve size. The

amounts specified in the table below provide adequate material for routine testing (gradation, LL, PI, volume swell, etc.). Minimum Field Test sample sizes are in MT 202.

SPECIFIED 100% PASSING SIEVE SIZE MINIMUM WEIGHT OF SAMPLE (See Note 2)

4.75 mm (4 Mesh) 14 Kg (30 lb.) 9.5 mm (3/8 Inch) 14 Kg (30 lb.) 12.5 mm (1/2 Inch) 14 Kg (30 lb.) 16.0 mm (5/8 Inch) 14 Kg (30 lb.) 19.0 mm (3/4 Inch) 14 Kg (30 lb.) 25.0 mm (1 Inch) 35 Kg (77 lb.)

37.5 mm (1½ Inch) 35 Kg (77 lb.) 50 mm (2 Inch) 35 Kg (77 lb.)

63 mm (2½ Inch) 35 Kg (77 lb.) Note 2 – The sample shall be obtained by quartering or splitting to insure a representative sample. If

necessary, the representative sample shall be split again so that no more than 77 lbs. (35 Kg) are placed in two bags.

10 Sampling from Stockpiles 10.1 When such sampling is necessary, every effort should be made to enlist the services of power

equipment to develop a separate, small sampling pile composed of materials drawn from various levels and locations in the main pile after which several increments may be combined to compose the field sample.

10.2 Coarse Aggregate Stockpiles – Where power equipment is not available, samples from stockpiles

should be made up of at least three increments taken from the top third, at the midpoint, and at the bottom third of the volume of the pile. A board shoved vertically into the pile just above the sampling point aids in preventing further segregation.

10.3 Fine Aggregate Stockpile – A suggested sampling procedure for fine aggregate would be to

remove the outer layer, which may have become segregated and take the sample from the material beneath. Sampling tubes approximately 1¼ inches (30-mm) minimum by 6 feet (2-m) minimum in length may be inserted into the pile at random locations to extract a minimum of five increments of material to form the sample.

11 Production Sampling 11.1 Production samples shall be taken in three equal increments from a stopped belt or with an

automatic sampling device and combined to make the sample. Such samples shall be reduced to testing size, according to MT 607, Method A or Method B.

12 Windrow Sampling (Cement Treated Base and Cold In-Place Recycle) 12.1 Samples should be composed of a number of samples taken at various points along the windrow,

combined and reduced to testing size according to MT 607, Method A or Method B. 13 Pug Mill – Mixed Aggregate Sampling 13.1 Samples for gradation and fracture testing shall be taken from a minimum of three increments

from the processed material on the roadway after lay down. 13.2 Samples for crushed cover material gradation and fracture will be taken at the most convenient

point before application determined by the engineer. 13.3 Samples for other specified properties will be taken at the point of production.

4 of 7

MT 201-13 (10/21/13)

14 Sampling from Roadway 14.1 Samples from the roadway (minimum of three increments) should be taken for the full depth of

the material, taking care to exclude any underlying material. Where necessary, place templates on the existing roadway to separate the underlying material from the sample. The sample shall be taken from the processed material on the roadway after laydown.

14.2 District or Area labs will determine the gradation, LL, PL, PI and soil class for Soil Survey “R”

Value samples. The results will be reported on a form 123 which will accompany the sample to the Materials Bureau.

15 “Special Borrow” 15.1 District or Area labs will determine the gradation, LL, PL, PI and soil class for Special Borrow “R”

Value samples. The results will be reported on a form 123 which will accompany the sample to the Materials Bureau.

16 Reduction of Sample Size by Quartering or Splitting 16.1 The procedure for reducing the size of field sample of aggregate is described in MT 607. 17 Required Production Samples other than Aggregates for Plant Mix 17.1 Field testing for Acceptance shall conform to the frequency as shown in MT 601, under

"Aggregate Surfacing". 18 Independent Assurance Samples 18.1 The District or Area laboratories shall take Independent Assurance samples in accordance with

the frequency shown in MT 601. The same sample shall be tested by each lab, with all the material returned to the sample.

18.2 If discrepancies occur between the District or Area laboratory and the Acceptance samples, the

District or Area laboratory will investigate and change any procedures or equipment found to be causing the differences.

18.3 If differences are found to exist between the District or Area laboratory and the Materials Bureau,

the Materials Bureau will have the authority to investigate all of the testing procedures and make any changes found necessary.

19 Plant Mix Aggregates 19.1 Sampling will be in accordance with the sample size and frequency described in MT 601 and the

following: 19.2 WHEN STOCKPILED - In order to establish a stockpile average, the samples shall be secured

and tested as the stockpile is being produced. 19.3 BATCH TYPE HOT PLANT - A representative sample of dried aggregate shall be provided by

means of an approved sampling device. 19.4 DRYER DRUM HOT PLANT - A representative composite sample shall be provided, by means of

an approved sampling device, at a point just prior to the aggregate entering the dryer drum mixer. 19.5 CONTINUOUS FLOW HOT PLANT - A representative sample of dried aggregate shall be

provided by means of an approved sampling device.

5 of 7

MT 201-13 (10/21/13)

20 Aggregates for Design 20.1 MAINTENANCE MIX DESIGN - The amount of material submitted to the Materials Bureau for a

proposed mix design shall be as follows: Plant Mix Aggregate - 300 lbs. (136 Kg), Seal and Cover Aggregate - 150 lbs. (68 Kg).

20.2 The sample shall be prepared in the district or area laboratory as described in 19.2 and 19.3. 20.3 Non-Quality Assurance Projects 20.3.1 When a satisfactory stockpile average has been established, a sieve analysis shall be performed,

in the District or Area laboratory, on a representative sample of the stockpiled material. 20.3.2 Compare the sieve analysis obtained in paragraph 19.2 above, to the established stockpile

average. 20.3.3 If the minus 4 mesh portion of the sample is within plus or minus 2% and the minus 200 mesh

portion is within plus or minus 1% of the stockpile average, the sample may be submitted to the Materials Bureau for a mix design, without further preparation.

20.3.4 If the sample does not meet the above criteria, it will be necessary to adjust the gradation, in the

District or Area laboratory, to allowable variations described in paragraph 20.2.3 above, before it is shipped to the Materials Bureau.

20.3.5 The stockpile average shall be shown on the laboratory work sheet that accompanies the sample. 21 Mineral Filler 21.1 One 2.3 Kg (5 lb.) sample per project of mineral filler will be sampled and submitted to the

Materials Bureau for testing and acceptance. 22 Compaction Samples 22.1 The District or Area laboratory shall run at least one sample from each different soil type using

the methods described in MT 210 or MT 230. It will not be necessary to submit compaction samples to the Materials Bureau. If the material being sampled consists of fine material, 30 pounds (14 Kg) shall be obtained. If the material consists of coarse and fine material, the sample shall be large enough to yield 30 lbs. (14 Kg) of the fine material (minus 4 mesh).

23 Field Density Tests 23.1 Field density tests shall be taken in accordance with MT 601, under "Density Control,

Embankment" and MT 218 (Determining Relative Compaction and Percent Moisture). 24 Concrete Aggregates 24.1 Concrete aggregate samples shall be submitted in accordance with MT 601. 25 Concrete Test Specimens 25.1 Concrete compressive and flexural strength test specimens will be made and cured in

accordance with MT 101. 26 Cement Treated Base 26.1 Cement Treated Base shall be sampled in accordance Section 12.1 or Section 14.1, and MT 601.

6 of 7

MT 201-13 (10/21/13)

27 Field Construction Sampling 27.1 Samples for soil classification and “R” value shall be obtained from the top 2 feet (0.6 meters) of

the sub-grade. Sample frequency will be one sample every 1000 feet (305 meters) for projects with 3 or more cuts or fills per mile. If the project has fewer than 3 cuts or fills per mile the sample distance is extended to 2000 feet (610 meters).

27.2 District/Area lab personnel will determine the soil classification. If the soil class is not equal to or

better than that used by the Surfacing Design Unit to determine the typical section, then samples for “R” value determination are to be submitted to the Materials Bureau in Helena.

27.3 Samples for soil classification and/or “R” value are not required when the top two feet of subgrade

is constructed with Special Borrow tested and accepted at the borrow source. However, samples may be obtained from the roadway and tested to ensure the in-place material meets the contract requirements. Take samples whenever the material delivered to the roadway appears to differ from samples used for pit acceptance. Sample frequency is at the discretion of the Project Manager.

Note 3 – These samples are as a design check only. Sampling every 1000 feet (305 meters) is a general

guide and some discretion should be used. For example, it may be advisable to take more samples in fill sections than cut sections, or if there is an obvious change in the soil conditions or soil class, etc. No samples will be required for typical sections with a design “R” of 5 or less or for soils classified as A-6 or A-7.

7 of 7

MT 202-11 (11/15/11)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 202-11

SIEVE ANALYSIS OF FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES (Modified AASHTO T 11 AND T 27)

1 Scope

1.1 This method covers the determination of the particle size distribution of fine and coarse aggregates by sieving.

1.2 Material passing the 4.75 mm (no. 4) sieve will be washed. Clay particles and other aggregate particles that are dispersed by the wash water, as well as water-soluble materials, will be removed from the aggregate during testing.

2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO M 231 Weighing Devices Used in the Testing of Materials T 11 Materials Finer Than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing T 27 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

MT Materials Manual MT 201 Sampling Roadway Materials MT 405 Wire Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes MT 607 Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size

3 Definitions

3.1 Constant Mass – Constant mass has been reached when there is less than a 0.1 percent change in mass over a monitored drying time. For an oven (110 ± 5° C (230 ± 9° F)), an additional 30 minutes of drying. For an uncontrolled heating source such as hot plates, an additional 20 minutes of drying, or microwaves, an additional 10 minutes of drying.

4 Apparatus

4.1 Balance – The scale or balance for the coarse 4.75 mm (plus 4 mesh) material shall have a sensitivity of 0.01 pounds or 0.01 kilograms. The scale or balance for the fine 4.75 mm (minus 4 mesh) material shall have a sensitivity of 0.1 gram.

4.2 Sieves – The sieve cloth shall be mounted on substantial frames constructed in a manner that will prevent loss of material during sieving. Suitable sieve sizes shall be selected to furnish the information required by the specifications covering the material to be tested. The sieves shall conform to the requirements of MT 405, Wire Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes.

4.2.1 Sieves – A nest of two sieves, the lower being a 75-μm (No. 200) sieve and the upper being a sieve with openings in the range of 2.36 mm (No. 8) to 1.18 mm (No. 16), both conforming to the requirement of MT 405.

4.3 Container – A container sufficient in size to contain the sample covered with water and to permit vigorous agitation without inadvertent loss of any part of the sample or water.

4.4 Heat Source – A heat source capable of drying samples in accordance with Section 5.

4.5 Mechanical Sieve Shaker – A mechanical sieving device shall create motion of the sieves to cause the particles to bounce, tumble, or otherwise turn so as to present different orientations to the sieving surface. The sieving action shall be such that the requirement for sieving thoroughness as described in Section 7.3 is met within a reasonable amount of time.

1 of 9

MT 202-11 (11/15/11)

5 Preparation of Samples 5.1 Samples for sieve analysis shall be prepared in accordance with MT 607, Reducing Field

Samples of Aggregates to Testing Size. The samples shall be the mass desired when dry. The selection of samples of an exact predetermined mass shall not be permitted.

5.2 Dry the sample to a constant mass. For control purposes, particularly where rapid results are

desired, it is generally not necessary to dry coarse aggregate to a constant mass for the sieve analysis test. The results are insignificantly affected by the moisture content unless the nominal maximum size is smaller than 12.5 mm (½ in.), or the coarse aggregate contains appreciable material finer than 4.75 mm (No. 4); or the coarse aggregate is highly absorptive (a lightweight aggregate, for example). Samples may be dried at higher temperatures associated with the use of hot plates or other uncontrolled heat sources without affecting results, provided steam escapes without generating pressures sufficient to fracture the particles, and temperatures are not so great as to cause chemical breakdown of the aggregate.

Note 1 – Samples taken for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index shall be air dried or dried at a

temperature no greater than 140°F or 60°C. Note 2 – Air drying is an acceptable method. 5.3 Representative samples will be graded to determine the percentage of fine material adhering to

the coarser fractions. 5.4 Fine Aggregate – The test sample of fine aggregate shall weigh, after drying, approximately the

following amount: Aggregate with at least 95% passing a 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve . . . 100g Aggregate with at least 85% passing a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve

and more than 5% retained on a 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve . . . . . . . . 500g 5.5 Coarse Aggregate – The mass of the test sample of coarse aggregate shall conform with the

following:

Specified 100% Passing

Sieve Size

Min. Field Test Sample Size*

mm (in) Kg (lb) *9.5 (3/8) 6.8 (15)

*12.5 (1/2) 6.8 (15) *19.0 (3/4) 9.1 (20) *25.0 (1) 11.3 (25) *37.5 (1½) 15 (33)

50 (2) 20 (44) 63 (2½) 35 (77)

Note 3 – For cover material, concrete aggregate, and samples that require a wear, cleanliness value test,

the sample size sent to Helena must be doubled. 5.6 Coarse and Fine Aggregate Mixtures – The mass of the test sample of coarse and fine aggregate

mixtures shall be the same as for coarse aggregate. 6 Procedure for Calculating Clinging Fines 6.1 Follow the procedure in Section 5 for the original test. Save the plus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) material. 6.2 Wash the plus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) material over a protected 75 μm (200 mesh) screen. In most

cases it is not necessary to rewash the minus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) material. Dry and re-screen over the original sized screens. Use the original mass of sample taken for the calculation of the plus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) percentages.

2 of 9

MT 202-11 (11/15/11)

6.3 Obtain the difference between the original plus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) material and the washed plus 4.75 mm (4) material. Record for use in calculations of the minus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) material. To convert from the pounds of minus 4 mesh material to grams, multiply by 453.6.

Example: (0.39 pounds) X (453.6) = 176.9 grams.

Use the percentage difference passing the 4.75 mm (4 mesh) divided by the before wash weight to get the reciprocal for multiplication.

Example: (1.55%)/176.9 g) = 0.00876

6.4 The total percent clinging fines is the difference in percent of the plus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) screen

sizes.

Example: 55.61%(dry) - 54.06%(washed) = 1.55% (report as 1.6%) 7 Procedure for Aggregate without Clinging Fines 7.1 The total sample as prepared in Section 5 shall be separated into a series of sizes. To determine

compliance with the specifications for the material under test, avoid overloading the screens. 7.2 Coarse Aggregate: Plus 4.75 mm (4 Mesh) Material – The individual mass of the plus 4.75 mm

(4 mesh) portion of the sample, retained on each screen, shall be determined and recorded to the nearest 0.01 of a pound or 0.01 kilogram.

7.2.1 The individual portions shall be saved until the entire plus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) portion of the

sample has been screened, weighed and the weights recorded, before any of the material is discarded.

7.2.2 The total amount of material finer than the plus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) sieve may be determined by

subtracting the total mass of material retained on the plus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) sieve from the total mass of the initial dry sample being tested.

7.3 Fine Aggregate: Minus 4.75 mm (4 Mesh) Material – At the completion of the sieving as

described in Section 7.2, the entire minus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) portions shall be thoroughly mixed and reduced to a minimum of 500 grams.

7.3.1 After drying the sample to a constant mass and weighing, place the test sample in the container

and add sufficient water to cover it. A detergent, dispersing agent, or other wetting solution may be added to the water to assure a thorough separation of the material finer than the 75 μm (No.200) sieve from the coarser particles (Note 4). Agitate the sample with sufficient vigor to result in complete separation of all particles finer than the 75 μm (No. 200) sieve from the coarser particles, and to bring the fine material into suspension. Immediately pour the wash water containing the suspended and dissolved solids over the nested sieves, arranged with the coarser sieve on top. Take care to avoid, as much as feasible, the decantation of coarser particles of the sample.

Note 4 – There should be enough wetting agent to produce a small amount of suds when the sample is

agitated. The quantity will depend on the hardness of the water and the quality of the detergent. Excessive suds may overflow the sieves and carry some material with them.

7.3.2 Add a second change of water (without wetting agent) to the sample in the container, agitate, and

decant as before. Repeat the operation until the wash water is clear. Note 5 – If mechanical washing equipment is used, the charging of water, agitating, and decanting may

be a continuous operation.

3 of 9

MT 202-11 (11/15/11)

Note 6 – A spray nozzle or a piece of rubber tubing attached to a water faucet may be used to rinse any of the material that may have fallen into the sieves. The velocity of the water, which may be increased by pinching the tubing, should not be sufficient to cause any splashing of the sample over the sides of the sieves.

7.3.3 Return all material retained on the nested sieves by flushing to the washed sample. Dry the

washed aggregate to a constant mass. 7.3.4 Following the washing of the sample and flushing any materials retained on the 75 μm (No. 200)

sieve back into the container, no water should be decanted from the container except through the 75 μm sieve, to avoid loss of material. Excess water from flushing should be evaporated from the sample in the drying process.

7.3.5 The individual weights of each size of the minus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) portion retained on each

sieve shall be determined and recorded to the nearest 0.1 gram. 7.3.6 The individual portions shall be saved until the entire minus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) portion of the

sample that was washed has been screened, weighed, and the weights recorded, before any of the material is discarded.

8 Sieving Procedure 8.1 Nest the sieves in order of decreasing size of opening from top to bottom and place the sample,

or portion of the sample if it is to be sieved in more than one increment, on the top sieve. Agitate the sieves by hand or by mechanical apparatus for a sufficient period, established by trial or checked by measurement on the actual test sample, to meet the criterion for adequacy of sieving described in Section 8.3.

8.2 Limit the quantity of material on a given sieve so that all particles have an opportunity to reach

sieve openings a number of times during the sieving operation. Table 1 shows the maximum allowable quantity of material that can be retained on each individual sieve at the completion of the sieving operation. In no case shall the quantity retained be so great as to cause permanent deformation of the sieve cloth.

8.2.1 Prevent an overload of material on an individual sieve by splitting the sample into two or more

portions, sieving each portion individually. Combine the masses of the several portions retained on a specific sieve before calculating the percentage of the sample on the sieve.

8.3 Continue sieving for a sufficient period and in such manner that, after completion, not more than

0.5 percent by mass of the total sample passes any sieve during one minute of continuous hand sieving. Perform as follows: Hold the individual sieve, provided with a snug-fitting pan and cover, in a slightly inclined position in one hand. Strike the side of sieve sharply and with an upward motion against the heel of the other hand at the rate of about 150 times per minute, turn the sieve about one sixth of a revolution at intervals of about 25 strokes. In determining sufficiency of sieving for sizes larger than the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, limit the material on the sieve to a single layer of particles. If the size of the mounted testing sieves makes the described sieving motion impractical, use 203 mm (8 in.) diameter sieves to verify the sufficiency of sieving.

8.4 Unless a mechanical shaker is used, hand sieve particles obtained on the 75 mm (3 in) by

determining the smallest sieve opening through which each particle will pass by rotating the particles, if necessary, in order to determine whether they will pass through the particular opening, however, do not force the particles to pass through an opening.

8.5 The efficiency of the mechanical shaker shall be checked periodically by comparing results with

the hand method. This practice will help determine the length of time required for the mechanical bshaker to adequately separate material sizes.

4 of 9

MT 202-11 (11/15/11)

Table 1 – Maximum Allowable Quantity of Material Retained on a Sieve, Kg (lb)

Nominal Dimensions of Sieve Sieve Opening

Size 8 in dia

10 in dia

12 in dia

14 x 14 in dia

16 x 24 in dia

125 mm (5 in) a a a a 67.4 (148.6) 100 mm (4 in) a a a 30.6 (67.5) 53.9 (118.8) 90 mm (31/2 in) a a 15.1 (33.3) 27.6 (60.8) 48.5 (106.9 75 mm (3 in) a 8.6 (19.0) 12.6 (27.8) 23.0 (50.7) 40.5 (89.3) 63 mm (21/2 in) a 7.2 (15.9) 10.6 (23.4) 19.3 (42.6) 34.0 (75.0) 50 mm (2 in) 3.6 (7.9) 5.7 (12.6 8.4 (18.5) 15.3 (33.7) 27.0 (59.5) 37.5 mm (11/2 in) 2.7 (6.0) 4.3 (9.5) 6.3 (13.9) 11.5 (25.4) 20.2 (44.5) 25.0 mm (1 in) 1.8 (4.0) 2.9 (6.4) 4.2 (9.5) 7.7 (17.0) 13.5 (29.8) 19.0 mm (3/4 in) 1.4 (3.1) 2.2 (4.9) 3.2 (7.1) 5.8 (12.8) 10.2 (22.5) 12.5 mm (1/2 in) 0.89 (2.0) 1.4 (3.1) 2.1 (4.6) 3.8 (8.4) 6.7 (14.8) 9.5 mm (3/8 in) 0.67 (1.5) 1.1 (2.4) 1.6 (3.5) 2.9 (6.4) 5.1 (11.2) 4.75 mm (No 4) 0.33 (0.7) 0.54 (1.2) 0.80 (1.8) 1.5 (3.3) 2.6 (5.7)

a = Sieves as indicated have less than 5 full openings and should not be used for sieve testing. 9 Calculations 9.1 Calculate the cumulative weight passing and the percentages to the nearest 0.01 percent on the

basis of the total mass of the initial dry sample. 9.2 Coarse Aggregate: Plus 4.75 mm (4 Mesh) Material – For each of the various sieves, the

individual cumulative weights must be converted to total weight passing. The total weight passing is divided by the total weight of the initial dry sample multiplied by 100, which will result in the percent passing. (See the example on the following worksheets).

9.3 Fine Aggregate: Minus 4.75 mm (4 Mesh) Material - Calculating the percentages of the minus

4.75 mm (4 mesh) portion of the sample is simplified by using a reciprocal. The reciprocal is determined by dividing the percent of material passing the minus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) sieve by the weight of the minus 4.75 mm (4 mesh) sample before washing. This reciprocal, when multiplied by the various total weights passing, results in the percent passing, in relation to the total sample. (See the example on the following worksheets).

10 Report 10.1 Unless otherwise required, the results of the sieve analysis shall be reported as the total percent-

ages passing each sieve size and reported to the nearest whole number for all material coarser than the 75 µm (200 mesh) and reported to one tenth of one percent for the 75 µm (200 mesh). Percentages shall be calculated on the basis of the total mass of the initial dry sample, including any material finer than the 75 µm (200 mesh) sieve.

11 Hot Plant Mix Aggregates 11.1 Plant mix aggregates shall be governed by the provisions of MT 202, except that sampling will be

in accordance with MT 201, which provides that the samples be obtained by means of an approved sampling device.

5 of 9

MT 202-11 (11/15/11)

Form No. 123-E (Rev. 11/8/11) Montana Department of Transportation

Materials Lab. No. UPN Contract No. Dist. Lab. No. Sample Hole/IA# Contract Item # Project No. Project Name Date Sampled Date Rec. Helena Kind of Deposit Sampled By Witnessed by Address Submitted By Title Date Quantity Area by Stationing Area is in Sec. T- R- Lab. No. County Supplier Address Sta. and/or Tons Production Sample Lift No. Examined for

Constant Mass (500 gram sample): Initial Wt. 524.3 grams Check Wt. 518.6 grams Second Check Wt. 518.6 grams Wt. of Sample Taken 40.83 lbs. 100.00 % LL PL Pl Wt. Retained 4-Mesh 26.92 lbs. 65.93 % Wear % Fld.Agg.Chart No. Wt. Passing 4-Mesh. 13.91 lbs. 34.07 % Fracture % Sp.Gr. (F) � (C) Before Wash 518.6 After 425.3 LBW 93.3 Max. Dens. Soil Class Opt. Moist Wt./Ft.

Dust Ratio Sand Equiv. Wt. Ret. Wt Pass Pct Spec Volume Swell Specimen

Condition ” Age Treat %Swell Spec. 3” 2½” 2” “R-Value” 1½” 100 Extrude Pressure 3.63 1” 37.2 91 Expansion Pressure 9.42 3/4” 31.41 77 Equilibrium 16.18 1/2” 24.65 60 Micro-Deval / Sodium Sulfate 20.04 3/8” 20.79 51 Micro-Deval

Loss % Sodium Sulfate Loss % 26.92 4M 13.91 34

146.5 8M/10M 372.1 24 Adhesion 279.6 40M 239.0 16 % Adhesion Bitumen Adhesive Agent 375.2 80M 143.4 9 423.9 200M 94.7 6.2 425.1 Pan Wt. 0.0657 Reciprocal 0.04% is less than 0.3%

Checked & Approved

Date Name

Distribution List District Administrator District Lab Supervisor Independent Assurance Comparison Area Lab Supervisor Sieve Field Dist Helena Engr Project Manager Maintenance Superintendent Construction Preconstruction County File Surfacing Design Helena Master Lab File

REMARKS: See the following page for a written explanation of calculations used for this form (F123-E).

6 of 9

MT 202-11 (11/15/11)

Calculations used on form F123-E PLUS 4.75 mm (+4 MESH) MATERIAL - The total weight passing each sieve divided by the total weight of the initial sample taken (40.83 lbs.), multiplied by 100, results in the percent passing. EXAMPLE: 13.91 ÷ 40.83 = 0.34 X 100 = 34% The value is rounded and recorded to the nearest whole number.

MINUS 4.75 mm (-4 MESH) MATERIAL – (By Reciprocal Method). This sample is dried to a constant mass before and after washing. A reciprocal is determined by dividing the percent of material passing the 4 mesh (34.07%) by the mass of the minus 4 mesh sample (518.6 grams). This reciprocal (0.0657) is multiplied by the cumulative weight passing for each sieve size.

EXAMPLE: 518.6 - 146.5= 372.1; 372.1 x 0.0657 = 24.45% and is rounded down to and is recorded as 24%. The rounding is either up or down to the nearest whole number with the exception of the 200 mesh which is carried to one tenth of a percentage (6.2%). The result represents the percent passing in relation to the total sample.

The adjusted cumulative mass retained in the pan plus the Loss By Wash (LBW) mass should be within 0.3% of original dry mass of the total sample. EXAMPLE: 425.1+93.3=518.4, 518.6-518.4=0.2, (0.2/518.6)x100=0.04%

7 of 9

F104C–E.doc Form 104C (Rev. 11/8/11)

MONTANA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

Field Aggregate Chart - Sample for Clinging Fines

Project No.: Contract No.: Project Name: Mat'ls. Suprv.: Contract Item # UPN : Material # :

County: Laboratory Pit No.: Test For: Pit Location: Section: Township: Range: Test No. Lot No. Stationing

Constant Mass Wt. 1 Wt. 2 Wt. 3

Wt. of Sample Taken 25.23 Lbs. 100%

Wt. Retained 4-Mesh 11.59 Lbs. 45.94%

Wt. Passing 4-Mesh 13.64 Lbs. 54.06%

Before Wash 520.5 After Wash 448.0 LBW 72.5

Cum. Wt. Ret. Size

Tot. Wt. Pass Percent Spec.

4½" 4" 3½" 3" 2½" 2" 1½" 1¼" 1"

0 ⅝ ¾" 25.23 100 1.29 lbs ½" 23.94 94.89 4.69 lbs ⅜" 20.54 81.41

* 11.59 lbs 4 M 13.64 54.06 219.7 g 8/10 M 300.8 31.25 375.8 g 40 M 144.7 15.03 420.5 g 80 M 100.0 10.39 447.9 g 200 M 72.6 7.54 Pan/Total Reciprocal 0.1039

* ±4 Mesh Sample Split and Sieved Dust Ratio % Moisture % Fracture % Liquid Limit Plasticity Index

Date

Lift Lane

Constant Mass Wt. 1 Wt. 2 Wt. 3

Wt. of Orig. Sample Taken 25.23 Lbs. Difference in Weight

Passing 4 -Mesh

0.39 Lbs 1.55%

Before Wash 176.9 After Wash LBW

Cum. Wt. Ret. Size

Tot. Wt. Pass Percent Spec.

4½" 4" 3½" 3" 2½" 2" 1½" 1¼" 1"

0 ⅝ ¾" 25.23 100 1.22 lbs ½" 24.01 95.16 4.43 lbs ⅜" 20.80 82.44

* 11.20 lbs 4 M 14.03 55.61 19.9 g 8/10 M 157.0 1.38 48.4 g 40 M 128.5 1.13 90.0 g 80 M 86.9 0.76

174.9 g 200 M 2.0 0.02 Pan/Total Reciprocal 0.0088

Dust Ratio % Moisture % Fracture % Liquid Limit Plasticity Index

Sampled By Tested By

Actual Grading %

Passing Size % Clinging Fines 4½" 4" 3½" 3" 2½" 2" 1½" 1¼" 1" 100 ⅝ ¾" 0

95.16 ½" 0.27 82.44 ⅜" 1.03 55.61 4 M 1.55 32.63 8/10 M 16.16 40 M 11.15 80 M 7.56 200 M

Pan/Total Reciprocal

NOTE: Report the % Clinging Fines to the tenth, 1.6% Dust Ratio % Moisture % Fracture % Liquid Limit Plasticity Index

Checked by Date Entered by Date REMARKS: See the following page for a written explanation of calculations used for this form (F104C-E).

8 of 9

Calculations used on form F104C-E PLUS 4.75 mm (+4 MESH) MATERIAL - The total weight passing each sieve divided by the total weight of the initial sample taken (25.23 lbs.), multiplied by 100, results in the

percent passing. EXAMPLE: 13.64 ÷ 25.23 = 0.5406 X 100 = 54.06% MINUS 4.75 mm (-4 MESH) MATERIAL – (By Reciprocal Method). This sample is dried to a constant mass before and after washing. A reciprocal is determined by dividing the

percent of material passing the 4 mesh (54.06%) by the mass of the minus 4 mesh sample (520.5 grams). This reciprocal (0.1039) is multiplied by the cumulative weight passing for each sieve size. EXAMPLE: 520.5 – 219.7= 300.8; 300.8 x 0.1039 = 31.25% and is rounded down to and is recorded as 31%. The rounding is either up or down to the nearest whole number with the exception of the 200 mesh which is carried to one tenth of a percentage (7.5%). The result represents the percent passing in relation to the total sample.

For the Actual Grading % Passing of the +4 MESH, use the second gradation. To calculate the % of Clinging Fines on each sieve (change in percentage), take the percent from the +4 MESH of the second gradation and subtract the percent from the +4 MESH of the first gradation. EXAMPLE 95.16 – 94.89 = 0.27% In order to calculate the Actual Grading % Passing the MINUS 4.75 mm (-4 MESH), the percent passing in the second gradation is added to the percent passing the first

gradation. EXAMPLE: 31.25 + 1.38 = 32.63 The reciprocal for the second sieve analysis is calculated by taking the % of clinging fines on the +4 MESH and dividing it by the before wash weight of the second gradation.

EXAMPLE: 1.55 ÷ 176.9 = 0.0088 The adjusted cumulative mass retained in the pan plus the Loss By Wash (LBW) mass should be within 0.3% of original dry mass of the total sample. EXAMPLE: 447.9+72.5=520.4, 520.5-520.4=0.1, (0.1/520.5)x100=0.02%

9 of 9

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 207-04

CENTERLINE SOIL SURVEY

1 Introduction

1.1 A centerline soil survey is an essential part of preliminary highway engineering. Information on the engineering properties and distribution of soils, rock and groundwater must be obtained before a reasonable and economic highway design can be developed. A soil survey is not intended to take the place of a thorough Geotechnical Foundation investigation.

1.2 The soil survey work depends on many factors which include scope of the proposed project, types and variability of materials found on the project, groundwater conditions, adverse geologic features, etc. Often field conditions found during the soil survey will increase or decrease the amount of work needed to supply the necessary information for design. The soil survey and the geotechnical investigation must be coordinated in order to preclude duplication of effort.

2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO M 145 Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes T 190 Resistance R-Value and Expansion Pressure of Compacted Soils

MT Materials Manual MT 210 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer MT 230 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 lb. Rammer

3 Apparatus

3.1 Sampling tools Hand shovels, picks, etc. Hand augers, post hole diggers Power augers and drills, etc. Backhoes

3.2 Instruments Survey equipment Nuclear moisture and density testing device Camera & film

3.3 Miscellaneous Stakes and lath Sample bags (17"X28" canvas 75 lb. capacity cloth) Sealed containers (jars or plastic bags) Field notebooks and forms

4 General Procedure

4.1 General Procedure: Following is the general procedure which should be followed in conducting any soil survey. The complexity of the soil survey will depend upon many factors as discussed in Section 1.2 above.

4.2 Reconnaissance of the proposed project should be conducted with pertinent existing information in hand. Additional information available may include but is not limited to the following items:

Maintenance records Construction records Topographic & geologic maps Historic use of the area U.S. Department of Agriculture Soil Conservation Service County soil survey reports Utility company maps & locations

MT 207-04 (06/01/04)

Page 1 of 10

City and county plat maps City, county and state health department information Information from landowners and businesses Aerial photography

4.3 Preliminary Survey Plan 4.3.1 A preliminary plan should be determined prior to fieldwork. This should be based upon available

information and intended scope. Approximate sample site locations should be determined to enable proper soil profile determination and adequate sampling. This plan will likely change as information is gained during the actual construction of the test sites.

4.3.2 Boring records should be kept in a systematic manner and referred to new centerline stationing

and elevations for each project. Such records should include and be recorded on Forms 30 and 111. Describe each site or area investigated, with each test hole, boring, or test pit clearly located (horizontally and vertically) with reference to some established coordinate system or permanent monument. Log each test hole, boring, test pit, or cut-surface exposure with the field description and location of each material encountered clearly shown by Montana Department of Highways' symbols and word descriptions used on Form 30.

Note – Color photographs of samples, and exposed strata may be of considerable value to the Department. Each photograph should include a date and an identifying number or symbol. Identify all soils based on AASHTO M 145 Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purpose. Record seepage and water-bearing zones and free water-table depth found in each test hole, boring or test pit. Identify artifacts and items of cultural and historical significance. Note items concerning environmental hazards or other worthy notes.

4.3.3 Identify vertical and/or horizontal change of original ground where instability problems exist

(landslides, subsidence, etc.). 4.4 Soil Profile Determination and Sampling 4.4.1 Boring or test pits should be taken for laboratory analysis from all areas which may supply

appreciable quantities of earthwork, and known borrow areas. Embankment areas should be tested for areas of swamp conditions or loosely compacted soils that will result in embankment settlements. The spacing of these investigations will depend upon the geologic complexity of the project area and upon the importance of soil and rock parameters to the project design. The depth should be a minimum of five feet below the proposed top of subgrade elevation or to borrow area depth.

4.5 Sampling 4.5.1 Accurately identify each sample with the project identification, location, date, test site number and

depth below reference ground surface from which it was taken. Place identification inside the container, securely close the container, protect it to withstand rough handling, and mark it with proper identification on the outside of the container. Keep samples for natural moisture determination in sealed containers to prevent moisture loss. When drying of samples may affect classification or engineering properties, protect them to minimize moisture loss.

MT 207-04 (06/01/04)

Page 2 of 10

4.5.2 Soil and water samples should be taken from the probable, proposed, or existing centerline of pipe, channel bottom and bridge locations as well as probable borrow areas, to determine pH, resistivity and sulfate (SO4) content of the soil and water. In areas of bad soils (resistivity less than 500), additional samples should be taken.

Sample Size not less than 5 lbs. (2.3 Kg.) Sample Size, Water 1 quart.

4.5.3 Evaluate performance of existing installations in the immediate vicinity of the proposed site, relative to their historical performance and environmental impact. Photos of relevant installations properly labeled are helpful.

4.5.4 Representative disturbed samples for laboratory classification tests of soil, rock, and local

construction material should be supplemented by undisturbed specimens. 4.5.5 Standard traffic control is required while working on the PTW. 4.6 Testing 4.6.1 Testing analysis should be performed on all samples for the following items and recorded on

Form 111. Soil class by AASHTO M 145 Liquid limit Plastic limit Percent of material passing the 10 mesh, 40 mesh, and 200 mesh sieve size. Maximum dry density and optimum moisture content by MT 230 for A-1 soils, MT 210 for all other soils In-place density and moisture content "R" value by AASHTO T 190, all soils except A-6 and A-7’s. Depth to water table

5 Field Procedure 5.1 Overlay, New and Reconstruction Projects

Survey data required for all projects is as follows: The PTW should be cored at least 5' into the subgrade and sampled in the driving lanes (not the shoulder) as frequently as necessary. Typical sampling frequency is one per 1/2 mile, more or less as conditions dictate. Note and log the mat thickness. Note and log base thickness and subgrade. Sample and determine moisture content, record soil class (AASHTO M 145), moisture, density and "R" value (AASHTO T 190). Perform a culvert inspection; take chemical corrosion samples where necessary. Take photos at locations of bad pipe. Review the existing project and record its past performance. A narrative summary should be provided with the soil survey. Problem areas must be shown and recommendations for sub-excavation and the proposed depth of sub-excavation should be noted. Anticipated borrow material should be sampled and tested for R values and corrosion.

MT 207-04 (06/01/04)

Page 3 of 10

Projects, where the intent is to overlay the existing plant mix, should be cored and the cores submitted to the Materials Bureau for evaluation. A typical sampling frequency is one (1) core per lane mile with a minimum of five (5) cores per project. The frequency can and should be adjusted as conditions warrant. The cores will be evaluated to determine the in-place condition of the PMS and a report issued to Surfacing Design.

5.2 New and Reconstruction Projects Only Additional survey data for new and reconstruction projects only are as follows: Review planning reports and anticipate alignment and grades. Test holes in the field should be located to provide engineering soil properties where appreciable quantities of excavation will occur. Depth will be determined by the new grade line with holes extending about five feet below the proposed subgrade line. Typical sampling frequency is one per 1/2 mile, more or less as conditions dictate. Tests should include samples of each soil strata encountered and the in place moisture, the chemical-corrosive properties, soil class (AASHTO M 145), "R" value (AASHTO T 190), and the specific gravity for each strata. Determine in place densities for shrink and swell determinations if frozen conditions do not exist. A log of the test holes should be kept and the test holes plotted on a profile sheet. Data obtained should be reviewed to determine if additional test sites (i.e., areas of refusal, inadequate depth, or of questionable frequencies) are required. Topsoil depth and availability should be noted. Any anticipated borrow material should be sampled for "R" value, chemical-corrosive properties, and moisture density purposes. If centerline is following close to the PTW and material in present embankment will be used, additional R-values and chemical-corrosive properties should be taken beneath the PTW driving lanes. Potential borrow areas that have better quality soils (A-4(0) or better) should be investigated to determine their use in the top 2' of the subgrade especially in areas where surfacing materials are scarce.

6 Interpretation of Results 6.1 Interpret the results of an investigation only in terms of actual findings and make every effort to

collect and include all field and laboratory data from previous investigations in the same areas. Extrapolation of data into local areas not surveyed and tested can be done only where geologically uniform subsurface conditions of soil and rock are known to exist. Engineering properties of the soils and rocks encountered on important projects should not be predicted wholly on field identifications or classification but should be checked by laboratory and field tests made on samples collected.

6.2 The recommendations for design parameters can be made only by professionals who have

specialized in the field of soils and foundations or highway engineering, and who are familiar with the problems for which the study is being made.

MT 207-04 (06/01/04)

Page 4 of 10

7 Report 7.1 A soil survey investigation report should: 7.1.1 Locate the area investigated in terms pertinent to the project. This may include sketch maps or

aerial photos on which the test holes, pits, and sample areas are located, as well as topographic items relevant to the determination of the various soil and rock types, such as contours, streambeds, sink holes, cliffs, etc. Where feasible, include a geologic map of the area investigated in the report.

7.1.2 Include copies of all borings, test-hole logs and laboratory test results. 7.1.3 Describe and relate the findings obtained by following the format of Section 4, General

Procedure. 7.1.4 Provide preliminary shrink/swell recommendations. Shrink/swell information obtained from

adjacent projects in the area should be included. 7.1.5 Provide recommendations relative to availability of better quality soils (A-4(0) or better) that could

be used in the top 2' of the subgrade to reduce more costly surfacing material and to improve drainage.

Provide recommendations for additional testing required by core drill, seismic, etc., for materials inaccessible because of depth, topography, etc.

7.1.6 Each soil survey shall be submitted and distributed as follows:

1 copy to Preconstruction Bureau 1 copy to Geotechnical & Materials Bureau 1 copy to Surfacing Design - Materials Bureau 2 copies to be retained by the District

MT 207-04 (06/01/04)

Page 5 of 10

DRAINAGE EVALUATION FORM MT 207

This form should be submitted with each soil survey. Each area of concern on the project should be noted.

Project No. Designation:

Date Submitted by:

Station(s)

Are the ditch lines clear of standing water?

Are the ditch lines and pavement edges free from weed growth that may indicate a moisture

concentration?

After a rain,

a) Is there moisture standing in the joints or cracks?

b) Is there any evidence of pumping?

c) Is there water standing at the outer edge of the shoulder?

d) Is there evidence that the water may pond on the shoulder?

Are joint sealants or crack sealants in good condition and preventing water from entering the pavement?

Are the cross drainage conduits closed by debris?

AC Pavements

Is there moisture related distress evident such as; Stripping, Rutting, Cracking in Wheelpath, Shoulder Dropoff/Heave, Pumping, Water Bleeding, Swelling?

PCC Pavements

Is there moisture related distress evident such as; Pumping, Faulting, Corner Break, D-Cracking, Edge Joint Opening, Shoulder Dropoff/Heave, Punchout (CRCP only), Swelling, Slab Cracking?

MT 207-04 (06/01/04)

Page 6 of 10

Is there evidence of springs and excessively wet areas?

Are there slides or slumps noted along the alignment?

Specific surface/subsurface drainage recommendations

MT 207-04 (06/01/04)

Page 7 of 10

MT 207-04 (06/01/04)

Page 8 of 10

MT 207-04 (06/01/04)

Page 9 of 10

Lab

Form

No.

111

/Q:M

T-ST

D\F

111.

doc

Rev

ised

2/8

/10

Mon

tana

Dep

artm

ent o

f Tra

nspo

rtat

ion

Prec

onst

ruct

ion

Soil

Surv

ey D

ata

and

Spec

ial R

ecom

men

datio

ns R

elat

ive

to S

ubgr

ade

and

Roa

d Su

rfac

e D

esig

n

Proj

ect N

umbe

r

Pr

ojec

t Nam

e

Le

ngth

C

ount

y

D

ate

UPN

C

ontra

ct N

o.

Subm

itted

by

Title

D

istri

ct M

ater

ials

Sup

ervi

sor

Dis

t. Pr

econ

stru

ctio

n En

gine

er

Hole Number

Sample Number

Dat

e

Ref

eren

ce

to

Cen

terl

ine

– L

ocat

ion

of

Bor

ing

Dep

th

Rep

rese

ntin

g St

atio

ning

Soil

Cla

ss

(MT

214)

L

L

PI

10 Mesh (2.00 mm)

40 Mesh (.425 mm)

200 Mesh (.075 mm)

In Place Density

Specific Gravity

Density Maximum Dry

Moisture Percent Natural

Moisture Percent Optimum

Water Table Depth to

(AASHTO T190) “R” Value

R

emar

ks:

Dis

trib

utio

n: P

reco

nstr

uctio

n B

urea

u; G

eote

ch, M

ater

ials

Bur

eau;

Sur

faci

ng D

esig

n, M

ater

ials

Bur

eau;

Dis

tric

t Lab

; Are

a L

ab,

,

N

DT

Dat

a C

olle

ctio

n

MT 207-04 (06/01/04)

Page 10 of 10

MT 210-16 (12/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 210-16

METHOD OF TEST FOR THE MOISTURE-DENSITY RELATIONS OF SOILS USING A 5.5 LB. (2.5 KG) RAMMER AND A 12 IN. (305 MM) DROP

(Modified AASHTO T 99) MT 210 is identical to AASHTO T 99 except for the following stipulations: 1. Replace Section 1.5 with the following:

If the specified oversized particle maximum percentage is exceeded (except for material that meets the criteria described in MT 218, Section 4.6.), the replacement method should be used. The replacement method maintains the same percentage of coarse material (passing a 50 mm sieve and retained on a 4.75 mm sieve) in the moisture-density sample as in the original field sample. The material retained on the 19.0 mm sieve shall be replaced as follows: sieve an adequate quantity of the representative soil over the 50 mm and 19.0 mm sieve. Weigh the material retained on the 19.0 mm sieve. Replace this material with an equal mass of material passing the 19.0 mm sieve and retained on the 4.75 mm sieve. Take the material for replacement from the extra portion of the sample.

1 of 1

MT 212-16 (12/28/16)

1 of 4

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 212-16

DETERMINATION OF MOISTURE AND DENSITY OF IN-PLACE MATERIALS (Modified AASHTO T 310 and T 355)

1 Scope 1.1 This test method describes the procedures for determining the moisture and/or density of in-place

materials, either in the natural state or after compaction, by the use of nuclear density/moisture gauge.

1.2 Alternatively, moisture may be determined in the laboratory by AASHTO T 265, Laboratory

Determination of Moisture Content of Soils. 2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO T 265 Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soils T 310 In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods T 355 In-Place Density of Asphalt Mixtures by Nuclear Methods MT Materials Manual MT 210 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using A 5.5 Lb Rammer and a 12 In Drop MT 230 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using A 10 Lb Rammer and a 18 In Drop

3 Apparatus 3.1 Nuclear moisture/density gauge containing radioactive sources, electronics and rechargeable

batteries 3.2 Standard Count Reference Block 3.3 AC Charger 115v/60Hz and DC Adapter 12v negative ground 3.4 Transport case designed and labeled for each specific gauge 3.5 Scraper Plate/Drill Rod Guide 3.6 Drill Rod and Drill Rod Extractor 3.7 Operators Manual and Gauge Booklet 3.8 Sieve, 30 mesh for seating sand 3.9 Thermoluminescent Dosimeter (TLD) Badge 4 Calibration

The nuclear moisture/density gauges are calibrated by the MDT Materials Bureau for testing density of PCC and AC pavements. The gauges are also calibrated for both density and moisture of most soils and soil aggregate mixtures. The calibrations are stored electronically within the gauge.

5 Operational Considerations 5.1 A manufacturer's instructional manual is furnished with each nuclear device and must be

consulted for operational procedures. These procedures vary between gauges and must be followed carefully.

5.2 Nuclear gauges shall only be distributed to personnel who have received the required 8 hour

radiation safety and nuclear gauge operation course.

MT 212-16 (12/28/16)

2 of 4

5.2.1 Gauge operators must attend a 2 to 4 hour refresher course at intervals not to exceed three (3)

years. This training will be provided by MDT. 5.2.2 District Materials Supervisors must ensure that each gauge operator has completed an approved

operator training course, that their card is up to date and in their possession, and that a radiation monitoring device (TLD Badge) is properly utilized when handling nuclear gauges.

5.3 Gauge operators should be very familiar with the Operator's Instruction Manual. 5.4 Gauge operators should always be aware of battery charge status and follow battery care

instructions in Operator's Manual. 5.5 The gauge electronics must be turned on to warm up for a minimum of 15 minutes before taking

the daily standard count or testing. Leave the power on all day during testing. 5.6 The Nuclear Gauge Transport form shall be kept with the nuclear gauge at all times. When

transporting a gauge, the certification shall be filled out, visible and within reach of the driver. 5.7 Additional Operational Considerations and Radiation Safety are provided in the Appendix. 6 Standardization 6.1 Standard counts shall be taken and recorded each day that gauges are put into use and should

be taken in the same environment as the actual measurement counts (i.e., at the construction site). The standardization should be performed with the gauge at least 10 m (30 ft) away from other nuclear density/moisture gauges and clear of large masses of water or other items that may affect the reference count rates.

6.2 If the daily standard counts are more than 1% for density or 2% for moisture from the average of

the previous four counts, procedures should be thoroughly examined and the counts taken again. If these counts also fail, problems with the gauge or procedure are indicated and the appropriate District or Area Laboratory should be contacted.

7 Stability Test 7.1 A Stability Test should be performed whenever the accuracy of the gauge is in doubt. 7.2 A Stability Test consists of 20, one-minute Standard Counts. 7.3 Calculations (Using Actual Gauge Readings) 7.3.1 Determine the Average Reading (AVG)

𝐴𝑉𝐺 = ∑ 𝑋𝑁

1

𝑁

Where: AVG = Average X = Reading N = number of readings

MT 212-16 (12/28/16)

3 of 4

7.3.2 Calculate the Standard Deviation (SD)

𝑆𝐷 = √∑ (𝑋 − 𝐴𝑉𝐺)2𝑁

1

𝑁

Where: SD = Standard Deviation X = Reading N = number of readings

7.3.3 Calculate the Stability Ratio

𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑏𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 = 𝑆𝐷

√𝐴𝑉𝐺

7.4 If the ratio falls outside of the indicated ranges, procedures should be checked and the stability

test taken again. If another failure occurs, contact the appropriate District or Area Lab.

PASSING RATIOS Moisture Density

0.18-0.35 0.18-0.35 8 Procedure 8.1 Soil and Soil-Aggregate (Direct Transmission Method) 8.1.1 Follow AASHTO T 310 Sections 9.1 – 9.3 and 9.5, collecting at least two (2) readings. The final

result will be the average of all the readings. 8.2 Asphalt Mixtures 8.2.1 Follow AASHTO T 355 Section 9 9 Calculations 9.1 Use the appropriate Compaction Form for recording field determinations with Nuclear Devices. 9.2 Wet density, dry density, and moisture can be read directly from the gauge scales in pounds per

cubic foot (lb/ft³). Percent moisture can also be read directly from the gauge. 9.3 Percent Compaction Calculation

% 𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = 𝐹𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑 𝐷𝑟𝑦 𝐷𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑦 (

𝑙𝑏

𝑓𝑡3)

𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝐷𝑟𝑦 𝐷𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑋 100

Note 1 – Proctor Dry Density from MT 210 or MT 230.

9.4 Compare field moisture to optimum moisture from the Proctor determination. 9.5 Record percent moisture and density readings to the nearest whole percent.

MT 212-16 (12/28/16)

4 of 4

APPENDIX A.1 Radiation Safety A.1.1 Each nuclear gauge operator must wear a TLD badge attached to the front of his/her clothing or

belt at waist level. The District Materials Supervisors issue these badges. Note 2 – A TLD badge is a device that monitors a person’s potential exposure to radiation. A.1.1.1 These TLD badges must not be transferred from one operator to another. A.1.1.2 When not in use, TLD badges should be stored at least 30 feet from nuclear gauges, out of direct

sunlight, and away from excessive heat or dampness. Badges left near gauges are especially susceptible to unfounded high readings.

A.1.1.3 Whenever a TLD badge has a high reading, the individual to whom the badge was issued will be

notified and must fill out a report and submit it to the Materials Bureau within five days. It is important that all facts and details be presented accurately and conscientiously including diagrams, distances and times. Statements from supervisors and witnesses are also valuable.

A.1.1.4 The District Materials Supervisor will keep an up-to-date record consisting of the individual's

name, the date the badge was issued, the serial number of the gauge they are using, and the project to which the gauge is assigned. This information, along with the TLD badges will be mailed to the Materials Bureau within ten days after the end of the quarter.

A.1.2 The leak testing of all nuclear gauges will be performed by personnel in the Materials Bureau or

other individuals designated by the Radiation Safety Officer to perform such tests. An up-to-date record of the results of these tests shall also be maintained by the Materials Bureau.

A.2 Transportation A.2.1 The nuclear gauges require careful handling. The vehicle in which they are transported should be

capable of keeping them dry and provide complete security from unauthorized personnel. It should also be equipped with a carrying rack to which the instrument cases can be strapped and locked.

A.3 Storage A.3.1 Storage areas should be locked and posted with radiation caution signs. A.3.2 When the equipment is not being used, it should be stored in a separate dry room or garage. The

temperature in the storage area should be above freezing and the batteries in the device should be fully charged. Never store a device in an area where personnel are working or will be working. Radiation caution signs shall be posted at the entrance door of any storage area.

A.3.3 Radiation levels surrounding the storage area shall not exceed two (2) millirems per hour. To help

ensure low radiation levels outside the storage area, a gauge should be stored as near the center of the room as practical. Gauges should not be stored above, below or adjacent to a work area. The best way to assure radiation safety is to limit the number of gauges in a storage area. The largest number of gauges to be stored in one area is determined by the outside radiation level which shall not exceed 2 millirems per hour. The Materials Bureau in Helena will check the outside area to see if the radiation levels are acceptable.

A.3.4 Store the gauge fully charged. Battery charging during storage is not necessary but gauges

should be given a full charge prior to initial use at the beginning of the construction season. A.4 Maintenance A.4.1 The Materials Bureau should be notified immediately when any breakdowns occur. It will be

decided at that time whether the gauge should be sent to the Materials Bureau for repairs. A.4.2 Clean and maintain the gauge regularly as recommended in the Operator's Manual.

MT 216-13 (10/21/13)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 216-13

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING CEMENT TREATED BASE (Montana Test Method)

1 Scope 1.1 This method describes procedures for making, curing, and testing cylindrical specimens from

representative samples of Cement Treated Base (CTB). 2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO T 19 Bulk Density (“Unit Weight”) and Voids in Aggregate T 134 Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures T 231 Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM D1633 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders MT Materials Manual MT 201 Sampling Roadway Materials MT 212 Determination of Moisture and Density of In-Place Materials MT 228 Method of Establishing Field Target Density for Cement Treated Base Density Control MT 405 Wire Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes MT 601 Materials Sampling, Testing and Acceptance Guide

3 Apparatus 3.1 Molds - Use solid-wall, metal cylinders manufactured with dimensions and capacities shown in

3.1.1. They must have a detachable collar assembly approximately 2.375 in. (60 mm) in height, to permit preparation of compacted specimens of soil-cement mixtures of the desired weight and volume. The mold and collar assembly must be constructed so that it can be fastened firmly to a detachable base plate made of the same material.

Note 1 – Alternate types of molds with capacities as stipulated herein may be used, provided the test

results are correlated with those of the solid-wall mold on several soil types and the same moisture-density results are obtained. Records of such correlations shall be maintained and readily available for inspection when alternate types of molds are used.

3.1.1 A 4 in. (101.6 mm) mold having a capacity of 1/30 ± 0.0003 cu. ft. (943 ± 8 cm³) with an internal

diameter of 4.000 ± 0.016 in. (101.6 ± 0.41 mm) and a height of 4.584 ± 0.005 in. (116.43 ± 0.13 mm).

3.1.2 Molds Out of Tolerance Due to Use - A mold that fails to meet manufacturing tolerances after

continued service may remain in use provided those tolerances are not exceeded by more than 50 percent; and the volume of the mold, calibrated in accordance with AASHTO T 19, Section 8 (Calibration of Measure), is used in the calculations.

3.2 Rammer 3.2.1 Manually Operated - Metal rammer having a flat circular face of 2.000 in. (50.8 mm) diameter, a

manufacturing tolerance of ± 0.01 (0.25 mm) and weighing 5.50 ± 0.02 lb. (2.495 ± 0.009 kg). The in-service diameter of the flat circular face shall be not less than 1.985 in. (50.42 mm). Use a rammer equipped with a suitable guide-sleeve to control the height of drop to a free fall of 12.00 ± 0.06 in. (305 ± 2 mm) above the elevation of the soil. The guide-sleeve must have at least 4 vent holes, no smaller than ⅜ in. (9.5 mm) diameter spaced approximately 90 degrees (1.57 radius) apart and approximately ¾ in. (19 mm) from each end, and provide sufficient clearance so the free fall of the rammer shaft and head is unrestricted.

1 of 5

MT 216-13 (10/21/13)

3.2.2 Mechanically Operated - A metal rammer equipped with a device to control the height of drop to a free fall of 12.00 ± 0.06 in. (305 ± 2 mm) above the elevation of the soil and uniformly distributes such drops to the soil surface (Note 2). The rammer must have a flat circular face 2.000 in. (50.8 mm) diameter, a manufacturing tolerance of ± 0.01 (0.25 mm) and weighing 5.50 ± 0.02 lb. (2.495 ± 0.009 kg).

Note 2 – Calibrate the rammer apparatus with several soil-cement mixtures. Adjust the mass of the

rammer, if necessary, to give the same moisture-density results as with the manually operated rammer. It may be impractical to adjust the mechanical apparatus so the free fall is 12 in. (305 mm) each time the rammer is dropped, as with the manually operated rammer. To make the adjustment of free fall, the portion of loose soil to receive the initial blow should be slightly compressed with the rammer to establish the point of impact from which the 12 in. (305 mm) drop is determined. Subsequent blows on the layer of soil-cement may all be applied by dropping the rammer from a height of 12 in. (305 mm) above the initial-setting elevation, or when the mechanical apparatus is designed with a height adjustment for each blow, all subsequent blows should have a rammer free fall of 12 in. (305 mm) measured from the elevation of the soil-cement as compacted by the previous blow.

3.2.3 Rammer Face – Use the circular face rammer. If necessary, use a sector face rammer as an

alternative. Indicate the type of face used other than the 2 in. (50.8 mm) circular face in the report. The alternate must have an area equal to that of the circular face rammer.

3.3 Sample Extruder - A jack, lever, frame, or other device adopted for the purpose of extruding

compacted specimens from the mold. 3.4 Balances and Scales - A balance or scale of at least 25 lb. (11.5 kg) capacity having sensitivity

and readability to 0.01 lb. (5 grams). Also, a balance of at least 3 lb. (1 kg) capacity having sensitivity and readability to 0.003 oz. (0.1 gram). Use balances or scales of the same units shown in the contract.

3.5 Heat Source - Oven, hot plate or alternate heating source. 3.6 Straightedge - A hardened steel straightedge at least 10 in. (254 mm) in length. Use a

straightedge with one beveled edge. At least one longitudinal surface (used for final trimming) must be plane within 0.01 in. per 10 in. (0.25 mm per 250 mm) (0.1 percent) of length within the portion used for trimming the soil. (Note 3)

Note 3 – The beveled edge may be used for final trimming if the edge is true within a tolerance of 0.01 in.

per 10 in. (0.25 mm per 250 mm) (0.1 percent) of length; however, with continued use, the cutting edge may become excessively worn and not suitable for trimming the soil to the level of the mold. The straightedge should not be so flexible that trimming the soil surface with the cutting edge will concave the soil surface.

3.7 Sieves – 2 in. (50 mm), ¾ in. (19.0 mm), No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieves conforming to the requirements

of MT 405. 3.8 Mixing Tools – Miscellaneous tools such as mixing pan, spoon, trowel, spatula, etc., or a suitable

mechanical device for thoroughly mixing the sample of soil with increments of water. 3.9 Container – A flat, round pan for moisture absorption by soil-cement mixtures about 12 in. (305

mm) in diameter and 2 in. (50 mm) deep. 3.10 Moisture Containers - Suitable containers made of material resistant to corrosion and not subject

to change in weight or disintegration on repeated heating and cooling. Use containers with close- fitting lids to prevent loss of moisture from samples before initial weighing and to prevent absorption of moisture from the atmosphere following drying and before final weighing. One container is needed for each moisture content determination.

3.11 Butcher Knife - A butcher knife approximately 10 in. (250 mm) in length, for trimming the top of the

specimens.

2 of 5

MT 216-13 (10/21/13)

4 CTB Mix Design 4.1 Verify that the contractor has submitted a cement treated base mix design to the Materials Bureau

at least 10 business days before scheduled placement. Confirm with the Materials Bureau that the design is approved for use before allowing placement on the project.

5 Acceptance 5.1 In-Place Densities – Test for compaction in accordance with Specifications 304.03.5. Determine

in- place densities in accordance with MT 212. Establish a corrected moisture curve by correcting the nuclear moisture reading to oven-dry moisture contents.

5.2 Field-Made Compression Specimens – Mold a minimum of one set of compressive strength

specimens for every 750 cubic yards (575 cubic meters) of CTB in accordance with MT 601. A set consists of three compressive strength specimens molded in accordance with Section 6 of this procedure. It is desirable that these specimens represent the material placed at the locations of the in-place densities so moisture-density comparisons can be made. Two specimens from each set will be tested at 7 days to determine strength acceptance. The remaining specimens will be broken at 28 days to identify strength gain. A copy of the sample record containing moisture content, cementitious material content, and density must accompany each set of compressive strength specimens in the shipping boxes.

5.3 Acceptance Samples of Aggregate - Sample for gradation analysis in accordance with

Specification 304.03.1. 6 Molding Specimens in the Field 6.1 Sample the CTB mixture placed on the roadway from a representative location in accordance

with MT 201. Obtain approximately one cubic foot of material and place in suitable container(s) lined with a plastic bag. Once the sample is complete, close the bag and place a lid on the container(s). This is done to reduce any possibility of moisture loss from the sample. Transport the sample to the place of molding as quickly as possible in order to minimize hydration (excessive hydration can reduce the lubrication properties and result in less than maximum density and therefore lower strengths). Remix the sample before and during molding to ensure uniformity and prevent segregation.

6.2 Immediately form a specimen by compacting the mixture in the mold in accordance with

AASHTO T 134, Section 5.5 (with the collar attached). Trim the specimen in accordance with AASHTO T 134, Section 5.6. Uniformly distribute the material by spading along the inside of the mold with a spatula for each lift placed in the mold and before compaction. After compaction of each lift, scarify or roughen the top of the layer in order to obtain a good bond between lifts.

6.3 During compaction, obtain a representative sample of the mixture, weighing not less than 500

grams. Weigh the sample immediately and dry until further drying does not alter the weight greater than 0.1 percent, constant mass. Determine the moisture content as a check against design moisture content.

6.4 Weigh the compacted specimen to check against design density before beginning the initial cure.

(Note 4) Note 4 – Once the specimen has been struck off to the required smoothness and weighed, cover the top of

the mold with plastic and place the compaction collar back on the mold, leaving the plastic in place. Tighten the collar so that the plastic will make an airtight seal around the rim of the mold and the surface of the specimen. This is done to prevent moisture loss from the specimen during the initial cure. Once all specimens have been molded and sealed with plastic, place in a cure box to protect the specimens from temperature extremes and from direct sunlight. Maintain a temperature range of 60° F to 80° F during the initial cure in the field. The location for the initial cure must be horizontally level, rigid, and free from vibration or other disturbances.

3 of 5

MT 216-13 (10/21/13)

6.5 Maintain a running average of densities and moistures in accordance with MT 228 to establish density control.

6.6 Form two additional specimens in the same manner as the first as rapidly as possible. Identify two

specimens as 7-day compression specimens, and the third as a 28-day compression specimen. (Note 5)

Note 5 – A satisfactory method of identifying the specimens for the 7-day or 28-day breaks is to wrap a

piece of masking tape around the specimen. Indicate on the masking tape the date made, stationing & lane, type of test, etc.

6.7 Cure the compacted specimens in the molds a minimum of 24 hours. Extract the specimens from

the molds, place in the shipping box packed in damp sawdust, and transport to the Materials Bureau as soon as possible so that the final cure can be accomplished in the moist cure room for the remainder of the curing period.

7 Compressive Strength Determination 7.1 Determine the diameter using two diameter measurements to the nearest 0.01 inches (0.25 mm)

taken at 90 degrees to one another near mid height of the specimen. Prior to placing compressive strength specimens in the compression machine, verify that both ends of the specimen are plane to within 0.002 in (0.05 mm). If an end of the specimen is outside of the 0.002 in. (0.05 mm) tolerance, cap that end of the specimen in accordance with AASHTO T 231.

7.2 Determine the 7 day unconfined compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D1633 except

as modified herein. Omit the requirement for immersing cured specimens in water for 4 hours prior to testing.

7.3 Maintain free moisture on the outsides of specimens to prevent drying until testing is complete

(except for the ends of the specimens when sulfur capping). When capping with sulfur, be certain that the ends of the specimen are dry enough to prevent small pockets of steam from forming within the capping compound.

8 Calculation 8.1 Calculate the unit compressive strength of the specimen by dividing the maximum load by the

cross-sectional area.

𝑆𝑆 =𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟2

Where: 𝑆𝑆 = Strength lbf = Maximum Load 𝑟𝑟 = Radius of Specimen

8.2 For purposes of this method, determine strength of specimens using a height (uncapped) divided

by diameter ratio of 1.15. This is standard and is not to be corrected by a length to diameter correction factor.

4 of 5

MT 216-13 (10/21/13)

9 Report 9.1 The field technician is to report the following:

Sample Date the cylinder was made Percent cement rounded to the nearest tenth Percent fly ash rounded to the nearest tenth Depth of material placed rounded to the nearest tenth of a ft (m) Station where sample was taken Density rounded to the nearest tenth of lbs per ft3 (kg per m3) Moisture content rounded to the nearest tenth of a percent

9.2 The lab technician is to report the following:

Date the cylinder was broken Diameter of the cylinder rounded to the nearest hundredth of an inch (mm) Load rounded to the whole number in lbs per ft (kg per m) Compressive strength rounded to the nearest whole number in lbs per in2 (MPa)

Report the average strength of the two 7-day cylinders rounded to the nearest whole number.

5 of 5

MT 218-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 218-04

METHOD OF TEST FOR DETERMINING RELATIVE COMPACTION AND PERCENT MOISTURE

(Montana Test Method) 1 Scope 1.1 This procedure is intended as a guide for comparing in-place moisture and density to optimum

moisture and maximum density, respectively, in order to determine compliance with standard specifications and contract special provisions.

2 Referenced Documents

MT Materials Manual MT 210 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer MT 212 Determination of Moisture and Density of In-Place Materials MT 230 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 lb. Rammer

3 In-Place Moisture and Density 3.1 The in-place moisture and density shall be determined in accordance with MT 212. 4 Optimum Moisture and Maximum Density 4.1 The optimum moisture and maximum density shall be determined in accordance with MT 210 or

MT 230, Method A, B, C, or D, whichever is applicable, using the following criteria as a guide. 4.2 When the material under test is a soil or aggregate consisting of entirely minus 4 mesh (4.75

mm), Method A or B will be used. 4.3 When the material under test is a soil or aggregate with a maximum size of 3/4 inch (19.0) mm),

Method C or D will be used. 4.4 When the material under test is a soil or aggregate with a maximum size of 2 inches (50 mm),

Method D will be used. 4.5 When the material under test is a soil or aggregate with a maximum size of 4 inches (100 mm)

and no more than 50% of the material under test is retained on the 4 mesh (4.75 mm), Method D will be used.

4.6 When the material under test is a soil or aggregate with a maximum size larger than 2 inches (50

mm) and more than 50% of the material under test is retained on the 4 mesh (4.75 mm), the material will not be required to meet 95% density within 2% optimum moisture.

4.6.1 A screen analysis must be provided on representative samples from each lift of the embankment

area to prove that more than 50% of the material is retained on the 4 mesh (4.75 mm) sieve. 4.6.2 Nuclear moisture and/or density readings (MT 212) must be taken on each lift in the embankment

area to demonstrate that uniform relative density has been achieved. Report percent moisture and density reading to the nearest whole percent.

4.6.3 Notes must be made on the Summary of Compaction Data (Form 1006) showing the results

obtained in paragraphs 4.6.1 and 4.6.2.

MT 218-04 (06/01/04)

2 of 2

5 Calculation 5.1 Determine the relative compaction by dividing the in-place density (pounds per cubic foot) by the

maximum density (pounds per cubic foot) and multiplying by 100. 5.2 A direct comparison of the in-place moisture and the optimum moisture will determine compliance

with specifications. 6 Family of Curves 6.1 A "family of curves" is a term applied to a number of moisture-density curves which are plotted on

one cross-section sheet, using the same ordinates and abscissas as dry weights pounds per cubic foot and moisture contents, respectively. The family of curves is plotted, initially, from values obtained by the sampling and testing of the various soil types during the Preconstruction Soils Survey and every effort must be made to sample and identify all of the various soil types that will be encountered on the project. Each new soil type, or mixture of soils, encountered on the project during construction, will be represented by a moisture-density curve, which is added to the "family".

Note 1 – New curves drawn through plotted one-point determinations shall not become a permanent part

of the family of curves until verified by a full moisture-density relationship. 7 One Point Proctors 7.1 A "one point Proctor" is an abbreviated standard Proctor compaction test and is used in

conjunction with the family of curves. Rather than determining the moisture and density points for an entire curve, a single point is determined for the purpose of selecting the curve, which represents the soil being compacted, from the family of curves.

7.1.1 One-point Proctors shall be run whenever there is any doubt that the soil being compacted is

from a location on the project, which is represented, by one of the curves in the family of curves. 7.1.2 Frequently soils may be mixed by heavy equipment excavating and hauling to the embankment

site and a one-point Proctor may not fit any of the established curves. In these cases a new curve will have to be prepared from the mixture and added to the family of curves.

7.1.3 It is necessary to run the one-point Proctor as close to optimum moisture as possible. The point

should be within plus or minus three percent of optimum on most curves and within plus or minus two percent of optimum on sharp breaking curves. If the point is established on either side of optimum and some distance from the peak of the curve, it may very well fit more than one curve in the family of curves, or none at all and it will be impossible to select the proper curve.

7.1.4 The moisture and density results obtained by the one-point Proctor are plotted on the family of

curves and, when obtained near optimum, will fall near one of the curves in the family of curves, provided that particular type of soil or mixture of soils has been tested for optimum moisture and maximum density. The peak of the curve selected shall be considered the optimum moisture and maximum density of the material represented by the one-point Proctor.

Note 2 – If the one-point plotted within or on the family of curves does not fall in the 80 to 100 percent of

optimum moisture range, compact another specimen, using the same material, at an adjusted moisture content that will place the one-point within this range.

8 Numbering Check Samples

When a check sample is taken it will be assigned the same number as the sample being checked, with the addition of a letter suffix. For example, if sample number 38 failed to meet specifications, the first check sample would be numbered 38-A, the second check sample would be 38-B.

MT 219-04 (06/01/04)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 219-04

METHOD OF TEST FOR CONTROLLING THE COMPACTION OF SURFACING AGGREGATES AND PLANT MIX PAVING

USING A CONTROL-STRIP TEST-SECTION TECHNIQUE WITH NUCLEAR GAUGES (Montana Test Method)

1 Scope

1.1 This test method is intended to control the density of compacted courses of surfacing aggregates and plant mix pavement using nuclear gauges.

2 Referenced Documents

MT Materials Manual MT 212 Determination of Moisture and Density of In-Place Materials MT 230 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb. Rammer MT 311 Marshall Method for Field Control of Hot Mix Asphalt Paving

3 Definitions

3.1 Control-Strip A - Surfacing Aggregates – A section approximately three hundred (300) feet long by the typical section width of two lanes on a firm sub-grade.

3.2 Control-Strip B - Plant Mix Paving – A section approximately three hundred (300) feet long by one paver width on a firmly compacted base. Please refer to Table 1 on page 3 as a guide for maximum rolling times.

3.3 Test-Section Surfacing Aggregates – Individual sections each approximately two thousand (2000) feet long, as constructed, on which the surfacing aggregates will be placed, using the same layer thickness, compaction watering and procedures used in constructing the Control-strip A above.

3.4 Test-Section Plant Mix Paving – Individual sections each approximately two thousand (2000) feet long by one paver width on which plant mix material will be placed, using the same layer thickness, compaction and procedure used in construction the Control-strip B above.

4 Apparatus

4.1 Nuclear moisture/density gauge containing radioactive sources, electronics and rechargeable batteries

4.2 Standard Count Reference Block

4.3 AC Charger 115v/60Hz and DC Adapter 12v negative ground

4.4 Transport case designed and labeled for each specific gauge

4.5 Scraper Plate/Drill Rod Guide

4.6 Drill Rod and Drill Rod Extractor

4.7 Operators Manual and Gauge Booklet

5 Operational Procedures

5.1 Control-Strip Surfacing Aggregates – At the beginning of compaction operations, the density requirements shall be determined by compacting a Control-Strip of an approved thickness. The procedure, MT-230 (Proctor Test) establishes the dry density for aggregates being used in the Control-strip. (Note 1)

1 of 3

MT 219-04 (06/01/04)

Note 1 – The moisture-density of the control strip will be determined by the use of approved nuclear

equipment under field conditions. 5.1.1 After each application of the roller, wet density and moisture determinations are made with the

nuclear device at a minimum of three (3) random locations. These locations may be marked with a small quantity of minus 30 mesh dry sand - the finer the better. This sand should be screened from the material that is being compacted and dried to constant weight. This sand serves to identify each test location and is an aid for seating the nuclear device to preclude air voids between the bottom surface of the probe and the coarser aggregate particles that may be extruding above the surface of the lift. To avoid any errors in reading due to the build-up of sand beneath the nuclear device, approximately the same quantity of sand is used at each of the three test locations. The test locations are marked so that the same locations are tested after each pass.

5.1.2 An average dry density is computed and plotted on a chart of dry density versus the number of

roller passes. Rolling is discontinued when the curve plotted for dry density versus roller passes levels off. When the density plot levels off, density and moisture readings are taken at seven additional locations. Ten test sites in the 300 feet long Control-Strip are calculated to yield satisfactory statistical results. The average dry density is computed from the ten sets of readings and this serves as the standard of compaction. A new Control-Strip is required when the aggregate characteristics change appreciably, the aggregate is produced from a different source, or there has been a change in the rolling equipment or procedures used. Each new lift will require a new Control-Strip to determine if there is any change in Control-Strip density. If a different nuclear device is used, a new Control-Strip might have to be established.

5.2 Test-Sections Surfacing Aggregates – The remainder of the project is divided into Test-Sections

described above. After placing and compacting a lift of surfacing aggregate, employing the same thickness and procedures used in the Control-Strip, moisture and density readings are taken at ten randomly selected locations. Dry density determinations are made for each set of readings.

5.2.1 Whenever the minimum density results are not met, immediate corrective action must be taken by

additional rolling or additional water and rolling. The densities of the completed Test-Sections must be determined without delay for applicable comparison (under the same conditions) with the Control-Strip density. (Note 2) Similarly, proper use of the most suitable roller can decrease time in attaining proper density in the Test-Section. The contractor should be encouraged to use various methods in establishing density in the Control-Strip.

Note 2 – (Not a specification requirement) The effective use of water and the method used in compacting

the Control-Strip can influence the time and the compactive effort required to attain satisfactory density.

5.3 Control Strip Plant Mix Paving – All roller equipment will be approved by the engineer prior to the

construction of the Control-Strip as specified in the Standard Specification. Whenever a Control- Strip is required on plant mix surfacing a comparison will be made between the established Control-Strip density and the Marshall density as determined by MT-311 (Marshall Method of Hot Mix Asphalt Paving). This should be done to ensure a reasonable Control-Strip density is established.

5.3.1 Three test sites will be randomly selected on the Control-Strip. Each site will be marked with

minus 30 mesh dry seating sand used to seat the nuclear gauge. This sand should be screened from the material that is being compacted and dried to constant weight. Compaction of the Control-Strip shall commence as soon as possible after placement of the bituminous mixture and be uniform over the entire Control-Strip before the temperature of the mix falls below 175oF. A test will be taken on each test site with a nuclear gauge after each pass of the compaction equipment.

5.3.2 This procedure will continue until the density increase is less than one (1) pound per cubic foot at

a temperature greater than 175oF. After completion of the rolling, then two more tests sites are established so that a total of five density tests are averaged for the Control-Strip density.

2 of 3

MT 219-04 (06/01/04)

5.3.3 Each new lift will require a new Control-Strip to determine if there is any change in Control-Strip density. If a different nuclear device is used, a new Control-Strip might have to be established.

5.4 Test Section Plant Mix Paving – The remainder of the project is divided into 2000 ft. test sections.

After placing and compacting a lift of Plant Mix Paving, employing the same thickness and procedures used in the Control-Strip, density readings are taken at five randomly selected locations. The average density of each test section will be evaluated based upon the results of five tests in each test section. Whenever the minimum density results are not met, immediate corrective action must be taken by additional rolling. The densities of the completed test sections must be determined without delay for applicable comparison (under the same conditions) with the Control-Strip density.

6 Forms and Reports 6.1 Use Lab Form No. 1000A for controlling the compaction of surfacing aggregates. This form may

also be used for Control Strip paving. 6.2 Lab. Form No. 1006-A, Summary of Compaction Data for Surfacing, is applicable for all types of

nuclear devices. It is requested that the serial number of the device being used and the Laboratory Number of each pit, be entered on this form.

Table 1. Maximum Available Rolling Times*

Recommended Minimum Laydown Temperature Mat Thickness

Base Temp.ºF ½" 3/4" 1" 1½" 2" 3" and Greater +35-40 - - - 305 295 280 +40-50 - - 310 300 285 275 +50-60 - 310 300 295 280 270 +60-70 310 300 290 285 275 265 +70-80 300 290 285 280 270 265 +80-90 290 280 275 270 265 260

+90 280 275 270 265 260 255 Maximum Available Rolling

Time, minutes 4 6 8 12 15 15 * Table from Superintendents Manual on Compaction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement (1978) Where dashes appear in the table, conditions are such that it is doubtful that specification density can be achieved so work would cease. The table has come to be known as "cessation requirements."

As an example to illustrate the use of the table: assume we are placing a 1½" thick mat and the base temperature is between 50ºF and 60ºF. A laydown temperature of 295ºF is needed to provide 12 minutes before the mat cools to an average temperature of 175ºF. If it is a warmer day, with a base temperature of 70ºF to 80ºF, a laydown temperature of 280ºF would provide 12 minutes of rolling time. On a day warm enough to have a base temp of 70ºF to 80ºF, the air temperature would probably be above 40ºF and there would be some sunshine, so it would probably take 2 or 3 more minutes to cool to 175ºF, probably 15 minutes.

3 of 3

MT 226-16 (12/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 226-16

MAXIMUM ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS IN THE SIEVE ANALYSIS OF INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE SAMPLES

(Montana Method)

1 Scope

1.1 This method shall serve as a guide in evaluating the maximum acceptable deviations in the sieve analysis of Independent Assurance samples. If the individual grading percentages vary from the group average percentages by more than the amounts listed, the cause must be determined and the error remedied. Deviation percentages are based on the weight of the total sample.

2 References

MT Materials Manual MT 201 Sampling Roadway Materials MT 602 Independent Assurance and Final Record Sampling MT 607 Procedure for Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size

Sieve Size Permissible Variation

4" (100 mm) ±3%

3" (75 mm) ±3%

2 1/2" (63 mm) ±3%

2” (50 mm) ±3%

1 1/2" (37.5 mm) ±3%

1" (25 mm) ±3%

¾” (19 mm) ±3%

5/8” (16.0 mm) ±3%

½” (12/5 mm) ±3%

3/8” (9.5 mm) ±3%

No. 4 (4.75 mm) ±2%

No. 8 (2.36 mm) ±2%

No. 10 (2.00 mm) ±2%

No. 16 (1.18 mm) ±2%

No. 30 (0.600 μm) ±2%

No. 50 (0.300 μm) ±2%

No. 100 (0.150 μm) ±2%

No. 200 (0.075 µm) ±1.5

1 of 1

MT 228-13 (10/21/13)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 228-13

METHOD OF ESTABLISHING FIELD TARGET DENSITY FOR CEMENT TREATED BASE DENSITY CONTROL

1 Scope

1.1 This method is the procedure for establishing the field target density and moisture for compaction control of cement treated base (CTB).

2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO T 134 Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures

MT Materials Manual MT 216 Method of Sampling and Testing Cement Treated Base

3 Procedure

3.1 At the start of CTB production, use the maximum density and optimum moisture determined by AASHTO T 134 and provided in the mix design as the target for compaction control.

3.2 When samples for MT 216 have been taken, use the specimens molded for compressive strength to determine density. Use the average density of the three specimens to represent each sample. Use additional material taken for MT 216 to determine moisture content. Once the field density and moisture have been determined for two samples, average the results. If the average results in an increase of 1.0 pounds per cubic foot (16.0 kg per cubic meter) or greater or a decrease of 1.5 pounds per cubic foot (24.0 kg per cubic meter) or greater, calculate a new maximum density and optimum moisture in accordance with AASHTO T 134 for the material produced. Apply the new maximum density retroactive to the start of CTB production on the project. Do not change the target moisture unless a new optimum moisture is determined by AASHTO T 134.

3.3 When field densities on four samples have been completed, average the four test values. If the average results in an increase of 0.5 pound per cubic foot (8.0 kg per cubic meter) or greater or a decrease of 1.0 pound per cubic foot (16.0 kg per cubic meter) or greater, calculate a new maximum density and optimum moisture in accordance with AASHTO T 134 for the material produced. Apply the new maximum density to all subsequent CTB produced. Do not change the target moisture unless a new optimum moisture is determined by AASHTO T 134.

3.4 As each additional field density and moisture is completed, add the results to the results of the previous three densities and moistures, and average. If the average results in an increase of 0.5 pound per cubic foot (8.0 kg per cubic meter) or greater or a decrease of 1.0 pound per cubic foot (16.0 kg per cubic meter) or greater, calculate a new maximum density and optimum moisture in accordance with AASHTO T 134 for the material produced. Apply the new maximum density to all subsequent CTB produced. Do not change the target moisture unless a new optimum moisture is determined by AASHTO T 134.

1 of 1

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 229-15

PROCEDURE FOR SOLIDS - WATER - VOIDS RELATIONS OF SOIL MASSES (ZERO-AIR VOIDS)

1 Scope

1.1 This method covers the compaction of soils by using the solids-water-voids (zero-air voids) chart. This method usually applies to the north central, eastern and southeastern areas of Montana but may apply to other areas of the state. It will be the responsibility of the District Materials Supervisor to monitor the applicability of this method.

2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO T 100 Specific Gravity of Soils

MT Materials Manual MT 210 Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 Lb. Rammer and a 12 Inch Drop MT 230 Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 Lb. Rammer and a 18 Inch Drop

3 Procedure

3.1 Air voids are another method used to determine the compaction of soils. The zero-air voids method will usually apply to soils classified from A-4 to A-7. When the zero-air voids method is not applicable, the 95% of maximum density and ±2% of optimum moisture will be used.

3.2 In order for this method to be accurate, it is necessary to find the specific gravity for the soils proposed for use. The most logical time to determine the specific gravity is during the pre-construction soil survey. However, due to the excavation process, which may result in a mixture of various soil strata, it may become necessary to perform additional specific gravity tests once the project is under contract. The specific gravity of soils is determined in accordance with AASHTO T 100. (An average specific gravity is determined for the soil samples secured within any individual project.)

3.3 Individual proctor tests determined during the pre-construction soil survey are plotted on the zero-air voids chart. If the plot of the peaks from the family of proctor curves from the preliminary soil survey falls on a line roughly parallel to the zero-air voids, the zero-air voids method should work. Tests that fall to the left of the 10% air voids line are generally single size granular particle soils or excessively wet condition type soils. With these soils, the 95% of maximum density and ±2% of optimum moisture will be used.

3.4 Tests taken in the field that lie outside, or to the right of the 0% air voids line, not within the band, should be reviewed and treated as a failing test or possibly a bad reading by the density gauge. However, it is unusual to get tests that fall to the right of the 0% line. If tests consistently fall to the right of the 0% line, a specific gravity on the soil in question should be determined in accordance with AASHTO T100. Special Provision covers Proctor tests that plot outside the zero-air voids chart under compaction control. All proctor tests must be plotted on a zero-air voids chart to see if each test fits the zero-air voids chart.

1 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15) 4 Calculations 4.1 Formula for calculating % voids:

% 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 = 100 − ��𝑉𝑉�1 + �𝐺𝐺𝑠𝑠�𝑚𝑚 100� ���

(𝐺𝐺𝑠𝑠)(𝑊𝑊) � × 100�

where: US Standard

d = Dry Density in lb/ft³ Gs = Specific Gravity m = % moisture W = wt of water in lb/ft³ or 62. 42796 Metric d = Dry Density in Kg/m³ Gs = Specific Gravity m = % moisture W = wt of water in Kg/m³ or 1000

2 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%

Dry

Den

sity

, Lb/

CuF

t

Moisture, Percent

2.6 Specific Gravity, Zero Air Voids

10.0% Air Voids, 2.6 Specific Gravity

3 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%

Dry

Den

sity

, Lb/

CuF

t

Moisture, Percent

2.65 Specific Gravity, Zero Air Voids

10.0% Air Voids, 2.65 Specific Gravity

4 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%

Dry

Den

sity

, Lb/

CuF

t

Moisture, Percent

2.7 Specific Gravity, Zero Air Voids

10.0% Air Voids, 2.7 Specific Gravity

5 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%

Dry

Den

sity

, Lb/

CuF

t

Moisture, Percent

2.75 Specific Gravity, Zero Air Voids

10.0% Air Voids, 2.75 Specific Gravity

6 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%

Dry

Den

sity

, Lb/

CuF

t

Moisture, Percent

2.8 Specific Gravity, Zero Air Voids

10.0% Air Voids, 2.8 Specific Gravity

7 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

1100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

2600

2700

2800

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%

Dry

Den

sity

, kg/

m3

Moisture, Percent

2.6 Specific Gravity, Zero Air Voids

10.0% Air Voids, 2.6 Specific Gravity

8 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

1100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

2600

2700

2800

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%

Dry

Den

sity

, kg/

m3

Moisture, Percent

2.65 Specific Gravity, Zero Air Voids

10.0% Air Voids, 2.65 Specific Gravity

9 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

1100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

2600

2700

2800

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%

Dry

Den

sity

, kg/

m3

Moisture, Percent

2.7 Specific Gravity, Zero Air Voids

10.0% Air Voids, 2.7 Specific Gravity

10 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

1100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

2600

2700

2800

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%

Dry

Den

sity

, kg/

m3

Moisture, Percent

2.75 Specific Gravity, Zero Air Voids

10.0% Air Voids, 2.75 Specific Gravity

11 of 12

MT 229-15 (09/24/15)

1100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

2600

2700

2800

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%

Dry

Den

sity

, kg/

m3

Moisture, Percent

2.8 Specific Gravity, Zero Air Voids

10.0% Air Voids, 2.8 Specific Gravity

12 of 12

MT 230-16 (03/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 230-16

METHOD OF TEST FOR THE MOISTURE-DENSITY RELATIONS OF SOILS USING A 10 LB. (4.54 KG) RAMMER AND A 18 IN. (457 MM) DROP

(Modified AASHTO T 180) MT 230 is identical to AASHTO T 180 except for the following stipulations: 1. Replace Section 1.5 with the following:

If the specified oversized particle maximum percentage is exceeded (except for material that meets the criteria described in MT 218, Section 4.6.), the replacement method should be used. The replacement method maintains the same percentage of coarse material (passing a 50 mm sieve and retained on a 4.75 mm sieve) in the moisture-density sample as in the original field sample. The material retained on the 19.0 mm sieve shall be replaced as follows: sieve an adequate quantity of the representative soil over the 50 mm and 19.0 mm sieve. Weigh the material retained on the 19.0 mm sieve. Replace this material with an equal mass of material passing the 19.0 mm sieve and retained on the 4.75 mm sieve. Take the material for replacement from the extra portion of the sample.

1 of 1

MT 232-16 (12/28/16)

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 232-16

SOIL CORROSION TEST (Montana Method)

1 Scope

1.1 This test method covers procedures and apparatus for determining the pH, conductivity and sulfate content of a soil in corrosion testing.

1.2 The intent of these tests is to supplement soil-resistivity measurements and thereby identify conditions under which the corrosion of metals in soil may be accentuated.

1.3 At the discretion of the Chief Chemist, MT 532 may be used to determine sulfate content of soils.

2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO M 231 Weighing Devices Used in the Testing of Materials

MT Materials Manual MT 532 Determination of Sulfate Content In Soils by Ion Chromatography

3 Apparatus

3.1 Sieves – A series of sieves of the following sizes: 1/4 in. (6.3 mm), No. 4 (4.75 mm), No. 10 (2.00 mm) and a pan

3.2 Balance – A balance with an accuracy of at least 0.1 percent and conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 231

3.3 Drying Apparatus – A suitable device capable of drying samples at a temperature of 140°F (60°C)

3.4 Pulverizing Apparatus – Either a mortar and a rubber-covered pestle or any device suitable for breaking up the aggregations of soil particles without reducing the size of the individual grains.

3.5 Sample Splitter – A suitable riffle sample splitter or sample splitter for proportional splitting of the sample and capable of obtaining representative portions of the sample without appreciable loss of fines. The width of the container used to feed the riffle splitter should be equal to the total combined width of the riffle chutes. Proportional splitting of the sample on a canvas cloth is also acceptable.

3.6 pH Meter – With electrodes suitable for laboratory analysis

3.7 Standard Buffer Solutions – Buffer solutions with known pH values of 4.0, 7.0, 10.0

3.8 Beakers – 100 ml and 250 ml wide mouth glass beakers with a watch glass for cover

3.9 Glass stirring rods

3.10 Conductivity Meter - Suitable for laboratory or field analysis

3.11 Muffle Furnace – The muffle furnace shall be capable of operation at the temperatures required and shall have an indicating pyrometer accurate within ±25°C, as corrected, if necessary, by calibration.

3.12 Platinum Crucible – Platinum crucibles for ordinary chemical analysis should preferably be made of pure unalloyed platinum of 15 to 30-ml capacity. Where alloyed platinum is used for greater stiffness or to avoid sticking of crucible and lid, the alloyed platinum should not decrease in mass by more than 0.2 mg when heated at 1200°C for one hour.

1 of 3

MT 232-16 (12/28/16)

3.13 Filter Paper – Fast filter paper (Whatman #41) and slow filter paper (Whatman #42) 4 Sample Preparation 4.1 The sample as received shall be in a moist condition for pH purposes. If the sample is too wet, it

may be dried to a moist condition in air or a drying apparatus not to exceed 140°F (60°C) prior to sample selection (Note 1). A representative test sample to perform the pH test shall then be obtained with a sampler or by splitting or quartering.

Note 1 – Samples dried in an oven or other drying apparatus at a temperature not exceeding 140°F

(60°C) are considered to be air dried. 5 Determination of pH 5.1 Place a sufficient amount of soil into a 100 ml glass beaker or other suitable container to fill to the

80 ml mark. 5.2 Stir enough distilled water into the sample to produce a soil slurry and then cover with a watch

glass. 5.3 Let the sample stand for a minimum of one hour, stirring every 10 to 15 minutes. This is to allow

the pH of the soil slurry to stabilize. 5.4 Measure the temperature of the soil and adjust the temperature controller of the pH meter to that

of the sample temperature. This adjustment should be done just prior to testing. 5.5 Calibrate the pH meter by means of the standard solutions provided. 5.6 Stir the sample with a glass rod immediately before immersing the electrode into the soil slurry

solution and gently turn the beaker or container to make good contact between the solution and the electrode. DO NOT place the electrode into the soil, only into the soil slurry solution.

5.7 Immerse the electrode in the solution for at least 30 seconds to allow the meter to stabilize. If the

meter has an auto read system, it will automatically signal when stabilized. 5.8 Read and record the pH value to the nearest tenth of a whole number. 5.9 Rinse the electrode well with distilled water, then dab lightly with tissues to remove any film

formed on the electrode. Caution: Do not wipe the electrode as this may result in polarization of the electrode and consequent slow response.

5.10 Add approximately 1 gram of calcium carbonate (CaCO3) to the soil slurry and set aside for

approximately 24 hours. Determine the marble pH by following sections 5.4 to 5.9. 6 Determination of Conductivity 6.1 Place a sufficient amount of soil on a 100 mm watch glass to completely cover the watch glass.

Let stand overnight to allow the sample to dry. 6.2 Sieve the dry sample over a No. 10 sieve (2.00 mm) and then pulverize the material remaining on

the sieve (+2.00 mm) with a mortar and pestle in such a manner so as to break up the aggregations without fracturing the individual grains. If the sample contains brittle particles, pulverize carefully and with just enough pressure to free the finer material that adheres to the coarser particles.

6.3 Place a portion of the pulverized soil in a 100 ml beaker and add distilled water at a ratio of 1 part

soil to 2 parts water and let stand for 30 minutes. 6.4 After conditioning, pour the water from the beaker into the sample container of the conductivity

meter and determine the conductivity to the nearest 0.01 m. mhos.

2 of 3

MT 232-16 (12/28/16)

7 Determination of Sulfate Content 7.1 Place 3 grams of the pulverized soil prepared in Section 6 into a 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask. 7.2 Add 150 ml of distilled water; stopper the flask and shake to mix. 7.3 Centrifuge the sample for 30 minutes. 7.4 Decant the liquid into a 250 ml beaker and add 2 ml of dilute Hydrochloric acid (50% strength), to

flocculate the suspended particles. Cover with a watch glass and place onto a hot plate until the sample boils.

7.5 Remove the beaker from the hot plate and immediately filter through a fast filter paper (Whatman

#41). 7.6 Add 10 ml of a 10% Barium Chloride (BaCl2·2H2O) solution to the filtered sample to determine

the presence of sulfate. (The liquid will become milky in the presence of sulfate). 7.7 Cover the beaker with a watch glass and return to the hot plate until the sample boils. 7.8 Remove the beaker from the hot plate and immediately filter through a slow filter paper (Whatman

#42). Wash the filter with several hot water rinses. 7.9 Place the filter paper in a tared 30 ml platinum crucible, place the crucible into a muffle furnace

and slowly raise the temperature to 1000oC to burn off filter paper. 7.10 Remove the crucible from the muffle furnace and desiccate until cool. Weigh to the nearest

0.0001 grams and record weight as W. 7.11 Sulfate Calculation

% Sulfate (SO4) = [(W*0.4115)/S]*100

Where: W = Sulfate weight S = Soil sample weight

8 Report Include the following parameters in the report: pH Marble pH Sulfate as % SO4 Conductivity in m. mohs

3 of 3

1 of 2 Rev. 12/31/17

CURRENT DATE OF REVISION MT 300 SECTION

HOT MIX PAVEMENT Test Date of Method Publication No. Title Pages or Revision MT 301 Vacant

MT 302 Sampling and Testing Bituminous Materials ................................................. 2 pp Jul 2014

MT 303 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures .......................................................... 3 pp Jul 2014

MT 304 Moisture Test on Plant Mix Bituminous Surfacing Aggregates ..................... 2 pp Jul 2014

MT 305 Volume Swell of Bituminous Mixtures ........................................................... 6 pp May 2009

MT 306 Vacant

MT 307 Vacant

MT 308 Vacant

MT 309 Eliminated (Use AASHTO R 47 Reducing Samples of Hot Mix Asphalt to Testing Size)

MT 310 Determining the Macro-Texture of a Pavement Surface ............................... 6 pp Dec 2017

MT 311 Vacant

MT 312 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 329 Moisture Content of Asphalt Mixtures by Oven Method)

MT 313 Vacant

MT 314 Eliminated (Use AASHTO T 166 Bulk Specific Gravity (Gmb) of Compacted Asphalt Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens)

MT 315 Vacant

MT 316 Method of Sampling Recycled Pavement and Field Control of Recycle Paving .............................................................................................. 5 pp Jun 2004

MT 317 Vacant

MT 318 Vacant

MT 319 Determining the Asphalt Binder Content of Plant Mix Surfacing (PMS) by the Ignition Method ........................................................................................ 6 pp Sep 2017

MT 320 Mechanical Analysis of Aggregate Recovered from Ignition Oven Burn ....... 1 pp Jun 2017

MT 321 Determining Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures - "Rice Gravity" .................................................................... 4 pp Jun 2017

MT 322 Method of Determining the Percent of Adhesion of Bituminous Materials to Aggregate .................................................................................................. 2 pp Oct 2004

MT 323 Vacant

MT 324 Vacant

MT 325 Vacant (ELIMINATED)

MT 326 Vacant

MT 327 Vacant

2 of 2 Rev. 12/31/17

CURRENT DATE OF REVISION MT 300 SECTION

HOT MIX PAVEMENT Test Date of Method Publication No. Title Pages or Revision MT 328 Establishing Field Target Density for Plant Mix Surfacing Density Control ... 1 pp Jul 2014

MT 329 Procedure for Evaluating Plant Mix Surfacing Failures………………………. 5 pp Jun 2004

MT 330 Vacant

MT 331 Sampling and Evaluating Stripping Pavements ............................................ 7 pp Jul 2014

MT 332 Gyratory Compaction of Bituminous Mixtures. .............................................. 2 pp Jun 2017

MT 333 Method of Test for the Torsional Recovery of Latex Modified Asphalt Emulsion Residue .......................................................................................... 3 pp Jun 2004

MT 334 Method of Test for Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures ...................................................................................... 4 pp Dec 2017

MT 335 Linear Kneading Compaction of Bituminous Mixtures ................................... 2 pp Jul 2014

MT 336 Vacant

MT 337 Vacant (ELIMINATED)

MT 338 Eliminated (Use ASTM D6390 Determination of Draindown Characteristics in Uncompacted Asphalt Mixtures)

MT 302-14 (07/29/14)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 302-14

SAMPLING AND TESTING BITUMINOUS MATERIAL (Montana Method)

1 Scope 1.1 This method covers the procedure for sampling and testing bituminous materials, submitting

samples, retaining samples, precautions to be used during sampling, designating who is to take the sample and the recording of information pertinent to the acceptance of bituminous materials.

2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO R 66 Sampling Asphalt Materials ASTM D140 Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Materials MT Materials Manual MT 601 Material Sampling, Testing and Acceptance Guide MT 610 Numbering Subgrade Material, Surfacing Material, Bituminous Treated Material, and

Liquid Asphalt

3 Inspection 3.1 The Department will witness the taking of any or all acceptance samples by the Contractor or

designated personnel. 4 Sampling Procedure 4.1 Importance of proper sampling - Sampling is equally as important as testing. Take every

precaution to obtain samples that show the true nature and condition of the materials they represent. Test results are valuable only when the tests are performed on representative samples. Take samples in accordance with the following procedures, so there will be no question as to validity. This is very important in case of a test failure, which may be the basis for rejection of the material.

4.2 Refer to MT 601 for sample size and container type. Use containers furnished by the Department. Do not use second-hand containers, any containers washed or rinsed with solvents, or any containers provided by the contractor. (Note 1)

Note 1 – Use metal containers for cut-back asphalt and asphalt cement. Use plastic containers for asphalt emulsions only.

4.2.1 Per 402 Specification, all truck tanks, trailer tanks, or other conveyances containing bituminous materials must be equipped with a sampling valve not less than ⅜-inch or more than ¾-inch in diameter. These valves may be installed either through the tank’s bulkhead at centerline or on the discharge line between the truck unloading pipe and the hose. Sample the contents of railroad tank cars and truck transports, not equipped with a sampling valve, from the pressure side of the unloading pump.

4.2.2 Discharge one gallon or sufficient volume of material to clear the sampling device prior to taking the samples. This step is important to ensure a representative and uniform sample is taken.

4.2.3 Take the duplicate samples consecutively with a minimum lapse of time from the same tank or trailer.

MT 302-14 (07/29/14)

2 of 2

Note 2 – Sample all emulsion shipments, regardless of the size of the shipment, within a reasonable time as to not compromise the sample. If emulsion sample has been diluted, note this on the sample record. Protect the emulsions samples from freezing. Re-sample when the material is stored without agitation for three or more days before use.

4.2.4 Leave the screw caps loose until the contents cool so the contraction of the asphalt will not collapse the containers. Remove any spillage on the outside of the container with a clean, dry cloth, cotton waste or paper towels. Do not use solvents (diesel fuel, gasoline, etc.) for this purpose.

Note 3 – For other sampling methods, refer to AASHTO R 66 and ASTM D140. 5 Submitting, Reporting and Testing of Samples 5.1 Submitting 5.1.1 After samples are taken, immediately forward to the Materials Bureau for testing. 5.2 Reporting 5.2.1 Create a SiteManager Sample Record to submit samples. 5.2.2 Refer to MT 610 for numbering the bituminous material samples. 5.3 Testing 5.3.1 The Materials Bureau will perform tests for all specification requirements on samples selected at

random for each project. 5.3.2 The Materials Bureau will immediately notify the Project Manager, who in turn will notify the Prime

Contractor, when the result of a series of tests is not within the specification limits. 5.3.3 In the event of a failure, refer to applicable Specification. 6 Certification of Shipments 6.1 Ensure suppliers of bituminous materials furnish the Project Manager or their representative, one

copy of the original bill of lading or invoice and a Certificate of Compliance. Ensure this documentation accompanies each tank car, truck-trailer tank, or other individual conveyance of bituminous materials shipped, or hauled to the project. This certificate, signed by a supplier’s responsible representative, attests to the fact that the bituminous material complies with Department specifications for the type and grade of material represented and the conveyance was inspected and found to be free of contaminating material.

6.2 The Certificate of Compliance is the basis for tentative acceptance and use of the material. Do

not allow the shipment to be tentatively accepted or incorporated in the work without the receipt of the certification. It may be included on the bill of lading or invoice or it may be a separate document attached to the bill of lading. The Project Manager will retain the certificate and bill of lading in the project files and digital files for record purposes.

MT 303-14 (07/29/14)

1 of 3

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 303-14

SAMPLING BITUMINOUS PAVING MIXTURES (Modified AASHTO T 168)

1 Scope 1.1 These methods cover sampling of bituminous paving mixtures at points of manufacturer, storage,

delivery, or in place. 2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO R 47 Reducing Samples of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) to Testing Size T 168 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D979 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures MT Materials Manual MT 601 Materials Sampling, Testing and Acceptance Guide Alberta Transportation ATT Test Procedures ATT 37 Sampling, Mixes

3 Inspection 3.1 Inspect the material to determine discernible variations. Ensure the contractor provides

equipment needed for safe and appropriate inspection and sampling. 4 Sampling Procedure 4.1 Importance of proper sampling – Sampling is equally as important as testing. Take every

precaution to obtain samples that show the true nature and condition of the materials they represent. Test results are valuable only when the tests are performed on representative samples. Take samples in accordance with the following procedures, so there will be no question as to validity. This is very important in case of a test failure, which may be the basis for rejection of the material.

4.2 Sampling from Truck Transports – Select the units to be sampled from the production of materials delivered. Obtain a minimum of three approximately equal increments as shown in Figure 1 and combine to form a field sample. Obtain the sample by collecting the increments with a scoop or shovel. Avoid sampling the extreme top surface.

Figure 1. Sampling from Truck Transports

MT 303-14 (07/29/14)

2 of 3

4.3 Sampling from a Paver Auger – Obtain samples from the end of the auger using a square head

shovel. Place the shovel in front of the auger extension, with the blade flat upon the surface to be paved over. Allow the front face of the auger stream to cover the shovel, and remove the shovel before the auger reaches the shovel by lifting it upward as vertically as possible. Obtain sample from a minimum of three equal increments of material.

4.4 Sampling from a Windrow – Obtain a representative sample from the windrow of one transport

unit. Combine a minimum of three approximately equal increments as shown in Figure 2.

1. Use the shovel to flatten a sufficient length of the windrow, discarding the material to either side.

2. Dig into the windrow's top at three or more equally distributed points along its flattened

portion. Do not include material from the subgrade or base. The sample is the total mix from three or more holes.

Figure 2. Sampling from a Windrow

4.5 Sampling from Bituminous Cold Mix or Recycled Asphalt Pavement (RAP) Stockpiles – Cold

mixes that are in a stockpile for some time may develop a crust on the surface of the pile. Remove this crust to a depth of 4 inches, over an area of one square yard, to expose the un-weathered mix as shown in Figure 3. Stir the exposed stockpile and obtain three approximately equal samples selected at random, and combine to form a field sample.

Figure 3. Sampling from a Stockpile

5 Number and Quantities of Field Samples 5.1 Designate each unit from which a field sample is to be obtained prior to sampling. 5.2 Refer to MT 601 for sample size. The quantities depend on the type and number of tests to which

the material is to be subjected. Obtain sufficient material to provide for the proper execution of standard control and acceptance tests.

MT 303-14 (07/29/14)

3 of 3

6 Securing or Submitting Samples 6.1 Transport samples in containers constructed to minimize heat loss, contamination, or damage to

the sample from mishandling during shipment. 6.2 Record pertinent information in the Quality Assurance Suite (QA Suite) Plant Mix section. 6.3 Using the Hamburg Sampling Guideline, attach identification to each Hamburg sample sent to a

district or headquarter lab. 6.4 Create a SiteManager Sample Record and attach to any plant mix sample sent to a district or

headquarter lab. 6.5 Use tamper resistant container(s) when sample(s) leave Department custody.

MT 304-14 (07/10/14)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 304-14

MOISTURE TEST ON PLANT MIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING AGGREGATES

(Montana Method) 1 Scope

This test method covers the determination of the moisture content of bituminous surfacing aggregates by various drying methods.

2 Referenced Documents AASHTO Standards M 231 Weighing Devices Used in the Testing of Materials MT Materials Manual

MT 201 Sampling Roadway Materials 3 Terminology 3.1 Constant mass – the state at which a mass does not change more than 0.10 percent, after

additional drying for the defined time interval in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 Methods of Drying

Heat Source Specific Instructions Drying increments (minutes)

Controlled: Forced draft (preferred), ventilated, or convection oven

110 ±5°C (230 ±9°F) 30

Uncontrolled: Hot plate, Heat Lamp, etc. Stir frequently 20

Microwave Heap sample and cover with ventilated lid 10

4 Apparatus

Ensure equipment used meets the following requirements 4.1 Drying Apparatus - any suitable device capable of drying samples. 4.2 Balance – balance or scale with a capacity larger than the size of the sample being tested. The

balance or scale must have a sensitivity of 0.1 gram and conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 231.

4.3 Sample container – not affected by heat and of sufficient size to contain a test sample of at least

4,000 g without danger of spilling. 5 Sampling 5.1 Obtain a representative sample of at least 3 pounds from each bin, stockpile, or cold feed belt per

MT 201. Immediately place the material, from each separate bin, stockpile, or cold feed belt, into a weighed container and seal.

MT 304-14 (07/10/14)

2 of 2

6 Procedure 6.1 After weighing the container with aggregate, transfer the material to drying pans and dry to

constant mass in an approved manner. Stir the sample occasionally to facilitate drying. 6.2 Reweigh sample and container when the sample has been dried to constant mass. Note 1 – Perform moisture testing on mixes showing the following properties:

• Foaming on the surface of the coarse aggregate particles

• Excessive slumping of the mix in the truck

• Condensed water dripping from the truck box

• Bubbles or blisters forming on the surface immediately behind the paver Ordinarily these conditions will not develop if the moisture content is below approximately 2 percent. 7 Calculations 7.1 Compute the moisture content of each sample of the aggregate using the following formula: 𝑀 = (

𝑊−𝐷

𝐷−𝐶) × 100

where: M = percent of moisture W = wt. of wet sample and container D = wt. of dry sample and container C = wt. of container 7.2 Compute the composite moisture content of the total aggregate according to the following

example:

Aggregate Size Fraction of Job Mix

Moisture Content, Percent

3/4" to 3/8" 0.20 x 2.00 = 0.40 3/8" to No. 10 0.40 x 1.00 = 0.40 Passing No. 10 0.40 x 0.50 = 0.20 Composite Moisture

Content = 1.00

8 Reporting 8.1 Report the moisture content to the nearest 0.10 percent.

MT 305-09 (05/15/09)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 305-09

METHOD OF TEST FOR VOLUME SWELL OF BITUMINOUS MIXTURES (MONTANA TEST METHOD)

1 Scope 1.1 This test method provides for the determination of the maximum volume swell of compacted

aggregates, soil, sand, or combination of mixtures passing the 10 Mesh (2.0 mm) sieve and stabilized with bituminous material.

2 Apparatus 2.1 Compaction Apparatus: 2.1.1 Forming mold – This forming mold shall be a steel cylinder 2.50 inches (63.5 mm) or greater in

outside diameter, 2.000 - 2.001 inches (50.80 - 50.8254 mm) inside diameter, and approximately 2.75 inches (69.85 mm) high. One end shall be recessed 0.245 - 0.250 inches (6.223 - 6.350 mm) with an inside diameter of 2.250 - 2.252 inches (57.1500 - 57.2008 mm) to fit the 2.247 - 2.249 inch (57.0738 - 57.1246 mm) base if the base plate method is used.

2.1.2 Plungers – Cylindrical steel plungers, fitted to the molding cylinders, 1.997 ± 0.001 inch (50.7238

± 0.0254 mm) in diameter and 3 inches (76.2 mm) high. 2.1.3 Base – Solid steel, circular plate 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick and 3 inches (76.2 mm) in diameter,

beveled and machined to a 2.247 - 2.249 inch (57.0738 - 57.1246 mm) top diameter above the mold seat.

2.2 Compression Testing Machine or Press – A compression machine or press capable of applying

loads of 10,000 pounds (4535.9 kg.) or greater and indicating the applied load with a sensitivity of 50 pounds (22.7 kg.) or less.

2.3 Mixing Apparatus: 2.3.1 Mixing pans – shall be smooth and conform to the following dimensions:

Bottom inside diameter = approximately 4-3/4" (120.65 mm) Top inside diameter = approximately 6-1/4 in. (158.75 mm) Height = approximately 3 in. (76.2 mm)

2.3.2 Spatula – approximately 7 in. (177.8 mm) long and 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) wide. 2.3.3 Putty knife – approximately 1-1/2 in. (38.1 mm) wide with a rounded tip. 2.3.4 Large metal scoop with handle (24 to 48 oz.). 2.3.5 Anti-slip, flexible rubber gloves (nitrile or vinyl). 2.4 Heater – An electric thermostatically controlled hot plate for warming pans of bituminous mix. 2.5 Vacuum Desiccator – of convenient size with a vacuum gauge incorporated on the lid. The

gauge shall be calibrated in inches or centimeters of Hg (mercury) vacuum. 2.6 Hand or motor driven vacuum pump with approximately two feet of plastic vacuum hose. 2.7 Stop-cock grease for desiccator seal. 2.8 Screw clamp. 2.9 Measuring and weighing apparatus. 2.9.1 A balance with a capacity of 500 grams and sensitive to 0.1g.

1 of 6

MT 305-09 (05/15/09)

2.9.2 A measuring device that is accurately calibrated and equipped to determine heights and

diameters of test specimens to the nearest 0.01 cm. 2.9.3 Mercury Displacement Cup – A glass or plastic cup with flat ground edge of convenient size to

contain test specimens for mercury displacement measurement. 2.9.4 Glass dish approximately 10 x 6 x 2 in. (254 x 152.4 x 50.8 mm) 2.9.5 Porcelain pan approximately 15 x 10 x 2-1/2 in. (381 x 254 x 63.5 mm) 2.10 Drying Oven – A thermostatically controlled drying oven capable of maintaining a temperature of

140± 5°F (60 ± 3°C) 2.11 A 4 mesh (4.75 mm) and a 10 mesh (2.0 mm) sieve. 2.12 Thermometers, beakers, and a 100 ml, glass, graduated cylinder with intervals of 1.0 mm. 2.13 Pulverizing Apparatus – Either a mortar and rubber covered pestle or a mechanical device

consisting of a power-driven rubber covered mallet suitable for breaking up the aggregations of soil particles without reducing the size of the individual grains.

3 Materials 3.1 Distilled water with a pH of approximately 7. (Tap water is satisfactory if it does not interfere

chemically with the test.) 3.2 Bituminous material - 200/300 Pen A.C. 3.2.1 200/300 Pen A.C. should be replaced with new asphalt at the beginning of each construction

season. 3.3 Mercury 3.3.1 Mercury (Hg) is a poison and can be absorbed through the respiratory tract, the intestinal tract or

through unbroken skin. Mercury is a cumulative poison and is a very volatile element. Dangerous levels are readily attained in the air at 77ºF (25ºC). Tests involving the use of Mercury should be performed under conditions of adequate ventilation. A fume hood is recommended for large numbers of samples or where the test is to be carried out frequently over extended periods of time. Protective gloves should be worn under conditions here skin contact with mercury may occur.

3.3.2 This test procedure does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with

its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test procedure to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitation prior to use.

4 Preparation of Aggregate 4.1 A representative sample of the 10 mesh (2.00 mm) material as described in AASHTO R 58 shall

be prepared. The sample shall be large enough to produce approximately 400 grams of minus 10 mesh (2.00 mm) material at the conclusion of the pulverizing procedure.

2 of 6

MT 305-09 (05/15/09)

5 Volume Swell Procedure The caliper method will be used to test all volume swell samples. If the caliper method yields a volume swell of 8.0 or greater than a sample will be submitted to either the Helena Materials Lab or the Billings District Lab for testing using the mercury method. The mercury method will only be performed in the Helena Materials Lab or the Billings District Lab. Porous briquettes that may entrap mercury shall be measured with calipers only.

5.1 Volume Swell Procedure – Caliper Method 5.1.1 Warm the 200/300 pen asphalt cement for mixing to approximately 250 ± 15ºF (121 ± 8ºC). 5.1.2 Stabilize the hot plate at 425ºF to 475 ºF (218ºC to 246ºC). 5.1.3 Stir the sample prepared in paragraph 4 with a spatula and transfer a 100 gram sample to the

weighing scoop. Use the spatula to obtain a uniform discharge and to pull material from the bottom of the sample container when transferring the material. If desired, the material may be preheated in an oven 230 ± 9ºF (110 ± 5ºC).

5.1.4 Transfer the 100 gram sample from the weighing scoop to the mixing pan, stir with a putty knife

and shake the material to one side of the mixing pan. 5.1.5 Place the mixing pan and sample on the balance and add 6.5 grams of 200/300 Pen A.C., do not

pour asphalt on material; place the pan back on the hot plate. 5.1.6 When asphalt starts to flow into the sample, start mixing rapidly with a putty knife while shaking

the mixing pan close to the hot plate. Avoid overheating the mix, as evidenced by smoking as-phalt. Mix and shake until a thorough mixture is obtained. See Note 1.

Note 1 – In the case of material having poor adhesion, the larger particles will only be slightly coated. Do

not add more asphalt. Mix and shake until maximum coverage is obtained. 5.1.7 Pour the mixture from the mixing pan into a small scoop. Pour the mixture from the scoop into the

assembled mold using the spatula to assist in obtaining a uniform discharge from the scoop. Insert the top plunger with a twist and a light tamp to seat firmly. Place the mold in the compression machine and at a uniform rate increase the load to a total of 6280 pounds in no less than 15 seconds. Maintain the maximum load for one minute and release. Remove the base plate with a twisting motion and mark the briquette in the mold with a wax crayon, applying light pressure.

5.1.8 After removing the base plate with a twisting motion and marking the briquette, turn the assembly

upside down. Place the sleeve on top of the forming mold and using the jack apply, pressure to the sleeve and top plunger. This will push the briquette and top plunger up into the sleeve. See Note 2. Cool and cure the briquette for three hours at room temperature.

Note 2 – If the briquettes tend to stick to the mold or plungers, preheat mold to 140ºF (60ºC). 5.1.9 Wipe the forming mold, base plate and plungers clean with a suitable solvent and dry with a cloth

before forming each briquette. 5.1.10 Measure and record the height and radius of the cured briquette. To obtain the height of the

specimen, measure and record the height (flats of the specimen) in four locations. Measurements should be taken at 90 degree intervals. Average the four measurements and use the average height for the calculations. To obtain the radius of the specimen, measure and record the diameter of the specimen (sides) in four locations. Measurements should be taken at 45 degree intervals. Average the four measurements and divide by 2 to obtain the average radius. Use the average radius for the calculations. Refer to Paragraph 6.1.2 (calculations) to determine the volume of the cured briquette.

5.1.11 Check the vacuum equipment for leaks before any briquettes are put into the desiccator.

3 of 6

MT 305-09 (05/15/09)

5.1.12 Fill the vacuum desiccator with distilled water and allow to stabilize at room temperature. Completely submerge the briquette in the distilled water and seal the top. See Note 3.

Note 3 – A perforated tray is supplied for a second layer of briquettes. 5.1.13 Subject the briquette to 8 inches (20.3 cm) of mercury vacuum for one hour. The 8 inches of

vacuum will be applied within the desiccator in not less than one minute. The vacuum is maintained for one hour and released gradually to avoid pressure shock to the briquettes.

5.1.14 Keep the briquette completely submerged in the distilled water at room temperature for an

additional 23 hours. If necessary to transfer to another container of distilled water, wait 15 minutes after releasing pressure before effecting transfer.

5.1.15 Remove the briquette, blot the excess water and weigh. Measure and record the height and

radius of the swollen briquette. To obtain the height of the specimen, measure and record the height (flats of the specimen) in four locations. Measurements should be taken at 90 degree intervals. Average the four measurements and use the average height for the calculations. To obtain the radius of the specimen, measure and record the diameter of the specimen (sides) in four locations. Measurements should be taken at 45 degree intervals. Average the four measurements and divide by 2 to obtain the average radius. Use the average radius for the calculations. Refer to Paragraph 6.1.2 (calculations) to determine the volume of the cured briquette and the percent of volume swell. In no event will the briquette be allowed to set for more than ten minutes before measuring is completed. The sides of the briquette will be squeezed for recording condition of the briquette such as hard, firm, soft, soft and cracked, or disintegrated. Refer to paragraph 6.1.1 (calculations) to determine the percent of volume swell. (See Note 4)

Note 4 – The test specimen shall be measured immediately after excess water is blotted off the

specimen. When measuring with calipers, take four measurements on the sides of the specimen and four measurements on the flats of the specimen at 90 degree intervals and record. The average of the recordings will be used for the calculation.

5.2 Volume Swell Procedure – Mercury Method

The Helena Materials Lab and the Billings District Lab are the only labs that will be performing volume swell testing using Mercury. A designated set of testing apparatus will be used to test using mercury (such as a Vacuum Desiccator designated for mercury method samples). The mercury method briquettes will be stored in a labeled container with a lid. The desiccator disposal water will also be stored in a labeled container with a lid. The waste products will be stored near the mercury method equipment and when a container of approximately five gallons is collected, Environmental Services will be contacted for disposal.

5.2.1 Warm the 200/300 Pen Asphalt Cement for mixing to approximately 250 ± 15ºF (121± 8ºC). 5.2.2 Stabilize the hot plate at 425 to 475ºF (218 to 246ºC). 5.2.3 Stir the sample prepared in paragraph 4 with a spatula and transfer a 100 gram sample to the

weighing scoop. Use the spatula to obtain a uniform discharge and to pull material from the bottom of the sample container when transferring the material. If desired, the material may be preheated in an oven 230± 9ºF (110± 5ºC).

5.2.4 Transfer the 100 gram sample from the weighing scoop to the mixing pan, stir with a putty knife

and shake the material to one side of the mixing pan. 5.2.5 Place the mixing pan and sample on the balance and add 6.5 grams of 200/300 Pen A.C., do not

pour asphalt on material; place the pan back on the hot plate.

4 of 6

MT 305-09 (05/15/09)

5.2.6 When asphalt starts to flow into the sample, start mixing rapidly with a putty knife while shaking the mixing pan close to the hot plate. Avoid overheating the mix, as evidenced by smoking as-phalt. Mix and shake until a thorough mixture is obtained. See Note 1.

5.2.7 Pour the mixture from the mixing pan into a small scoop. Pour the mixture from the scoop into

the assembled mold using the spatula to assist in obtaining a uniform discharge from the scoop. Insert the top plunger with a twist and a light tamp to seat firmly. Place the mold in the compression machine and at a uniform rate increase the load to a total of 6280 pounds in no less than 15 seconds. Maintain the maximum load for one minute and release. Remove the base plate with a twisting motion and mark the briquette in the mold with a wax crayon, applying light pressure.

5.2.8 After removing the base plate with a twisting motion and marking the briquette, turn the assembly

upside down. Place the sleeve on top of the forming mold and using the jack apply, pressure to the sleeve and top plunger. This will push the briquette and top plunger up into the sleeve. See Note 2. Cool and cure the briquette for three hours at room temperature.

5.2.9 Wipe the forming mold, base plate and plungers clean with a suitable solvent and dry with a cloth

before forming each briquette. 5.2.10 Weigh the cup filled with mercury and record the weight (W1). Place the cured briquette in the

cup and allow the mercury to displace by pressing the plastic plate flatly, squarely and firmly down on the specimens top surface until the plate is seated on the top rim on the cup and the excess mercury is fully displaced. Remove the cured briquette. Weigh and record the weight of the mercury and the cup minus the weight of the mercury lost due to immersion of the cured briquette (W2). Wear Rubber exam gloves at all times when while testing with mercury.

5.2.11 Check the vacuum equipment for leaks before any briquettes are put into the desiccator. 5.2.12 Fill the vacuum desiccator with distilled water and allow to stabilize at room temperature.

Completely submerge the briquette in the distilled water and seal the top. See Note 3. 5.2.13 Subject the briquette to 8 inches (20.3 cm) of mercury vacuum for one hour. The 8 inches of

vacuum will be applied within the desiccator in not less than 1 minute. The vacuum is maintained for one hour and released gradually to avoid pressure shock to the briquettes.

5.2.14 Keep the briquette completely submerged in the distilled water at room temperature for an

additional 23 hours. If necessary to transfer to another container of distilled water, wait 15 minutes after releasing pressure before transfer.

5.2.15 Remove the briquette and blot the excess water. Place the swollen briquette in the mercury cup

and allow the briquette to displace the mercury by pressing the plastic plate flatly, squarely and firmly down on the specimen’s top surface until the plate is seated on the top rim on the cup and the excess mercury is fully displaced. Weigh and record the weight of the mercury and the cup minus the weight of the mercury lost due to immersion of the swollen briquette (W3). In no event will the briquette be allowed to set for more than ten minutes before weighing is completed. The sides of the briquette will be squeezed for recording condition of the briquette such as hard, firm, soft, soft and cracked, or disintegrated. Refer to paragraph 6.1.2 (calculations) to determine the percent of volume swell. See Note 5.

Note 5 – The test specimen shall be weighed immediately after excess water is blotted off the specimen.

If the specimen is allowed to set for any amount of time, the specimen will dry out and shrink giving erroneous swell results.

5 of 6

MT 305-09 (05/15/09)

6 Calculation 6.1 The volume swell, expressed as a percentage can be calculated by either of the two following

methods. 6.1.1 Percent Volume Swell by Caliper Method V = πr2h where: V = volume of specimen π = 3.1416 r = radius of specimen h = height of specimen and

100

112 xV

VVS −=

where: S = volume swell, percent V1 = volume of specimen before immersion, by caliper V2 = volume of specimen after immersion 6.1.2 Percent Volume Swell by Mercury Method

100

2132 xWW

WWS−−=

where: S = volume swell, percent W1 = weight of cup filled with mercury W2 = weight of mercury and cup minus mercury lost because of immersion of cured briquette W3 = weight of mercury and cup minus mercury lost because of immersion of swollen briquette 7 Report 7.1 The report shall consist of the following: 7.1.1 Percent of Volume Swell, 7.1.2 Condition of specimen.

6 of 6

MT 310-17 (12/31/17)

1 of 6

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 310-17

METHOD OF DETERMINING THE MACRO-TEXTURE OF A PAVEMENT SURFACE (Modified ASTM E965)

1 Scope 1.1 This method describes the procedures for determining the average macro-texture depth of micro-

milled concrete surfaces and micro-milled and cold-milled plant mix surfaces. 1.2 This standard does not purport to address all the safety concerns associated with its use. It is the

responsibility of the user of this procedure to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

2 Reference Documents

AASHTO M 247 Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paints

ASTM

E965 Measuring Pavement Macrotexture Depth Using a Volumetric Technique

MT Materials Manual

MT 606 Procedure for Selecting Sampling locations by random sampling technique

METHOD A – COLD-MILLED PLANT MIX SURFACES 3 Apparatus 3.1 Filler – Type 1 glass beads in accordance with AASHTO M 247.

3.2 Spreader – A flat, stiff, hard disk made from methyl methacrylate (Plexiglas) with a thickness of 0.5 ± 0.1 inch, diameter of 8 ± 2 inch and a round handle affixed in the center

3.3 Graduate – A conical or cylindrical shape graduate, 250 ml capacity 3.4 Brushes – A stiff wire brush and a soft bristle brush 3.5 Container – A small sample container with a secure and easily removable cover, at least 200 ml

capacity 3.6 Screen – A shield to protect the test area location from air turbulence created from wind or traffic. 4 Test Material Preparation 4.1 Prepare one sample container for each test area location. 4.1.1 Fill the graduate with 200 ± 2 ml of filler. 4.1.2 Gently tap the side of the graduate to level the surface of the filler. 4.1.3 Place the measured volume of filler in the container. 4.1.4 Label the container with type and quantity of filler.

MT 310-17 (12/31/17)

2 of 6

5 Procedure 5.1 Test Area 5.1.1 Randomly select a test area location(s) on the milled pavement surface in accordance with

MT 606. 5.1.2 Inspect the test area location and ensure it is a dry, homogeneous site, free of unique or localized

features such as cracks, joints, stripping and patching. 5.1.3 If localized features are present, move up-station at the same transverse offset until a suitable

site is found. 5.1.4 Gently clean an area of about 1 foot by 1 foot for the test area location using the stiff wire brush to

remove any residue, debris or loosely bonded material. Be careful not to dislodge bonded material. After using the stiff wire brush, gently brush the test area location with the soft bristle brush to remove any remaining debris.

5.1.5 Place the screen on the milled pavement surface to protect the test area location from air

turbulence. 5.2 Test Measurement 5.2.1 Hold the container with filler no more than 4 inches above the pavement at the test area location. 5.2.2 Pour the measured volume of filler from the container onto the milled pavement surface in a

conical pile. 5.2.3 Place the spreader lightly on top of the conical pile of filler being careful not to compact the filler. 5.2.4 Move the spreader in a slow, circular motion to disperse the filler in a circular area and to create a

defined crest around the perimeter. 5.2.5 Continue spreading the filler until it is well dispersed and the spreader rides on top of the high

points of the milled pavement surface. 5.2.6 Measure and record the diameter of the circular area four times, at intervals of 45º and to the

nearest 0.1 inch, as shown in Figure 1. 5.2.7 Measure the diameter of the circular area from the top (crest) of the slope on one side, through

the center, and to the top (crest) of the slope on the other side of the circular area.

Figure 1: Typical Measuring Pattern

MT 310-17 (12/31/17)

3 of 6

5.2.8 Calculate the average diameter of the circular area covered by the filler (Equation 9.1). 5.2.9 Determine the macro-texture thickness of the milled pavement surface by using the cross

reference table in Section 9.3 below. 5.3 Remove the filler material from the location using the soft bristle brush and repeat Subsection 5.2

two more times.

METHOD B – MICRO-MILLED CONCRETE AND PLANT MIX SURFACES

6 Apparatus 6.1 Filler – Type 1 glass beads in accordance with AASHTO M 247 6.2 Spreader – A flat, stiff hard disk with a thickness of 1.0 ± 0.5 inch, diameter of 4 ± 2 inch 6.3 Graduate – A conical or cylindrical shape graduate, 250 ml capacity 6.4 Brushes – A stiff wire brush and a soft bristle brush 6.5 Container – A small sample container with a secure and easily removable cover, at least 50 ml

capacity 6.6 Screen – A shield used to protect the test area from air turbulence created from wind or traffic 7 Test Material Preparation 7.1 Prepare one sample container for each test area location.

7.1.1 Fill the graduate with 25 ± 2 ml of filler.

7.1.2 Gently tap the side of the graduate to level the surface of the filler.

7.1.3 Place the measured volume of filler in the container.

7.1.4 Label the container with type and quantity of filler.

8 Procedure 8.1 Test Area 8.1.1 Randomly determine a test area location on the milled pavement surface in accordance with

MT 606. 8.1.2 Gently clean an area of about 1 foot by 1 foot for the test area location using the stiff wire brush to

remove any, residue, debris or loosely bonded material. Be careful not to dislodge bonded material. After using the stiff wire brush, gently brush the test area location with the soft bristle brush to remove any remaining debris.

8.1.3 Place the screen on the milled pavement surface to protect the test area location from air

turbulence.

MT 310-17 (12/31/17)

4 of 6

8.2 Test Measurement 8.2.1 Hold the container with filler no more than 4 inches above the pavement at the test area location. 8.2.2 Pour the measured volume of filler from the container onto the milled pavement surface into a

conical pile. 8.2.3 Place the spreader lightly on top of the conical pile of filler being careful not to compact the filler. 8.2.4 Move the spreader in a slow, circular motion to disperse the filler in a circular area and to create a

defined crest around the perimeter. 8.2.5 Continue spreading the filler until it is well dispersed and the spreader rides on top of the high

points of the pavement surface. 8.2.6 Measure and record the diameter of the circular area four times, at intervals of 45º and to the

nearest 0.1 inch, as shown in Figure 1. 8.2.7 Calculate the average diameter of the circular area covered by the filler (Equation 9.1). 8.2.8 Determine the macro-texture thickness of the milled pavement surface by using the cross

reference table in Section 9.4 below. 8.3 Repeat Subsection 8.2 two more times. 8.4 Remove the filler material from the locations and properly dispose of the material. 9 Calculations 9.1 For each test area location, perform the following calculations. 9.1.1 Calculate the average diameter of the circular area covered by the filler.

𝐷𝑎 = (𝐷1 + 𝐷2 + 𝐷3 + 𝐷4)

4

Where: Da = Average diameter of the filler area, inches D1, D2, D3, D4 = Diameters of the filler area, inches

9.1.2 Calculate the area of the circle covered by the filler in square inches (in2).

𝐴 = 𝜋𝐷𝑎2

4

9.1.3 Calculate the volume of filler in cubic inches (in3).

𝑉(𝑖𝑛3) = 𝑉(𝑚𝑙)

16.387 𝑚𝑙/𝑖𝑛3

9.1.4 Calculate Macro-texture Depth (inches):

𝐷𝑒𝑝𝑡ℎ =𝑉(𝑖𝑛3)

𝐴(𝑖𝑛2)

MT 310-17 (12/31/17)

5 of 6

9.1.5 Example:

Da = 8.0 inches Area = π Da2/4 = π 8.02/4 = 50.265 in2 Volume of filler = 25 ml Convert ml to cubic inches = 25/16.387 = 1.525 in3

Depth = V(in3)/A(in2) = 1.525 in3/50.265 in2 = 0.030 in.

9.2 Calculate the Average Texture Depth (ATD) 9.2.1 Add the three (3) individual macro-texture depth results and divide by three. 9.2.2 Report the ATD to the nearest 0.001 inches. 9.3 Macro-Texture Thickness Based on 200 ml of Filler and Average Diameter

Average Diameter (inches)

Macrotexture Thickness (inches)

Average Diameter (inches)

Macrotexture Thickness (inches)

Average Diameter (inches)

Macrotexture Thickness (inches)

7.1 0.308 8.8 0.201 10.5 0.141 7.2 0.300 8.9 0.196 10.6 0.138 7.3 0.292 9.0 0.192 10.7 0.136 7.4 0.284 9.1 0.188 10.8 0.133 7.5 0.276 9.2 0.184 10.9 0.131 7.6 0.269 9.3 0.180 11.0 0.128 7.7 0.262 9.4 0.176 11.1 0.126 7.8 0.255 9.5 0.172 11.2 0.124 7.9 0.249 9.6 0.169 11.3 0.122 8.0 0.243 9.7 0.165 11.4 0.120 8.1 0.237 9.8 0.162 11.5 0.117 8.2 0.231 9.9 0.159 11.6 0.115 8.3 0.226 10.0 0.155 11.7 0.113 8.4 0.220 10.1 0.152 11.8 0.112 8.5 0.215 10.2 0.149 11.9 0.110 8.6 0.210 10.3 0.146 12.0 0.108 8.7 0.205 10.4 0.144 12.1 0.106

MT 310-17 (12/31/17)

6 of 6

9.4 Macro-Texture Depth Based on 25 ml of Filler and Average Diameter

Average Diameter (Inches)

Macrotexture Depth (Inches)

Average Diameter (Inches)

Macrotexture Depth (Inches)

Average Diameter (Inches)

Macrotexture Depth (Inches)

Average Diameter (Inches)

Macrotexture Depth (Inches)

5 0.078 6.5 0.046 8 0.030 9.5 0.022

5.1 0.075 6.6 0.045 8.1 0.030 9.6 0.021 5.2 0.072 6.7 0.043 8.2 0.029 9.7 0.021 5.3 0.069 6.8 0.042 8.3 0.028 9.8 0.020 5.4 0.067 6.9 0.041 8.4 0.028 9.9 0.020 5.5 0.064 7 0.040 8.5 0.027 10 0.019 5.6 0.062 7.1 0.039 8.6 0.026 10.1 0.019 5.7 0.060 7.2 0.037 8.7 0.026 10.2 0.019 5.8 0.058 7.3 0.036 8.8 0.025 10.3 0.018 5.9 0.056 7.4 0.035 8.9 0.025 10.4 0.018 6 0.054 7.5 0.035 9 0.024 10.5 0.018

6.1 0.052 7.6 0.034 9.1 0.023 10.6 0.017 6.2 0.050 7.7 0.033 9.2 0.023 10.7 0.017 6.3 0.049 7.8 0.032 9.3 0.022 10.8 0.017 6.4 0.047 7.9 0.031 9.4 0.022 10.9 0.016

MT 316-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 5

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 316-04

METHOD OF SAMPLING RECYCLED PAVEMENT AND FIELD CONTROL OF RECYCLE PAVING

1 General 1.1 This method is divided into four sections which are as follows: 1.2 Section A: Sampling pavement for Cold Recycling 1.3 Section B: Field Control of Cold Recycle Paving 1.4 Section C: Sampling Pavement for Hot Recycling 1.5 Section D: Field Control of Hot Recycle Paving

Each section of this method is to be used specifically for its respective purpose related to recycle paving.

SECTION A

2 Sampling Pavement for Cold Recycling 2.1 Scope 2.2 This section describes the procedure for sampling roadways for cold mix recycling. The first

portion describes sampling procedures for design information to determine if recycling is possible. The second portion describes sampling procedures for mix design purposes.

3 Procedure 3.1 Preliminary Sampling for Proposed Recycled Pavement 3.1.1 The project should be divided into at least three areas from which milled or cored samples are

obtained. A minimum of three representative sample locations should be visually selected in each area. Samples weighing approximately sixty pounds and representative of the lifts to be recycled should be obtained from each location. If maintenance patches or other intermittent treatments occur within the area, the locations that samples were taken should be recorded and the samples properly labeled. The proposed depth for recycling the pavement should be recorded.

3.1.2 Sampling a Cold Recycled Pavement for Mix Design: Milled Sampling 3.1.2.1 The project should be divided into at least three areas from which samples are obtained. A

minimum of three locations should be used for each area of sampling. Submit approximately one hundred pounds of milled plant mix from each location. Three core samples should be taken to correspond with each milled area. The core samples should be placed into sealed containers at the job site so that in-place moisture contents may be determined.

3.1.3 Submitting Samples 3.1.3.1 Samples from different locations are to be kept separate and submitted to the Materials Bureau

for testing. Pertinent information such as locations at which samples were taken and depth to which milling was performed should be submitted with the samples.

MT 316-04 (06/01/04)

2 of 5

SECTION B 4 Field Control of Cold Recycle Paving 4.1 Scope 4.1.1 This section describes the procedure for field control of cold recycle paving. The test procedure

utilizes standard 50 blow Marshall specimens. The Marshall specimens will be fabricated at the job site and then transported to the Materials bureau for compression testing.

4.1.2 Material should be secured from either the feed hopper of the laydown machine or the windrow,

depending on the paving operation. Enough material (at least 25 lbs.) should be obtained for both the molding of briquettes and moisture determination.

5 Procedure 5.1 Determination of Moisture Content 5.1.1 For moisture determination, a representative sample of 2000 grams shall be weighed and placed

in a 140°F oven. 5.1.2 The sample shall be weighed at intervals with weight losses recorded until a stabilized condition

is achieved. A moisture loss of less than 1.0 gram in one hour should be considered a stabilized condition. Moisture content may be determined by:

% 100%

5.2 Briquette Fabrication 5.2.1 Apparatus 5.2.1.1 Scoops 5.2.1.2 Thermometer, - 50° to 150°F 5.2.1.3 Balance – 2 kg. Capacity for weighing batch samples and briquettes 5.2.1.4 Mixing spoons 5.2.1.5 Spatulas 5.2.1.6 Standard Marshall compaction pedestal – with molds and compaction hammer 5.2.1.7 Extrusion jack 5.2.1.8 Gloves and marking crayons 5.2.1.9 Pans for holding and warming specimens 5.2.1.10 Oven – capable of maintaining 140°F ±5°F 6 Preparation of Test Specimens 6.1 Prepare three specimens for each test. 6.2 Thoroughly clean molds and hammer face. Place paper disk in bottom of molds. Warm molds and

hammer to remove chill.

MT 316-04 (06/01/04)

3 of 5

6.3 Weigh out individual briquette samples. It is recommended that a trial briquette, approximately 1140 grams, be molded initially to determine height. Weight of material should then be adjusted to produce 2-1/2” ±0.05” specimens.

6.4 Warm individual specimens in 140°F oven for two hours. Note: This process has been found to

develop a density of mix equal to the roller compaction on the roadway. 6.5 Mold briquettes using standard Marshall procedures (i.e., 50 blows applied to each face).

6.6 Curing specimens in molds for up to 24 hours before extruding may be necessary if distortion occurs at an earlier extrusion time. Molds should be placed on their sides to permit equal ventilation of both ends (remove paper disks).

6.7 Carefully extrude specimens from molds. 6.8 If, when extruded, briquettes are sufficiently strong to enable handling, proceed to weigh in air,

weigh in water and weigh saturated surface dry. 6.9 If, when extruded, briquettes are too tender to handle, curing will be required until they can be

handled. The bulk specific gravities may then be determined. Bulk specific gravity is calculated as follows:

6.9 Once bulk specific gravities have been determined, carefully transport the specimens to the

Materials Lab for compression testing. 6.10 Report the specific gravities that were measured and the location represented by the samples.

The samples must be protectively wrapped for shipping and they must be numbered sequentially to maintain control of their origin and history.

7 Utilization of Final Record Samples 7.1 The final record pavement core samples taken in accordance with MT 602 are designated for

research. As soon as possible, these should be sent to the Materials Bureau, accompanied by Form No. 31. The location and sample number are to be entered on the form and the wrapped cores are to be sequentially numbered.

SECTION C

8 Sampling Pavement for Hot Mix recycling 8.1 Scope 8.1.2 This section describes the procedure for sampling roadways for hot mix recycling. The first

portion describes sampling procedures for design information to determine if recycling is possible. The second portion describes sampling procedures for mix design purposes.

9 Procedure 9.1 Preliminary Sampling for Proposed Recycled Pavement:

MT 316-04 (06/01/04)

4 of 5

9.1.2 The project should be divided into at least three areas from which milled or cored samples are obtained. A minimum of three representative sample locations should be visually selected in each area. Samples weighing approximately sixty pounds and representative of the lifts to be recycled should be obtained from each location. If maintenance patches or other intermittent treatments occur within the area, the locations that samples were taken from should be recorded and the samples properly labeled. The proposed depth for recycling the pavement should be recorded.

To complete assessment of a potentially recyclable pavement, submit information about sources of aggregate used on the original project. In addition, send a minimum of 350 pounds of material to the Materials Bureau from a source which may be used as a virgin aggregate in the recycle mix.

10 Sampling a Hot Recycled Pavement for Mix Design 10.1 Milled Sampling: 10.1.1 The project should be divided into at least three areas from which samples are obtained. A

minimum of three locations should be used for each area of sampling. Submit approximately one hundred pounds of milled plant mix from each location. Three core samples should be taken to correspond with each milled area.

11 Stockpile Sampling 11.1 Stockpiles of crushed reclaimed plant mix shall be sampled in accordance with MT 201,

paragraph 10. Note – Stockpile sampling requires particular care to avoid segregation. Samples should be taken from a

near vertical face and should be secured by reducing the sample to 300-pounds by the quartering method or with a sample splitter. Due to the time required t extract and analyze the reclaimed plant mix, samples should be submitted as soon as one-third of the reclaimed mat stockpile has been produced.

11.2 To complete the mix design, 350 pounds of aggregate from the stockpiles of virgin aggregate,

along with the appropriate forms, are required. The samples and documentation may be submitted when, in the judgment of the Project Manager, they are representative of the material to be incorporated into the recycled plant mix.

SECTION D

12 Field Control of Hot Recycle Paving 12.1 Scope 12.1.2 This section describes the procedure for field control of hot recycle paving. 13 Procedure 13.1 The crushed reclaimed mate shall be sampled in accordance with MT 201, paragraph 11:

“Production sample shall be taken not less than every four hours. The sample shall be sieved and the percentage of oversize recorded. One sample of approximately 15 pounds shall be taken and submitted to the Materials Bureau every three days.”

13.2 The aggregate incorporated into the mix shall be subject to all of the controls of a normal plant

mix operation. The output of the plant will be subjected t field control Marshall testing with the same frequency as a conventional mix.

13.3 Monitors of established production of recycled plant mix shall be taken the first three days and the

first day of every week thereafter or until otherwise informed by the Materials Bureau.

MT 316-04 (06/01/04)

5 of 5

13.4 The samples shall be placed in a new double paper bag with completed form No 98 inserted between the sacks to keep it clean. The bag should be securely tied and marked as to sample number, stationing, lane and lift. This same information shall be placed on each Daily Plant Mix Report. Several of these paper bags can be packed into a sample sack for transmittal to the laboratory. Care should be taken to see that no movement is possible, or broken bags and mixed samples will result.

14 Utilization of Final Record Samples 14.1 The final record pavement core samples taken in accordance with MT 602 are designated for

research. As soon as possible, these should be sent to the Materials Bureau, accompanied by Form No. 31. The location and sample number are to be entered on the form and the wrapped cores are to be sequentially numbered.

MT 319-17 (09/30/17)

1 of 6

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 319-17

DETERMINING THE ASPHALT BINDER CONTENT OF PLANT MIX SURFACING (PMS) BY THE IGNITION METHOD

(Modified AASHTO T 308) 1 Scope 1.1 This test method covers the determination of asphalt binder content of Plant Mix Surfacing (PMS)

mixtures by ignition at temperatures that reach the flashpoint of the binder in a furnace. The means of specimen heating may be the convection method or the direct infrared (IR) irradiation method.

1.2 The values in metric units are to be regarded as the standard. 1.3 This standard may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This standard does

not purport to address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to consult and establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO M 231 Weighing Devices Used in the Testing of Materials R 47 Reducing Samples of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) to Testing Size T 308 Determining the Asphalt Binder Content of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) by the Ignition Method T 329 Moisture Content of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)Asphalt Mixtures by Oven Method MT Materials Manual MT 202 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates MT 303 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures MT 320 Mechanical Analysis of Aggregate Recovered from Ignition Oven Burn

3 Summary of Test Method 3.1 The asphalt binder in the paving mixture is ignited using the furnace equipment applicable to the

particular method. The asphalt binder content is calculated as the difference between the initial mass of the PMS and the mass of the residual aggregate. The asphalt content is expressed as mass percent of moisture-free mixture. This method may be affected by the type of aggregate in the mixture. Accordingly, to optimize accuracy, establish correction factors for asphalt binder and aggregate by testing a set of correction factor specimens for each type of PMS.

4 Significance and Use 4.1 This method can be used for quantitative determinations of asphalt binder content and gradation

in PMS mixtures and pavement specimens for quality control, specification acceptance, and mixture evaluation studies. This method does not require the use of solvents. Use aggregate obtained by this test method for gradation analysis according to MT 320.

5 Apparatus

Ensure equipment used meets the following requirements: 5.1 Ignition furnace – A forced air ignition furnace that heats the specimen by either convection

method or direct IR irradiation method. Use a convection-type furnace capable of maintaining a temperature at 578°C (1072°F). Use a furnace containing an internal balance thermally isolated from the furnace chamber and accurate to 0.1 g. The balance must be capable of weighing a 3500 gram specimen in addition to the specimen baskets. A data collection system is included so that the weight can be automatically determined and displayed during the test. The furnace has a built in computer program to calculate change in mass of the specimen and provide for the input of a correction factor. The furnace chamber and basket dimensions must be adequate to

MT 319-17 (09/30/17)

2 of 6

accommodate a specimen size of up to 3500 grams. The furnace provides an audible alarm and indicator light when the specimen mass loss does not exceed 0.01 percent of the total specimen mass for three consecutive minutes. The furnace door is equipped so that the door cannot be opened during the ignition test. The furnace must be vented into a hood or to the outside. The furnace is equipped with a fan capable of pulling the air through the furnace to expedite the test and to reduce the escape of smoke into the laboratory.

5.2 Specimen basket(s) – of appropriate size that allows the specimens to be thinly spread and

allows air to flow through and around the specimen particles. Ensure sets with 2 or more baskets are nested. Completely enclose the specimen with screen mesh, perforated stainless steel plate, or other suitable material.

Note 1 – Screen mesh or other suitable material with maximum and minimum opening of 2.36 mm (No. 8)

and 600 microns (No. 30), respectively, has been found to perform well. 5.3 Catch Pan – of sufficient size to hold the specimen basket(s) so that aggregate particles and

melting asphalt binder falling through the screen mesh are caught. 5.4 Oven – capable of maintaining mix design compaction temperature. 5.5 Balance – of sufficient capacity and conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 231, Class

G2, for weighing specimen in basket(s). 5.6 Safety Equipment – face shield, high temperature gloves, a heat resistant surface capable of

withstanding 650°C (1202°F) and a protective cage capable of surrounding the specimen baskets during the cooling period.

5.7 Miscellaneous Equipment – a pan larger than the specimen basket(s) for transferring specimen

after ignition; spatulas, bowls, wire brushes, and other manufacturer’s equipment. 6 Sampling 6.1 Obtain samples of freshly produced PMS in accordance with MT 303. 6.2 Obtain the test specimen by splitting a sample taken in accordance with AASHTO R 47. 6.3 If the mixture is not sufficiently soft to separate with a spatula or trowel, place it in a large flat pan

or glass dish in an oven (conventional or microwave). Heat the specimen to separate. Excessive heat may cause asphalt drain down or oxidation to occur, altering the results.

6.4 The size of the test specimen is governed by the nominal-maximum aggregate size of the PMS

and must conform to the mass requirement shown in Table 1. Ensure the specimen is no more than 400 grams greater than the minimum recommended specimen mass.

Note 2 – Large specimens of fine mixes tend to result in incomplete ignition of asphalt.

Table 1—Mass Requirements

Nominal Max Agg Size, mm Sieve Size

Min Mass of Specimen,

g 4.75 No. 4 1200 9.5 ⅜ in. 1200 12.5 ½ in. 2000 19.0 ¾ in. 2000 25.0 1 in. 3000 37.5 1½ in. 4000

MT 319-17 (09/30/17)

3 of 6

7 Test Procedure 7.1 Test Initiation: 7.1.1 For the convection-type furnace, preheat the ignition furnace to 538°C (1000°F) or as determined

in ANNEX A4.1. Manually record the furnace temperature (set point) prior to the initiation of the test if the furnace does not record automatically.

7.1.2 For the direct IR irradiation-type furnace, preheat furnace to 420°C (788°F) or manufacturer’s

recommendation. Use the same burn profile as used during the correction factor determination. 7.2 Determine the moisture content of the specimen according to AASHTO T 329 at the beginning

and middle of each production day and as needed. 7.3 Apply the correction factor for the specific mix to be tested as determined in ANNEX A1 in the

ignition furnace. 7.4 Weigh and record the mass of the specimen basket(s) and catch pan (with guards in place) to the

nearest 0.1 gram. 7.5 Prepare the specimen as described in Section 6. Place the specimen basket(s) in the catch pan.

Evenly distribute the specimen in the specimen basket(s), taking care to keep the material away from the edges of the basket. Use a spatula or trowel to level the specimen.

7.6 Weigh and record the total mass of the specimen, basket(s), catch pan, and basket guards.

Calculate and record the initial mass of the specimen (total mass minus the mass of the specimen basket assembly).

7.7 Input the initial mass of the specimen to 0.1 gram for direct IR irradiation-type furnace or 1 gram

for convection-type furnace into the ignition furnace controller. Verify that the correct mass has been entered.

7.8 Open the chamber door and place the specimen basket assembly in the furnace, carefully

positioning the specimen basket assembly so it is not in contact with the furnace walls. Close the chamber door, and verify that the specimen mass (including the basket assembly) displayed on the furnace scale equals the total mass recorded in Section 7.6 within ± 5 grams. (Note 4). An indication that the specimen basket assembly is contacting the furnace wall is a difference greater than 5 g or failure of the furnace scale to stabilize.

Initiate the test by pressing the start/stop button. This operation will lock the specimen chamber and start the combustion blower.

Note 3 – The furnace temperature will drop below the set point when the door is opened, but will recover

with the door closed and when ignition occurs. Specimen ignition typically increases the temperature well above the set point, depending on specimen size and asphalt binder content.

Note 4 – The weights obtained from external weighing take precedence over those obtained from the

internal balance. 7.9 Allow the test to continue until the stable light and audible alarm indicate the test is complete (the

change in mass does not exceed 0.01 percent for three consecutive minutes). Press the start/stop button. This will unlock the specimen chamber door.

7.10 Open the chamber door, remove the specimen basket assembly, allow specimen to cool to room

temperature and weigh. During cooling, ensure specimen basket assembly is protected from contaminates.

MT 319-17 (09/30/17)

4 of 6

7.11 Calculate the corrected asphalt binder content (percent) from the external weighing according to the following equation:

MCCfXMi

MfMiPb

100,%

Where: Pb = the measured (corrected) asphalt binder content, percent Mi = the total mass of the PMS specimen prior to ignition, g Mf = the total mass of aggregate remaining after the ignition, g Cf = the correction factor, percent by mass of PMS specimen MC = the moisture content of the PMS

8 Extraction of Residual Aggregate for Gradation 8.1 Cool the contents of the specimen baskets to room temperature prior to performing the gradation

analysis. Empty the contents of the baskets into a flat pan, being careful to capture all the material. Use a small wire sieve brush to ensure that any residual fines are removed from the baskets and catch pan.

8.2 Weigh the specimen and perform the gradation analysis according to MT 320. 9 Report 9.1 Report the corrected asphalt binder content to the nearest 0.01%, correction factor,

temperature compensation factor (if applicable), total percent loss, specimen mass and moisture content (if determined).

MT 319-17 (09/30/17)

5 of 6

ANNEX A1 Correction Factors A1.1 Asphalt binder content results may be affected by the type of aggregate in the mixture and the

ignition furnace. Accordingly, to optimize accuracy, establish a correction factor by testing a set of correction factor specimens for each type of PMS. Perform this procedure before any acceptance testing is completed. Repeat the process for determining a correction factor each time there is a new or transferred PMS design. Determine a unique correction factor for each ignition furnace in the location where testing is to be performed.

A1.2 Asphalt binder correction factor – Certain aggregate types may result in unusually high correction

factors (greater than 1.0 percent). Such mixes must be corrected and tested at a lower temperature, as described below. Determine a unique asphalt binder correction factor for each ignition furnace in the location where testing will be performed.

A1.3 Aggregate correction factor – Due to potential aggregate breakdown during the ignition process,

determine a unique aggregate correction factor for each ignition furnace in the location where testing will be performed when the following conditions occur: aggregates that have a proven history of excessive breakdown; or aggregates are from an unknown source.

A2 Correction Factor Procedure A2.1 According to the requirements of Section 6, prepare a minimum of four correction specimens at

the job mix formula design asphalt content and gradation using only virgin material in a buttered bowl. Sample aggregate used for the correction factor specimens from stockpiled material produced and designated for use on the candidate project. An additional “blank” (aggregate only) specimen is provided for aggregate gradation comparison according to MT 320. The washed gradation must fall within the mix design tolerances.

A2.2 Place the freshly mixed specimens directly in the specimen baskets assembly. If allowed to cool,

heat the specimens in a conventional oven to compaction temperature. Do not preheat the specimen baskets assembly.

A2.3 Test the specimens in accordance with Sections 7 and 8. A2.4 After burning the appropriate number of calibration specimens, determine the measured asphalt

binder contents for each specimen by calculation or from the printed tickets. A2.5 If the difference between the measured asphalt binder contents of the 2 specimens exceeds 0.15

percent, repeat the 2 tests and, from the 4 tests, discard the high and low results. Determine the correction factor from the 2 remaining results. Calculate the difference between the actual and measured asphalt binder contents for each specimen. The correction factor is the average of the differences expressed in percent by weight of the asphalt mixture.

A3 Correction Factor Ignition Oven Temperature Adjustment A3.1 For the convection-type furnace, if the correction factor exceeds 1.0 percent, lower the test

temperature to 482 ± 5°C (900 ± 8°F) and repeat test. Use the correction factor obtained at 482°C (900 ± 8°F) even if it exceeds 1.0 percent.

A3.2 For the direct irradiation-type furnace, use Option 2 burn profile for most materials. Option 1 is

designed for very soft aggregate (such as dolomites) that typically require a large aggregate correction factor (greater than 1%). Option 2 is designed for specimens that may not burn completely using the DEFAULT burn profile and is appropriate for most of Montana aggregates.

MT 319-17 (09/30/17)

6 of 6

A4 Procedure Temperature A4.1 For the convection-type furnace, the temperature for testing PMS specimens in Section 7.1.1 is

the same temperature selected for testing mixture correction specimens. A4.2 For the direct IR irradiation-type furnace, the burn profile for testing PMS specimens in Section

7.1.2 is the same burn profile selected for testing mixture correction specimens. A5 Aggregate Correction Factor A5.1 Perform a gradation analysis on the residual aggregate in accordance with MT 320. Utilize the

results to develop an aggregate correction factor. Calculate and report to the nearest 0.1 percent. A5.2 From the gradation results, subtract the percent passing for each sieve for each specimen from

the percent passing each sieve of the “blank” specimen gradation results from Section A2.1. A5.3 Determine the average difference for the 2 values. If the difference for a single sieve exceeds the

allowable difference for that sieve as listed in Table A1, apply aggregate gradation correction factors (equal to the resultant average differences) for all sieves, to all acceptance gradation test results determined by MT 320, prior to final rounding and reporting. If the 0.075-mm (No. 200) sieve is the only sieve outside the limits in Table A1, apply the aggregate correction factor to only the 0.075-mm (No. 200) sieve.

Table A1 – Permitted Sieving Difference

Sieve Size Allowable Difference Sizes larger or equal to 2.36 mm (No. 8) ±5.0% Sizes larger than 0.075 mm (No. 200)

and smaller than 2.36 mm (No. 8) ±3.0%

Sizes 0.075 mm (No. 200) and smaller ±0.5% A6 Burn Oven Worksheet

MT 320-17 (06/30/17)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 320-17

MECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF AGGREGATE RECOVERED FROM IGNITION OVEN BURN (Modified AASHTO T 30)

MT 320 is identical to AASHTO T 30 except for the following stipulations: 1. Replace Table 1 with the following:

Table 1 – Maximum Allowable Mass of Material Retained on a Sieve

Screen Size

8-inch (203 mm) Diameter Screen

12-inch (304.8 mm) Diameter Screen

Maximum Grams

Maximum Pounds

Maximum Grams

Maximum Pounds

1 ¼-inch (31.75 mm) 3821.9 8.4 1-inch (25.0 mm) 3057.5 6.7 ¾-inch (19.0 mm) 2598.9 5.7 ⅝-inch (16.0 mm) 2293.2 5.1 ½-inch (12.5 mm) 1987.4 4.4 ⅜-inch (9.5 mm) 223.0 2.7 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 318 0.7 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 194 0.4 436.5 0.9 No. 10 (2.00 mm) 194 0.4 436.5 0.9 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 194 0.4 436.5 0.9 No. 30 (0.600 mm) 194 0.4 436.5 0.9 No. 40 (0.425 mm) 194 0.4 436.5 0.9 No. 50 (0.300 mm) 194 0.4 436.5 0.9 No. 80 (0.180 mm) 194 0.4 436.5 0.9 No. 100 (0.150 mm) 194 0.4 436.5 0.9 No. 200 (0.075 mm) 194 0.4 436.5 0.9

Note – If the sample is overloading screens, split or quarter the sample in accordance with MT 607,

Procedure for Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size. Grade each part of the sample

separately and combine the weights to obtain a representative gradation. Use the following table to

determine if screens are overloaded.

MT 321-17 (06/30/17)

1 of 4

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 321-17

DETERMINING THEORETICAL MAXIMUM SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF BITUMINOUS PAVING MIXTURES - "RICE GRAVITY"

(MODIFIED AASHTO T 209) 1 Scope 1.1 This test method covers the determination of theoretical maximum specific gravity (commonly

referred to as Rice Gravity) of un-compacted bituminous paving mixtures. 2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO T 209 Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) MT Materials Manual MT 303 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures MT 309 Splitting Samples of Plant Mix Surfacing to Testing Size MT 325 Determining Moisture Content of Bituminous Mixtures or Aggregate Using Microwave

Ovens 3 Terminology 3.1 Residual pressure (as employed by this test method) – the pressure in a vacuum vessel when

vacuum is applied. 3.2 Specific gravity (as determined by this test method) – the ratio of a given mass of material at 77°F

(25°C) to the mass of an equal volume of water at the same temperature. 4 Significance and Use 4.1 The theoretical maximum specific gravities of bituminous paving mixtures are basic properties

whose values are influenced by the composition of the mixtures and types and amounts of aggregates and asphalt materials.

4.2 These properties are used to calculate percent air voids in compacted bituminous paving

mixtures. 4.3 These properties provide target values for the compaction of bituminous paving mixtures. 4.4 These properties are essential when calculating the amount of asphalt binder absorbed by the

internal porosity of the individual aggregate particles in bituminous paving mixtures. 5 Apparatus Ensure equipment used meets the following requirements: 5.1 Balance – Capacity of 16,000 g sensitive to 0.1 g, to allow the maximum specific gravity of the

un-compacted mix to be calculated to the nearest thousandth (0.001 g). 5.2 Container – 4000 mL volumetric flask. Ensure the flask, with a proper cover (see Note 1), is

sufficiently strong to withstand a partial vacuum. Confirm the top surfaces of all containers are smooth and substantially plane.

Note 1 – MDT uses a glass capillary stopper.

MT 321-17 (06/30/17)

2 of 4

5.3 Vacuum System 5.3.1 Vacuum Pump – Motor driven vacuum pump, capable of maintaining at least 25 mm of Hg of

vacuum. The pump is used for removing air from the flask through the vacuum. 5.3.2 Vacuum Apparatus - rubber stopper with a hose connection to connect the volumetric flask to

vacuum pump. 5.3.3 Vacuum Measurement Device – Residual pressure manometer or vacuum gauge connected

directly to the vacuum vessel and capable of measuring residual pressure down to 25 mm of Hg or less.

5.4 Water Bath – Water bath capable of maintaining constant temperature of 77 ± 1ºF (25 ± 0.6ºC) to

fill the 4000 mL flask. 5.5 Thermometer – Liquid-in-glass thermometer accurate to 0.5°C (1°F). 6 Sampling 6.1 Obtain field samples in accordance with MT 303. Split field samples in accordance with MT 309. 6.2 Meet the sample size requirements in Table 1.

Table 1 – Minimum Sample Sizes

Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size Minimum Sample Size 1" (25 mm) 2500 g (5.50 lb) 3/4" (19 mm) 2000 g (4.40 lb) 1/2" (12.5 mm) 1500 g (3.30 lb) 3/8" (9.5 mm) 1000 g (2.20 lb) No. 4 (4.75 mm) 500 g (1.10 lb)

7 Standardization of Flasks 7.1 At the beginning of PMS production, the volumetric flask and glass capillary stopper are

standardized to accurately determine the mass of water at 77 ± 1ºF (25 ± 0.6ºC) in the flask. 7.1.1 Fill the flask with water. Gently place the stopper in the flask ensuring proper seating. Ensure all

air has been removed from the flask. Remove flask from water bath. Carefully towel dry the outside of the flask and stopper area. Weigh the flask with stopper and record the mass. Designate this mass as E1, E2, or E3.

7.1.2 Remove the stopper and decant a portion of the water back into the bath. Repeat Section 7.2 two

(2) more times. 7.1.3 Record the average of the flask standardization masses (See section 9.1). Designate this

average mass as E. 7.2 Check standardization daily when testing and re-standardize as needed or when there is a

change in tester, equipment, or when adding additional water for the day’s testing. Keep the equipment clean and free from any accumulation that would change the mass if the volume standardization is to remain constant. Do not subject glass vessels to vacuum if they are scratched or damaged.

8 Procedure 8.1 Obtain a sample size in accordance with section 6.2, Table 1.

MT 321-17 (06/30/17)

3 of 4

8.2 Separate the particles of the sample, taking care not to fracture the mineral particles so that the fine aggregate portion is not larger than ¼ inch.

8.3 The sample may be heated at mix design compaction temperature if necessary to facilitate the

breakup of the sample. 8.4 Cool the sample to approximately 77ºF. 8.5 Remove flask from water bath containing enough water at 77ºF to cover the sample by

approximately 1 inch, towel dry the outside of the flask, and place on the scale. Record the mass of the flask and water, then tare the scale.

8.6 Add the sample to the tared flask ensuring both the sample and the flask are at

77 ± 2ºF (25 ± 0.6ºC). Weigh to the nearest 0.1g. Designate the mass of the sample as D. 8.7 Wet the mouth of the flask and seat the vacuum apparatus on the flask, to ensure a proper seal

between the flask and the vacuum apparatus. Turn on the vacuum pump to remove entrapped air by subjecting the contents to a partial vacuum of 27.5 ± 2.5 Hg mm gauge pressure for 15 ± 2 minutes (See Note 2). Agitate the container and contents either continuously by mechanical device or manually by vigorous shaking at intervals of about 2 minutes.

Note 2 – The time the sample is under vacuum does not begin until the proper gauge pressure has been

reached. 8.8 Turn off the vacuum pump, slowly open the release valve to allow the pressure to normalize, then

remove the vacuum apparatus. 8.9 Fill the flask with water from the water bath (77 ± 2ºF). Gently place the stopper in the flask

ensuring proper seating and taking care not to introduce air into the sample. Place the flask and contents in the water bath and bring the contents to a temperature of 77 ± 2ºF within 10 ± 1 min after completing the vacuum procedure. Check the temperature of the contents with the thermometer.

8.10 Remove flask from water bath. Carefully towel dry the outside of the flask and stopper area.

Determine the mass of the flask filled with contents. Designate the mass of flask with water and sample as C.

9 Calculations 9.1 Calculate the average of the flask standardization masses as follows:

𝐸 = (𝐸1 + 𝐸2 + 𝐸3

3)

Where: E = averaged mass of standardized flask, designated as mass of flask E1 = 1st flask standardization mass E2 = 2nd flask standardization mass E3 = 3rd flask standardization mass 9.2 Calculate the mass of the sample (dry mass) and mass of standardized flask:

𝐹 = 𝐷 + 𝐸 Where: F = mass of the sample (dry mass) and mass of standardized flask D = mass of the sample (dry mass) E = mass of flask

MT 321-17 (06/30/17)

4 of 4

9.3 Calculate the volume of the sample as follows:

𝐺 = 𝐹 − 𝐶

Where: G = Volume of sample F = mass of sample (dry mass) and flask (equation 9.2)

C = mass of the standardized flask with contents (water and saturated sample after vacuum procedure)

9.4 Calculate the “Rice Gravity” of the sample as follows:

𝑅 = 𝐷

𝐺

Where: R = Gmm = theoretical maximum specific gravity of the mixture, “Rice Gravity” D = mass of the sample (dry mass) G = volume of sample (equation 9.3)

10 Report 10.1 Report the theoretical maximum specific gravity of the mixture (Rice Gravity) to the nearest

thousandth (0.001).

MT 322-04 (10/19/04)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 322-04

METHOD OF DETERMINING THE PERCENT OF ADHESION OF BITUMINOUS MATERIALS TO AGGREGATE

(Montana Method) 1 Scope 1.1 This test is intended to evaluate the resistance of a bituminized mixture to its bituminous film

removal by water. 2 Apparatus 2.1 Drying oven - capable of maintaining a temperature of 248º F (120º C). 2.2 Electric hot plate 2.3 Various mixing pans 2.4 Putty knife 2.5 Balance - with a capacity of 500 grams 2.6 ¼" wire screen 2.7 ½ gallon can 2.8 Water 2.9 “Red Devil" or equal paint shaker 3 Preparation of Sample 3.1 The proposed aggregate is mixed with bituminous materials, which may be Asphalt Cement or

Liquid Asphalt, or Emulsified Asphalt. The preparation of the sample, depending upon the type of bituminous materials, is as follows:

3.2 Asphalt Cement or Liquid Asphalt 3.2.1 Approximately 150 grams of plus ¼" aggregate and a sufficient quantity of the appropriate

bituminous material are heated in separate containers in an oven at 248 ºF (120 ºC). 3.2.2 After heating, the aggregate is mixed on a hot plate with just enough bituminous material to

thoroughly coat the aggregate surfaces. Avoid overheating the mix, as evidenced by smoking asphalt. A metal pan and putty knife are used to accomplish the mixing. The mixture is oven cured at 250 ºF (121 ºC) for one hour, then stirred and left to cool at room temperature.

3.3 Emulsified Asphalt 3.3.1 The test procedure varies somewhat at the preliminary stage when an emulsified asphalt is used.

Add a sufficient quantity of the appropriate emulsion to approximately 150 grams of dry, cool, plus ¼" aggregate and stir until the sample is completely covered. Excess emulsion is drained off on an elevated 4 Mesh wire screen. The mixture is oven cured at 250 ºF (121 ºC) for a period of one hour. If CRS-2 is used, the aggregate must be pre-wetted.

MT 322-04 (10/19/04)

2 of 2

4 Procedure 4.1 After the aggregate-bituminous mixture has cooled or cured for the prescribed time, it is removed

from the mixing pan or draining screen with a putty knife. Note – In order to facilitate removal, the mixture may be removed from the mixing pan or draining screen

after the receptacle has been heated on a hot plate for approximately three seconds. 4.2 The mixture is then immersed in a half-gallon can containing one quart of water at 49 to 73 ºF (15

to 25 ºC) for twenty-four hours. 4.3 At the end of the soaking period, the mixture is shaken in a "Red Devil" or other approved paint

shaker for five minutes, after which it is carefully washed to remove any loose bituminous material, and placed on a doubled layer of paper toweling. The sample is spread evenly over an area approximately five inches in diameter so that the paper is not visible through the sample.

5 Evaluation 5.1 Evaluation of adhesion is made only after the aggregate is thoroughly dry. A visual estimate of

the proportion of the surfaces remaining coated with bituminous material is made and the results expressed as percent adhesion.

MT 328-14 (07/29/14)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 328-14

ESTABLISHING FIELD TARGET DENSITY FOR PLANT MIX SURFACING DENSITY CONTROL

1 Scope 1.1 This test method is the procedure for establishing the field target density for compaction control of

bituminous mixtures. 2 Referenced Documents MT Materials Manual

MT 321 Determining Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures – “Rice Gravity”

3 Procedure 3.1 Determine the maximum specific gravity of un-compacted bituminous paving mixtures in

accordance with MT 321. 3.2 When two (2) maximum specific gravities of field samples have been determined using MT 321,

average the results. Use the average for the field target Rice Gravity density. This target is effective retroactive to the start of plant mix production on the project.

Maintain documentation of the Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures (MT 321) to determine the target density and all changes during the contract.

3.3 When four (4) field Rice Gravities are completed, average the four (4) test values. If a change of

0.5 pound per cubic foot (8.0 kg per cubic meter) or greater is calculated change, to the new average Rice Gravity. This change is effective at the time the last sample was obtained.

Notify applicable Department personnel (e.g. Project Manager, Lab Supervisor, Lead Inspector) immediately of effective change with day, time and tonnage of the change.

3.4 As each additional field Rice Gravity is completed, add the results to the sum of the previous

three (3) gravities and compute an average. If a change of 0.5 pound per cubic foot (8.0 kg per cubic meter) or greater is calculated from the last field target density, change to the new average Rice Gravity. This change is effective at the time the last sample was obtained.

MT 329-04 (06/01/04)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 329-04

PROCEDURE FOR EVALUATING PLANT MIX SURFACING FAILURES

1 Scope 1.1 This method covers the step-by step procedure for evaluating a plant mix surfacing failure. The

procedure calls for reviewing the types of plant mix failures and method for rating the distressed areas.

1.2 After determining the type and extent of the failure, further investigational requirements will

include reviewing plant mix production records, visual analysis, deflection analysis, sampling analysis of plant mix, base and subgrade materials and surfacing design analysis. Based upon all the information and data gathered through this procedure, the causes, potential solutions and recommendations to correct the plant mix surfacing failures can be determined.

2 Visual Analysis 2.1 The first step in investigating a pavement failure is to perform a complete and comprehensive

visual analysis of the entire project emphasizing the distressed areas in question. 2.2 Determine the approximate milepost and/or stationing and length of each of the distressed areas.

The following is a list of pavement distress types and a rating system to be used for the distress.

PAVEMENT FAILURE RATING SYSTEM RATING

FAILURE TYPE Rutting Light Moderate Severe

Rut Depth Rate of Rutting Lateral Movement Of Rut (Humping)

0-1/2” 0-1/8”/yr. None Visible

1/2 – 3/4” 1/8 – 3/8”/yr.

3/4” & Greater 3/8”/yr.& Greater Visible Bulge

Cracking Longitudinal Cracks In wheel paths (Load Associated)

Alligator or Block Cracking Tight

Alligator or Block Cracking Edges spaced – pieces loose or missing

*Stripping Some asphalt material stripped

**Cores **Cores

Ravelling Fines removed from surface.

1st layer coarse aggregate removed

Pavement removed through one or more lifts.

*Any stripping should be noted. **If the investigation requires plant mix cores, advanced stages of stripping will be determined at that time. Note – If dual wheel ruts exist, they should be noted. Measurements should always be taken in both

wheelpaths with a stringline stretched from centerline to the shoulder to obtain the measurements.

3 Report of Visual Analysis 3.1 A summary of the visual analysis should be written immediately after the investigation.

1 of 5

MT 329-04 (06/01/04)

3.2 The report should include date, reviewer, project termini, and detailed information concerning each distressed area. This information should include but not be limited to approximate milepost or station, length, width, relationship to centerline, lane and type of distress. Also, photographs of the typical distress on the project should be included. In addition to recording the types of pavement distress referenced above, record any other problems that are visible (drainage, terrain, frost problems, dips or swells, etc.). Based upon this visual analysis, the course of action and investigational requirements can be determined.

3.3 Copies of the report shall be sent to the District Engineer and the Materials Bureau Chief. 4 Deflection Analysis 4.1 After the visual analysis report has been evaluated, the second step of this procedure will

normally require Road Rater testing. The decision to have a Road Rate analysis will be determined based upon the visual analysis. When the decision has been made to use the Road Rater, the following are the steps that will be followed.

4.2 The Road Rater shall be used to determine the in-place strengths of each layer. An elastic

modulus for each layer will be determined from the roadway deflections. 4.2.1 Deflection tests will be taken at 200-800 foot intervals throughout problem areas to determine the

extent of the distress. In addition, the remainder of the project will be tested using the normal testing intervals (six tests per mile).

4.2.2 The deflection analysis will be reviewed for elastic modulus of each layer to determine the nature

and extent of the problem. The required design overlay thickness analysis will then be performed. 5 Investigation Requirements 5.1 Determine the investigational requirements depending on the type and extent of the plant mix

failure. The following is a list of the distress types and requirements for each:

Distress Type *Investigation Required Cracking – Alligator (1)-(7) Rutting & Shoving (1)-(7) Stripping – Underlying Courses (1)-(7) Ravelling – Surface (1),(3),(4) Segregation (1),(3),(4)

6 Investigational Requirements 6.1 Physical Data (information already obtained)

Location Weather Extent of Failure Photos

6.2 Deflection Analysis (information already obtained)

Road Rater testing – evaluate good and bad areas of the project.

2 of 5

MT 329-04 (06/01/04)

6.3 Production Records (a review of construction reports) Note – When reviewing the reports listed below, look for any abnormalities. Example: The production records generated during construction should be reviewed to determine if any problems during construction can be related to the pavement failure. For example there may have been some density problems in the same area of the failure, late paving, etc.

Mix Design Plant Reports Marshall Tests Aggregate Tests Compaction Tests Monitor Samples Project Diaries

6.4 Core Samples – Plant mix core samples shall be obtained and tested as follows: Note – Lifts will be identified and tested separately.

Tests Thickness Density Rice Gravity A.C. Content Gradation HP-GPC Abson Extraction – AC Penetration Petrographic – Geology Other tests to be determined by the Materials Bureau at the time of testing.

7 Sampling In-Place Material

R Value Liquid Limit and Plastic Index Moisture Gradation Proctor

8 Traffic Data

Present ADL Accumulative ADL

9 Structural Properties

Gravel Equivalency – Surfacing Design 10 Samples and Testing Required 10.1 Samples shall be taken so that the following tests and procedures can be run to evaluate the

problem areas. The samples will be submitted to the Materials Bureau for testing unless otherwise specified.

3 of 5

MT 329-04 (06/01/04)

10.2 Plant Mix Surfacing Core Samples 10.2.1 Samples shall be taken of each plant mix layer with at least five 4” cores from a bad area, a

shoulder next to bad area, and good area. (See Figure 1 for sampling diagram.) If more than five distressed areas exist on a project, the minimum number of sample locations will be three if all distressed areas appear to be visually identical. If material or geological conditions change between distressed areas, each various condition shall be sampled. If the lifts are still intact they shall be separated using a coring saw if required. Each lift of plant mix shall be evaluated for:

Rice Gravity Density Thickness – Each core should be measured Extracted Gradation (MT 202) Extracted Percent Asphalt (AASHTO T 164) Abson Extraction – Asphalt Penetration HP-GPC Petrographic-Analysis

Figure 1. Sampling Diagram

PASSING LANE (X) (X) (X) (X) (X) DRIVING LANE FAILURE X X X X X SHOULDER * * * * * (X) – Samples from good area X – Samples within area of visible failure * - Samples within same paver pass but not visibly failed 10.3 Base and Subgrade 10.3.1 When obtaining samples of the base and subgrade materials, a minimum 3-by-3-foot area of

plant mix shall be taken in the wheel path at each location. This should allow for adequate testing and sampling of each lift of material.

10.3.2 In-place densities and moisture shall be obtained for each lift using a nuclear gauge. 10.3.3 In-place moisture samples shall be taken of each lift and immediately placed in a sealable plastic

sack. The sample size shall be a minimum of 1 lb. (450 grams). These samples shall then be oven dried to obtain a moisture content.

10.3.4 A minimum of two “R” value samples shall be taken from both the base and subgrade for a given

problem area. In addition, one sample per mile shall be taken for the remainder of the project. The sample size will be determined in accordance with MT 207.

10.3.5 Samples and size of each lift shall be taken immediately and placed in a sealable plastic bag for

soils classification (AASHTO M 145), plastic index (AASHTO T 90) and liquid limit (AASHTO T 89) in accordance with referenced procedures.

10.3.6 Samples of the base and subgrade shall be taken for a proctor test to establish the optimum

moisture and density. The sample size shall be determined in accordance with MT 230.

4 of 5

MT 329-04 (06/01/04)

11 Traffic Data 11.1 Traffic data will be requested from the Planning and Statistics Bureau by the Materials Bureau.

This data will be used by the Road Rater and Surfacing Design Sections to determine if any structural deficiencies exist. If the traffic section in the Planning Bureau feels traffic data may not reflect the true 18 Kip axle loads, a site specific investigation should be conducted by them.

12 Structural Analysis - Surfacing Design 12.1 The surfacing Design personnel will check the design of the problem area based on the new “R”

Values and the condition of the pavement structure in place. 13 Report 13.1 A summary of the sample tests and other investigational requirements will be submitted upon

completion of all testing of all testing and analysis.

5 of 5

MT 331-14 (07/29/14)

1 of 7

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 331-14

SAMPLING AND EVALUATING STRIPPING PAVEMENTS

(Montana Method) 1 Scope 1.1 This test method describes the procedure for sampling cores. Cores are used to evaluate

existing structure, materials, pavement condition, lift thicknesses, and potential milling depth. 2 Sampling Procedure 2.1 4-Lane Roadway

Take a minimum of one (1) core per ½ mile of roadway in each direction. Alternate cores between the outside wheel path of the driving lane and the outside wheel path of passing lane. Pavement displaying a high extent or severity of cracking or raveling, rutting greater than 1/3 inch, and excessive patches, may require modification to the sampling frequency and location. If available, record the Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates of core.

2.2 2-Lane Roadway

A minimum of one (1) core per ½ mile of roadway, taken in the outside wheel path and in alternating lanes. Pavement displaying a high extent or severity of cracking or raveling, rutting greater than 1/3 inch, and excessive patches, may require modification to the sampling frequency and location. If available, record the GPS coordinates of core.

Example: 3 Sample Containment 3.1 Bag the cores with the bagging system provided by the Department’s Helena Materials Bureau. If

possible, bag the core in the orientation it was extracted (directly from drill barrel). Keep field notes describing the appearance, location, and total depth of the core. Take pictures to accompany field notes. If a portion or portions of the core are rubble, describe the thickness of the rubble section and where the rubble portion was within the core. Submit the sample for stripping evaluation. Also describe the roadway condition and any other information that would be helpful in evaluating the cores and the in-place pavement.

4 Sample Identification and Submitting of Samples 4.1 Mark core with specimen number using a marker or grease pencil. Each core sample bag must

contain a tag including the Sample Record ID number and specimen number. Ensure the Sample Record contains the Sample ID number, specimen number, uniform project number (UPN), and project name if available, location (route number, station, mile post, lane, offset, and GPS), total depth drilled and total length of the core when bagged. Submit the cores to the Materials Bureau for evaluation. Include observations and comments in the Sample Record Remarks.

½-mile

MT 331-14 (07/29/14)

2 of 7

5 Evaluation of Cores 5.1 Evaluate the total core for stripping using the "control photographs" in Annex A. Split cores by

indirect tensile loading in a press and record maximum pressure needed to yield the core. Evaluate each lift or distinct layer of plant mix for stripping using the Core Rating Scale (Section 5.2).

5.2 Core Rating Scale

Core Rating Description

4 (good core) Face shiny, black, all aggregate particles coated

3 (moisture damaged) Loss of sheen, dull appearance, some smaller aggregate is uncoated

2 (stripping) In addition to moisture damage some large aggregate is not coated

1 (severely stripped) Most of the aggregate is so clean the colors of the rock are easily seen

0 (no core) Asphalt is mostly gone from all sizes of aggregate. The core has disintegrated.

6 Reporting Results 6.1 At the completion of the evaluation, test results consisting of the extent of stripping, and other test

information are entered into SiteManager by the Materials Bureau. Each lift or layer is evaluated for stripping in the report.

MT 331-14 (07/29/14)

3 of 7

ANNEX: EXAMPLES OF EVALUATED CORES A1

MT 331-14 (07/29/14)

4 of 7

A2

MT 331-14 (07/29/14)

5 of 7

A3

MT 331-14 (07/29/14)

6 of 7

A4

MT 331-14 (07/29/14)

7 of 7

A5

MT 332-17 (06/30/17)

1 of 2

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 332-17

GYRATORY COMPACTION OF BITUMINOUS MIXTURES (Modified AASHTO T 312)

MT 332 is identical to AASHTO T 312 except for the following additions: 1. Section 11 – Include the following calculations. % Air Voids (Va)

𝑉𝑎 = 100 × (𝐺𝑚𝑚 − 𝐺𝑚𝑏

𝐺𝑚𝑚

)

Where: Gmm = Maximum specific gravity of paving mixture (Rice) Gmb = Bulk specific gravity of compacted mixture Record and round to the nearest 0.1% Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA)

𝑉𝑀𝐴 = 100 - (𝐺𝑚𝑏(100 − 𝑃𝑠)

𝐺𝑠𝑏

)

Where: Gmb = Bulk specific gravity of compacted mixture Ps = Aggregate content, percent by total mass of mixture Gsb = Bulk specific gravity of aggregate Record and round to the nearest 0.1% Voids Filled with Asphalt (VFA)

𝑉𝐹𝐴 = 100 × (𝑉𝑀𝐴 − 𝑉𝑎

𝑉𝑀𝐴)

Record and round to the nearest 0.1% Dust/Asphalt Ratio

𝐷𝐴 = (𝑃200 − 1

𝑃𝑏

)

Where: DA = Dust to Asphalt Ratio, P200 = Aggregate content passing the 0.075mm sieve, the percent by mass of aggregate (MT

320) Pb = Asphalt Content, percent by total mass of mixture (MT 319) Record and round to the nearest 0.1%

Note – The Dust/Asphalt ratio is used during mix design and field production.

MT 332-17 (06/30/17)

2 of 2

Dust Proportion

𝐷𝑃 = (𝑃200 − 1

𝑃𝑏𝑒

)

Where: DP = Dust Proportion, P200 = Aggregate content passing the 0.075mm sieve, the percent by mass of aggregate

(MT 320) Pbe = Effective asphalt content, percent by total mass of mixture

Note – The Dust Proportion is used during mix design.

Effective Asphalt Content

𝑃𝑏𝑒= - (𝑃𝑠×𝐺𝑏) × (𝐺𝑠𝑒 − 𝐺𝑠𝑏

𝐺𝑠𝑒×𝐺𝑠𝑏

) + 𝑃𝑏

Where: Pbe = Effective asphalt content, percent by total mass of mixture Ps = Aggregate content, percent by total mass of mixture Gb = Specific gravity of asphalt Gse = Effective specific gravity of aggregate Gsb = Bulk specific gravity of aggregate Pb = Asphalt Content, percent by total mass of mixture Record and round to the nearest 0.1%.

MT 333-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 3

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 333-04

METHOD OF TEST FOR THE TORSIONAL RECOVERY OF LATEX MODIFIED ASPHALT EMULSION RESIDUE

1 Scope 1.1 This test method provides an indication of the amount of elasticity that has been imparted to

asphalt by the addition of latex. The asphalt used in this test has been recovered from an emulsion.

2 Apparatus 2.1 Sample container – A flat-bottomed, cylindrical, seamless tin 55mm (2.17 inch) in diameter and

35 mm (1.38 inch) in depth. The container is commonly known as a 3-ounce ointment tin. 2.2 Disc and spider assembly – This assembly is shown in Figure 1. The disc is made of aluminum.

The spider assembly, bolt, and pointer are made of steel. 2.3 Wrench – A 9/16 inch open-end or box wrench. 2.4 Timer – A stopwatch, clock, or other timing device graduated in divisions of one second or less. 2.5 Scale – A paper scale, graduated in millimeters, at least 180 mm in length. 3 Procedure 3.1 Place the spider assembly on the container and adjust it so that it is centered, using the small

nuts on the arms of the spider to maintain the adjustment. Adjust the depth of the disc in the container so that the top of the disc will not be below the surface of the asphalt. Remove the spider assembly from the container. Construct two, centered spider assemblies and containers per test.

3.2 Obtain a latex modified asphalt residue sample by following the procedure outlined in

AASHTO T 59, Residue By Evaporation, sections 21 – 27. 3.3 Transfer a sufficient quantity of the hot residue into the sample container to fill it to within ½ to ¼

inch from the top of the container. Immediately place the previously centered spider assembly on the container and adjust the depth of the disc to bring the top of the disc level with the surface of the asphalt.

3.4 Place the two test assemblies in a 138°C (280°F) oven for ten minutes to allow air bubbles to

escape and the break the surface tension around the disc. Remove the assembly from the oven and allow cooling to room temperature for two hours.

3.5 Tape a paper scale around the container and mark the location of the pointer. Make another mark

180° form the pointer (halfway around the container). 3.6 Holding the container and spider assembly rigidly, place the wrench on the bolt head and turn the

bolt to the 180° reference mark and release immediately. The rotation should be done at a steady rate and be accomplished in approximately 5 seconds. Start the stopwatch when the bolt is released. Mark the location of the pointer on the scale when 30 seconds have elapsed, and again when 30 minutes have elapsed. Repeat the procedure with the second test assembly.

MT 333-04 (06/01/04)

2 of 3

4 Calculation and Report 4.1 The percent of recovery following deformation is calculated as follows:

2

∗ 100

Where: A = The arc on the container, measured in millimeters, between the mark made after 30 seconds

has elapsed, and the mark made after 30 minutes has elapsed. B = The circumference of the can, measured in millimeters.

4.2 Report the percent recovery as an average of the two tests.

MT 333-04 (06/01/04)

3 of 3

MT 334-17 (12/31/17)

1 of 4

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 334-17

HAMBURG WHEEL-TRACK TESTING OF COMPACTED BITUMINOUS MIXTURES

(Modified AASHTO T 324) 1 Scope 1.1 This test method describes a procedure for testing the rutting and moisture-susceptibility of plant

mix surfacing (PMS) specimens in the Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing Device. 1.2 The method describes the testing of submerged, compacted PMS in a reciprocating rolling-wheel

device. This test provides information about the rate of permanent deformation from a moving, concentrated load. This procedure utilizes laboratory- or field laboratory-compacted specimens, field saw-cut slabs, or field cores.

1.3 The test method is used to determine the premature failure susceptibility of PMS due to

weakness in the aggregate structure, inadequate binder stiffness, or moisture damage. This test method measures the rut depth and number of passes to failure.

1.4 The specimens are submerged in temperature-controlled water during loading to evaluate the

potential for moisture damage effects. 2 Reference Documents

AASHTO T 166 Bulk Specific Gravity (Gmb) of Asphalt Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens T 324 Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing of Compacted Asphalt Mixtures MT Materials Manual MT 303 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures MT 321 Determining Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures –

“Rice Gravity” MT 332 Gyratory Compaction of Bituminous Mixtures MT 335 Linear Kneading Compaction of Bituminous Mixtures Manufacturer’s Operation Manual For equipment used

3 Terminology 3.1 Specimen

Any of the following are considered specimens under this test method. 3.1.1 Laboratory-compacted slab 3.1.2 Two (2) paired laboratory-compacted gyratory pucks 3.1.3 Two (2) paired field laboratory-compacted gyratory pucks 3.1.4 Field core, 10” core or two (2) paired 6” cores 3.1.5 Field saw-cut slab 3.2 Mix Design Verification Test

A Mix Design Verification test will consist of evaluating two specimens with the Hamburg Wheel-Tracking Device and averaging the results.

MT 334-17 (12/31/17)

2 of 4

3.3 Field Production Verification Test

A Field Production Verification test will consist of the evaluation of one specimen with the Hamburg Wheel-Tracking Device.

4 Summary of Method 4.1 A laboratory- or field laboratory-compacted specimen of PMS, a core(s) taken from compacted

pavement, or a saw-cut slab specimen is repetitively loaded using a reciprocating steel wheel. The specimen is submerged in a temperature-controlled water bath at a temperature specified for the binder being used. The deformation of the specimen, caused by the wheel loading, is measured.

4.2 The impression is plotted as a function of the number of wheel passes. An abrupt increase in the

rate of deformation coincides with stripping of the asphalt binder from the aggregate in the PMS specimen.

5 Apparatus

Ensure equipment used meets the following requirements: 5.1 Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing Device – Electrically powered device capable of moving a steel

wheel with a diameter of 203.2 ± 2.0 mm (8 ± 0.08 in.) and width of 47 mm (1.85 in) over a test specimen. The load applied by the wheel is 705 ± 4.5 N (158 ± 1.0 lb.). The wheel load is maintained at ± 5% for the duration of the test excluding the cycles that are interrupted by stopping the process. The wheel reciprocates over the specimen, with the position varying sinusoidally over time. The wheel makes 52 ± 2 passes across the specimen per minute.

5.2 Temperature Control System – Water bath capable of controlling the temperature within ± 2.0ºC

over a range of 25 to 70ºC (77 to 158oF). This bath should have a mechanical circulating system to stabilize the water temperature.

5.3 Impression Measurement System – Linear Variable Differential Transducer (LVDT) device

capable of measuring the depth of the impression of the wheel within 0.5 mm, over a range of at least 0 to 20 mm. The system is mounted to measure the depth of the impression at several points, including the midpoint, in the wheel’s path on the specimen. The impression is measured at least every 400 passes of the wheel without stopping the wheel.

5.4 Wheel Pass Counter – Device that counts each wheel pass over the specimen. The signal from

this counter is coupled to the wheel impression measurement, allowing for the depth to be correlated with the number of wheel passes.

5.5 Slab Specimen Mounting System – A tray that is mounted to the machine so that movement of

the specimen is restricted to less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) during testing. Plaster of paris may be used to rigidly mount specimen in tray. The system supports the specimen, allowing for free circulation of water in the bath on all sides of the specimen and tray.

5.6 Cylindrical Specimen Mounting System – An assembly consisting of two high-density

polyethylene (HDPE) molds or plaster of paris to hold the gyratory pucks or cores, placed in a tray that is mounted to the machine so that movement of the specimen is restricted to less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) during testing. The system supports the specimen, allowing for free circulation of water in the bath on all sides of the specimen and tray.

5.7 Balance – Balance with a minimum capacity of 15,000 grams, accurate to 0.1 g. 5.8 Oven – Thermostatically-controlled forced draft or convection oven. 5.9 Mixing apparatus – Bowls, spoon, spatula, etc. 5.10 Diamond Bladed Saw – Capable of cutting PMS.

MT 334-17 (12/31/17)

3 of 4

6 Specimen Preparation 6.1 Number of Specimens – Produce at least two (2) specimens for a Mix Design Verification test and

one (1) specimen for a Field Production Verification test. 6.2 Laboratory Produced Mix – Before mixing bituminous mixtures for testing, “butter” all of the pans

and implements. Heat materials to the mixing temperature range in a forced draft or convection oven. Do not overheat the material.

6.3 Laboratory-Compacted Slabs – Prepare PMS and compact into slabs in accordance with MT 335.

Slab thicknesses should be within a range of 38 to 100 mm. Ensure the slab thickness is at least twice maximum aggregate size. Determine the air void content of the slab.

6.4 Gyratory-Compacted Specimens – Prepare PMS as necessary and compact into gyratory pucks

in accordance with MT 332. Determine the air void content of the gyratory pucks. Mark the compacted face of each gyratory puck and cut to height if necessary by removing the uncompacted face (Note 1). Cut each puck on a chord that is 35 to 45 mm longer than the width of the test wheel and parallel to the vertical axis of the specimen. Mount the two cut pucks so that the chords are together and the wheel rolls on the uncut faces of the pucks (see Note 2). The wheel path should follow the diameter of each half of the specimen through the center of the chords. A tolerance of ± 5 mm offset from the center is allowed.

Note 1 - When using the Pine Brovold Gyratory Compactor (Model AFGB1) the compacted face is the

bottom face as the puck sits in the compactor so the puck must be flipped after extraction in order to mark the compacted face.

Note 2 – Take care when loading the specimen so it is level to the surface of the mold. Trim the specimen

if it is too tall or shim it up if it is too short (support with bedding sand or plaster as needed). 6.5 Determine Air Void Content – Determine the air void content of the compacted slab and gyratory

compacted pucks in accordance with MT 335 and MT 332, respectively. The recommended target air void content is 7.0 ± 1.0 percent for laboratory-compacted slabs and 7.0 ± 0.5 percent for laboratory-compacted gyratory pucks. The air void content of field laboratory specimens will vary.

6.6 Field Cores – One (1) – 10” core or two (2) – 6” cores. Cut field cores with an appropriately sized

diameter bit. Remove the bottom lift(s) of PMS to achieve the desired height between 38 to 100 mm. Cut the core with a diamond saw at the desired point, taking care to orient the cut parallel to the surface being tested.

7 Procedure 7.1 Place specimens in mounting systems. Use plaster of paris to rigidly mount specimens (i.e., 10”

cores) that don’t fit in the HDPE molds or trays. 7.2 Position the frame holding the specimen into the wheel-tracker so that the loading arm of the

wheel is approximately horizontal when it rests on the slab. Ensure that the frame is securely fastened. Confirm that the settings of the machine are the same as those required for the specification. These settings include wheel force, appropriate water temperature based on binder grade (see Table 1), stroke length, speed and any other variables described in the procedure. Enter the number of test passes required by the specification.

Table 1

Binder Grade

Test Temperature

70-28 133°F (56°C) 64-22 and 64-28 122°F (50°C)

58-28 111°F (44°C)

MT 334-17 (12/31/17)

4 of 4

7.3 Lower the wheel onto the slab. Select the “Start” button of the testing device software. When the specimen has been preconditioned in the water at the test temperature, for 45 minutes, the initial passes of the loaded wheel occur; this establishes zero. The wheel-tracking device shuts off when the test completes the specified number of passes, when the test has achieved the maximum impression depth established in the specification, or when the set maximum standard deviation has been reached. The testing device software automatically saves the test data file.

7.4 Photograph the tested specimen before removing specimen mounting tray, if possible; otherwise

photograph the specimen after removing the mounting trays. Remove the specimen mounting tray(s) containing the specimen(s). Remove the specimen from the mounting tray and thoroughly clean the mounting tray(s). Clean the water bath, heating coils, wheels, filter element, spacers, and temperature probe in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. If no manufacturer’s recommendation exists, use water and scouring pads. Remove particles that have settled to the bottom of the baths. Lubricate moving parts in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not use solvents to clean the water bath.

7.5 Report the Average Final Impression determined by the software as the Hamburg Wheel-

Tracking Device test result. Determine the average impression of each run by averaging the middle seven points from the data given by the software (eliminating the first two data points and the last two data points). A Field Production Verification test consists of a single specimen. A Mix Design Verification test is the average of two or more specimens. If two Mix Design Verification specimens vary by more than 6 mm with one passing test result and one failing test result, prepare two more test specimens and re-run. The reported result will be the average of all four or more individual specimen test results.

8 Report 8.1 Ensure the report of the results contains the following information.

Sample, Compaction, and Run Dates Project Number Project Name Tester/Technician Binder Content Contract Binder Grade SiteManager Sample ID Sample Type (Start-up; Target-set, Out-of-broadband, etc.; Informational Use Only) Rice Gravity Density % Air Voids (include % Air Voids for each gyratory puck used in the specimen) Other Comments Configuration Settings Conditioning Time Velocity Maximum Allowed Passes Maximum Allowed Depth Sample Frequency Data Points Wheel Travel Water Temperature Force Setting Average Final Impression Graph (number of passes on the x-axis and impression depth on the y-axis)

MT 335-14 (07/29/14)

1 of 2

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 335-14

LINEAR KNEADING COMPACTION OF PLANT MIX SURFACING (PMS)

1 Scope 1.1 This test method is used to prepare compacted slabs of PMS for testing with the Hamburg

Wheel-Track Testing Devices. 2 Reference Documents

AASHTO R 47 Reducing Samples of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) to Testing Size T 166 Bulk Specific Gravity (Gmb) of Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Using Saturated

Surface-Dry Specimens MT Materials Manual MT 303 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures MT 321 Determining Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures –

“Rice Gravity” MT 332 Gyratory Compaction of Bituminous Mixtures MT 334 Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Manufacturer’s Operation Manual For equipment used

3 Summary of Method 3.1 A slab of plant mix is compacted by applying pressure to the PMS through a series of rectangular

parallel plates. The sample is placed in an open top steel box with the desired dimensions. Closely fitting steel plates are placed in a vertical row across the plant mix. A steel roller travels back and forth on the row of plates and successively applies pressure to the plant mix through the plates. This compacting motion continues until the height of the specimen of plant mix is reduced to the height calculated to yield the desired voids.

4 Apparatus

Ensure equipment used meets the following requirements: 4.1 Linear Kneading Compactor – Hydraulic powered unit, used to compact bituminous mixtures into

rectangular slabs using vertically aligned steel plates that compress the bituminous mixture into a flat slab of predetermined thickness and density.

4.2 Steel Wear Plate – 10.125” wide, 12.6” long, 0.125” high 4.3 Steel Compacting Plates – 3.6” high 4.4 Steel Compaction Carrier Box – 10.25” wide, 12.625” long, 6” high 4.5 Temperature Control System – Oven which can maintain temperatures (250ºF to 350ºF). 4.6 Shims – Aluminum or steel plates that vary in thickness to achieve desired specimen height. 4.7 Rubber Mallet 4.8 Balance – Balance with a minimum capacity of 15,000 grams, accurate to 0.1 g.

MT 335-14 (07/29/14)

2 of 2

5 Sample 5.1 Field Specimens – The top lift or lifts of PMS are tested. Ensure specimens for testing have a

thickness at least two times the nominal maximum aggregate size. 5.1.1 Slabs –The formula for the volume of a slab is as follows: length x width x thickness. The amount

of material to batch for each slab with 7 ± 1% air voids is determined by multiplying the specimen length x width x thickness in cubic centimeters by the specimen’s maximum specific gravity (Gmm) x 0.93. Mass for sample = 5283 cm3 x 1 gm/cm3 x Gmm x 0.93

5.1.2 Laboratory Produced Mix – Before mixing bituminous mixtures for testing, “butter” all of the pans

and implements. Heat materials to the mixing temperature range in a forced draft or convection oven. Do not overheat the specimens.

6 Procedure 6.1 Preheat wear and compaction plates in an oven to desired compaction temperature. Ensure PMS

is heated to desired compaction temperature. If not, place in the oven to heat to compaction temperature.

6.2 Mix and reduce the sample in accordance with AASHTO R 47 to approximate sample sizes.

Individually weigh enough material for each specimen. 6.3 Place the wear plate in compaction carrier box. 6.4 Load the specimen into compaction carrier box. Place the steel parallel plates vertically on top of

the specimen mixture. To level plates on the specimen, use a rubber mallet if needed. 6.5 Ensure that all safety mechanisms are in place at Linear Kneading Compaction start-up in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Start the Linear Kneading Compactor. 6.5 Using a hydraulic jack, pressure will be applied automatically or manually to the specimen.

Maintain a constant pressure until specimen reaches desired height. Ensure final compaction is 7 ± 1% air voids.

6.6 Press the stop button to complete the compaction process. Shut off the Linear Kneading

Compactor and disengage safety mechanisms. Remove steel plates and side walls. Remove slab along with the bottom plate and cool to room temperature (to the touch).

6.7 Repeat the procedure for any additional specimens. 7 Calculation 7.1 Using AASHTO T 166 and MT 321, calculate the air void content of the specimen to the nearest

tenth of a percent. % Air Voids (Va)

𝑉𝑎 = 100 × (𝐺𝑚𝑚 − 𝐺𝑚𝑏

𝐺𝑚𝑚)

Where: Gmm = Maximum specific gravity of paving mixture (Rice) Gmb = Bulk specific gravity of compacted mixture Round and record to the nearest 0.1%

1 of 1 Rev. 09/24/15

CURRENT DATE OF REVISION MT 400 SECTION

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND TEST METHODS Test Date of Method Publication No. Title Pages or Revision MT 401 Sampling and Inspecting Corrugated Aluminum Pipe .................................. pp 1-2 May 2007

MT 402 Sampling and Testing Corrugated Steel Pipe ............................................... pp 1-2 Jun 2004

MT 403 Sampling and Inspection of Seeding and Landscaping Materials ................ pp 1-3 Jun 2004

MT 404 Inspecting Wood Products ............................................................................ pp 1 Jun 2004

MT 405 Wire Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes ....................................................... pp 1-4 Jun 2004

MT 406 Sampling and Inspection of Signing Material and Signs ............................... pp 1-5 Jun 2004

MT 407 Method of Test for High Strength Bolts ......................................................... pp 1-4 Sep 2005

MT 408 Method of Sampling and Field Testing Liquid Deicing Material .................... pp 1-4 Feb 2010

MT 409 Welded Stud Shear Connectors.................................................................... Under Development

MT 410 Inspection, Sampling, Testing and Acceptance of Paint ............................... pp 1-3 Jun 2004

MT 411 Vacant

MT 412 Topsoil Sampling, Sample Preparation and Testing ..................................... pp 1-2 Jun 2004

MT 413 Inspection of Fencing Materials .................................................................... pp 1-2 Sep 2005

MT 414 Method of Acceptance for Reinforcing Steel ................................................. pp 1-5 Jun 2009

MT 415 Structural Steel .............................................................................................. Under Development

MT 416 Vacant

MT 417 Vacant

MT 418 Method of Acceptance for Miscellaneous Welded Items .............................. pp 1 Jun 2004

MT 419 Vacant

MT 420 Procedure to Check for Leaks Under Hydrostatic Pressure ......................... pp 1-3 Jun 2004

MT 421 Sampling Construction Fabrics ..................................................................... pp 1-2 Jun 2009

MT 422 Method of Test for Surface Smoothness and Profile .................................... pp 1-4 Apr 2012

MT 401-07 (05/15/07)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 401-07

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND INSPECTING CORRUGATED ALUMINUM PIPE (AASHTO M196, M197)

1 Scope: 1.1 This specification covers the testing and inspection guidelines for aluminum clad alloy culverts

and underdrains.

2 Referenced Documents: 2.1 AASHTO: M196 Corrugated Aluminum Pipe for Sewers and Drains M 197 Aluminum Alloy Sheet for Corrugated Aluminum Pipe ASTM: B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 3 Sampling: 3.1 Sampling shall be performed or witnessed by the testing agency at the point of fabrication. 3.2 Random sampling shall consist of at least one set of three 1” x 12” samples per gauge, alloy and

temper, lot number and type of corrugation. Samples shall be obtained a minimum of 3” from any edge.

3.3 Previously tested material that is properly marked and accepted need not be re-sampled but must be listed in the test report.

3.4 In the event that the samples fail to comply, two additional sets of three samples will be taken from the same gauge, alloy and temper, lot number and type of corrugation. Both sets must comply with the requirements or the entire lot number will be rejected.

3.5 Each corrugated sheet used in annular corrugated pipe, and each 2 ft. (0.6m) to 5 ft. (1.5m) of coiled sheet used in helically corrugated pipe, shall be identified by the fabricator showing the following:

3.5.1 Name of sheet manufacturer. 3.5.2 Identification of the pipe fabricator, if different than the sheet manufacturer. 3.5.3 Alloy and temper. 3.5.4 Specified thickness. 3.5.5 Fabricator’s date of corrugating or forming into pipe by a six (6) digit number indicating in order

the year, month and day of the month. 3.6 The marking shall be applied to the sheet by a permanent method such as coining into the metal.

This identification shall appear on the outside of the pipe.

3.7 Sheet Manufacturer’s Analysis: The manufacturer of each brand shall furnish a certificate setting forth the name or brand of aluminum alloy to be furnished, and a statement that the material conforms to the specified chemical composition limits. The certificate shall be sworn to for the manufacturer by a person having legal authority to bind the company.

MT 401-07 (05/15/07)

2 of 2

3 Fabrication: (continued) 3.8 Sheet Manufacturer’s Guarantee:

The manufacturer of the sheets shall submit, with the analysis, a guarantee providing that all aluminum alloy furnished shall conform to the applicable requirements of the latest revision of ASTM B209 for Alclad alloy 3004-H34 unless otherwise specified and shall bear a suitable identification brand or mark, and shall be replaced without cost to the purchaser when not in conformity with the specified analysis, sheet thickness, or cladding thickness, and the guarantee shall be so worded as to remain in effect so long as the manufacturer continues to furnish material.

3.9 Fabrication of the corrugated aluminum pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M

196, the Standard Specifications, and the plans for the specific project, and the Special Provisions.

4 Certification: 4.1 The testing agency shall submit appropriate manufacturer’s mill test reports and chemical

analysis representing each lot number used. The certification shall be submitted with the samples, and under separate cover. The reports shall include the following:

4.1.1 Lot number. 4.1.2 Gauge. 4.1.3 Corrugation size. 4.1.4 Diameter and quantity of pipe. 4.1.5 Type of seam. 4.1.6 Name of supplier. 4.1.7 Montana highway project for which the material is designated. 5 Approval for Shipments of Culverts 5.1 Culverts and/or related material shall not be approved for shipment until they have been found to

comply with our specifications. 5.2 Evidence of approval shall be by means of the inspecting agency’s ID stamp or tag placed on a

noticeable location on each section of the inspected material. 5.3 In the event of any questions pertaining to the approval for shipment of culverts and/or related

material, contact the Materials Bureau. 6 Field Inspection and Acceptance 6.1 The field inspection shall be made by the Project Manager who shall be furnished by the seller

with an itemized statement of the sizes and lengths of culvert pipe in each shipment. This inspection shall include an examination of the culvert pipe for deficiency in length of finished pipe, and any evidence of damage during shipment. Along with the proper approval stamp or tag from the inspecting agency.

MT 402-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 402-04

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE (AASHTO M 36)

1 Scope:

1.1 The specification covers corrugated steel pipe intended for use for storm water drainage, under-

drains, the construction of culverts, and similar uses. The steel sheet used in fabrication of the pipe has a protective metallic coating of zinc (galvanizing), aluminum, or aluminum-zinc alloy.

2 Referenced Documents: 2.1 AASHTO: M 36 Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated, for Sewers and Drains 3 Sampling Procedure: 3.1 Sampling shall be performed or witnessed by MDT or an approved inspecting agency at the point

of manufacture. 3.2 Random sampling shall consist of at least one set of three 3” x 3” samples per gauge, heat

number, lot number and type of corrugation. Samples shall be obtained a minimum of 3” from any edge.

3.3 Previously tested material that is properly marked and accepted need not be re-sampled, but must

be listed in the test report. 3.4 In the event that the samples fail to comply, two additional sets of three samples will be taken from

the same gauge, heat number, lot number and type of corrugation. Both additional sets must comply with the requirements or the entire lot number will be rejected.

4 Fabrication: 4.1 Fabrication of the corrugated steel pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36, the

Special Provisions, the Standard Specifications, and the plans for the specific project.

5 Certification: 5.1 The inspecting agency shall verify that all materials are in compliance with the “Buy America”

provision in the Montana Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Upon receipt of the materials, the Contractor will submit the appropriate test reports and chemical analysis representing each lot number on the Contractors Certificate of Compliance, Form 406. The reports shall include the following:

5.1.1 Lot number 5.1.2 Heat number. 5.1.3 Gauge. 5.1.4 Corrugation size. 5.1.5 Diameter and quantity of pipe.

MT 402-04 (06/01/04)

2 of 2

5 Certification: (continued) 5.1.6 Type of seam. 5.1.7 Weight of coating in oz/ft² or g/m². 5.1.8 Name of supplier. 5.1.9 Montana Department of Transportation project for which the material is designated. 5.1.10 Two copies of the report are to be forwarded to the District Laboratory.

6 Approval for Shipment of Culverts: 6.1 Culverts and/or related material shall not be approved for shipment until they have been found to

comply with our specifications. 6.2 Evidence of approval shall be by means of the inspecting agencies ID stamp or tag placed on a

noticeable location on each section of the inspected material. 6.3 In the event of any questions pertaining to the approval for the shipment of culverts and/or related

material, contact the Materials Bureau. 7 Field Inspection and Acceptance: 7.1 Field inspection shall be made by the Engineering Project Manager who shall be furnished by the

seller with an itemized statement of the sizes and lengths of culvert pipe in each shipment. This inspection shall include an examination of the culvert pipe for deficiency in length and any evidence of damage during shipment along with the proper approval stamp or tag from the inspecting agency and be submitted on a Form 46.

MT 403-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 3

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 403-04

SAMPLING AND INSPECTION OF SEED, FERTILIZER MULCH, EMULSIFIED BINDER, PEAT MOSS

AND NURSERY STOCK 1 Scope: 1.1 Sampling, sample preparation and submittal, supervision of seed blending. 2 Referenced Documents: 2.1 MT Manual: MT 412 Topsoil Sampling, Sample Preparation and Testing 3 Sampling Procedure: 3.1 All proposed seed, other than Montana certified "blue tag" seed, will be sampled under MDT

supervision. Resampling will not be required if the proposed seed has been pretested at the grain and seed laboratory at Montana State University within a period of twelve (12) months. A miscel-laneous sample sheet listing the supplier's name and all the information given on the purity and germination tag must be submitted to the Materials Bureau. List the name and approximate number of each kind or specie of restricted noxious weed seeds occurring per pound on the purity and germination tag. Acceptance of seed is based on compliance with the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.

3.2 When sampling seeds in bags, a trier long enough to reach all areas in the bag will be used. The

trier must be designed so that it will remove an equal volume of seed from each part of the bag through which the trier travels. Unless the trier has partitions in the seed chamber, it must be inserted into the bags horizontally. Sample non-free-flowing seeds difficult to sample with a trier by thrusting the hand into the seed and removing representative portions. When a sample is taken with the hand, insert the hand flat and with the fingers together. Keep the fingers together as the hand is closed and withdrawn. Because of possible segregation, hand samples should be taken from various locations in the bags.

3.2.1 Seed in bags. 3.2.1.1 For lots of one to six bags, sample each bag. 3.2.1.2 For lots of more than six bags, sample five bags plus at least 10% of the number of bags in the lot.

Round numbers with decimals to the nearest whole number. Regardless of the lot size, it is not necessary to sample more than 30 bags.

3.2.1.3 Closed and open bags should be sampled with a long trier, probe, or bag sampler extending the

full length of the bag. In sampling open bags it must be recognized that the sample may not represent the original shipment.

3.2.1.4 A trier or probe is available from the Materials Bureau on request and must be returned

immediately upon completion of sampling. 3.2.1.5 Seed which has been pretested under Materials Bureau supervision need not be resampled by

project personnel. If there is a reason to believe that the material received on the project has not been pre-tested, the sampling procedure described above shall be adhered to.

MT 403-04 (06/01/04)

2 of 3

3 Sampling Procedure: (continued) 3.3 Submit a one quart (one liter) container for each lot of seed sampled. Should the total quantity of

seed sampled be in excess of one quart (one liter), reduce the sample by means of quartering or splitting.

3.4 Submit the seed sample along with the purity and germination tag directly to the Seed Lab at

Montana State University. Submit a miscellaneous sample sheet with the following information to the Materials Bureau: all pertinent project information, supplier's name and address, kind of seed, all of the information given on the purity and germination tag and the amount of seed the sample represents.

3.5 Blending supervision - Seed blending performed in the field will be supervised on the job site by

project personnel. Arrangements will be made for the supervision of blending when performed by a dealer or supplier. A blending report will be submitted to the Materials Bureau.

3.6 On each seeding project, retain a one quart container of each blend until such time as the project

has been completed and accepted. The same will apply to seed not incorporated in a blend, but applied directly. This will constitute a referee sample should a question arise relative to the purity and germination of the original sample.

4 Fertilizer: 4.1 Sampling will be performed by field personnel at the project site. In the case of blended fertilizer, a

sample of the blended material will be sampled for analysis. Obtain sufficient material to fill a one quart (one liter) container from the top, center, and bottom of each fertilizer container to be sampled. Only one sample will be required from each lot, except that sampling is not required for projects under 500 pounds.

4.2 Each sample submitted to the Materials Bureau will be accompanied by the certified chemical

analysis tag, a miscellaneous field sheet listing the supplier's name, the kind of fertilizer, the lot number, all of the information given on the certified chemical analysis tag, and the total pounds the sample represents.

5 Mulch: 5.1 Vegetative mulch - The project inspection of mulch for conformance with the Standard Specifications

will be arranged by field personnel. In connection with this inspection, the Materials Bureau will be furnished with a report which will include the following information: Source, type, condition, purity, and moisture content of the mulch.

5.2 Wood cellulose fiber mulch - The project inspection of mulch for conformance with the Standard

Specifications will be arranged by field personnel. In connection with this inspection, the Materials Bureau will be furnished with a report, which will include the following information: Source, type, and moisture content of the mulch.

5.3 Peat moss - A one pound representative sample will be submitted to the Materials Bureau for pH

analysis. 5.4 Bark chip mulch - Bark chips derived from the bark of Douglas Fir, Pine, or Hemlock will be

acceptable. All material must be reasonably free from weed seeds and other foreign material such as grasses, chaff, and substances toxic to plant growth. Individual bark chips will have a maximum dimension of 3 inches and not more than 10% of the chips can pass through a 3/4 inch sieve. A 25-pound sample will be submitted to the Materials Bureau for testing.

MT 403-04 (06/01/04)

3 of 3

5 Mulch: (continued) 5.5 Manure - The term "Manure" will apply to stockpiled, well-rotted cattle, sheep, or horse manure or

combinations of such, more than one year old, reasonably free of debris and foreign matter. Before being used in any planting operation, the manure must be shredded to break up large chunks and to assure proper mixing with other materials. Before any manure is hauled to the project site it must be approved by the landscape architect or engineer.

5.6 Fabricated netting - The project inspection of netting for conformance with the Standard

Specifications will be arranged by field personnel. In connection with this inspection, the Materials Bureau shall be furnished with a report which shall include the source, type, and condition of the material.

6 Emulsified Binder: 6.1 When the quantity of emulsified binder is in excess of 10,000 gallons, a one-quart representative

sample of the emulsified asphalt proposed for use on the project shall be submitted to the Materials Bureau. Ship emulsified binder in plastic containers.

7 Topsoil: 7.1 With the exception of topsoil which has been stripped and is stockpiled for later replacement, a

two pound sample of each kind or type will be sampled and tested in accordance with MT-412. 8 Sod: 8.1 The material will be inspected on-site, a miscellaneous field sample sheet (Form 46) will list

source, grass specie, and thickness of sod, and also the total quantity of material represented by the sample, and forwarded to the Materials Bureau.

9 Nursery Stock: 9.1 The project inspection of nursery stock will be performed by the Manager, Field Project Unit for

conformance with the specifications contained in the project proposal. In connection with this inspection, the Materials Bureau is to be furnished with a report which will include the following information: supplier, stock name, quantity, condition, minimum and maximum size or spread of trees and shrubs, whether of nursery or collected stock, whether stock is bare-root, balled and burlapped or plotted and number of trees and shrubs accepted.

9.2 The following is an example of a nursery stock inspection report: COMMON NAME BOTANICAL NAME QUANTITY SIZE Ponderosa Pine Pinus ponderosa 6 1'6" - 1'0"

All of the specified size, all potted nursery stock, all in good condition and all accepted. Common Lilac Syringa Vulgaris 140 25" - 35"

All of the specified size, all nursery stock, all in good condition and all accepted.

MT 404-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING

MT 404-04 METHOD FOR INSPECTING WOOD PRODUCTS (Montana Method) 1 Scope: 1.1 This method includes the inspection of all wood products at the mills, the treating plant and after

shipment to the job-site. 1.2 A detailed procedure for inspecting wood products is not included in this method because the

primary responsibility for such inspections is charged to the Inspector at the Materials Bureau. In the event division or other personnel are required to make inspections of wood products, attention is directed to paragraph 5.1, below.

2 Mill Inspection: 2.1 Plant inspection of all wood products will consist of checking grade, dimensions, etc., in accordance

with the applicable section in the Standard Specifications. 3 Treating Plant Inspection: 3.1 (Wood products to be treated may be inspected in the white to determine its suitability for

treatment.) After treating is completed, the wood products must be inspected again for: 3.1.1 Adequacy of the treatment. 3.1.2 Damage which may have been caused by or during the treating cycle, or in subsequent handling. 3.2 It is essential that the treating plants call the Materials Bureau at least 48 hours in advance of the

time requested for an inspection. 4 Final Inspection: 4.1 At the time of final inspection, all acceptable large timbers (guardrail posts, pilings, sign posts, etc.)

are individually stamped with the Circle (M) stamping hammer which denotes acceptance prior to shipment.

4.2 The acceptance of small items (fence posts, etc.) prior to shipment is indicated by inspection seals

attached to each bundle. 5 Job-Site Inspection: 5.1 In the event that the inspector from the Materials Bureau is unable to perform the inspection at the

plant, Division personnel may be called upon to perform the inspection in the field. Division personnel are directed to contact the Materials Bureau for specific instructions.

5.2 All wood products are subject to final field approval after delivery to the project.

MT 405-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 4

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 405-04 WIRE CLOTH SIEVES FOR TESTING PURPOSES (Modified AASHTO M 92) 1 Scope: 1.1 This specification covers the requirements for the design and construction of sieves using a

medium of woven-wire cloth mounted in a frame for use in testing for the classification of materials according to designated nominal particle size and wire cloth, meeting the specifications of Table 1, to be designated test grade wire cloth. All subsequent references to wire cloth shall mean test grade wire cloth.

2 Referenced Documents: 2.1 AASHTO: M 92 Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing Purposes 3 Sieve Cloth Requirements: 3.1 Wire cloth used in U.S.A. standard testing sieves meeting the specifications shown in Table 1

shall be designated “test grade”. Test grade cloth shall be woven from stainless steel, brass, bronze, or other suitable wire with a plain weave, except that cloth with openings of 63 µm (No. 230) and finer may be woven with a twill weave. The wire shall not be coated or plated.

3.2 The openings of the sieve cloth of successive sieves from a base of 1 mm in the ration of

approximately 4√2 :1. 3.3 All measurements of openings and wire diameters shall be made along the midpoints of the

opening. 3.4 Sieve cloth shall conform to the dimensional requirements of Table 1. The average opening

(distance between parallel wires measured at the center of the opening), in the horizontal and vertical directions measured separately, shall conform to the values in Column 1, within the permissible variation in average opening size shown in column 4. Not more than 5% of the openings shall exceed the value shown in Column 5. The maximum individual opening size shall not exceed the value shown in Column 6.

3.4.1 The average diameter of the horizontal and vertical wires, measured separately, shall conform to

the diameter in Column 7 within the tolerances in Footnote A of Table 1. 3.5 Wires shall be crimped in such a manner that they will be rigid when in use. 3.6 There shall be no punctures or obvious defects in the wire cloth. 4 Test Sieve Frames: 4.1 General Requirements - Frames for wire cloth sieves shall be constructed in such a manner as to

be rigid. The wire cloth shall be mounted on the frame without distortion, looseness or waviness. To prevent the material being sieved from catching in the joint between the wire cloth and the frame, the joint shall be filled smoothly or constructed so the material will not be trapped.

4.2 Standard Frames--The standard sieve frame shall be circular with nominal diameters of 3, 6, 8,

10 or 12 inches (76, 512, 203, 254, or 305 mm) as may be specified. The dimensions shall conform to the requirements of Table 2. Frames shall be made from noncorrosive material such as brass or stainless steel and be of seamless construction.

MT 405-04 (06/01/04)

2 of 4

4 Test Sieve Frames: (continued) 4.2.1 The bottom of the frame shall be constructed so as to provide an easy sliding fit with any sieve

frame of the same nominal diameter conforming to the specified dimensions. 4.2.2 The joint or fillet at the connection of the sieve cloth to the frame will provide a minimum clear

sieving surface with a diameter equal to the nominal diameter less 0.5 in. (13 mm). 4.3 Nonstandard Frames – Other sieve frames may be square, rectangular, or circular. The frame

may have the sieve cloth permanently installed, or be designed to permit replacement. The provisions of 5.1 apply.

Note 1 – While there are no requirements for nesting of nonstandard frames, care should be applied in

the use to prevent loss of material during analysis. 4.4 Pans and Covers – Pans and covers for use with sieves shall be made so as to nest with the

sieves. Pans with extended rims (“stacking skirts”) shall be furnished when specified. The pans and covers shall conform to the dimensions of Table 2.

5 Product Marking: 4.1 Each sieve shall bear a label marked with the following information: 4.1.1 U.S.A. Standard Testing Sieve, 4.1.2 ASTM designation E 11, 4.1.3 Standard sieve designation (from Table 1, Column 1), 4.1.4 Name of manufacturer or distributor, and 4.1.5 Alternative sieve designation (from Table 1, Column 2) Optional. 4.1.6 Each test sieve shall bear a unique serial number permanently engraved or etched onto the sieve

frame, skirt or nameplate.

MT 405-04 (06/01/04)

3 of 4

TABLE 1 Nominal Dimensions, Permissible Variations for Wire Cloth of Standard Test Sieves (U.S.A. Standard Series) Permissible Variation Maximum of Average Opening Nominal Opening from Size for Sieve the Standard Not More Maximum Nominal Sieve Designation Opening, Sieve than 5% of Individual Wire Standardb Alternative in.c Designation Openings Opening Diameter, mm mm mm mm mma (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 125 5 in. 5 ±3.7 130.0 130.9 8.0 106 4.24 in. 4.24 ±3.2 110.2 111.1 6.40 100d 4 in.d 4 ±3.0 104.0 104.8 6.30 90 3½ in. 3.5 ±2.7 93.6 94.4 6.08 75 3 in. 3 ±2.2 78.1 78.7 5.80 63 2½ in. 2.5 ±1.9 65.6 66.2 5.50 53 2.12 in. 2.12 ±1.6 55.2 55.7 5.15 50d 2 in.d 2 ±1.5 52.1 52.6 5.05 45 1¾ in. 1.75 ±1.4 46.9 47.4 4.85 37.5 1½ in. 1.5 ±1.1 39.1 39.5 4.59 31.5 1¼ in. 1.25 ±1.0 32.9 33.2 4.23 26.5 1.06 in. 1.06 ±0.8 27.7 28.0 3.90 25.0d 1 in.d 1 ±0.8 26.1 26.4 3.80 22.4 7/8 in. 0.875 ±0.7 23.4 23.7 3.50 19.0 3/4 in. 0.750 ±0.6 19.9 20.1 3.30 16.0 5/8 in. 0.625 ±0.5 16.7 17.0 3.00 13.2 0.530 in. 0.530 ±0.41 13.83 14.05 2.75 12.5 1/2 in.d 0.500 ±0.39 13.10 13.31 2.67 11.2 7/16 in. 0.438 ±0.35 11.75 11.94 2.45 9.5 3/8 in. 0.375 ±0.30 9.97 10.16 2.27 8.0 5/16 in. 0.312 ±0.25 8.41 8.58 2.07 6.7 0.265 in. 0.265 ±0.21 7.05 7.20 1.87 6.3d 1/4 in.a 0.250 ±0.20 6.64 6.78 1.82 5.6 No. 3½ 0.223 ±0.18 5.90 6.04 1.68 4.75 No. 4 0.187 ±0.15 5.02 5.14 1.54 4.00 No. 5 0.157 ±0.13 4.23 4.35 1.37 3.35 No. 6 0.132 ±0.11 3.55 3.66 1.23 2.80 No. 7 0.111 ±0.095 2.975 3.070 1.10 2.36 No. 8 0.0937 ±0.080 2.515 2.600 1.00 2.00 No. 10 0.0787 ±0.070 2.135 2.215 0.900 1.70 No. 12c 0.0661 ±0.060 1.820 1.890 0.810 1.40 No. 14 0.0555 ±0.050 1.505 1.565 0.725 1.18 No. 16 0.0469 ±0.045 1.270 1.330 0.650 1.00 No. 18 0.0394 ±0.040 1.080 1.135 0.580 0.850 No. 20 0.0331 ±0.035 0.925 0.970 0.510 0.710 No. 25 0.0278 ±0.030 0.775 0.815 0.450 0.600 No. 30 0.0234 ±0.025 0.660 0.695 0.390 0.500 No. 35 0.0197 ±0.020 0.550 0.585 0.340 0.425 No. 40 0.0165 ±0.019 0.471 0.502 0.290 0.355 No. 45 0.0139 ±0.016 0.396 0.425 0.247 0.300 No. 50 0.0117 ±0.014 0.337 0.363 0.215 0.250 No. 60 0.0098 ±0.012 0.283 0.306 0.180 0.212 No. 70 0.0083 ±0.010 0.242 0.263 0.152 0.180 No. 80 0.0070 ±0.009 0.207 0.227 0.131 0.150 No. 100 0.0059 ±0.008 0.174 0.192 0.110

MT 405-04 (06/01/04)

4 of 4

TABLE 1 Nominal Dimensions, Permissible Variations for Wire Cloth of Standard Test Sieves (U.S.A. Standard Series) Permissible Variation Maximum of Average Opening Nominal Opening from Size for Sieve the Standard Not More Maximum Nominal Sieve Designation Opening, Sieve than 5% of Individual Wire Standardb Alternative in.c Designation Openings Opening Diameter, mm mm mm mm mma (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 0.125 No. 120 0.0049 ±0.007 0.147 0.163 0.091 0.106 No. 140 0.0041 ±0.006 0.126 0.141 0.076 0.0090 No. 170 0.0035 ±0.005 0.108 0.122 0.064 0.075 No. 200 0.0029 ±0.005 0.091 0.103 0.053 0.063 No. 230 0.0025 ±0.004 0.077 0.089 0.044 0.053 No. 270 0.0021 ±0.004 0.066 0.076 0.037 0.045 No. 325 0.0017 ±0.003 0.057 0.066 0.030 0.038 No. 400 0.0015 ±0.003 0.048 0.057 0.025 0.032d No. 450d 0.0012 ±0.003 0.042 0.050 0.028 0.025d No. 500d 0.0010 ±0.003 0.034 0.041 0.025 0.020d No. 635d 0.0008 ±0.003 0.029 0.035 0.020

TABLE 2 Dimensions of Standard Frames Nominal Typical FrameA

Diameter Mean Diameter, in. (mm) In. Inside at TopB Outside of Skirt Nominal HeightC in. (mm) 3 3.000 + 0.030/-0.000 3.000 + 0.000/-0.030 1 1/4 (32) FHD

(76 + 0.76/ -0.00) (76 + 0.00/ -0.76) 5/8 (16) HH 6 6.000 + 0.030/-0.000 6.000 + 0.000/-0.030 1 3/4 (45) FH (152 + 0.76/ -0.00) (152 + 0.00/ -0.76) 1 (25) HH 8 8.000 + 0.030/-0.000 8.000 + 0.000/-0.030 2 (50) FH (203 + 0.76/ -0.00) (203 + 0.76/ -0.76) 1 (25) HH 10 10.000 + 0.030/-0.000 10.000 + 0.000/-0.030 3 (76) FH (254 + 0.76/ -0.00) (254 + 0.00/ -0.76) 1 1/2 (38) HH 12 12.000 + 0.030/-0.000 12.000 + 0.000/-0.030 3 1/4 (83) FH (305 + 0.76/ -0.00) (305 + 0.00/ -0.76) 2 (50) IH 1 5/8 (41) HH A Other frame heights are not precluded. B Measured 0.2 in. (5 mm) below the top of the frame. C Distance from the top of the frame to the sieve cloth surface. D FH = full height, HH = half height, IH = intermediate height.

MT 406-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 5

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 406-04 METHOD OF INSPECTING, SAMPLING, AND TESTING SIGNING MATERIAL, INSPECTION OF SIGNS, AND SUBMITTAL OF TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS (Montana Method) 1 Scope: 1.1 Following the determination of a successful bidder, and upon the letting of a project to contract, a

letter is sent to the prime contractor by the Materials Bureau requesting the source of bid items in the contract. These items include signing material and signs. Upon receipt of the information, the Certification Inspection Supervisor in the Materials Bureau will arrange for inspection. The following procedures and requirements shall be observed whenever signs are included in a project.

2 Referenced Documents: 2.1 Montana Department of Transportation Detailed Drawings 3 Reporting: 3.1 A copy of all correspondence, test results, certificates and other pertinent documents shall be

submitted to the Materials Bureau, attention Certification Inspection Supervisor. 4 Signing Material: 4.1 Inspection of signing material will be performed by either another state, by a commercial

inspection and testing agency, or if the material was not pre-inspected by field personnel. 5 Sign Fabrication Inspection: 5.1 Sign fabrication inspection involves visual observation of sign materials, fabrication procedures,

and the manufactured product to ensure that it will serve the intended purpose for its expected performance life.

5.2 Material specifications are outlined in the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge

Construction and in the contract special provisions. Materials used in the fabrication of highways signs are inspected by an inspection agency for each construction contract.

5.3 In-Plant sign inspection and approval does not constitute mandatory acceptance by the Project

Manager of the delivered product. It is possible that signs may be damaged in transit because of inadequate packaging or poor handling and will be rejected at the project site. Approval of a sign at the point of fabrication means that the inspector has assured himself that all materials used meet the plan specifications and that finished signs are satisfactory in appearance and workmanship.

6 Materials: 6.1 Inspection & Sampling: Following is a listing of the materials used in the fabrication of signs and

the required sampling procedures before the subject material may be approved for use. 6.2 6061 T6 or 5052 H38 Aluminum Sheeting can be accepted on certification of conformance and

certified mill test reports. No sample is required unless deemed necessary by the Inspector. If samples are required, they shall be sampled as follows: Two samples of size 3/4 inch x 9 inch of

each gauge will be taken from each consignment of aluminum received for signing. Samples will be oriented with the longer dimension parallel to the direction of rolling. The Materials Bureau will

MT 406-04 (06/01/04)

2 of 5

6 Materials: (continued) machine these samples to comply with ASTM E8-80A. A Certificate of Compliance including

Certified Mill Test Reports of each gauge is required. 6.3 Aluminum Sign Blanks: Each consignment of aluminum sign blanks is spot checked with a

micrometer for gauge thickness conformance. Certificates of Compliance and a Certified Mill Test Report of each gauge are required.

6.4 6063 T6 Extruded Aluminum T-Sections (Wind Beam): Certificates of Compliance, Certified Mill

Test Reports, and Chemical Analysis are required for each order. No sample is required unless deemed necessary by the Inspector.

6.5 HD (High Density) Plywood: The minimum allowable plywood grade shall be B-B high density

overlay 60/60 with amber overlay on both sides, and a minimum thickness of 3/4" or as shown on plans. A spot check on thickness requirements, grade-trademark for Grade and Type of plywood, and a letter attesting to the standard of the plywood received is required. No sample is required unless deemed necessary by the Inspector.

6.6 Reflective Sheeting: A portion of each roll will be visually inspected for imperfections. A

Certificate of Compliance including the type, grade, color, and purchase order number is required for each roll used in the signing fabrication.

Note 1 -Reflective sheeting from each manufacturer will be sent to the Materials Bureau for reflectivity

testing on an annual basis. 6.7 Sign Faces: No sampling is required for reflective or non-reflective sign faces. A visual inspection

for conformance and imperfections will be performed on each order of sign faces received. A Certificate of Compliance is required for each shipment. The certificate will include type of material and purchase order number.

6.8 Applied or Demountable Copy A Certificate of Compliance is required for each order prior to

usage. The reflective sheeting for all sign copies shall be Silver-White No. 2 (Parkway - if a 3M product). Encapsulated lens, wide angle reflective sheeting may be used when specified in the plans.

7 Fabrication: Items to be observed by the Inspector During Sign Fabrication: 7.1 Approved materials. 7.2 Visual check of material color and color match with a 150 watt flood light held at eye level at a

distance of 50 feet from material being observed. 7.3 Visual check of uniform legend color tone and uniform reflectivity with a 150 watt flood light held

at eye level at a distance of 50 feet from legend being observed. 7.4 Visual check of splices. 7.5 Fabrication 7.5.1 Correct thickness of aluminum or plywood. 7.5.2 Correct material for reflectorized and non-reflectorized signs, (sheeting and copy). 7.5.3 Correct "T" sections (wind beam) and proper spacing of "T" sections, (Standard Drawing No.

619-04 and 619-06).

MT 406-04 (06/01/04)

3 of 5

7 Fabrication: Items to be observed by the Inspector During Sign Fabrication: (continued) 7.5.4 Correct spacing of rivets with heads painted to match signs, (Standard Drawing No. 619-04). 7.5.5 Correct spacing of aluminum clips on "T" sections on plywood, (Standard Drawing No. 619-06). 7.5.6 Correct sign size, color, and whether copy and background sheeting are reflectorized or non-

reflectorized. 7.5.7 Corners of control signs rounded. 7.5.8 Corners of guide signs rounded when so noted on plans. 7.6 Non-Standard Items: 7.6.1 Conformance to contract special provisions. Conformance to special mounting details shown on

the plans. 8 Application of Materials: 8.1 Use of approved equipment and qualified personnel. 8.2 Sheeting properly applied. 8.3 Absence of foreign particles under applied sheeting. 8.4 Absence of air bubbles under applied sheeting. 8.5 Absence of loose edges. 9 Workmanship: 9.1 Correct sign layout and size. 9.2 Sharp clear screened sign messages. 9.3 Proper horizontal and vertical spacing. 9.4 Correctly spelled words. 9.5 Symbols correctly depicted. 9.6 Back of sign clean and free of corrosion. 9.7 Sign number on back of guide signs.

10 Design Conformance: 10.1 Completed Signs: 10.1.1 All completed signs will conform to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, and Standard

Highway Signs as specified in the MUTCD, 1978 with addendums; except as may be provided for in the Montana Standard Drawings, Montana Sign Index, or contract plans and approved shop drawings.

MT 406-04 (06/01/04)

4 of 5

10 Design Conformance: (continued) 10.1.2 All completed signs that are in conformance will be stamped on the back of the sign, by the

inspector, with the inspecting agency's stamp of approval. 10.1.3 Test reports for signing material, inspected and sampled by a commercial agency, will be sent to

the inspecting agency by the Materials Bureau upon completion of the tests. 10.1.4 Test reports for material sampled by field personnel will be issued upon completion of the tests. 10.1.5 The supplier for all major signing material must provide the manufacturer’s Certificates of

Compliance. Copies of all certificates will be kept in the Materials Bureau project files. 10.1.6 Acceptance reports for material used on pre-inspected signs that were supplied from out-of-state

will be submitted to the field in the final report. 10.1.7 The field shall provide the Materials Bureau with inspection and acceptance reports whenever un-

inspected signing material that has been supplied from out-of-state is delivered to the project. (Section 10.2.4).

10.2 Signs Supplied Locally or from Out-of-State: 10.2.1 Signs that have been supplied locally or out-of-state are inspected at the source as designated

by the Materials Bureau. Following inspection, a report listing the number and kind of signs will be submitted to the field and to the Materials Bureau.

10.2.2 In the event that the signs have not been pre-inspected, the Materials Bureau shall require a Field Inspection and Acceptance Report in addition to the manufacturer's Certificates of Compliance (Section 10.1.5). 10.2.3 Signs are inspected for conformance with the Montana Department of Transportation

specification requirements. Locally inspected signs will bear evidence of having been inspected by the presence of the inspecting agency's stamp of approval. Unpackaged signs will bear a stamp on the back of the sign, while packaged signs will bear a stamp on the package face.

10.2.4 Locally supplied signs that have not been inspected may be delivered to a project only in the

case of extreme urgency for installation. For such cases, the suppliers have been directed to immediately forward a letter to the Materials Bureau and to the Project Manager describing the circumstances under which the signs (not inspected) were shipped. This letter must designate the project and location to which the signs were delivered and list the kind and quantity of signs. Signs that have been shipped without inspection shall not be accepted until the manufacturer has submitted this letter.

10.2.5 It is imperative that the Materials Bureau, attention Certification Inspection Supervisor, be

informed of the field inspection and acceptance of all signs that do not show evidence of inspection at the source. The following information will be included in this inspection report:

10.2.5.1Appearance and workmanship 10.2.5.2Conformance to specifications 10.2.5.3Type, size, and quantity 10.2.5.4Gauge of aluminum 10.2.5.5Thickness or ply of plywood

MT 406-04 (06/01/04)

5 of 5

10 Design Conformance: (continued) 10.3 Final Signing Material and Sign Acceptance Reports: 10.3.1 Signing material and signs which have been inspected by a commercial agency will be accepted

upon receipt of all required Certificates of Compliance. 10.3.2 Signing material and signs which have been supplied from out-of-state but which have not been

inspected will be accepted upon receipt of required certificates from the supplier, a field inspection, and an acceptance report.

10.3.3 Signing material and signs which have been supplied from out-of-state and have been inspected

by a commercial agency will be accepted on the reports issued by the agency. 10.3.4 Signing material and signs which have been supplied locally and have been inspected by the

District will be accepted on the reports issued by the District. 10.3.5 All signing material and signs, regardless of source and inspection procedure, are subject to final

field approval.

MT 407-05 (09/01/05)

1 of 4

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 407-05

METHOD OF TEST FOR HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTS

1 Scope: 1.1 The method covers rotational capacity testing of high strength bolts used in bridge construction.

2 Referenced Documents: 2.1 AASHTO: M 164 (M 164M), High-Strength Bolts for Structural Joints M 291 (M 291M), Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts M 292 (M 292M), Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature

Service or Both Procedure A: (Long Bolts in Tension Calibrator) 3 Apparatus: 3.1 A Skidmore-Wilhelm calibrator for measuring bolt tension, of sufficient capacity for the bolts to be

tested. 3.2 Calibrated torque wrench. 3.3 Spacers and/or washers with a maximum hole size 1/16 in. (2mm) larger than the bolt to be tested. 3.4 A steel section on which to mount the bolt calibrator. The flange of a girder or a cross-frame

accessible from the ground is acceptable. 4 Procedure:

4.1 Use black fasteners oily to the touch at testing. Clean all weathered or rusty fasteners of all rust

and re-lubricate prior to testing. Lubricate all galvanized fasteners with a visible dye, so a visual check verifies the lubricant’s presence.

4.2 Measure the bolt length, not including the head. 4.3 Thread a nut onto the bolt with sufficient spacers or washers to bring the bolt end to at least flush

with the tightened nut to a maximum bolt stick-out of three threads. Provide 3 to 5 threads between the inside faces of the nut and the bolt head. Always use a hardened washer under the nut.

4.4 Tighten the nut with a wrench to produce the appropriate snug tension from Table 1, with an

allowable error range from 0 kips to +2 kips (0 to + 9 kn). The snug condition should be the normal effort applied with a 12-inch wrench.

Table 1

Bolt Dia. (in.) ½ 5/8 ¾ 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 ¼ 1 3/8 1 1/2 Snug Tension (kips) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10

Bolt Dia. (mm) 20 22 24

Snug Tension (kN) 13 18 23

MT 407-05 (09/01/05)

2 of 4

4 Procedure: (continued) 4.5 Match-mark the bolt, nut and face plate of the calibrator. 4.6 Using the torque wrench, tighten the nut to at least the tension in Table 2. Record the bolt tension

and the torque that produced the tension. (Measure the torque with the nut in motion). Calculate the following value for maximum allowable torque given by: T = 0.25 PD, where P=

tension in lbs. (N) and D = diameter of bolt in feet (m). The fastener assembly fails the test at this point if the recorded torque exceeds the value, T, as

calculated above.

Table 2 Bolt Dia. (in.) ½ 5/8 ¾ 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 ¼ 1 3/8 1 1/2 Tension (kips) 12 19 28 39 51 56 71 85 103

Bolt Dia. (mm) 20 22 24 Tension (kN) 125 173 227

4.7 Tighten the nut further by the number of turns shown in Table 3, using the radial lines on the

calibrator faceplate for reference. The rotation is measured from the initial marking in step 4.5. Record the bolt tension. Bolt and nut assemblies which strip or fracture before achieving the full rotation have failed the test.

Table 3

Bolt Length

4 x bolt dia. or less

Greater than 4 but no more than 8 x dia.

Greater than 8 x dia.

Required Rotation 2/3 1 1 1/6 4.8 Compare the bolt tension recorded from Section 4.7 with the appropriate value from Table 4.

Fastener assemblies that do not provide the minimum required tension shown in Table 4 at the rotation shown in Table 3 have failed the test.

Table 4

Bolt Dia. (in.) ½ 5/8 ¾ 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 ¼ 1 3/8 1 1/2 Tension (kips) 14 22 32 45 59 64 82 98 118

Bolt Dia. (mm) 20 22 24 Tension (kN) 142 200 262

4.9 Remove the nut and bolt from the calibrator and examine them. The fastener assembly has failed

the test if threads show signs of stripping, shear or torsion failure or the nut fails to turn freely, by hand, on those threads occupied by the nut in the test position. (The nut does not have to freely turn the entire length of the thread to pass this test.)

Procedure B (Bolts too short for tension calibrator) 5 Apparatus: 5.1 Calibrated torque wrench and hand wrenches. 5.2 Spacers and/or washers with a maximum hole size 1/16 in. (2mm) larger than the bolt. 5.3 A steel section with holes sized 1/16 in. (2mm) larger then the bolt diameter, with a plate thickness

that will accommodate section 6.3.

MT 407-05 (09/01/05)

3 of 4

6 Procedure:

6.1 Use black fasteners oily to the touch at testing. Clean all weathered or rusty fasteners of all rust and re-lubricate prior to testing. Lubricate all galvanized fasteners with a visible dye, so a visual check verifies the lubricant’s presence.

6.2 Measure the bolt length, not including the head. 6.3 Install the fastener assembly in the steel plate with sufficient spacers or washers to bring the bolt

end out at least flush with the tightened nut, to a maximum bolt stick-out of three threads. Provide three to five threads in the length of bolt between the inside faces of the nut and bolt head. Always use a hardened washer under the nut.

6.4 Snug the bolt by applying no more than 20% of the torque allowed in Table 6 below, using a

torque wrench. Measure and record the torque (with the nut in motion) on the bolt. 6.5 Match-mark the nut, bolt and plate. 6.6 Tighten the nut with the torque wrench by the number of turns from Table 5. Use a hand wrench

to ensure that the bolt does not turn. Measure and record the torque with the nut in motion.

Table 5

Bolt Length

4 x bolt dia. or less Greater than 4 but no more

than 8 x bolt dia. Required Rotation 1/3 turn 1/2 turn

If the measured torque from section 6.6 exceeds the appropriate value from Table 6, the fastener assembly has failed the test. Assemblies that fail prior to completing this rotation, by stripping or fracture, fail the test.

Table 6

Bolt Dia. (in.) ½ 5/8 ¾ 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 ¼ 1 3/8 1 1/2 Torque (Ft/lbs) 150 290 500 820 1230 1500 2140 2810 3690

Bolt Dia. (mm) 20 22 24 Tension (N-m) 710 1100 1570

6.7 Tighten the nut further by the appropriate number of turns from Table 7, using the reference mark

from section 6.5. Assemblies that fail prior to completing this rotation, by stripping or fracture, fail the test.

Table 7

Bolt Length

4 x bolt dia. or less Greater than 4 but no more

than 8 x bolt dia. Required Rotation 2/3 turn 1 turn

6.8 Remove the nut and the bolt from the plate and examine them. The fastener assembly has failed

the test if threads show signs of stripping, shear or torsion failure or the nut fails to turn freely by hand, on those threads occupied by the nut in the test position. (The nut does not have to freely turn the entire length of the thread to pass this test.)

7 Report: 7.1 Date tested, 7.2 Name of tester,

MT 407-05 (09/01/05)

4 of 4

7 Report: (continued) 7.3 Procedure performed (A or B), 7.4 Bolt length, 7.5 Bolt tension, 7.6 Bolt torque at tension.

MT 408-09 (23/01/09)

Page 1 of 4

Methods of Sampling and Testing MT 408-10

Method of Sampling and Field Testing Liquid Deicing Material 1 Scope: 1.1 This method covers the sampling and testing of liquid magnesium chloride deicing material in the

field. 2 Reference Documents: 2.1 Pacific Northwest Snowfighters (PNS) snow and ice control chemical products

specifications and test protocols for the PNS association of British Columbia, Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Oregon and Washington.

2.2 ASTM E126 - 05a Standard Test Method for Inspection, Calibration, and Verification of ASTM Hydrometer

2.3 ASTM D891 - 09 Standard Test Methods for Specific Gravity, Apparent, of Liquid Industrial

Chemicals 3 Terminology: 3.1 Deicer, a device or a chemical substance for preventing or removing ice. 4 Apparatus: 4.1 1-gallon jug (NEW, not used) and a label, 4.2 Hydrometer meeting ASTM E126 with an appropriate scale that includes the target range, 4.3 Hydrometer Cylinder, 4.4 Personal protection equipment (rubber gloves, eye protection, etc), 4.5 Deicer sampling checklist. 5 Field Inspection: 5.1 Document and maintain records on all deliveries, including those that are rejected. 5.2 Check to ensure that the product is being delivered according to the terms of the contract.

Document the following information:

Bill of Lading with the following information: Name of product Supplier and manufacturer of product Delivery Destination Total number of units being delivered Total weight of delivery using certified scale tickets or certified flow meter. Lot number of product Date of the order,

Date and time of delivery, Verification of advance delivery notification, Delivered in allowable times, Name of Delivery Company and license plate numbers,

MT 408-09 (23/01/09)

Page 2 of 4

5 Field Inspection: (continued)

Are any price adjustment assessments required, Is the product being delivered what was ordered, Document all procedures prior to unloading, Verify that all papers required of a delivery are present, complete and legible, Legible and current MSDS, Certified weight slip. 6 Unloading: 6.1 Visually inspect the discharge valve prior to unloading for the presence of any foreign material. 6.2 Visually inspect the delivered product again while unloading. If problems are noted that are a

cause for rejection of the load, immediately halt the unloading process. Take photos and record any pertinent information. Conduct the following procedures if the material is to be rejected.

6.2.1 If the product fails the field inspection or testing, reload the product and reject the load. 6.2.2 If reloading can’t be accomplished, (mixed with previous product) note the amount of the product

pumped into the tank and total product now in the tank. 6.2.3 Circulate the contents of the tank and then take 2 one-gallon (4 liter) samples of the contaminated

product now in the tank. 6.2.4 Determine and record the specific gravity of the samples. 6.2.5 Take appropriate action as needed to ensure the integrity of the product on hand if possible.

Determine if all products on hand will have to be removed.

6.2.6 Forward all sample directly to MDT’s Materials laboratory for testing. 6.2.7 Immediately advise the Purchasing Services Bureau of any ordering, delivery, storage, or product

quality issues. 7 Sampling: 7.1 Remove one gallon of sample from the supplier’s truck. Visually inspect the sample and reject the

delivery if any foreign material is present. 7.2 Purge a minimum of one gallon of product to ensure hoses are free of contamination. Take a one-

gallon sample from the transfer hose in three equal parts, compositely mixed together, to make up the sample that will be submitted to the laboratory for testing. Collect the samples during unloading as the first third, the second third and the last third of the product is being delivered. If the trailer or pup has compartments, take the three equal samples from only one of the compartments to complete the sample.

7.3 Determine the specific gravity of the sample, as described in Section 8. Retain the sample in case

of dispute. Dispose of samples after notification by the Purchasing Services Bureau. 8 Specific Gravity Determination: 8.1 Carefully pour a sufficient quantity of deicer into a clean hydrometer cylinder, taking care to avoid

the formation of air bubbles.

MT 408-09 (23/01/09)

Page 3 of 4

8 Specific Gravity Determination: (continued) 8.2 Slowly lower the hydrometer in the liquid and release it. After the hydrometer stabilizes and floats

freely away from the walls of the cylinder, read the specific gravity at the point the meniscus intersects the hydrometer in accordance to ASTM D891.

8.3 Record your results on the Deicer Sampling Checklist.

MT 408-09 (23/01/09)

Page 4 of 4

Magnesium Liquid Deicer Sampling Checklist 1 Which tank will product be pumped into?______________________

Gallons of de-icer in tank prior to pumping_____________________

Gallons after delivery__________________________ 2 Before pumping any material, take a 1-gallon pre-sample. Visually inspect the

sample for contamination with foreign material. Determine the specific gravity. Allow pumping to start and dispose of pre-sampled material and go to step 3. Re-sample the material if the sample appears to be contaminated or if it fails the specific gravity. If the second sample appears contaminated or fails the specific gravity, politely inform the delivery driver his product does not meet MDT specification and you must reject the load. If product is rejected immediately contact your supervisor. Retain the second sample for the supervisor. Specific gravity of pre-sample ________________________

3 Choose one compartment from either truck or trailer to take the official sample.

Purge a minimum of one gallon of product to ensure hoses are free of contamination. Take a one-gallon sample in three equal parts, compositely mixed together, to make up the sample that will be submitted to the laboratory for testing. Collect the samples during unloading as the first third, the second third and the last third of the product is being delivered. If the trailer or pup has compartments, take the three equal samples from only one of the compartments to complete the sample. Clean the outside of the sample container and attach the label.

4 Determine the specific gravity of the sample. This must be done in view of the

delivery driver. 5 Record the following: Samplers Name:_________________________________Date: _______________ Time:_______________ Location:_______________________________________ Specific Gravity _______________Tons of product delivered __________________ Truck _________ or trailer _________ # the sample was taken from. Delivery driver’s signature: ____________________________________________

MT 409-12 (10/01/12)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLINGB AND TESTING MT 409-12

METHOD OF ACCEPTANCE FOR WELDED STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS (MONTANA METHOD)

THIS PROCEDURE IS IN DEVELOPMENT

MT 410-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 3

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING

MT 410-04 METHOD OF INSPECTION, SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE OF PAINT, EPOXY AND THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL (Montana Method) 1 Scope: 1.1 This procedure describes the inspection, sampling, testing and acceptance of construction and

maintenance traffic line paint, structural steel primers and finish coats delivered to construction and maintenance projects.

2 Reference Documents: 2.1 ASTM Standards, Federal Test Methods Std. 141: D-711 No - Pick-up Times for Traffic Paint D-1640 Drying, Curing, or Film Formation of Organic Coatings at Room Temperature D-969 Laboratory Determination of Degree of Bleeding of Traffic Paint D-1210 Fineness of Dispersion of Pigment-Vehicle Systems D-562 Consistency of Paints Using Stormer Viscometer D-823 Producing Films of Uniform Thickness of Paint, Varnishes, and Related Products on Test

Panels D-522 Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings D-1475 Density of Paint, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Products D-4060 Abrasion Resistance on Organic Coatings by the Tabor Abaser 6192 Federal Test Method Std. No. 141 Method 6192 MT Manual: MT-601 Montana Test Methods-Methods of Sampling and Testing 3 Sampling: 3.1 Two samples are required for each lot or batch of paint used on a project. Suitable containers for

each type of paint are listed below. 3.1.1 Sample Waterborne paints using a clean, one-liter (quart), lined, metal can or plastic “Nalgene”

bottle. Do not use unlined metal containers for Waterborne paint samples. 3.1.2 Sample Alkyd paints using a clean, one-liter (quart), unlined, metal “Asphalt” sampling can. Do

not use plastic “Nalgene” containers for Alkyd paint samples. 3.1.3 Sample Epoxy paints using a clean, one-liter (quart), lined or unlined metal can or plastic

“Nalgene” container. 3.1.4 Sample Aluminum Mastic paints using a clean, one-liter (quart), unlined metal “Asphalt” can. Do

not use plastic “Nalgene” containers for Aluminum Mastic paint samples. 3.2 Construction Projects - Project quantities of 19 liters (5 gallons) or less: No field sample required.

Attach the label from the paint container to a Miscellaneous Form 46 and submit to the Materials Bureau.

3.3 Construction Projects - Project quantities greater than 19 liters (5 gallons) but less than 95 liters

(25 gallons): No field sample is required. Sample if the type or quality is suspect, at the option of the Department. Submit Manufacturer's Certification to the Materials Bureau attached to a Miscellaneous Form 45.

MT 410-04 (06/01/04)

2 of 3

3 Sampling: (continued) 3.4 Construction Projects - Project quantities of 95 liters (25 gallons) or more: 3.4.1 Duplicate, one-liter (quart) samples will be taken from the thoroughly mixed contents of a striping

machine or container representing each lot. Both samples will be forwarded to the Materials Bureau for testing with a Miscellaneous Form 45. Acceptance will be based on the test report issued by the Materials Bureau. CONSTRUCTION PAINT WILL NOT BE PRETESTED AT THE POINT OF MANUFACTURE.

4 Maintenance Traffic Paint: 4.1 Duplicate one-liter (quart) samples of thoroughly mixed paint per lot or batch will be sampled by

the Montana Department of Transportation at the point of manufacture and be forwarded to the Materials Bureau for testing. Acceptance will be based on the test report issued by the Materials Bureau.

4.2 For each paint shipment received, a Field Inspection Report - Miscellaneous Material Form

No. 46 shall be prepared and mailed to the Materials Bureau. This report shall indicate the type, quantity, and condition of the paint together with source information (Manufacturer and Lot No., etc.). The label may be taken from the container and attached to the inspection report to transmit the source information.

5 Epoxy Pavement Marking Material: 5.1 Epoxy pigment and catalyst will be sampled separately and submitted in accordance with 3.1.3

and submit to the Materials Bureau for testing. Manufacturer's certification will be attached to a Miscellaneous Form 45 and submitted with the samples.

6 Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Material: 6.1 Thermoplastic will be sampled at the point of application. Approximately ½ kilo (1 pound) of the

solid material will be submitted to the Materials Bureau for testing. The inspector will supply sample containers. Manufacturer's certification will be attached to a Miscellaneous Form 45 and submitted with the samples.

7 Testing: 7.1 Test methods used for testing paint shall conform to ASTM, Federal Test Methods Standard No.

141, latest revisions, or tests and methods described below: 7.1.1 Flexibility - Apply the paint to produce a 0.0762 mm (0.003 inch) dry film on a 0.25 mm (0.10")

tin panel. Air dry at twenty-five (25) degrees centigrade plus or minus 2 degrees (25 °C ± 2°C) or 77 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus 4 degrees (77 °F ± 4 °F) for at least four (4) hours and then bend over 6.4 mm (1/4 inch) diameter mandrel. The film shall not crack when subjected to the above prescribed flexibility test.

7.1.2 Adhesion: Prepare the panel as for the flexibility test. Place the panel on a 3.2 mm (1/8 inch)

thick rubber pad. Strike a sharp blow with a ball peen hammer to cause an indentation of 1.27 mm to 2.54 mm (0.05 to 0.10 inch). There shall be no cracking, chipping or peeling when subjected to the above-prescribed test.

7.1.3 Skinning: In a 250 ml. paint container (1/2 pint), fill 1/2 full with the paint. Examine after

24 hours for skinning. There shall be no skinning.

MT 410-04 (06/01/04)

3 of 3

7 Testing: (continued) 7.1.4 Settling: Fill a 100 ml. centrifuge tube with paint and revolve for 2 hrs. at a speed producing a

centrifugal force of 1,112 Newton (250 pounds). A separation of not more than 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) of the pigment is acceptable. The pigment in the bottom of the tube should be soft and easily dispersed with a spatula.

7.1.5 Abrasion: ASTM D-4060 (Test Method for Epoxy Traffic Paint). 7.1.5.1 Abrasion: Federal Test Method Std. No. 141, Method 6192. Panels may be coated by dipping,

spraying or by means of film applicator. Dry at 25 °C ± 2 °C (77 °F ± 4 °F) for 24 hours, cure at 49 °C (120 °F) for 72 hours, cool to room temperature and subject to Tabor Abrasion Test using CS-10 wheels, 1000 gram load per wheel and at least 500 revolutions. The dry film thickness should not be less than 0.003 inches prior to testing. The Department performs this test starting with a wet paint thickness of 0.254 mm ± 0.051 mm (0.010 ± 0.002 inch).

7.1.6 Hiding: Use a Standard Horest Hiding Power Chart. Apply at a rate of 16.26 square meters (175

square feet) per 3.785 liters (one gallon). Visual examination will determine acceptance.

7.1.7 Film Appearance: Visual examination of dry film on tin panel is performed. The paint shall dry to a flat finish.

7.1.8 Light Resistance: Apply a wet film of 0.381 mm (0.012 inches) to two clean 76.2 mm x 127 mm

(3x5 inches) tin panels and allow to dry horizontally for twenty-four (24) hours. Expose one (1) of the panels to direct sunlight or to a carbon arc light (no water spray) for a period equivalent to seven (7) hours of direct sunlight. The other panel shall not be exposed. Finally examine both panels and compare for darkening. The yellow paint shall not darken appreciably when subjected to the above-prescribed test.

MT 412-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 412-04

TOPSOIL SAMPLING, SAMPLE PREPARATION AND TESTING

1 Scope: 1.1 It is intended that the procedure for sampling and testing topsoil shall apply (1) only to topsoil that

has been imported from another source (other than the project), and ( 2 ) to any topsoil intended for use in planting lawns, shrubs, trees or other particular plants which require special soil. It is not necessary to sample or test topsoil (termed salvaging and placing) which has been stripped and is stockpiled for later replacement on median areas, outer separation areas and side slopes of roadway areas.

2 Referenced Documents: 2.1 AASHTO: T 2 Sampling of Aggregates 3 Sampling Procedures: 3.1 Samples shall be obtained from each kind or type of soil (homogeneous area) Soil types may be

identified from visual appearance, present vegetative growth, or soils classification primary group from an Engineering Soil Survey.

3.1.1 Samples of sub-soils may also be taken from borings in conjunction with Engineering Soil Survey. 3.1.2 Samples from stockpiles or from loaded transports may be taken in accordance with procedures

outlined in AASHTO T 2. 3.2 Samples from the layer of soil proposed for use as topsoil shall be labled “topsoil”. Samples from

the layer of soil over which the topsoil is to be placed shall be labeled “subsoil.” Insignificantly small, unusual areas may be omitted in sampling.

3.3 A sample shall be a composite of material taken from three sample sites in the following manner: 3.3.1 Dig a V-shaped hole through the thickness of the layer of soil being sampled (if a surface sample)

and remove a ½ inch thick slice of soil from one side of it. 3.3.2 Trim off from each side of the slice all but a thin ribbon of soil down the center of the spade face

and place this in a clean bucket. 3.3.3 Mix equal size samples representing similar soils thoroughly and keep two pounds for testing. 3.4 The sampler shall identify the samples by number and the location from which they were taken.

Observations concerning the soil’s apparent ability to support plant growth such as the presence or absence of usual or unusual vegetative types, swamps, rock, salt encrustations, etc., should be noted and recorded with the identification data.

4 Sample Preparation: 4.1 Samples shall be allowed to air dry. Larger stones shall be removed by hand and the remainder

sieved through a 10 mesh sieve. Note - Material larger than the ten mesh shall be weighed as gravel and the percent by weight recorded

on form to accompany sample. The minus 10 mesh fraction is retained for the soils test and submitted to the Helena Laboratory.

MT 412-04 (06/01/04)

2 of 2

5 Testing Procedures: 5.1 Conductivity - A measured volume of 15 ml. Of soil is placed in a 50 ml. Beaker. To this is added

30 ml. of distilled water. The suspension is allowed to stand about one-half hour, being stirred several times during this period. Conductivity is measured using a pipette cell.

5.2 Soil ph - The suspension from conductivity measurement sample is decanted and discarded,

saving the sediment for the ph measurement. The ph measurement is taken with a glass electrode ph meter.

6 Reagents: 6.1 K 2 Cr 2 O 7, 1.0 N - Dissolve exactly 49.04 grams K 2 Cr 2 O 7 in distilled water and dilute to one

liter. 6.2 Fe (NH 4 ) 2 (SO 2 ) , approximately 0.5 N - Dissolve 200 grams FE ( NH 4 ) 2 ( SO 4 ) 2 6H 2 O in 800 ml. Distilled water containing 20 ml. H 2 SO 4 and dilute to one liter.

6.3 Ferroin indicator - 0.025 M solution purchased ready for use. 7 Procedure: 7.1 Place 1 gm of soil in a 250 ml. Erlenmeyer flask. Add 10 ml. Potassium dichromate with an

automatic pipette. Add 20 ml. Conc. Sulfuric acid from a burette. Mix and let stand 10 minutes. Dilute with 70 ml. Distilled water added from a burette. Titrate the excess dichromate with ferrous ammonium sulfate. At the end point, the ferroin changes from blue to red. Run a blank using dichromate and acid, but no soil. The blank titration should be between 19.5 and 20.5 ml.

% O. M. = BLANK – TITRATION

3

Note - If the titration is less than 5.0, the soil is re-analyzed using ½ gm. sample and is divided by 1.5.

8 References: Conductivity and pH: Montana Agriculture Experiment Station, Plant and Soil Science

Department, Circular No. 50 July 1968, Bozeman, MT Organic Matter: Jackson, M.L. , Soil Chemical Analysis. pp. 219-221, Prentiss-Hall, Inc., 1958.

MT 413-05 (09/01/05)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 413-05 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF FENCING MATERIAL 1 Scope: 1.1 This method is intended to cover the inspection, sampling, and testing of fencing materials. 2 Referenced Documents: 2.1 AASHTO: M 181 Chain Link Fence M 279 Metallic-Coated Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric M 280 Metallic-Coated (Carbon) Steel Barbed Wire M 281 Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot-Wrought Materials Manual: MT 404 Method for Inspecting Wood Products 3 General Information: 3.1 Material may be inspected and stored. Acceptable material must be identified by tagging or

marking until used. 3.2 Visual inspection of mesh, posts and other parts shall be made for workmanship, dimension,

condition of galvanizing and freedom from defects in accordance with specifications. Galvanizing shall be checked for excessive roughness, blisters, sal ammoniac spots, bruises, and flaking. Care and judgment must be exercised in making this inspection. Weave and finish (knuckling or barbed) of mesh shall be checked for compliance with specifications.

3.3 If gates are included in the order the design, general workmanship, dimensions, and condition of

galvanizing shall be checked for conformance with specifications and applicable drawings. Welded connections shall be inspected to see that they have been cleaned and re-galvanized or painted with approved paint. Whenever practical, materials used and galvanizing procedure shall be checked for compliance with specifications. Observing the fabrication when feasible will be helpful in this regard.

3.4 Samples shall be submitted to the Materials Bureau accompanied by completed Lab. Form No. 45. 3.5 Upon completion of a project, the Project Manager shall submit a report to the Materials Bureau

showing the quantity of each type of material inspected and sampled. 3.6 As a guide to the inspector, all applicable specifications for fencing materials can be found in

Montana Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 712. 4 Chain Link Fence: 4.1 Inspect and sample chain link fence according to AASHTO M 181. 5 Woven Wire: 5.1 Inspect and sample woven wire according to AASHTO M 279.

MT 413-05 (09/01/05)

2 of 2

6 Barbed Wire: 6.1 Inspect and sample barbed wire according to AASHTO M 280. The following is provided as a

general guide for field personnel: 6.1.1 Field inspection for General Workmanship: For the purpose of inspection, a maximum of two spools

from the lot shall be inspected for barb length, spacing, overall length, and workmanship. Inspection for barb spacing is normally performed on the outer 25 feet (7.6 m) length of a spool.

Note 1 – Field personnel may measure barb spacing and inspect for general workmanship. When the barb

spacing is measured in the field, the results must be forwarded to the Materials Bureau along with samples for physical testing.

6.1.2 Re-Inspection: If either of the sample spools fails to meet the requirements for barb length,

spacing, overall length, and workmanship, two additional spools shall be selected at random for inspection. If either of these spools fails to meet the requirements, the lot will be rejected.

6.1.3 Sampling: For test purposes, select one spool at random from every 50 spools or fraction thereof in

a lot, or a total of seven samples, whichever is less. A lot shall consist of all the spools of a single construction (Design Number) of barbed wire delivered at the same time.

6.1.4 Test Specimens for Physical Testing: Cut a 4-foot (1.2 m) length of barbed wire from the end of

each spool and submit to the Materials Bureau for testing. The specimen(s) will be tested for mass of coating and breaking strength.

6.1.5 Lot Size for Retests: If one or more of the individual wire specimens fails, retest the lot. For retest

purposes, four additional spools of barbed wire for each 50 spools shall be sampled. The lot size then becomes 50 spools.

7 Hardware for Barbed or Woven Wire: 7.1 Inspection - Stay wires, brace wires, tie wires, and wire clamps shall be inspected for gauge,

condition of galvanizing and compliance with specifications. Any tendency of coating to flake off when wire is manipulated should be observed and noted.

8 Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies: 8.1 Inspect and sample steel fence posts and assemblies according to AASHTO M 281. 9 Wood Fence Posts: 9.1 Inspect and sample wood fence posts according to MT 404.

MT 414-09 (06/05/09)

1 of 5

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING

MT 414-09 METHOD OF ACCEPTANCE FOR REINFORCING STEEL 1 Scope: 1.1 The procedure set forth in this method will be followed for the acceptance of all reinforcing steel.

The acceptance will be based on certain documents and random sampling. 2 Referenced Documents: 2.1 AASHTO: M 31 Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM: A 615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 3 Required Documents: 3.1 For each shipment of reinforcing steel delivered to the project, the contractor shall furnish two

copies each of the following documents to the Project Manager: 3.1.1 Shipping invoice that shows the weight of all the steel in the shipment. Note 1 - In the event the steel does not meet the specification requirements, a copy of the

manufacturer's invoiced price per pound for this material must be provided. 3.1.2 A signed and dated contractors Certificate of Compliance (Form 406).

3.2 A shipment shall consist of the entire amount of reinforcing steel in each truckload delivered to the project. When a shipment is made by railroad, each 20 tons or fraction thereof will be considered a shipment.

3.3 The Project Manager will retain one set of the documents shown above for his files. The other set

will be forwarded to the Materials Bureau after the Project Manager has indicated on the invoice the method by which the steel was accepted. One of the following statements, together with the Project Manager's signature, will be shown on the invoice sent to Helena:

3.3.1 "Shipment accepted on Form 46 and Form 406, no sample taken." 3.3.2 "Shipment accepted on Form 46 and Form 406 and acceptable test results." 4 Random Sample Requirement: 4.1 In addition to the required documents, a minimum random sampling procedure will be adopted. 4.2 As shipments of steel arrive on the project, it will be the responsibility of the Project Manager to

decide how many samples, if any, he will take and when and where they will be taken. Sampling will be done by the contractor as directed by the Project Manager in accordance with MT-601, using table 1 as a guide to indicate the minimum number of samples to be taken.

4.3 The following are locations in the structure where reinforcing steel samples may be taken, or the

remaining portion of the sampled bar may be placed, without adverse effect on the structure. The Bridge Bureau must be contacted if clarification is required on the location of any sample bar.

MT 414-09 (06/05/09)

2 of 5

4 Random Sample Requirement: (continued) 4.3.1 Footing - The outermost bar in the mat may be sampled. The portion of the bar remaining shall

be centered in the footing and used as is. 4.3.2 Column - The bar nearest the centerline of bent at centerline of structure may be sampled. The

sample shall be taken from the top end. The remaining portion of the bar may be used as is. 4.3.3 Slab - Transverse Steel - Take sample from bar in bottom layer. Center remaining portion of bar

between curbs. 4.3.4 Slab - Longitudinal Steel - Take sample from any line of bars in bottom of slab adjacent to edge

of a beam at the end of slab. 4.3.5 Curb - No sample need be taken. 4.3.6 Bent Cross Beam - The center bar in bottom layer at bottom of beam may be sampled. Center

remaining portion of bar between columns. 4.3.7 T Type Pier Cap - The center bar in bottom layer at top of cap may be sampled. Center

remaining portion of bar over column. 4.3.8 If re-sampling under paragraph 6.1.1.1 becomes necessary because of a failure, it will be

necessary for the contractor to replace the sampled portion plus the required lap length. 4.4 Samples taken will be forwarded immediately to the Materials Bureau for testing in accordance

with ASTM A 615 or AASHTO M 31. 4.5 The shipment under test shall be kept separate from the other steel on the project until test

results have been received. 4.6 Steel taken for the purpose of sampling may have to be replaced in the structure. When

replacement is necessary it shall be done by the contractor at no cost to the State. 5 Domestic Materials: 5.1 No steel will be accepted if it does not comply with Montana Standard Specification for Road and

Bridge Construction, Section 106.09. 6 Failing Steel: 6.1 In case there is a failure in any size tested under this random sampling procedure, the steel may

be rejected in accordance with 6.1.1 or, a price reduction will be assessed in accordance with 6.1.2.

6.2 The failing steel may be ordered removed and replaced at no cost to the State if either of the two

check samples fail as described in paragraph 6.1.1.1, below. 6.3 In the event that a sample of reinforcing steel fails, two additional samples representing the

sample that failed may be submitted. Both of the check samples must meet specifications before the shipment will be accepted without price reduction.

6.4 If the Bridge Engineer determines that the steel is usable, a price reduction will be assessed

against the contractor. The price reduction will be calculated using the following formula: P = A x B where:

MT 414-09 (06/05/09)

3 of 5

6 Failing Steel: (continued) A = total invoice price of reinforcing steel in the lot.* B = 10%, 20% or 30% dependent upon departure from specifications. The value to be used

shall be determined by the Bridge Engineer. P = Price reduction for the Lot. * A lot is defined as all of the bars of one bar number and pattern of deformation contained in an

individual shipment. 7 Standard Weights, Diameters and Number Designations: 7.1 The standard weights and diameters of deformed reinforcing bars and their number designations

shall be those listed in Table 1. 7.1.1 The three minimum yield levels of bars are: 40,000 psi; 60,000 psi; and 75,000 psi, designated

as Grade 40, Grade 60, and Grade 75, respectively. 7.1.2 The nominal dimensions of a deformed bar are equivalent to those of a plain round bar having

the same weight per foot as the deformed bar. 7.1.3 Bar numbers are based on the number of eighths of an inch included in the nominal diameter of

the bars.

MT 414-09 (06/05/09)

4 of 5

TABLE 1 English Version

Bar Size

Nominal Dia.

Inches

Wt. Lb.

Per Ft.

Minimum Sampling Frequency per Project

3 .375 .376 No sample for less than 2 tons 1 sample for ea. 5 tons or fraction

4 .500 .668 No sample for less than 5 tons 1 sample for ea. 40 tons or fraction

5 .625 1.043 No sample for less than 5 tons 1 sample for ea. 40 tons or fraction

6 .750 1.502 No sample for less than 5 tons 1 sample for ea. 85 tons or fraction

7 .875 2.044 No sample for less than 5 tons 1 sample for ea. 85 tons or fraction

8 1.000 2.670 No sample for less than 10 tons 1 sample for ea. 150 tons or fraction

9 1.128 3.400 No sample for less than 10 tons 1 sample for ea. 150 tons or fraction

10 1.270 4.303 No sample for less than 10 tons 1 sample for ea. 240 tons or fraction

11 1.410 5.313 No sample for less than 10 tons 1 sample for ea. 240 tons or fraction

14 1.693 7.650 One sample

18 2.257 13.600 One sample

MT 414-09 (06/05/09)

5 of 5

TABLE 1 Metric Version

Bar Size

Nominal Dia. mm

Wt. Kg/m

Minimum Sampling Frequency per Project

10 9.5 0.560 No sample for less than 2 metric tons (t) 1 sample for ea. 5 metric tons (t)or fraction

13 12.7 0.994 No sample for less than 5 metric tons (t) 1 sample for ea. 36 metric tons (t)or fraction

16 15.69 1.552 No sample for less than 5 metric tons (t) 1 sample for ea. 36 metric tons (t)or fraction

19 19.1 2.235 No sample for less than 5 metric tons (t) 1 sample for ea. 77 metric tons (t)or fraction

22 22.2 3.042 No sample for less than 5 metric tons (t) 1 sample for ea. 77 metric tons (t)or fraction

25 25.4 3.973 No sample for less than 9 metric tons (t) 1 sample for ea. 136 metric tons (t)or fraction

29 28.7 5.060 No sample for less than 9 metric tons (t) 1 sample for ea. 136 metric tons (t)or fraction

32 32.3 6.404 No sample for less than 9 metric tons (t) 1 sample for ea. 218 metric tons (t)or fraction

36 35.8 7.907 No sample for less than 9 metric tons (t) 1 sample for ea. 218 metric tons (t)or fraction

43 43.0 11.38 One sample

57 57.3 20.24 One sample

MT 415-12 (10/01/12)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING

MT 415-12

METHOD OF ACCEPTANCE FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL

THIS PROCEDURE IS IN DEVELOPMENT

MT 418-04 (06/01/04)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLINGB AND TESTING MT 418-04

METHOD OF ACCEPTANCE FOR MISECLLANEOUS WELDED ITEMS (MONTANA METHOD)

1 Scope: 1.1 This method is intended as a guide for the acceptance of miscellaneous, low stress carrying

welded items. It does not cover any welding in connection with bridge related items.

2 Referenced Documents: 2.1 Montana Department of Transportation Detailed Drawings 3 Field Welding Acceptance: 3.1 The low stress carrying members listed in 3.1.1, 3.1.2, and 3.1.3 below can be approved by the

field provided the welding has been done by a qualified welder in accordance with AWS D1.1 Current edition, Limited Thickness. In the event that field welding is necessary, contact the Bridge Bureau for welder qualification tests.

3.1.1 Trash guard racks (MDT Detailed Drawing No. 615-02) and median inlet covers (MDT Detailed

Drawing No. 604-00).

3.1.2 Guardrail terminal section anchor plates (MDT Detailed Drawing No. 606-86).

3.1.3 Ladders, stairways, scale pit angles, grates, and miscellaneous items associated with weigh stations, rest areas, and observation points.

4 Acceptance Procedure: 4.1 The procedure listed in 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, and 4.1.4 below must be followed for the acceptance

of welded items covered in this method.

4.1.1 A copy of the mill test results must accompany the material.

4.1.2 A copy of the welder qualification form or other verification must accompany the material.

4.1.3 The items must be visually inspected and the welds examined for appearance, size, undercut, and porosity.

4.1.4 Items 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 must be attached to the visual inspection report and submitted in the usual manner.

MT 420-04 (06/01/04)

1of 3

METHOD OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 420-04

PROCEDURE TO CHECK FOR LEAKS UNDER HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE

1 Scope: 1.1 This procedure is used to determine the degree of water tightness for corrugated metal irrigation

or siphon pipe and couplers. This test is customarily performed at the fabrication plant, but can also be performed in the field.

2 Apparatus and Equipment: 2.1 Bulkheads shall consist of the following: 2.1.1 A two-foot section of corrugated steel pipe of the specific diameter to be tested. Pipe sections

with helical corrugations shall be re-rolled at the outer ends to form at least two corrugations to fully accommodate band couplers.

2.1.2 Two squares pieces of 1/8 inch thick steel plate, with a dimension four inches greater than the

diameter of the pipes to be tested.

2.1.3 Four lengths of 2 inch x 2 inch x ¼ inch steel angles to be used as braces with a length equal to the dimension of the plates.

2.1.4 One – 3 inch galvanized steel elbow.

2.1.5 One – 3 inch galvanized cap with a ¾ inch threaded hole at center.

2.1.6 One – ¾ inch, or longer, gate valve to accommodate a water hose.

2.1.7 Two full length section of culvert. 2.1.8 Three approved band couplers with appropriate gaskets.

2.1.9 2 inch x 4 inch wood bracing blocks 3 feet in length.

2.2 The bulkheads consist of two 2-foot sections of corrugated steel pipe, of the diameter of the pipe

to be tested, to which a braced 1/8 inch square plate has been welded to one end. One bulkhead is fitted with a 3 inch galvanized elbow. The elbow is welded vertically to the top of the plate. The horizontal leg of the elbow must be located directly below the trough of the culvert corrugation to prevent air entrapment (See fig. 1).

2.3 A 3 inch removable, galvanized filler cap with ¾ inch dia. hole at center is to accommodate a

standpipe for observing the static pressure head applied (see fig. 1 & fig. 2). 2.4 A ¾ inch dia. Gate valve is to accommodate the pressurized hose attached to the bottom of the

steel back plate. This valve is to provide a constant head of water in the stand pipe during the tests and also to serve as a drain after testing is completed (see fig. 1).

2.5 The stand pipe shall consist of the following: 2.5.1 Four – 5 foot sections of ¾ inch galvanized pipe. 2.5.2 Three – ¾ inch galvanized tees. 2.5.3 Three – ¾ inch galvanized plugs. 2.5.4 One – 8 inch funnel.

MT 420-04 (06/01/04)

2of 3

3 Procedure: 3.1 After attaching the bulkheads to the culvert test sections, the sections are coupled together,

braced at the center to prevent sagging, and are filled to capacity with water. 3.2 The 20 foot stand pipe ( fig. 2 ) is assembled and attached to the 3 inch elbow filler cap.

3.3 Water is introduced into the stand pipe from the bottom by means of the gate valve.

3.4 With water flowing continuously out of the first or bottom tee, and after waiting for a period of five

minutes, a close examination is made of the test section for evidence of leakage.

3.5 The tee is plugged and the process repeated at each five foot increment until water flows out of the top of the stand pipe, the maximum twenty foot head.

3.6 A slight indication of “sweating” or “seepage ‘ at the test seams is permissible for irrigation pipe.

Dripping or free flow of water is not acceptable. No sweating or other seepage for siphon pipe applications is permissible. If only the pipe seams are being tested but not the bands, some leakage at the bands may be allowed.

MT 420-04 (06/01/04)

3of 3

4 Frequency of Test: 4.1 Each diameter of pipe at least once a year at the discretion of the inspector.

MT 421-09 (06/01/09)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 421-09 METHOD OF SAMPLING GEOSYNTHETICS (Construction Fabric and Geogrid) 1 Scope: 1.1 This method covers the sampling of Geosynthetics. Geosynthetics generally fall into one of the

following catagories; woven and non-woven Geotextiles, Geogrids, Geocomposites, Geomembranes and Geosynthetic Clay Liner (GCL).

2 Description: 2.1 Geotextiles are permeable materials comprised of fibers or yarns combined into planar textile

structures. The majority are either woven or non-woven (as described below) and are used for strength, separation, drainage, filtrationand erosion control purposes.

Woven – Geotextile that are typically made of monofilament, multifilament or fibrillated

yarns. Non-woven – Geotextile that is manufactured using a process in which synthetic polymer

fibers are continuously extruded and spun. The fibers or filaments are then connected by needle punching or heat bonding.

2.2 Geogrid consists of polymer mats constructed either of coated yarns or punched and stretched

polymer sheets that allow interlocking of surrounding geomaterials and are commonly used for soil reinforcement.

2.3 Geocomposites generally consist of a geonet or a cuspated or dimpled polyethylene drainage

core wrapped in a geotextile and are often used as edge drains, wall drains, vertical drains (wick drains), and sheet drains.

2.4 Geomembranes consist of impervious polymer sheets that are typically used to line ponds,

ditches, and landfills. 2.5 Geosynthetic Clay Liners (GCL) are manufactured hydraulic barriers consisting of sodium

bentonite clay sandwiched and binded between two geotextiles or attached with an adhesive to a geomembrane. Overlaps self-seal when the sodium bentonite hydrates. GCL’s are commonly used to control vertical or horizontal infiltration of moisture.

3 Referenced Documents: 3.1 AASHTO: M288 – Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications ASTM: D4354 – Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing MT Geotechnical Manual 4 Sample: 4.1 Prior to installation of the geosynthetic the following requirements are necessary to insure proper

selection for each type of application: 4.1.1 The contractor shall submit to the EPM two copies of a notarized manufacturer's certificate of

compliance signed by a legally authorized official of the manufacturer and notarized. The

MT 421-09 (06/01/09)

2 of 2

4 Sample: (continued) certification shall represent physical and chemical test results that were performed on a

representative lot of material being used by the department. 4.1.2 In addition to certifications, a sample for Acceptance testing is required. 4.1.3 All sampling of geosynthetics,will be done at the project and witnessed by the EPM or his

designee, for each type of application, i.e., geotextiles: separation, stabilization, subsurface drainage (Class A, B, or C) permanent erosion control (Class A, B, or C), silt fence (stabilized or unstabilized), geogrids, geocomposites GCL”s and geomembranes. Compare the manufacturer’s certificate of compliance to the specifications for the proposed application to ensure product compliance prior to acceptance and installation. Submit samples with certifications to the Materials Bureau for testing.

4.1.4 The size of sample for each application will be a minimum 4 foot wide strip cut across the full roll

taken from a wrap of geosynthetic not exposed to sunlight or abrasion (see Note 1). 4.1.5 Frequency of sampling shall be one sample for every 10,000 square yards (8,000 m2) of

application. 4.1.5.1 Each new roll used will be checked for variance of lot number and then, if necessary, resampled

and submitted to the Materials Bureau for testing. (See Note 2) 4.1.5.2 The direction of roll must be identified on the sample. Note 1 - The sample must be cut so that the cut edge is perpendicular to the roll (machine) direction. It

is important to identify the roll direction on the sample, as the direction of failure in the fabric must be identified.

Note 2 - Label the sample with the manufacturer's lot number and identification of fabric type, grade or

product name, date of sampling, project number and sample number. 5 Shipment and Storage: 5.1 Each geosynthetic roll shall be wrapped with a material that will protect the geosynthetic,

including the ends of the roll, from damage due to shipment, direct sunlight, ultra-violet radiation and contaminants. The protective material shall be maintained during shipping and storage.

5.2 During storage, geosynthetic rolls shall be elevated off of the ground and adequately covered to

protect them form the following: site construction damage, precipitation, extended ultraviolet radiation including sunlight, chemicals that are strong acids or bases, flames including welding sparks, temperatures in excess of 160° F (71° C), and other environmental conditions that may damage the physical properties of the geosynthetic.

6 Specifications: 6.1 For basis of acceptance and testing requirements refer to the Standard Specifications for Road

and Bridge Construction. Since the Materials Bureau has a strict acceptance policy, proper sampling and correct submittal is essential.

MT 422-12 (04/17/12)

1 of 5

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 422-12

METHOD OF TEST FOR SURFACE SMOOTHNESS AND PROFILE

1 Scope: 1.1 This method covers the testing of a finished flexible pavement surface for smoothness and profile.

The surface smoothness is expressed in International Roughness Index (IRI) in units of inches per mile. The surface profile is generated to locate variations in profile (e.g., bumps or dips). This method is not intended to be used with rigid pavement or gravel surfacing.

2 Reference Documents:

2.1 Operator’s Manual, Surface Systems & Instruments, LLC

Profiler Operations Manual (POM) for MDT Profilers (most recent version) MDT QC/QA Plan (most recent version)

3 Terminology:

3.1 International Roughness Index (IRI) – An index resulting from a mathematical simulation of vehicular

response to the longitudinal profile of a pavement using a 'quarter-car' simulation model as described in NCHRP Report 228.

4 Apparatus:

4.1 Class I laser road profiler as defined in ASTM E950. The road profiling system is mounted on a

vehicle, usually a van or truck. It consists of the following components: 4.1.1 Vertical, non-contact, height measurement systems (i.e., laser) capable of measuring the height

from the mounted sensor face to the surface of the pavement. 4.1.2 A linear distance measuring system (i.e., DMI) capable of measuring distance traveled. 4.1.3 An inertial referencing system (i.e., accelerometers) capable of measuring the movement of the

vehicle as it traverses the pavement. 5 Software: 5.1 The software must activate the testing using parameters (i.e., data collection initiation) that are

stored by the control setup. 5.2 The software must receive, display, and store raw data received from the profiler. 5.3 The software must be capable of accumulating desired output and printing results. 6 Calibration: 6.1 Perform a comprehensive calibration and sensor check at thirty (30) day intervals during

construction season. Check the DMI and verify Laser each day before use. 6.2 Calibration is used to establish and adjust the operating characteristics of the SSI system. There

are five (5) items that will either be calibrated or checked: laser height, distance measuring device, tire pressure, Accelerometer and Bounce Test.

6.3 Check tire pressure and inflate to manufacturer’s recommended psi. Special care should be given to the tire on which the DMI device is mounted.

MT 422-12 (04/17/12)

2 of 5

6 Calibration: (continued) 6.4 Laser Height Verification 6.4.1 The lasers have been calibrated at the factory. The lasers can only be verified.

6.4.2 A verification check of the laser will be performed each day before use.

6.4.3 A full verification check of the laser sensors must also be performed whenever problems are

suspected, or when a sensor is repaired or replaced. 6.5 Facility for Laser Height Verification 6.5.1 Each MDT District should have a facility available (e.g.; enclosed garage at District). 6.5.2 Facility should have a level surface and be free of vibration. 6.6 Procedure for Laser Height Verification

6.6.1 Verify laser height in accordance with section 3.3 (pages 15-16) of the SSI Operations Manual. 6.7 Accelerometers 6.7.1 Accelerometers need an occasional static verification. Perform static verification (1) every 30 days

during times when the system is used frequently, (2) after any prolonged period that the system has not been used, (3) when repairs are performed on the accelerometer(s) or associated system, or (4) any time the system is generating data that appears erroneous or suspect.

6.8 Facility for Accelerometer Verification 6.8.1 Each MDT District should have a facility available (e.g.; enclosed Garage at District). 6.8.2 Facility should have a level surface and be free of vibration. 6.9 Procedure for Accelerometer Verification 6.9.1 Perform the Accelerometer verification as per section 3.6 (page 21) of the SSI Operations Manual. 6.10 Bounce Test 6.10.1 The bounce test is a controlled-conditions procedure that uses the profiler’s built-in simulation

capabilities to test that the profiling system is operating properly. Perform the bounce test (1) every 30 days during times when the system is used frequently, (2) after any prolonged period that the system has not been used, (3) when repairs are performed on the associated system, or (4) any time the system is generating data that appears erroneous or suspect.

6.11 Facility for Bounce Test 6.11.1 Each MDT District should have a facility available (e.g.; enclosed garage at District).

6.11.2 Facility should have a level surface and be free of vibration. 6.12 Procedure for Bounce Test 6.12.1 Perform the Bounce Test as per sections 3.4 and 3.5 (page 17) of the SSI Operations Manual.

MT 422-12 (04/17/12)

3 of 5

6.13 Distance Measuring Instrument (DMI) 6.13.1 Calibrate DMI whenever problems are suspected, the tires are replaced, suspension repairs are

performed, wheels are rotated/ aligned, or repairs are performed on the DMI. 6.14 DMI Calibration Site 6.14.1 Each MDT District should have a calibration site established. 6.14.2 This site should be located on a straight portion of roadway that is reasonably level and has low

traffic volume. 6.14.3 The site should be measured with a standard surveying tape or wheel (using standard surveying

procedures), or laid out using an electronic distance measuring system.

6.15 Procedure for DMI Calibration 6.15.1 Calibrate the Distance Measuring Instrument (DMI) as per section 3.2 (pages 14-15) of the SSI

Operations Manual.

6.16 Record Keeping 6.16.1 SSI software has a Calibration/Verification Report that Tracks DMI Calibration and Accelerometer

Verification dates. That report may be printed from any Data Analysis files you may have. A simple record of all calibrations and verifications can be kept with the machine as per attached. (SEE “Calibration and Run Information” form)

7 Project Testing: 7.1 Preparation of Surface

7.1.1 Test the roadway only when it is free of moisture and any deleterious material that will not provide

accurate test results. 7.1.2 The Contractor is responsible for all work to prepare the roadway for testing, such as, but not limited

to sweeping off of debris. 7.1.3 Do not conduct testing while it is raining or under other weather conditions determined inclement by

the Engineering Project Manager (EPM). 7.2 Project Setup 7.2.1 Engineering Project Manager (EPM) or one of his/her representatives will meet with the Contractor

and identify the Beginning-of-Project (BOP), the End-of-Project (EOP), and all excluded areas (e.g., bridges not paved, curves with short radii).

7.2.2 If possible, project should be marked for testing using reflective tape or reflective traffic cones. This

is the preferred method. There are two other acceptable methods: back-up to start or manual. 7.2.3 If it is not feasible to use the photocell to initiate and stop data collection, data collection can be

initiated and stopped manually. When manually initiating and stopping profile data collection, cones should be placed at the beginning and end of the project to be used as reference points by the operator.

MT 422-12 (04/17/12)

4 of 5

7.3 Profiler Operations 7.3.1 Operation of profiler should be consistent with guidelines discussed in the latest version of the SSI

Profiler Operations Manual. This includes but is not limited to the following:

• Run in English unit system.

• If possible, initiate data collection via reflective surface and photocell.

• Use approved file naming convention. (Contract#_Lane Direction_Lane_Run#) example 09610_NB_DR_Run1

• Document any issues that occurred during testing.

• Process data with software.

• Properly backup data.

• Provide report to EPM or one of his/her representatives.

7.3.2 MDT collects two comparable runs.

• Once the operator is confident that a minimum of two comparable runs have been obtained, the

Quality Control Review and Bump Reports are used to evaluate their acceptability. Profiler runs should satisfy the following criteria:

• The average IRI values at each 1 mi (1.61 km) interval for each of the two runs are within ± 5.7%

of the mean IRI of both runs.

• If spikes (e.g., unusually high IRI) are present in the data, the operator should determine if spikes are pavement related or the result of equipment or operator error. The operator should examine the profile bump reports for discrepancies and features that cannot be explained by observed pavement features.

• Rerun the entire project if any one mile section does not match within the 5.7%

tolerance established in 7.3.2.1.1 and compare that run to the previous runs.

• Use the results of the two runs that compare for project acceptance.

• If the third run does not compare to either of the first two runs, recheck all calibrations and then rerun the entire project and compare the results to the previous runs. Use the two runs that compare favorably.

7.4 Testing Results 7.4.1 Results shall be provided to EPM or one of his/her representatives and shall be processed into

desired segments (e.g., 0.5 miles) as described in the contract Ride Specification. 7.4.2 A Roughness Report will be generated for the first profile run deemed to be within the comparison

values for each lane profiled. This report will contain the IRI values for the left and right wheel paths. These IRI values will be applied to the most recent pay incentives/disincentives as described in Ride Specification.

MT 422-12 (04/17/12)

5 of 5

7.4 Testing Results: (continued) 7.4.3 A Bump Report will be generated for the first profile run deemed to be error free for each lane

profiled. The Bump Report will indicate the locations of potential defects. These will be reviewed with the EPM. Location should be physically examined to determine if, at the EPM’s discretion, the location should be considered a defect.

CURRENT DATE OF REVISION MT 500 SECTION

CHEMISTRY Test Date of Method Publication No. Title Pages or Revision MT 501 pH, Insoluble Materials, Corrosion Rate, Percent Settleable Solids and

Percent Passing a #10 Sieve of Brine Materials ........................................... 1 pp Jun 2016

MT 502 Elemental Chemical Analysis Of Brine Materials .......................................... 7 pp Sep 2016

MT 503 Vacant

MT 504 Cyanide In Brine Material .............................................................................. Under Development

MT 505 Vacant

MT 506 Vacant

MT 507 Vacant

MT 508 Vacant

MT 509 Vacant

MT 510 Vacant

MT 511 Vacant

MT 512 Vacant

MT 513 Vacant

MT 514 Vacant

MT 515 Vacant

MT 516 Vacant

MT 517 Vacant

MT 518 Vacant

MT 519 Vacant

MT 520 Determination of Wear Metals in Engine Oil ................................................. Under Development

MT 521 Determination of Red Dye #26 in Diesel Fuel ............................................... 1 pp Sep 2016

MT 522 Vacant

MT 523 Vacant

MT 524 Vacant

MT 525 Vacant

MT 526 Moisture Analysis of PNS Category 8A, 8B, and 8C Solid Sodium Chloride 2 pp Jun 2016

MT 527 Vacant

MT 528 Vacant

MT 529 Vacant

1 of 2 Rev. 12/28/16

CURRENT DATE OF REVISION MT 500 SECTION

CHEMISTRY Test Date of Method Publication No. Title Pages or Revision MT 530 Determination of Chloride in Bridge Deck Cement by Ion Chromatography 5 pp Dec 2016

MT 531 Vacant

MT 532 Determination of Sulfate Content in Soils by Ion Chromatography .............. 4 pp Dec 2016

MT 533 Chemical Analysis of Fly Ash and Pozzolans ............................................... 9 pp Sep 2016

MT 534 Chemical Analysis of Portland Cement ......................................................... 8 pp Jun 2016

MT 535 Bridge Deck Crack Sealant IR Test .............................................................. Under Development

MT 536 Chemical Analysis of Silica Fume ................................................................. 1 pp Jun 2016

MT 537 Chemical Analysis of Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag (GGBFS) ..... 4 pp Sep 2016

MT 538 Chemical Analysis of Blended Cement ......................................................... Under Development

MT 539 Vacant

MT 540 Vacant

MT 541 Vacant

MT 542 Vacant

MT 543 Vacant

MT 544 Vacant

MT 545 Vacant

MT 546 Vacant

MT 547 Vacant

MT 548 Analysis of Traffic Paint................................................................................. 7 pp Jun 2016

2 of 2 Rev. 12/28/16

MT 501-16 (06/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 501-16

pH, INSOLUBLE MATERIAL, CORROSION RATE, PERCENT SETTLEABLE SOLIDS AND PERCENT PASSING A # 10 SIEVE OF BRINE MATERIALS

(Montana Method) MT 501 is identical to the 2010 Pacific Northwest Snowfighters Snow and Ice Control Chemical Products Specifications and Test Protocols for the PNS Association of British Columbia, Colorado, Idaho, Montana and Washington (http://pnsassociation.org/wp-content/uploads/PNSSPECS.pdf) except for the following stipulations: Test Method C 1 Perform a prescreening procedure for the Percent Total Settleable Solids methods. 1.1 Pour a well-mixed sample into a 50 ml conical bottom disposable vial to the 50 ml mark. Cap vial.

Repeat for all samples. Place the vials in a freezer at the test temperature designated below for 168 hours:

• Sodium Chloride: -17.8°C ± 1°C (0°F ± 2°F) • Magnesium Chloride: -17.8°C ± 1°C (0°F ± 2°F) • Calcium Chloride: -29°C ± 1°C (-20°F ± 2°F)

Note 1 – Ensure the samples remain free from agitation or disturbance during the entire testing duration. 1.2 At the end of the testing time (168 hours), observe samples. If any noticeable hardening or

crystallization of the deicer is observed, then perform additional testing in accordance with PNS Test Method C. If the sample does not exhibit hardening or crystalizing the sample passes the test.

2 Report 2.1 Report settleable solids as a (V/V) percent ±0.1% in Site Manager. 2.2 Report solids passing through a number 10 sieve as a (V/V) percent ±0.1% in Site Manager.

1 of 1

MT 502-16 (09/30/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 502-16

ELEMENTAL CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF BRINE MATERIALS (Montana Method)

1 Scope

1.1 This test method describes the procedures used to analyze brine materials for the following

analytes: arsenic (As), barium (Ba), cadmium (Cd), chromium (Cr), copper (Cu), phosphorus (P), lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), selenium (Se), and zinc (Zn) in brine materials. Additionally the samples are analyzed for magnesium (Mg), sodium (Na), and sulfur (S) to determine the percentage of magnesium chloride, sodium chloride, and sulfates in the samples.

1.2 This standard involves hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this procedure to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

2 Referenced Documents Milestone Milestone Grease Digestion Application Note HPR-CH-16 3 Summary of Test Method 3.1 Samples are prepared using a microwave digestion technique based on Milestone Grease

Digestion Application Note HPR-CH-16. Mercury is analyzed using a cold vapor technique with a vapor generation assembly (VGA) attached to a flame atomic absorption spectrometer (FAAS). All other analytes are analyzed using a inductively coupled plasma – optical emission spectrometer (ICP-OES).

4 Significance and Use 4.1 This procedure is primarily used to provide quality assurance and control for deicer materials and

dust palliatives. 5 Apparatus 5.1 Analytical Balance – with a precision of 0.0001 g 5.2 Microwave digestion system – Capable of heating samples to 200°C and maintaining that

temperature for at least 30 minutes. The system must use sealable vessels that prevent the escape of vapors.

5.3 ICP-OES – Capable of measuring analytes of interest at parts per million (ppm) levels and low

parts per billion (ppb) levels 5.4 Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrometer (FAAS) – Equipped with a hollow cathode lamp (HCL) for

measuring Hg and capable of operating with an attached VGA 5.5 Vapor Generation Assembly (VGA) – Capable of cold vapor techniques for detecting mercury at

low ppb to high parts per trillion (ppt) levels 5.6 Labware – Glassware, Teflon, and Plasticware containers that have been properly cleaned and

stored filled with dilute nitric acid solution (1 – 5%) for at least 2 days.

1 of 7

MT 502-16 (09/30/16)

6 Reagents and Materials 6.1 Trace metal grade (TMG) hydrochloric acid (HCl), concentration of 32-38% 6.2 TMG nitric acid (HNO3), concentration of 65-70% 6.3 Technical grade hydrogen peroxide (H2O2), concentration of 34-37% 6.4 Stannous chloride solution - 10% stannous chloride (SnCl2) w/v and 20% TMG hydrochloric acid 6.5 1+1 hydrochloric acid – Made with TMG HCl (e.g., Add 500 ml TMG HCl to 400 ml reagent water

and dilute to 1 L). 6.6 Reagent Water – Purified with a polishing system such that ASTM Type II water or better is

obtained. 7 Calibration and Standardization

Follow manufacturer’s specifications for calibrating and standardizing the ICP-OES and VGA. Appendix A provides calibrating and standardizing specifications for a Varian Axial View ICP-OES, an Agilent Radial View ICP-OES, and Varian VGA.

8 Procedure 8.1 Tare a clean microwave digestion vessel on the analytical balance. Use a transfer pipet to

dispense a portion of the sample into a digestion vessel in accordance with the table below. Record the mass.

Material Being Analyzed Amount of material (grams)

Corrosion Inhibitor 1.2

Sodium Chloride Magnesium Chloride Calcium Chloride

7.5

Note 1 – Use a small weighing dish in place of a microwave digestion vessel when static electricity

prevents a stable measurement. Transfer contents to a microwave digestion vessel; use a small amount of water to rinse the contents of the weighing dish.

8.2 In a ventilation hood, add 1 mL of hydrogen peroxide and 9 mL of nitric acid to each of the

digestion vessels. Assemble the digestion vessels and all other components required for proper microwave digestion in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and then run the digestion program. MDT’s parameters for a Milestone Ethos EZ microwave digestion system are in Appendix A.

8.3 After completion of the digestion program, allow the carousel to cool before removing. The

carousel may be left overnight to cool. 8.4 Remove a digestion vessel and open it. Rinse the sample into a clean Teflon beaker or other

suitable cleaned container. Tare an appropriate storage container on the analytical balance. Rinse the sample into the storage container. Place the storage container back onto the analytical balance and dilute with reagent water until a mass of 100.00 g ± 0.05. Record the mass to nearest 0.01 g. Repeat for all samples.

8.5 Label the sample bottles with the sample number, date, analyst initials, and as Brine Material

stock solution.

2 of 7

MT 502-16 (09/30/16)

8.6 Dilute the stock solutions with reagent water for the analysis of Mg, Na, and S to 1:100 by weight. Label the dilute samples with the sample number, date, analyst initials, and as Brine Material dilute solution.

8.7 Analyze the stock and dilute samples on the radial view ICP-OES, axial view ICP-OES, and VGA

with FAAS, as appropriate. 9 Calculation or Interpretation of Results 9.1 Concentration Calculations 9.1.1 As, Ba, Cd, Cr, Cu, P, Pb, Se, and Zn (measured in mg/kg by the ICP-OES)

Sample concentration is calculated by multiplying the measured value by a ratio of the solution weight divided by the sample weight.

𝐶𝐶 = 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷(𝐿𝐿𝑆𝑆

) Where: C = sample concentration (mg/kg) M = measured value (µg/kg) L = solution mass S = sample mass D = dilution factor that is equal to 1 for final products or is equal to 100%/P where P is the

percentage of the component of interest in the final product

Note – Concentration calculations for corrosion inhibitors requires the inclusion of a dilution factor based on the amount of inhibitor used in the product.

9.1.2 Hg (measured in µg/kg by the VGA) Mercury concentration is calculated by multiplying the measured value by a ratio of the solution mass divided by the sample mass then divided by 1000.

C= 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀1000𝑆𝑆

Where: C = sample concentration in mg/kg M = measured value in µg/kg L = solution mass S = sample mass

3 of 7

MT 502-16 (09/30/16)

9.2 Percent Weight Calculations

P = 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿10000𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆

Where: P = percent weight of the desired compound L = mass of the first solution M = measured value of the analyte in mg/kg N = mass of the second solution O = molecular mass of the desired compound S = sample mass T = mass of the aliquot from the first solution U = atomic mass of the measured analyte.

Elements and molecules Atomic mass Molecular mass

Na 22.99

NaCl 58.44

Mg 24.31

MgCl2 95.21

S 32.066

SO4 96.066 10 Report 10.1 Elements As, Ba, Cd, Cr, Cu, Hg, P, Pb, Se, and Zn – report as mg/kg 10.2 MgCl2, NaCl, and SO4 – report as percent by weight of the product

4 of 7

MT 502-16 (09/30/16)

APPENDIX A ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION CALIBRATION

Milestone Ethos EZ microwave digestion system Digestion program used: motoroil.mpr Heat and time: Heat to 200°C and hold temperature during a 30 minute interval. Follow by a 10 minute cooling period. Rotor: SK-10 Varian Axial View ICP-OES configuration parameters for brines and non-inhibitors Equipment Configuration a. Nebulizer: Sea Spray b. Spray chamber: cyclonic c. Sample pump tubing: White/White d. Waste pump tubing: Blue/Blue e. Rinse Solution: 3% Nitric Acid f. Torch: High solids with sheath gas g. Sheath gas: Argon at 10mL/min h. Power: 1.20 kW i. Plasma flow: 15.0 L/min j. Auxiliary flow: 1.50 L/min k. Nebulizer flow: 0.70 L/min for MgCl2 brines 0.80 L/min for NaCl brines l. Replicate Read time: 10.00 s m. Instrument stabilization delay: 15.00s n. Sample uptake delay: 30.00s o. Pump rate: 15 rpm p. Rinse time: 100s q. Fast pump: yes r. Replicates: 3 Line Selection for Standard, Samples, and Blanks: a. As 193.696 b. Ba 233.527 c. Cd 214.439 d. Cr 267.716 e. Cu 324.754 f. P 213.618 g. Pb 220.353 h. Se 196.026 i. Zn 213.857 Calibration Varian Axial ICP-OES a. Type: Linear for all elements b. Linear-Maximum percent error of 5% except Cd that can be 15% and confidence limit of 0.99% c. Calibration standards: Prepare calibration standards and blanks so that the sample matrices are

being mimicked by compensating for the content of acids and salts. Prepare a total of one standard blank and three standards with varying concentrations of each desired analyte.

5 of 7

MT 502-16 (09/30/16)

Agilent Radial View ICP-OES configuration parameters for brines and inhibitors Equipment configuration a. Nebulizer: One Neb b. Spray chamber: cyclonic c. Sample pump tubing: White/White d. Waste pump tubing: Blue/Blue e. Rinse solution: 3% Nitric acid f. Torch: High solids g. Power: 1.15 kW MgCl2 brines, 1.20 kW NaCl brines, and 1.10 kW for inhibitors. h. Plasma flow: 15.00 L/min i. Auxiliary flow: 1.50 L/min j. Nebulizer flow: 0.80 L/min MgCl2 brines, 0.75 L/min NaCl brines, and 0.70 L/min for inhibitors. k. Viewing height: 11 mm MgCl2 brines, 12 mm NaCl brines, and 9 mm for inhibitors. l. Replicate read time: 10.00s m. Instrument stabilization delay: 15s n. Sample uptake delay: 30s o. Pump rate: 15s p. Rinse rate: 10s q. Fast pump: yes r. Replicates: 3 Line selection for standards, samples and blanks: MgCl2 brines a. Mg 280.270 b. Na 589.592 c. S 181.972 NaCl brines a. Na 589.592 Corrosion Inhibitors b. As 188.980 c. Ba 455.403 d. Cd 226.502 e. Cr 205.560 f. Cu 324.754 g. P 213.618 h. Pb 220.353 i. Se 196.026 j. Zn 213.857 Calibration Agilent Radial ICP-OES a. Type: Linear for all elements b. Linear-Maximum percent error of 5% and confidence limit of 0.99%. c. Calibration standards: Prepare calibration standards and blanks so that the inhibitor sample matrices

are being mimicked by compensating for the acids and inhibitor components. For the brines only compensate for the acid content. Prepare a total of one standard blank and three standards with varying concentrations of each desired analyte.

6 of 7

MT 502-16 (09/30/16)

Varian AA 240FS and VGA configuration parameters Equipment configuration a. Measurement time: 10.00s b. Read delay: 115s c. Sample tubing: Purple/black d. Acid and reductant tubing: black/black e. Replicates standards: 3 f. Replicates samples: 3 g. Precision % standards: 1.0 h. Precision % samples: 1.0 i. Lamp Current: Recommended current on Hg lamp j. Slit width: 0.5R nm k. Reslope rate: 50 l. Reslope standard: number 2 Wavelength selection for standards, samples, and blanks a. 253.7 nm Calibration Varian AA 240FS and VGA a. Type: Linear b. Calibration standards: Prepare calibration standards and blanks so that the acid content of the

sample matrices are mimicked. Prepare a total of one standard blank and three standards with varying concentrations of each desired analyte.

Reagents a. Acid: Described in 6.5 b. Reductant: Described in 6.4

7 of 7

MT 504-16 (06/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 504-16

CYANIDE IN BRINE MATERIAL

THIS PROCEDURE IS IN DEVELOPMENT

1 of 1

MT 520-12 (10/01/12)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING

MT 520-12 DETERMINATION OF WEAR METALS IN ENGINE OIL

THIS PROCEDURE IS IN DEVELOPMENT

MT 521-16 (09/30/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 521-16

METHOD OF TESTING DYED DIESEL (Modified ASTM D6258)

MT 521 is identical to ASTM D6258 except for the following stipulations: 1. Add the following to Section 9.2.1:

Volume of Stock Standard/100 ml

Approximate Concentration of Working Standards

6.0 mL 18 mg/L 7.0 mL 21 mg/L

2. Add to the end of Section 9.5:

“Also measure the amplitude difference between the peak and valley of 580 ± 20 nm and 561 ± 20 nm.”

1 of 1

MT 526-16 (06/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 526-16

MOISTURE ANALYSIS OF PNS CATEGORY 8A, 8B, AND 8C SOLID SODIUM CHLORIDE

(Modified ASTM E534) 1 Scope 1.1 This method is utilized to determine the water insoluble residue of PNS specified salt for product

acceptance by the Montana Department of Transportation. This method will serve as the reference method for salt with an insoluble residue of 0.0% – 10.0% by mass.

2 Referenced Documents ASTM Standards E534 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Sodium Chloride Other Standards

PNS Document - Pacific Northwest Snowfighters Snow and Ice Control Chemical Products, Specifications, and Test Protocols for the PNS Association of British Columbia, Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Oregon and Washington. http://pnsassociation.org/wp-content/uploads/PNSSPECS.pdf

3 Apparatus and Reagents 3.1 Analytical Balance 3.2 Desiccator 3.3 Oven 4 Procedure 4.1 Weigh 100g of salt to the nearest 0.01g (split or quartered from original sample) into a previously

dried and weighed moisture dish or pan. Distribute the salt in the vessel such that it is not more than 1/4 of an inch in depth at any given location.

4.2 Dry at 110°C for 2 hours. 4.3 Cool to room temperature in a desiccator and weigh. 5 Calculation and Reporting 5.1 Calculate the percentage of moisture as follows:

𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 % =(𝐼𝐼 − 𝐹𝐹)

𝐼𝐼∗ 100

where: F = final mass of the dry salt I = initial mass of the wet salt

5.2 Report the insoluble residue to the nearest 0.01%.

1 of 2

MT 526-16 (06/28/16)

6 Validation Data 6.1 Precision and Bias

Moisture %

σ(n-1) % n 95%

CL %

Intra Laboratory σ(n-1) %

Intra Laboratory

n

Intra Laboratory 95% CL %

Inter Laboratory σ(n-1) %

Inter Laboratory

n

Inter Laboratory 95% CL %

0-5.0% 0.005 29 0.03 0.006 3 0.03 0.006 6 0.04

5.1%-10.0% 0.008 31 0.05 0.008 3 0.06 0.009 6 0.06

2 of 2

MT 530-16 (12/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 530-16

DETERMINATION OF CHLORIDE IN BRIDGE DECK CONCRETE BY ION CHROMATOGRAPHY

(Montana Method) 1 Scope 1.1 This method describes the procedure used to determine the concentration of acid-soluble

chloride in bridge deck concrete via ion chromatography. 1.2 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This method does not

purport to address all of the safety concerns associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this procedure to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

2 Referenced Documents

MT Materials Manual MT 114 Sampling for Chloride Content of Bridge Deck Concrete

Other Method Tex-620-J, Determining Chloride and Sulfate Contents in Soil (http://ftp.dot.state.tx.us/pub/txdot-info/cst/TMS/600-J_series/archives/620-0805.pdf)

3 Terminology 3.1 Chromatography – the separation and quantitative analysis of ions based on their affinity to the

ion exchanger. 3.2 Eluent – A solution that transports the sample through the system and contributes to the

selectivity of the separation in the ion chromatograph. 4 Summary of Test Method 4.1 The chloride ion is extracted from concrete samples, put into solution, centrifuged, filtered and

injected into the Ion Chromatograph (IC). The sodium carbonate/bicarbonate eluent transports the sample through the column which is operating with a suppressed conductivity method. The ion chromatograph detects chloride ions which interface with the column and are read on the instrument’s conductivity detector.

5 Significance and Use 5.1 This procedure is used to determine the concentration of the chloride ion in concrete samples

collected from bridge decks. The chloride ion concentration is used to evaluate the level of corrosion and determine the maintenance requirement for bridge decks.

6 Apparatus 6.1 Metrohm Basic Ion Chromatograph Plus 883 equipped with: 6.1.1 Autosampler 6.1.2 Metrosep A Supp 150/4.0 Column 6.1.3 Conductivity Detector 6.1.4 MagIC Net Software 6.2 Centrifuge

1 of 5

MT 530-16 (12/28/16)

7 Reagents and Materials 7.1 Reagent Water – Purified with a polishing system such that ASTM Type II water or better is

obtained. 7.2 Suppressor Regenerant Solution, 0.1 Molar Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4) 7.3 Suppressor Rinse Solution, 99.9% MeOH 7.4 Neutralizing Solution, 0.5 M Sodium Hydroxide (aqueous)

Add 500mL of reagent water to a 750 or 1000mL glass beaker and slowly add 9.99 g of solid NaOH pellets to the reagent water and mix.

7.5 Eluent, 3.2 M Sodium Carbonate, Na2CO3/1.0 M Sodium Bicarbonate, NaHCO3 (aqueous);

(stock eluent solution, A Supp 5 Eluent 100x, ordered from Metrohm). Shelf life of eluent is 2 days.

7.6 Nitric Acid (HNO3), concentrated Trace Metal Grade, 65-75% 7.7 Standard Stock Solution, Dionex Five Anion Standard, chloride concentration of 30 ppm 7.7 Glassware: 50 mL beakers, 100mL volumetric flasks for dilution 7.8 Auto-pipettes 7.9 Plastic Syringes, 30 mL non-sterile 7.10 Syringe filters - particle retention of 0.2 µm 7.11 Dry plastic bottles that have been stored filled with a dilute HNO3 acid solution (1 – 5%) prior to

use 7.12 Disposable IC vials, 11 ml 8 Sampling 8.1 Bridge deck concrete samples are collected in accordance with MT 114 and pulverized in a Bico

pulverizer with plates spaced between 1 and 2 mm. 9 Calibration and Standardization 9.1 IC Instrumentation Settings: 9.1.1 Flow rate on IC: 0.7 mL/min 9.1.2 Sample Loop: 20 µL 9.1.3 Run time: 20 minutes 9.2 Calibration Curve Determination 9.2.1 Prepare standards from a five anion standard. The Dionex Five Anion Standard with a chloride

concentration of 30 ppm is commonly used. 9.2.2 Weigh indicated masses from the 5 anion standard bottle into a dry plastic bottle (See Table 1).

Record weights to the thousandth decimal place. 9.2.3 Dilute with reagent water for a target total mass of 50 g (± 0.001)

2 of 5

MT 530-16 (12/28/16)

Table 1: Standard calibration solutions and masses of components Concentration, ppm Mass of 5 anion standard, g Mass of solution, g

0.5 0.834 50.000 1.0 1.667 50.000 2.0 3.334 50.000 4.0 6.667 50.000 5.0 8.334 50.000 10.0 16.668 50.000

Note 1 - The masses in Table 1 above have been developed for the Dionex Five Anion Standard which has a chloride concentration of 30 ppm, if another standard is used the weights in the table are not applicable

9.2.4 Determine concentration of each standard and enter into the IC software. 10 Procedure 10.1 Preparation of Controls 10.1.1 For each sequence to be analyzed on the IC, prepare and analyze a quality control (QC) sample.

Use a QC sample with a concentration which is mid-range of the calibration curve. For example, chloride standard preparations range from 0.5 ppm to 10 ppm. A QC sample with a target of approximately 3 ppm is sufficient. Using a Portland cement with a qualified standard of 0.127% is an acceptable QC sample. Determine percent recovery per Section 11.5 below. Analysis is considered acceptable with a percent recovery on the quality control sample of ±10%.

10.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis 10.2.1 Weigh 0.25 g of sample into a 50 – 60 mL beaker using a balance with an accuracy of

± 0.0001 g. Record the sample weight to be used in final calculation (Ws). Add 1 mL of reagent water to the beaker to liquefy the cement sample.

10.2.2 In a fume hood, Add 100 µL of concentrated HNO3 to the cement paste and and swirl gently to

mix well. CO2 gas liberates from the reaction between the cement constituents and nitric acid. Wait roughly 10 minutes for the extraction to occur.

10.2.3 Neutralize the solution by adding approximately 1.5 mL of 0.5 M NaOH (2-4 mL may be needed).

Test with litmus paper strips to make sure the solution is neutral. 10.2.4 Transfer the neutral solution into a 100 mL volumetric flask (V), rinsing the beaker to transfer the

solids from the beaker to the flask. Dilute to the fill line with reagent water. 10.2.5 Pour approximately 10 mL of the solution into a plastic syringe equipped with a 0.2 µm nylon filter

tip. Filter the solution into a plastic ion chromatography test tube. Note 2 – If the turbidity of the sample is such that light cannot pass through it, then centrifuge the sample

at 500 rpm for roughly 15 minutes in a plastic nunc tube prior to pouring the sample into the IC vial centrifuge.

10.6 Analyze the sample and the QC sample simultaneously on the IC to determine the chloride

concentration. Shelf life of the sample is one week.

3 of 5

MT 530-16 (12/28/16)

11 Calculation or Interpretation of Results 11.1 Dilution Factor

𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 =𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉

Where: DF = Dilution factor Vf = Final volume (diluent and aliquot) Vi = initial volume

11.1.1 Dilution Factor for Concrete Sample

The dilution factor (DF) for the concrete sample is the volume of the volumetric flask used in Section 10.2.4 (i.e., 100 mL).

11.2 Chloride Concentration in Concrete

𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = (𝐶𝐶𝑉𝑉𝐶𝐶 ∗ 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷)

𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊

Where: Ccl = Concentration of the chloride in the original concrete, ppm Cic = Concentration of the chloride as determined by the IC, ppm DF = Dilution factor Ws = Weight of the sample, g

11.2.1 Example: Cic = 2.78 mg/L (or ppm)

DF = 100 Ws= 0.2529 g

Ccl= (2.78*100)/0.2529 = 1099 ppm

11.3 Percent Chloride in Concrete

%𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶

10,000

11.3.1 Example: Ccl = 1099 ppm (from above)

%Cl = 1099/10,000 = 0.1099% 11.4 Pounds of Chloride per cubic yard of Concrete

𝑃𝑃𝐶𝐶 = (𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 ∗ 𝐷𝐷𝐶𝐶)1,000,000

Where: Pc = Pounds of chloride per cubic yard of concrete Ccl = Concentration of chloride ions in the original concrete sample, ppm Dc = Density of concrete (4,000 lb/cy)

4 of 5

MT 530-16 (12/28/16)

11.5 Percent Recovery of Quality Control Sample

% Recovery = [CIC(QC)*DF/WQC/10,000/CQC]*100%

Where: CIC(QC) = Concentration of the Quality Control Sample as determined by the IC, ppm CQC = Known value of the quality control sample DF = Dilution factor WQC = Weight of the Quality Control Sample, g

11.5.1 Example: CIC(QC) = 3.15 ppm

DF = 100 WQC= 0.2529g CQC = 0.127%

% Recovery = [3.15*100/0.2529/10,000/0.127]*100 = 98.07%

12 Report 12.1 Enter chloride analysis results in the following location:

X:\CHEMISTRY\LAB\Bridge Chlorides 20XX.xlsx

5 of 5

MT 532-16 (12/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 532-16

DETERMINATION OF SULFATE CONTENT IN SOILS BY ION CHROMATOGRAPHY 1 Scope 1.1 This method describes the procedures used to determine water-soluble sulfate in soils through

the use of the ion chromatograph (IC). 1.2 This method was developed as an alternative to the sulfate analysis in MT 232 and was validated

June 2016. 1.3 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This method does not

purport to address all of the safety concerns associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this procedure to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

2 Referenced Documents

ASTM C1580 Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Sulfate in Soil MT Materials Manual MT 232 Soil Corrosion Test Other TX DOT, Tex-620-J, Determining Chloride and Sulfate Contents in Soil (http://ftp.dot.state.tx.us/pub/txdot-info/cst/TMS/600-J_series/archives/620-0805.pdf) Validation of Sulfate Method on the Ion Chromatograph, MDT, June 2016.

3 Summary of Test Method 3.1 Soils are dissolved in water and analyzed on the ion chromatograph. This method is substantially

based on ASTM C1580 and the Texas Department of Transportation Method Tex-620-J. The method of analysis can be used for both solid soil and water samples. The samples are dissolved or diluted in water, filtered and injected into the IC instrument. A calibration curve is prepared on the IC using a five anion standard. Sulfate results are obtained in ppm as determined by the IC.

4 Significance and Use 4.1 This procedure is used to determine sulfate content in soil samples for pipe corrosion evaluation

and soil survey samples. 5 Apparatus 5.1 Metrohm Basic Ion Chromatograph Plus 883 equipped with: 5.1.1 Autosampler 5.1.2 Metrosep A Supp 150/4.0 Column 5.1.3 Conductivity Detector 5.1.4 MagIC Net Software 6 Reagents and Materials 6.1 Reagent Water – Reverse Osmosis (RO) water purified with a polishing system such that ASTM

Type II water or better is obtained. 6.2 Suppressor Regenerant Solution, 0.1M Sulfuric Acid, H2SO4 (aqueous)

1 of 4

MT 532-16 (12/28/16)

6.3 Suppressor Rinse Solution, 99.9% MeOH 6.4 Eluent, 3.2 M Sodium Carbonate, Na2CO3/1.0 M Sodium Bicarbonate, NaHCO3 (aqueous);

(stock eluent solution, A Supp 5 Eluent 100x, ordered from Metrohm and kept in-house). 6.5 Standard Stock Solution, Dionex Five Anion Standard, Sulfate concentration of 150 mg/L 6.6 Glassware: 250 mL beakers and large glass centrifuge tubes 6.7 Class A pipettes, for secondary dilution 6.8 Plastic Syringes, 30 mL non-sterile 6.9 0.20 µm nylon filters, non-sterile 7 Sampling 7.1 Samples are prepared in accordance with MT 232. A 3 gram (g) sample is required for analysis. 8 Calibration and Standardization 8.1 IC Instrumentation Settings 8.1.1 Flow rate on IC: 0.7 mL/min 8.1.2 Sample Loop: 20 µL 8.1.3 Run time: 20 minutes 8.2 Calibration Curve Determination 8.2.1 Prepare six standards based on the indicated concentrations and masses in Table 1 using the

Dionex Five Anion Standard. The values for the sulfate calibration curve range from approximately 2.5 ppm and 50 ppm.

8.2.2 Weigh the standard into a plastic bottle. Record weights to the thousandth decimal place. 8.2.3 Dilute the standard to a target total mass of 50 (±0.001g) with reagent water. Record the final

weight.

Table 1: Standard calibration solutions and masses of components Concentration, ppm Mass of 5 anion standard, g Mass of solution, g

2.5 0.834 50.000 5 1.667 50.000 10 3.334 50.000 20 6.667 50.000 25 8.334 50.000 50 16.668 50.000

Note 1 - The masses in Table 1 above have been developed for the Dionex Five Anion Standard which has a sulfate concentration of 150 ppm, if another standard is used the weights in the table are not applicable

8.2.4 Inject the six prepared standards and utilize the instrumentation on the IC to develop a calibration

curve.

2 of 4

MT 532-16 (12/28/16)

9 Procedure 9.1 Preparation of Controls

For each sequence to be analyzed on the IC, prepare a Quality Control (QC) sample in the target range of approximately 20 ppm. Use a qualified soil standard with a known concentration of 1630 ppm (±43.7 ppm) to prepare the control. Determine percent recovery per Section 10.4 below. Analysis is considered acceptable with a percent recovery on the control sample of ±10%.

9.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis 9.2.1 Weigh 3 grams of sample from the remaining material used for the conductivity preparation in MT

232 into a 250 ml glass beaker. Record the weight to the thousandth decimal place (Ws). 9.2.2 Add 150 mL of reagent water and mix with a stir bar for an hour. 9.2.3 Pour approximately 20 mL of the liquid extract into a syringe with attached 0.20 µm nylon filter.

Filter this extract directly into plastic ion chromatography test tube and cap. 9.2.4 Analyze the sample and the QC sample simultaneously on the IC to determine the sulfate

concentrations. Note 2 – A secondary dilution may be necessary if concentration falls outside of the range determined by

the calibration curve. 10 Calculation or Interpretation of Results 10.1 Dilution Factor

𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 =𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉

Where: DF = Dilution factor Vf = Final volume (diluent and aliquot) Vi = initial volume

10.1.1 Dilution Factor for Secondary Dilution

𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 =𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉

Where: DF = Dilution factor Vd = Volume of the flask used for the dilution, mL Vp = Volume of the pipette used to make the dilution, mL

3 of 4

MT 532-16 (12/28/16)

10.2 Concentration of sulfate ion in the original soil sample

CSO4 = (CIC*DF)/Ws

Where: CSO4 = Concentration of the sulfate in the original soil sample, ppm CIC = concentration of sulfate ion in the sample run through the IC, ppm DF = Dilution factor Ws = Weight of the sample, g

10.2.1 Example: CIC = 2.948 mg/L (or ppm)

DF = 150 Ws= 3.0041 g

CSO4= (2.948*150)/3.0041 = 147.2 ppm 10.3 Percent Sulfate in Soil

% SO4 = CSO4 /10,000 10.4 Percent Recovery Quality Control Sample

% Recovery = [CIC(QC)*DF/WQC /10,000/CQC]*100%

Where: CIC(QC) = Concentration of the soil standard sample as determined by the IC, ppm CQC = Known value of the soil standard (soil standard typically is 1630 ppm SO4), ppm DF = Dilution factor WQC = Weight of the quality control sample, g

10.4.1 Example: CIC(QC) = 31.96 ppm

DF = 50 WQC= 1.004 g CQC = 1630 ppm

% Recovery = [31.96*50/1.004/1630]*100 = 98.07%

11 Report

The concentration of the sulfate will be recorded in the soil corrosion spreadsheets and the Sitemanager data base as percent sulfate.

4 of 4

MT 533-16 (09/30/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 533-16

METHOD OF TEST FOR CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF FLY ASH AND POZZOLANS (Montana Method)

1 Scope 1.1 This test method describes the procedures used to determine the concentration of elemental

oxides and sulfur trioxide of fly ash and pozzolans for use in Portland Cement. Three test procedures are described in this document:

1.1.1 Spectroscopic Determination of Elemental Oxides in Fly Ash and Pozzolans

1.1.2 Spectroscopic Determination of Sulfur Trioxide in Fly Ash and Pozzolans 1.1.3 Spectroscopic Determination of Silicon Dioxide in Fly Ash and Pozzolans 1.2 This test method also denotes reference test methods: 1.2.2 Moisture of Fly Ash and Pozzolans – ASTM C311 Sections 11 and 12 1.2.1 Loss on Ignition of Fly Ash and Pozzolans – ASTM C311 Sections 13 and 14 1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with its

use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

2 Referenced Documents ASTM

C114 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement C150 Standard Specifications for Portland Cement C311 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use in

Portland-Cement Concrete E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with

Specifications E542 Practice for Calibration of Laboratory Volumetric Apparatus E694 Standard Specification for Laboratory Glass Volumetric Apparatus STP 985 Rapid Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement FHWA FHWA-RD-72-41 A New Method for Rapid Cement Analysis (Atomic Absorption

Spectrophotometry) MT Materials Manual MT 108 Sampling and Certification of Portland Cement MT 607 Procedure for Reducing Field Samples to Testing Size

3 Summary of Test Method 3.1 Spectroscopic Determination of Elemental Oxides in Fly Ash and Pozzolans Summary of Test

Method In this test method fly ash or pozzolans are dissolved in a combination of acids via a digestion in Teflon vessels secured in a microwave digestion system. The solution is diluted and analyzed by means of an Inductively Coupled Plasma – Optical Emission Spectrophotometer (ICP-OES). The following analytes are quantified as oxides: calcium, magnesium, iron, aluminum, potassium, and sodium.

1 of 9

MT 533-16 (09/30/16)

3.2 Spectroscopic Determination of Sulfur Trioxide in Fly Ash and Pozzolan Summary of Test Method This test method is substantially based on the publications ASTM STP 985, FHWA-RD-72-41 and the reference test method of ASTM C114. In this method, sulfur is extracted from fly ash or pozzolans using nitric acid and hydrogen peroxide and then quantified via ICP-OES analysis. This procedure is valid for the analysis and reporting of sulfur trioxide.

3.3 Spectroscopic Determination of Silicon Dioxide in Fly Ash and Pozzolans Summary of Test

Method This test method is substantially based on the publications ASTM STP 985 and FHWA-RD-72-41. In this method, the fly ash or pozzolan is solubilized by fusion with a mixed lithium metaborate and lithium tetraborate powder. The molten glass bead is dissolved in a weak nitric acid solution and analyzed by ICP-OES.

4 Significance and Use 4.1 This procedure is primarily used to provide quality assurance for the fly ash and pozzolan

samples submitted by suppliers for inclusion on the MDT Qualified Product List as well as provide analytical information for design applications using fly ash or pozzolans.

5 Apparatus 5.1 Inductively Coupled Plasma-Optical Emission Spectrophotometer (ICP-OES) 5.2 Microwave digestion system – Capable of heating samples to 200°C and maintaining that

temperature for at least 30 minutes. 5.3 Labware – Glassware, Teflon, and Plasticware containers that have been properly cleaned and

stored filled with dilute nitric acid solution (1 – 5%) for at least 2 days. 5.4 Analytical Balances – For the initial weighing of samples and standards, a balance with a

precision of 0.0001 g should be used. For weighing material over 210 g, a balance with a precision of 0.01 g should be used.

5.5 Muffle Furnace – Capable of maintaining a temperature of 950°C ± 25° verified by clay pyrometric

cones yearly. 6 Reagents and Materials 6.1 Trace metal grade (TMG) Hydrochloric acid (HCl), concentrated (32-38%) 6.2 TMG Nitric acid (HNO3), concentrated (65-70%) 6.3 Fluoroboric acid (HBF4), concentrated (46-52%) 6.4 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2), concentrated (30-38%) 6.5 Reagent Water – Purified with a polishing system such that ASTM Type II water or better is

obtained. 6.6 Filter paper – Particle retention of 20 – 25 µm and a medium flowrate. 6.7 Ultra-pure grade lithium borate flux – composed of about 66% Lithium tetraborate (Li2B4O7), 33%

lithium metaborate (LiBO2) and 1% lithium bromide (LiBr) 7 Sampling 7.1 Fly ash or pozzolan samples are to be collected in accordance with MT 108 and split in

accordance with MT 607. A 50 mL sample should be provided to the Chemistry Lab for analysis.

2 of 9

MT 533-16 (09/30/16)

SPECTROSCOPIC DETERMINATION OF ELEMENTAL OXIDES IN FLY ASH AND POZZOLANS

8 Calibration and Standardization

Follow manufacturer’s specifications for calibrating and standardizing the ICP-OES. Appendix A provides calibrating and standardizing specifications for a Varian Axial ICP-OES for the determination of elemental oxides.

9 Procedure 9.1 Weigh 0.1000 g ± 0.0005 g of fly ash or pozzolan onto tared waxed paper or a small weighing

boat. Record the mass. 9.2 Transfer the sample to a Teflon insert for microwave digestion. Reweigh the waxed paper or

weighing boat and note the residual mass from the sample. Record the residual mass and calculate the mass transferred to the Teflon insert.

9.3 In a ventilation hood, add 10 mL TMG Hydrochloric acid, 4 mL TMG Nitric acid, and 4 mL

Fluoroboric acid to the Teflon insert using autopipets with disposable tips. Place the Teflon insert in the carousel.

9.4 Once all samples have been prepared, place the carousel in the microwave digestion system.

Begin the digestion process (see Appendix A for MDT digestion process). After completion of the digestion process, allow the carousel to cool before removing. The carousel may be left overnight to cool.

9.5 Remove a digestion vessel and open it. Rinse the sample into a clean Teflon beaker. Tare a dry

500 mL plastic volumetric flask. Rinse the solution from the beaker into the plastic volumetric flask. Place the plastic volumetric flask on the balance and add reagent water to a mass of 500.00 g ± 0.05 g. Cap the plastic volumetric flask and invert it several times to homogenize the solution.

9.6 Pour some of the solution into a plastic sample bottle for a stock solution. Label the container with

the sample number, date, analyst initials, and as fly ash or pozzolan stock solution. 9.7 Dilute the stock solution by dispensing 1.50 g ± 0.03 g of the solution into a 15 mL centrifuge tube

and add reagent water until the mass is 15.00 g ± 0.03 g. Label the centrifuge tube with the sample number, date, analyst initials, and as fly ash or pozzolan dilute solution.

9.8 Repeat Sections 9.5 to 9.7 for all samples. 9.9 Analyze the dilute solutions on an ICP-OES.

3 of 9

MT 533-16 (09/30/16)

SPECTROSCOPIC DETERMINATION OF SULFUR TRIOXIDE IN FLY ASH AND POZZOLANS

10 Calibration and Standardization

Follow manufacturer’s specifications for calibrating and standardizing the ICP-OES. Appendix B provides calibrating and standardizing specifications for a Agilent Radial ICP-OES for the determination of sulfur trioxide.

11 Procedure 11.1 Weigh 0.5000 g ± 0.0005 g fly ash or pozzolan directly into a dry 250 mL beaker. Note – If a thick walled beaker is used that is too heavy for the balance, the cement can be weighed on

waxed paper or a small weighing boat and transferred. Reweigh the waxed paper or weighing to account for any cement that may have stuck to it.

11.2 Add 5.0 mL of hydrogen peroxide using an autopipet to each beaker. 11.3 Bring the solution to the 100 mL mark on the beaker with reagent water. 11.4 Add 10.0 mL of nitric acid to the beaker using an autopipet. 11.5 Add a Teflon stir bar and place on a stir plate to agitate for a minimum of 60 minutes. A good stir

rate is about two revolutions per second. 11.6 Quantitatively filter into a 500 mL glass volumetric flask and rinse many times with reagent water. 11.7 Bring to volume with reagent water. 11.8 Transfer the solution to a 500 mL HDPE bottle. Label with the sample number, the date, analyst

initials, and analyte of interest. 11.9 Once all the samples are prepared, analyze the solutions using the ICP-OES.

4 of 9

MT 533-16 (09/30/16)

SPECTROSCOPIC DETERMINATION OF SILICON DIOXIDE IN FLY ASH AND POZZOLANS 12 Calibration and Standardization

Follow manufacturer’s specifications for calibrating and standardizing the ICP-OES. Appendix C provides calibrating and standardizing specifications for a ICP-OES for the determination of silicon dioxide.

13 Procedure 13.1 Weigh 0.8000 g ± 0.005 g of lithium borate flux into a graphite crucible. 13.2 Tare the flux and crucible and add 0.1000 g ± 0.0005 g fly ash or pozzolan on top of the flux. 13.3 Fuse the graphite crucible(s) containing the samples in the muffle furnace at 950°C for 5 minutes.

Do not fuse more than two crucibles at a time. Swirl the crucible to consolidate all residual sample that may be sticking to the sides of the crucible. Continue fusing for an additional 15 minutes at 950°C.

13.4 Prior to or during the fusion process, prepare an adequate number of Teflon beakers (at least 200

mL) by rinsing them copiously with reagent water. Add 50 mL of 1 + 24 nitric acid to the beakers. Place a Teflon stir bar in each beaker and cover each with a watch glass. Place the beakers on a stir plate near the furnace and stir at a rate of about two revolutions per second.

13.5 At the completion of the fusion process, quickly transfer the fusion bead from the graphite crucible

to one of the prepared Teflon beakers. Inspect the graphite crucible for any trace of sample or fusion material; discard the sample if either are present. Replace the watch glass on the beaker and stir for a minimum of 30 minutes or until all material is dissolved. More acid may be needed to completely dissolve the fusion bead; add the same amount of acid to each sample in order to maintain the same acid content. If additional acid results in material coming out of solution, the sample is not suitable for analysis; discard the sample.

13.6 Once all the material has dissolved, prepare the stock solution by transferring the solution to a

500 mL class A volumetric flask. Bring to volume with reagent water and add nitric acid such that the concentration of nitric acid will be 15 + 485. Cover the flask with Parafilm and invert a minimum of eight times to thoroughly mix.

13.7 Transfer the stock solution to a plastic sample bottle; discard any excess solution. Label the

container with the sample number, fly ash or pozzolan, Si analysis, stock solution, date, and analyst initials.

13.8 Once all the samples are prepared, analyze the stock solutions on an ICP-OES.

5 of 9

MT 533-16 (09/30/16)

14 Report 14.1 Data Reporting and Retention for fly ash or pozzolans will be reported as shown below:

Analyte Report As Significance

Ca CaO XX.XX

Al Al2O3 X.XX

Fe Fe2O3 X.XX

Mg MgO X.XX

Si SiO2 XX.XX

K K2O X.XXX

Na Na2O 0.XXX

S SO3 X.XX

LOI LOI X.XX

Moisture Moisture X.XX 15 Validation 15.1 For validation data and quality control information consult ASTM C114 and ensure all instruments

meet its conditions.

6 of 9

MT 533-16 (09/30/16)

APPENDIX A SPECTROSCOPIC DETERMINATION OF ELEMENTAL OXIDES IN FLY ASH OR POZZOLANS

Varian Axial ICP-OES configuration parameters Equipment Configuration Nebulizer: Sea Spray Spray chamber: cyclonic Sample pump tubing: White/White Waste pump tubing: Blue/Blue Rinse solution: 3% Nitric acid Torch: High solids with sheath gas Sheath gas: Argon at 10mL/min Power: 1.20 kW Plasma flow: 15.0 L/min Auxiliary flow: 1.50 L/min Nebulizer flow: 0.75 L/min Replicate read time: 6.00s Instrument stabilization delay: 15s Sample uptake delay: 30s Pump rate: 15 rpm Rinse time: 120s Fast pump: yes Replicates: 5 Line Selection for Standards, Samples, and Blanks: Select the best line(s) and average for each element. Al: 396.152, 394.401, 309.271, and 257.509. Ca: 393.366, 370.602, 318.127, 317.933, 315.887, 219.779, and 210.324. Fe: 273.358, 261.187, 260.709, 259.940, and 238.204. Mg: 285.213, 280.270, 279.553, and 202.582. K: 766.491 and 769.897. Na: 589.592 and 588.995. Calibration Varian Axial ICP-OES Type: Linear for all elements. Linear-Maximum percent error of 10% and Confidence limit of 0.99%. Calibration Standard Selection: Pick NIST or CCRL pozzolan standards that provide a range covering what would likely be expected of the samples being analyzed. Usually a minimum of four should be selected. If any samples fall outside the range of the selected standards more should be selected to expand the range. Milestone Ethos EZ microwave digestion system Digestion program used: portcement.mpr Heat and time: Heat to 200°C and hold temperature during a 30 minute interval. Followed by a 10 minute cooling period Rotor: SK-10

7 of 9

MT 533-16 (09/30/16)

APPENDIX B

SPECTROSCOPIC DETERMINATION OF SULFUR TRIOXIDE IN FLY ASH OR POZZOLANS Agilent Radial ICP-OES configuration parameters Equipment Configuration Nebulizer: OneNeb Spray chamber: cyclonic Sample pump tubing: White/White Waste pump tubing: Blue/Blue Rinse solution: 3% Nitric acid Torch: High solids Power: 1.00 kW Plasma flow: 15.00 L/min Auxiliary flow: 1.50 L/min Nebulizer flow: 0.75 L/min Viewing height: 10 mm Replicate read time: 10.00 s Instrument stabilization delay: 15s Sample uptake delay: 30s Pump rate: 15rpm Rinse time: 10s Fast pump: yes Replicates: 3 Line Selection for Standards, Samples, and Blanks: Select the best line(s) and average for each element. S : 180.669, 181.972 Calibration Agilent Radial ICP-OES Type: Linear for all elements. Linear-Maximum percent error of 10% and Confidence limit of 0.99%. Calibration Standard Selection: Pick NIST or CCRL pozzolan standards that provide a range covering what would likely be expected of the samples being analyzed. Usually a minimum of four should be selected. If any samples fall outside the range of the selected standards more should be selected to expand the range.

8 of 9

MT 533-16 (09/30/16)

APPENDIX C SPECTROSCOPIC DETERMINATION OF SILICON DIOXIDE IN FLY ASH OR POZZOLANS

Agilent Radial ICP-OES configuration parameters Equipment Configuration Nebulizer: OneNeb Spray chamber: cyclonic Sample pump tubing: White/White Waste pump tubing: Blue/Blue Rinse solution: 3% Nitric acid Torch: High solids Power: 1.10 kW Plasma flow: 15.00 L/min Auxiliary flow: 1.50 L/min Nebulizer flow: 0.75 L/min Viewing height: 10 mm Replicate read time: 10.00 s Instrument stabilization delay: 15s Sample uptake delay: 45s Pump rate: 15rpm Rinse time: 10s Fast pump: yes Replicates: 3 Line Selection for Standards, Samples, and Blanks: Select the best line(s) and average for each element. Si : 212.412 Calibration Agilent Radial ICP-OES Type: Linear for all elements. Linear-Maximum percent error of 10% and Confidence limit of 0.99%. Calibration Standard Selection: Pick NIST or CCRL pozzolan standards that provide a range covering what would likely be expected of the samples being analyzed. Usually a minimum of four should be selected. If any samples fall outside the range of the selected standards more should be selected to expand the range.

9 of 9

MT 534-16 (06/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 534-16

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF PORTLAND CEMENT (Montana Method)

1 Scope 1.1 This test method describes the procedures used to determine the concentration of elemental

oxides and sulfur trioxide of Portland cement. Two test procedures are described in this document:

1.1.1 Spectroscopic Determination of Elemental Oxides in Portland Cement

1.1.2 Spectroscopic Determination of Sulfur Trioxide in Portland Cement 1.2 This test method also denotes reference test methods: 1.2.1 Loss on Ignition of Portland Cement – ASTM C114, Section 18 1.2.2 Insoluble Residue of Portland Cement – ASTM C114, Section 7 1.2.3 Carbon Dioxide Determination in Portland Cement – ASTM C114, Section 24 1.2.4 Sulfide Determination in Portland Cement – ASTM C114, Section 17 1.2.5 Halogen Determination in Portland Cement – No current validated method 1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with its

use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

2 Referenced Documents ASTM

C114 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement C150 Standard Specifications for Portland Cement E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with

Specifications E542 Practice for Calibration of Laboratory Volumetric Apparatus E694 Standard Specification for Laboratory Glass Volumetric Apparatus STP 985 Rapid Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement FHWA FHWA-RD-72-41 A New Method for Rapid Cement Analysis (Atomic Absorption

Spectrophotometry) MT Materials Manual MT 108 Sampling and Certification of Portland Cement MT 607 Procedure for Reducing Field Samples to Testing Size

3 Summary of Test Method 3.1 Spectroscopic Determination of Elemental Oxides in Portland Cement Summary of Test Method

In this test method, Portland cement is dissolved in a combination of acids via a microwave digestion system. The solution is then diluted and analyzed by an Inductively Coupled Plasma – Optical Emission Spectrophotometer (ICP-OES). The following analytes are quantified as oxides: calcium, magnesium, silicon, iron, aluminum, potassium, titanium, sodium, manganese, zinc, chromium, and phosphorus.

1 of 8

MT 534-16 (06/28/16)

3.2 Spectroscopic Determination of Sulfur Trioxide in Portland Cement Summary of Test Method This test method is substantially based on the publications STP 985, FHWA-RD-72-41, and ASTM C114. In this method, sulfur is extracted from Portland cement using nitric acid and hydrogen peroxide and then quantified via ICP-OES analysis. This procedure is valid for the analysis and reporting of sulfur trioxide.

4 Significance and Use 4.1 This procedure is primarily used to provide quality assurance for the Portland cement submittals

for suppliers on the MDT Qualified Product List as well as provide analytical information for design applications using Portland cement.

5 Apparatus 5.1 Inductively Coupled Plasma-Optical Emission Spectrophotometer (ICP-OES) 5.2 Microwave digestion system – Capable of heating samples to 200°C and maintaining that

temperature for at least 30 minutes. 5.3 Labware – Glassware, Teflon, and Plasticware containers that have been properly cleaned and

stored filled with dilute nitric acid solution (1 – 5%) for at least 2 days. 5.4 Analytical Balances – For the initial weighing of samples and standards, a balance with a

precision of 0.0001 g should be used. For weighing material over 210 g, a balance with a precision of 0.01 g should be used.

6 Reagents and Materials 6.1 Trace metal grade (TMG) hydrochloric acid (HCl) – Any commercially available brand at a

concentration of 32-38%. 6.2 TMG nitric acid (HNO3) – Any commercially available brand at a concentration of 65-70%. 6.3 Fluoroboric acid (HBF4) – Any commercially available brand at a concentration of 46-54%. 6.4 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2) – Any commercially available brand at a concentration of 30-38%. 6.5 Reagent Water – Purified with a polishing system such that ASTM Type II water or better is

obtained. 6.6 Filter paper – Particle retention of 20 – 25 µm and a medium flowrate. 7 Sampling 7.1 Cement samples are to be collected in accordance with MT 108 and split in accordance with MT

607. A 50 mL sample should be provided to the Chemistry Lab for analysis.

2 of 8

MT 534-16 (06/28/16)

SPECTROSCOPIC DETERMINATION OF ELEMENTAL OXIDES IN PORTLAND CEMENT 8 Calibration and Standardization

Follow manufacturer’s specifications for calibrating and standardizing the ICP-OES. Appendix A provides calibrating and standardizing specifications for an Agilent Radial ICP-OES for the determination of elemental oxides.

9 Procedure 9.1 Weigh 0.2000 g ± 0.0005 g Portland cement onto tared waxed paper or small weighing boat.

Record the mass. 9.2 Transfer the sample to a Teflon insert for microwave digestion. Reweigh the waxed paper or

weighing boat and note the residual mass from the sample. Record the residual mass and calculate the mass transferred to the Teflon insert.

9.3 In a ventilation hood, add 10 mL TMG Hydrochloric acid, 4 mL TMG Nitric acid, and 4 mL

Fluoroboric acid to the Teflon insert using autopipets with disposable tips. Place the Teflon insert in the carousel.

9.4 Assemble all components required for proper microwave digestion according to the

manufacturer’s instructions and then run the digestion. MDT’s parameters for a Milestone Ethos EZ microwave digestion system are in Appendix A.

9.5 After completion of the digestion process, allow the carousel to cool before removing. The

carousel may be left overnight to cool. 9.6 Remove the digestion vessel and open it. Rinse the sample into a clean Teflon beaker or other

suitable cleaned container. Tare an appropriate storage container on the analytical balance. Rinse the sample into the storage container. Place the storage container back onto the analytical balance and dilute with reagent water until a mass of 100.00 g ± 0.05. Record the mass to nearest 0.01 g.

9.9 Label the sample bottle with the sample number, date, analyst initials, and as Portland cement

stock solution. 9.10 Using the stock solution, prepare a dilute solution for the analysis of silicon and calcium oxides. In

a centrifuge tube, dilute the stock solution at a ratio of 1:5 with reagent water. Label the centrifuge tube with the sample number, date, analyst initials, and as Portland cement dilute solution.

9.11 Once all the samples have been prepared, analyze the dilute and stock solutions on an ICP-OES.

3 of 8

MT 534-16 (06/28/16)

SPECTROSCOPIC DETERMINATION OF SULFUR TRIOXIDE IN PORTLAND CEMENT 10 Calibration and Standardization

Follow manufacturer’s specifications for calibrating and standardizing the ICP-OES. Appendix B provides calibrating and standardizing specifications for an Agilent Radial ICP-OES for the determination of sulfur trioxide.

11 Procedure 11.1 Weigh 0.5000 g ± 0.0005 g Portland cement directly into a dry 250 mL beaker. Note – If a thick walled beaker is used that is too heavy for the balance, the cement can be weighed on

waxed paper or a small weighing boat and transferred. Reweigh the waxed paper or weighing to account for any cement that may have stuck to it.

11.2 Add 5.0 mL of hydrogen peroxide using an autopipet to the beaker. 11.3 Bring the solution to the 100 mL mark on the beaker with reagent water. 11.4 Add 10.0 mL of nitric acid to the beaker using an autopipet. 11.5 Add a Teflon stir bar and place on a stir plate to agitate for a minimum of 60 minutes. A good stir

rate is about two revolutions a second. 11.6 Quantitatively filter the sample into a 500 mL glass volumetric flask rinsing many times with

reagent water. 11.7 Bring to volume with reagent water. 11.8 Transfer the solution to a 500 mL HDPE bottle. Label with the sample number, the date, analyst

initials, and analyte of interest. 11.9 Once all the samples are prepared, analyze the solutions using the ICP-OES. 12 Calculation or Interpretation of Results 12.1 Portland Cement Potential Phase Composition Calculations 12.1.1 Refer to ASTM C150 Annex A1. 12.2 Portland Cement Limestone Content Calculation 12.2.1 Refer to ASTM C150 Annex A2. 12.3 Equivalent Alkalis Calculation for Portland Cement 12.3.1 Refer to ASTM C150 Section 4 Table 2.

4 of 8

MT 534-16 (06/28/16)

13 Report 13.1 Data Reporting for Portland Cement will be reported as shown below:

Analyte Reported As Significance

Ca CaO XX.XX

Al Al2O3 X.XX

Fe Fe2O3 X.XX

Mg MgO X.XX

Si SiO2 XX.XX

Ti TiO2 0.XX

Cr Cr2O3 0.0XX

K K2O X.XXX

Mn Mn2O3 0.XXX

Na Na2O 0.XXX

P P2O5 0.XXX

Zn ZnO 0.XXX

S SO3 X.XX

S- S- X.XX

LOI LOI X.XX

ISR ISR 0.XX

CO2 CO2 X.XX

Lime Content Lime Content X.X

C3S C3S XX.X

C2S C2S XX.X

C3A C3A X.X

C4AF C4AF XX.X

Alkalinity Alkalinity X.XX

Cl- Cl- 0.0XX

F- F- 0.XX 14 Validation 14.1 For validation data quality control information consult ASTM C114 and ensure all instruments

meet its conditions.

5 of 8

MT 534-16 (06/28/16)

APPENDIX A SPECTROSCOPIC DETERMINATION OF ELEMENTAL OXIDES IN PORTLAND CEMENT

Milestone Ethos EZ microwave digestion system Digestion program used: portcement.mpr Heat and time: Heat to 200°C and hold temperature during a 30 minute interval. Followed by a 10 minute cooling period Rotor: SK-10 Agilent Radial ICP-OES configuration parameters Equipment Configuration for Ca and Si

a. Nebulizer: One Neb b. Spray chamber: cyclonic c. Sample pump tubing: Gray/Gray d. Waste pump tubing: Blue/Blue e. Rinse solution: 5% Nitric acid f. Torch: High solids g. Power: 1.20 kW h. Plasma flow: 15.00 L/min i. Auxiliary flow: 1.50 L/min j. Nebulizer flow: 0.60 L/min k. Viewing height: 10 mm l. Replicate read time: 1.00 s m. Instrument stabilization delay: 15 s n. Sample uptake delay: 30 s o. Pump rate: 15 rpm p. Rinse time: 10 s q. Fast pump: yes r. Replicates: 8

Equipment Configuration for all other analytes

a. Nebulizer: One Neb b. Spray chamber: cyclonic c. Sample pump tubing: White/White d. Waste pump tubing: Blue/Blue e. Rinse solution: 5% Nitric acid f. Torch: High solids g. Power: 1.15 kW h. Plasma flow: 15.00 L/min i. Auxiliary flow: 1.50 L/min j. Nebulizer flow: 0.75 L/min k. Viewing height: 8 mm l. Replicate read time: 1.00 s m. Instrument stabilization delay: 15 s n. Sample uptake delay: 45 s o. Pump rate: 15 rpm p. Rinse time: 40 s q. Fast pump: yes r. Replicates: 5

6 of 8

MT 534-16 (06/28/16)

Line Selection for Standards, Samples, and Blanks: Select the best line(s) and average for each element. a. Ca : 210.324, 219.779, 315.887, 317.933, 318.127, 370.602, 393.366 b. Al: 309.271 c. Fe: 261.187 d. Mg: 280.270 e. Si: 185.005, 185.185, 250.690, 251.611, 251.920, 252.411, 252.851, 288.158 f. Ti: 334.941 g. Cr: 267.716 h. K: 766.491 i. Mn: 257.610 j. Na: 589.592 k. P: 213.618 l. Zn: 213.857

Calibration Agilent Radial ICP-OES

a. Type: Linear for all elements. b. Linear-Maximum percent error of 10% and Confidence limit of 0.99%. c. Calibration Standard Selection: Pick NIST or CCRL Portland cement standards that provide a

range covering what would likely be expected of the samples being analyzed. Usually a minimum of four should be selected. If any samples fall outside the range of the selected standards more should be selected to expand the range.

7 of 8

MT 534-16 (06/28/16)

APPENDIX B

SPECTROSCOPIC DETERMINATION OF SULFUR TRIOXIDE IN PORTLAND CEMENT Agilent Radial ICP-OES configuration parameters Equipment Configuration

a. Nebulizer: OneNeb b. Spray chamber: cyclonic c. Sample pump tubing: White/White d. Waste pump tubing: Blue/Blue e. Rinse solution: 5% Nitric acid f. Torch: High solids g. Power: 1.45 kW h. Plasma flow: 15.00 L/min i. Auxiliary flow: 1.50 L/min j. Nebulizer flow: 0.55 L/min k. Viewing height: 6 mm l. Replicate read time: 3.00 s m. Instrument stabilization delay: 15 s n. Sample uptake delay: 30 s o. Pump rate: 15 rpm p. Rinse time: 10 s q. Fast pump: yes r. Replicates: 3

Line Selection for Standards, Samples, and Blanks: Select the best line(s) and average for each element

a. S : 180.669, 181.972 Calibration Agilent Radial ICP-OES

a. Type: Linear for all elements. b. Linear-Maximum percent error of 10% and Confidence limit of 0.99%. c. Calibration Standard Selection: Pick NIST or CCRL Portland cement standards that provide a

range covering what would likely be expected of the samples being analyzed. Usually a minimum of four should be selected. If any samples fall outside the range of the selected standards more should be selected to expand the range.

8 of 8

MT 535-16 (06/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 535-16

BRIDGE DECK CRACK SEALANT IR TEST

THIS PROCEDURE IS IN DEVELOPMENT

1 of 1

MT 536-16 (06/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 536-16

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF SILICA FUME (Montana Method)

1 Scope 1.1 This method describes the procedures to be used for determining chemical analytes in silica fume

as recommended by AASHTO M 307 Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures.

1.2 Spectroscopic Determination of Silicon Dioxide in Silica Fume – MT 533 Chemical Analysis of Fly

Ash and Pozzolans 1.3 Moisture Content of Silica Fume – ASTM C311 sections 11 and 12 1.4 Loss on Ignition (LOI) of Silica Fume – ASTM C311 sections 13 and 14 1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with its

use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

2 Referenced Documents ASTM

C114 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement C311 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use in

Portland-Cement Concrete AASHTO M 307 Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures MT Materials Manual MT 108 Sampling and Certification of Portland Cement MT 533 Chemical Analysis of Fly Ash and Pozzolans MT 607 Procedure for Reducing Field Samples to Testing Size

3 Significance and Use 3.1 This procedure is primarily used to provide quality assurance for the silica fume submittals for

suppliers on the MDT Qualified Product List as well as provide analytical information for design applications using silica fume.

4 Report 4.1 Data Reporting and Retention for Silica Fume will be reported as shown below:

Analyte Report As Significance

Si SiO2 XX.XX

Moisture Moisture X.XX

LOI LOI X.XX 5 Validation 5.1 For validation data and quality control information consult ASTM C114 and ensure all instruments

meet its conditions.

1 of 1

MT 537-16 (09/30/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 537-16

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF GROUND GRANULATED BLAST-FURNACE SLAG (Montana Method)

1 Scope 1.1 This method describes the procedures to be used for determining chemical analytes of ground

granulated blast-furnace slag (GGBFS) as recommended by AASHTO M 302 Slag Cement for Use in Concrete Mortars.

1.1.1 This method includes the procedures for the determination of chloride by Ion Chromatography

(IC) and the following reference methods. 1.2 This test method also denotes reference test methods: 1.2.1 Spectroscopic Determination of Sulfur Trioxide – MT 533 Chemical Analysis of Fly Ash and

Pozzolans 1.2.2 Sulfide Determination – Reference method in ASTM C114 Section 17.2. 1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with its

use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

2 Referenced Documents ASTM

C114 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement AASHTO M 302 Slag Cement for Use in Concrete Mortars MT Materials Manual MT 108 Sampling and Certification of Portland Cement MT 533 Chemical Analysis of Fly Ash and Pozzolans MT 607 Procedure for Reducing Field Samples to Testing Size

3 Summary of Test Method 3.1 Chloride ions are extracted from GGBFS with nitric acid. The resulting sample solutions are

analyzed on an Ion Chromatograph. 4 Significance and Use 4.1 This procedure is primarily used to provide quality assurance for the GGBFS submittals by

suppliers for inclusion on the MDT Qualified Product List as well as provide analytical information for design applications using GGBFS.

5 Apparatus 5.1 Ion Chromatograph (IC) 5.2 Analytical Balance – A balance with a precision of 0.0001 g should be used.

1 of 4

MT 537-16 (09/30/16)

6 Reagents and Materials 6.1 Trace metal grade (TMG) Nitric acid (HNO3), concentrated (65-70%) 6.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH), concentration of 0.7 Molar 6.2 Reagent Water – Purified with a polishing system such that ASTM Type II water or better is

obtained. 6.3 Syringe filters - particle retention of 0.2 µm 6.4 Litmus paper - capable of indicating basicity or acidity 7 Sampling 7.1 GGBFS samples are to be collected in accordance with MT 108 and split in accordance with

MT 607. A 50 mL sample should be provided to the Chemistry Lab for analysis. 8 Calibration and Standardization

Follow manufacturer’s specifications for calibrating and standardizing the IC. Appendix A provides calibrating and standardizing specifications for a Metrohm 883 Basic IC plus for the determination of chloride.

9 Procedure 9.1 Weigh 0.2500 g ± 0.0005 g GGBFS into a 50 mL beaker. Record the mass. 9.2 Gently tap the materials to thinly spread it over the bottom of the beaker. 9.3 Mix 1 mL of reagent water and 200 µL of TMG Nitric Acid. 9.3 Add the acid/water mixture to the sample in a hood and gently break apart clumps using a glass

rod. 9.4 Set the mixture on a warm hot plate for five minutes, intermittently grinding any clumps so the

slag completely dissolves. 9.5 Remove the sample from the hot plate; let it cool for 10 minutes. 9.6 Add 1 mL of 0.7 M sodium hydroxide to the sample. Check the pH with litmus paper; continue

adding sodium hydroxide or nitric acid until the pH is neutral. 9.7 Transfer the sample to a 100 mL volumetric flask and bring to volume with reagent water. 9.8 Using a syringe filter, transfer a sufficient amount of the sample to a vial for the IC. 9.9 Analyze the sample on the IC.

2 of 4

MT 537-16 (09/30/16)

10 Report 10.1 Data Reporting and Retention for GGBFS will be reported as shown below:

Analyte Report As Significance

S SO3 X.XX

S- S- X.XX

Cl- Cl- 0.0XX 11 Validation 11.1 For validation data and quality control information consult ASTM C114 and ensure all instruments

meet its conditions.

3 of 4

MT 537-16 (09/30/16)

APPENDIX A CHLORIDE DETERMINATION IN GGBFS USING ION CHROMATOGRAPHY

Metrohm 883 Basic IC Plus configuration parameters Equipment Configuration Run time: 20 minutes Injection volume: 20µL Eluent: 3.2 mM sodium carbonate and 1.0 mM sodium bicarbonate

4 of 4

MT 538-12 (10/01/12)

1 of 1

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING

MT 538-12 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF BLENDED CEMENT

THIS PROCEDURE IS IN DEVELOPMENT

MT 548-16 (6/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 548-16

METHOD OF TEST FOR ANALYSIS OF TRAFFIC PAINT (Montana Method)

1. Scope 1.1 This method describes the procedures for analyzing physical and chemical properties of traffic

paint samples including: 1.1.1 Color and Contrast Ratio – Modified ASTM D2805 and E1347 1.1.2 Viscosity – ASTM D562 1.1.3 Density – Modified ASTM D1475 1.1.4 Freeze-Thaw – primarily Modified ASTM D562 and D2243 1.1.5 Static Heat Stability 1.1.6 Bleeding Ratio – primarily Modified ASTM D868 1.1.7 Skinning and Lumps 1.1.8 Settling 1.1.9 Skinning 1.1.10 FTIR Spectra Verification – Modified ASTM D7588 1.1.11 Cracking 1.1.12 Determination of Heavy Metals 1.2 This standard involves hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This standard does not

purport to address all of the safety concerns associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this procedure to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.

2 Referenced Documents ASTM Standards

D562 Standard Test Method for Consistency of Paints Measuring Krebs Unit (KU) Viscosity Using a Stormer-Type Viscometer

D660 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Checking of Exterior Paints D661 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Cracking of Exterior Paints D823 Standard Practices for Producing Films of Uniform Thickness of Paint, Varnish, and

Related Products on Test Panels D868 Standard Practice for Determination of Degree of Bleeding of Traffic Paint D1475 Standard Test Method for Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and Related Products D2243 Standard Test Method for Freeze-Thaw Resistance of Water-Borne Coatings D2805 Standard Test Method for Hiding Power of Paints by Reflectometry D7588 Standard Guide for FTIR Fingerprinting of a Non-Aqueous Liquid Paint as Supplied in the

Manufacturer’s Container E77 Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers E1347 Test Method for Color and Color-Difference Measurement by Tristimulus Colorimetry

1 of 7

MT 548-16 (6/28/16)

3 Summary of Test Methods 3.1 The Static Heat test involves storing paint at an elevated temperature for a week then conducting

a viscosity test on the paint. 3.2 The Skinning and Lumps test involves storing paint at ambient conditions then straining the paint

with a 100 mesh screen. 3.3 The Settling test involves centrifuging paint to produce a separation of the paint components. 3.4 The Skinning test involves partially filling a container with paint and inspecting it after two days to

see if the paint has formed a skin. 3.5 The Cracking test involves casting a paint film over asphalt saturated felt and examining the film

for cracks after it has dried. 3.6 For the determination of heavy metals, the paint is analyzed for the presence of antimony (Sb),

arsenic (As), cadmium (Cd), chromium (Cr), cobalt (Co), lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), and tin (Sn). Paint samples are prepared through a microwave digestion system using nitric and fluoroboric acids. The samples are then analyzed for mercury with a cold vapor technique using a vapor generation assembly (VGA) outfitted onto a flame atomic absorption spectrometer (FAAS) and for the remainder of the analytes by an inductively coupled plasma optical emission spectrometer (ICP-OES).

4 Significance and Use 4.1 This procedure is primarily used to provide quality assurance for traffic paint used within the

Montana Department of Transportation’s oversight. 5 Apparatus 5.1 Analytical Balance – Capable of measuring to 0.0001 g. 5.2 Microwave digestion system – Capable of heating samples to 200°C and maintaining that

temperature for at least 10 minutes. The system must use sealable vessels that prevent the escape of vapors.

5.3 ICP-OES – Capable of measuring trace elements to low parts per billion (ppb) levels. 5.4 FAAS – Outfitted with a hollow cathode lamp (HCL) for measuring Hg and capable of being

outfitted with a VGA. 5.5 VGA – Capable of cold vapor techniques for detecting mercury at low ppb to high parts per trillion

(ppt) levels. 5.6 Plasticware – Suitable for trace element analysis. Properly cleaned and stored filled with dilute

nitric acid solution (1 – 5%) for at least 2 days. 5.7 Centrifuge – Capable of a centrifugal force of 1112 Newtons. 5.8 Asphalt Felt Paper – 15 pound saturated asphalt felt paper. 5.9 Cans – Pint sized, lined and unlined. 5.10 Screens – 100 mesh screen capable of accommodating paint.

2 of 7

MT 548-16 (6/28/16)

5.11 Leneta 5C form – an opacity chart containing a white section and a black section paint films can be applied to.

5.12 Oven – Capable of maintaining 60°C ± 1°C. 6 Reagents and Materials 6.1 Trace metal grade (TMG) hydrochloric acid (HCl) – Any commercially available brand at a

concentration of 32-38%. 6.2 TMG nitric acid (HNO3) – Any commercially available brand at a concentration of 63-70%. 6.3 Fluoroboric acid (HBF4) – Any commercially available brand at a concentration of 46-54%. 6.4 Stannous chloride (SnCl2) solution – 10% stannous chloride w/v and 20% TMG hydrochloric acid. 6.5 1+1 hydrochloric acid – Made with TMG HCl (e.g., Add 500 ml TMG HCl to 400 ml reagent water

and dilute to 1 L). 6.6 Reagent Water – Purified with a polishing system such that ASTM Type II water or better is

obtained. 7 Calibration and Standardization 7.1 Follow manufacturer’s instructions for calibrating and standardizing the ICP-OES. Appendix A

provides parameters for a Varian Axial ICP-OES used by MDT. 7.2 Follow manufacturer’s instructions for calibrating and standardizing the FAAS and VGA.

Appendix A provides parameters for a Varian FAAS used by MDT. 7.3 Check the calibration of the oven every 6 month with a thermometer verified in accordance with

ASTM E77.

PROCEDURES 8 Color and Contrast Ratio 8.1 The paint shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D2805 and ASTM E1347 except for the

following stipulations. 8.1.1 Rescind ASTM D2805 Sections 7.1.3 through 7.8 and replace with “15 mil films shall be cast on

Leneta 5C opacity charts or equivalent and dried for a minimum of 2 hours.” Use a colorimeter to determine coordinates per ASTM E1347. Use Y, x, and y coordinates with illuminant and observer settings of C and 2° when collecting readings. Record Y, x and y coordinates. Use these coordinates to calculate contrast ratio via ASTM D2805.

9 Viscosity 9.1 The paint shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D562. 10 Density 10.1 The paint shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D1475 including the following modification. 10.1.1 Add “Stir the sample until homogeneous.” at the beginning of ASTM D1475 Section 9.1. 11 Freeze-Thaw 11.1 The paint shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D2243. Repeat procedures for 3 freeze-thaw

cycles (ASTM D2243 Section 7.3). MDT does not require a control sample as described in ASTM D2243 Section 7.1.

3 of 7

MT 548-16 (6/28/16)

11.2 After completion of the freeze-thaw procedures, visually examine the sample and note any signs

of livering, hard settling, coagulating, lumps or coarse particles. Then determine the viscosity of the freeze-thaw sample per ASTM D562. Compare the original viscosity to the freeze-thaw viscosity and determine if there was an increase or decrease in viscosity.

12 Static Heat Stability 12.1 Pour paint into a pint container to within 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) of the top. Close the container, seal

it with tape, and place the container in an oven maintained at 60°C ± 1°C (140°F ± 2°F) for 7 days.

12.2 After 7 days, remove the container from the oven. Equilibrate the paint at standard conditions and

gently stir the paint for a minimum of 5 minutes. Visually examine the sample and note any signs of livering, hard settling, coagulating, lumps or coarse particles. Then determine the viscosity of the static heat sample per ASTM D562. Compare the original viscosity to the static heat viscosity and determine if there was an increase or decrease in viscosity.

13 Bleeding Ratio 13.1 The paint shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D868, except in section 7.4.1.1, replace the

CIE L* value with the reflectance coordinate Y. 14 Skinning and Lumps 14.1 Fill a pint container ¾ full and seal it tightly. Allow the container and sample to sit for 72 hours at

ambient laboratory conditions then strain the paint through a 100 mesh screen. Note if any lumps or skin is retained on the screen.

15 Settling 15.1 Fill a centrifuge tube with paint and revolve it for 2 hours at a speed producing a centrifugal force

of 1112 Newtons (250 pound-force). Note the amount of separation of the components; there shouldn’t be more than 13 mm of separation.

16 Skinning 16.1 Fill a lined paint can ¾ full with paint and seal tightly. Invert the can momentarily, and then turn it

upright. Place the can in an area where the temperature is 21°C to 32°C for 48 hours. Do not agitate or disturb the sample. After 48 hours, open the can and inspect the paint for the presence or absence of a skin.

17 FTIR Spectra Verification 17.1 The paint shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D7588. Compare the acquired absorbance

spectrum to a previously measured spectrum or one provided by the manufacturer. Note any significant differences between the spectra. For multicomponent paints, determine a spectrum for each component separately.

18 Cracking 18.1 The film shall be cast with a 380 micron (15 mil) drawdown blade on 15-pound saturated asphalt

felt paper. Allow the film to dry for 24 ours then examine the paint for cracking. Cracking is understood to be any break extending through the paint film to the surface it is applied to. Partial breakthroughs known as checking are not categorized as cracking and are not addressed in this test. Consult ASTM D660 and ASTM D661 to better understand definitions of cracking and checking.

4 of 7

MT 548-16 (6/28/16)

19 Heavy Metals Determination 19.1 Procedure 19.1.1 Weigh 0.50 g of paint or a paint component into a Teflon insert of a high pressure sample rotor

system for microwave digestion. Make note of the mass to 0.0001 g. 19.1.2 In a properly functioning ventilation hood add 8 mL TMG nitric acid and 2 mL of fluoroboric acid to

the Teflon inserts. Place the Teflon insert in the carousel. 19.1.3 Assemble all components required for proper microwave digestion according to the

manufacturer’s instructions and then run the digestion. MDT’s parameters for a Milestone Ethos EZ microwave digestion system are in Appendix A.

19.1.4 Following the manufacturer’s instructions, remove and cool the digestion vessel and open it.

Rinse the sample into a clean Teflon beaker or other suitable cleaned container. Tare an appropriate storage container on the analytical balance. Rinse the sample into the storage container. Place the storage container back onto the analytical balance and dilute with reagent water to a mass of 100 g. Record the mass to nearest 0.01 g.

Note – If titanium dioxide is present in the sample, the sample should be filtered with a syringe filter prior

to analyzing in order to remove small particles that could block the nebulizer. 19.1.5 Once all the samples have been prepared, analyze them on an ICP-OES and a FAAS outfitted

with a VGA. 19.2 Calculation or Interpretation of Results 19.2.1 For elements Sb, As, Cd, Cr, Co, Pb, and Sn measured in mg/kg on the spectrometer, the

sample concentration is calculated by multiplying the measured value by the ratio of the solution weight and then dividing by the sample weight.

19.2.2 For Hg measured in µg/kg on the spectrometer, the sample concentration (mg/kg) is calculated

by multiplying the measured value by the ratio of the solution weight then dividing by the sample weight then dividing by 1000.

19.3 Report 19.3.1 Elements Sb, As, Cd, Cr, Co, Pb, Hg, and Sn are to be reported in the units mg/kg.

5 of 7

MT 548-16 (6/28/16)

APPENDIX A Varian Axial ICP-OES configuration parameters Equipment Configuration

a. Nebulizer: Sea Spray b. Spray chamber: cyclonic c. Sample pump tubing: White/White d. Waste pump tubing: Blue/Blue e. Rinse Solution: 3% Nitric Acid f. Torch: High solids with sheath gas g. Sheath gas: Argon at 10mL/min h. Power: 1.40 kW i. Plasma flow: 15.0 L/min j. Auxiliary flow: 1.50 L/min k. Nebulizer flow: 0.55 L/min l. Replicate Read time: 10.00 s m. Instrument stabilization delay: 15.00s n. Sample uptake delay: 30.00s o. Pump rate: 15 rpm p. Rinse time: 100s q. Fast pump: yes r. Replicates: 3

Line Selection for Standard, Samples, and Blanks

a. As 188.980, 193.696 b. Cd 214.439 c. Co 230.786, 231.160 d. Cr 267.716 e. Pb 220.353 f. Sb 217.582, 231.146 g. Sn 189.925, 283.998

Calibration Varian Axial ICP-OES

a. Type: Linear for all elements b. Linear-Maximum percent error of 5% except Cd that can be 15% and confidence limit of 0.99% c. Calibration standards: Prepare calibration standards and blanks so that the sample matrices are being mimicked by compensating for the content of acids in the case of analyzing the amine component of two component paints. Prepare a total of one standard blank and three standards with varying concentrations of each desired analyte. For other paint types or components standard additions will need to be made by adding 3 differing spikes to a known portion of sample solution kept at a constant portion of each solution followed by a dilution with no spike.

An example for a stock solution taken to 500 g for standard addition spikes is as follows:

Analyte Starting Concentration (mg/kg)

Mass Added (g)

Standard Concentration (mg/kg)

As 1000 0.5 1.0 Cd 1000 0.01 0.02 Co 1000 0.5 1.0 Cr 1000 0.1 0.2 Pb 1000 0.5 1.0 Sb 1000 0.5 1.0 Sn 1000 0.5 1.0

40 mL of TMG nitric acid and 10 mL of fluoroboric acid would added to keep the analytes stable.

6 of 7

MT 548-16 (6/28/16)

Varian AA 240FS and VGA configuration parameters Equipment configuration

a. Measurement time: 10.00s b. Read delay: 115s c. Sample tubing: Purple/black d. Acid and reductant tubing: black/black e. Replicates standards: 3 f. Replicates samples: 3 g. Precision % standards: 1.0 h. Precision % samples: 1.0 i. Lamp Current: Recommended current on Hg lamp j. Slit width: 0.5R nm k. Reslope rate: 50 l. Reslope standard: number 2

Wavelength selection for standards, samples, and blanks

a. 253.7 nm Calibration Varian AA 240FS and VGA

a. Type: Linear b. Calibration standards: Prepare calibration standards and blanks so that the acid content of the sample matrices are mimicked. However do not compensate for hydrogen peroxide as it seems to keep the analysis from working properly. Prepare a total of one standard blank and three standards with varying concentrations of each desired analyte

Milestone Ethos EZ microwave digestion system Heat and time: Heat to 200°C and hold temperature during a 20 minute interval. Followed by a 10 minute cooling period Microwave power: 1200W (500 W for 3 vessels or less) Rotor: SK-10

7 of 7

1 of 1 Rev. 03/31/18

CURRENT DATE OF REVISION MT 600 SECTION

INFORMATION AND FIELD SAMPLING PROCEDURES Test Date of Method Publication No. Title Pages or Revision MT 601 Materials Sampling, Testing and Acceptance Guide Index .......................... 150 pp Mar 2018

MT 602 Independent Assurance and Final Record Sampling ................................... 6 pp Jun 2017

MT 603 Definitions (formerly MT 501) ........................................................................ 7 pp Dec 2016

MT 604 Conversion Tables (formerly MT 502) .......................................................... 1 pp Jun 2004

MT 605 Samples and Certifications (formerly MT 503).............................................. 1 pp Jun 2004

MT 606 Random Sampling Techniques (formerly MT 416) ....................................... 8 pp Jun 2004

MT 607 Procedure for Reducing Field Samples to Testing Size (formerly MT 417) . 3 pp Jun 2004

MT 608 Voids Table (formerly MT 505) ..................................................................... 1 pp Jun 2004

MT 609 Field Numbering Concrete Cylinders (formerly MT 510) .............................. 2 pp Feb 2016

MT 610 Numbering Subgrade Material, Surfacing Material, Bituminous Treated Material and Liquid Asphalt (formerly MT 512) ............ 1 pp Jun 2004

MT 611 A Guide for Laboratory Forms (formerly MT 513) ......................................... 2 pp Jun 2004

MT 601-18 (03/31/18)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 601-18

MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE

1 Scope

This procedure is intended to assist in determining the basis of sampling, testing, inspecting, and accepting various materials and products commonly used on highway projects.

Within this procedure is a table informing the user what tests should be performed on a particular material; the sample size; rate and frequency of sampling; responsibility for sampling, testing, collecting certification, or visually inspecting the material; and special instructions or information.

2 General

Various materials are listed in the MT 601 Table. The basis of acceptance for these materials may vary depending on the specifications, procedures or circumstances relating to these materials.

The MT 601 Table is divided into material categories, such as Aggregate, Aggregate Surfacing, etc. The user is able to click on a category to expose a table containing materials that fall within that category. Also included on each page is a link to MDT Specifications. MT 601 Table contains:

• Name of the material.• The material code that corresponds to SiteManager.• Tests that are routinely performed on materials for project acceptance. When possible,

tests are hyperlinked to their procedure.• Sample size required to perform the testing.• Rate and frequency samples are to be collected.• Responsible party for witnessing/collecting samples, collecting certifications, visually

inspecting material and/or testing material.• Notes containing special instructions or information.

3 Material Acceptance Methods

There are numerous methods for determining if a material is acceptable (i.e., meet contract requirements). The basis for acceptance of a material is defined in the contract. The SiteManager term for each acceptance method is provided in parentheses.

• Sample/Test Results (Test Results): Utilized when only test results are required to verifymaterial quality.

• Sample/Test Results and Certification (Test Results & Certification): Utilized when testresults and certification and/or visual inspection are required to verify material quality.

• Qualified Products (Approved Materials): Utilized for materials that have been approvedfor inclusion on MDT’s QPL.

• Certification/Visual Inspection (Certification/Visual Inspection): Utilized when there is onlya certification and/or visual inspection required.

• Final Record: Sample and tests taken from completed portions of a project to spot checkthe results obtained for contract compliance.

• Pre-Inspection: Utilized for materials tested and inspected prior to project delivery• Mix Design: Utilized for the approval or verification of material properties and mix

proportions

3.1 Sample/Test Results

Assure that the material to be incorporated into the work is sampled at the appropriate frequency. The contractor is responsible for collecting a representative sample when applicable.

All major items to be sampled and tested are listed by category in the MT 601 Table with instructions for sample size, rate/frequency of testing, sampling/witnessing and testing

1

MT 601-18 (03/31/18)

responsibility, and any special instructions. Whenever a conflict exists between a particular test method and MT 601, MT 601 will govern.

Acceptance - Department personnel or authorized representative will witness samples collected by the contractor.

Quality Assurance (QA) – Perform sampling for QA according to the Montana Materials Manual of Test Procedures, Montana Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Manual and any applicable Supplemental Specifications for the item to be sampled. Department personnel or authorized representative will witness samples collected by the contractor. Independent Assurance (IA) - The Department requires all witnessing/sampling and testing for Independent Assurance purposes be accomplished by Department personnel or authorized representatives. IA samples must be collected under the direct supervision of the Materials Supervisor or their authorized representative and must not be scheduled on such an inflexible and regular routine that its frequency can be predicted; however, sufficient samples must be submitted to satisfy the frequency intended. There are two types of IA’s: Comparison Testing and Procedural Checks. Independent Assurance is highlighted within the MT 601 Table in blue. Specifics on the IA procedure can be found in MT 602 Acceptance, Independent Assurance and Final Record Sampling.

3.1.1 Small Quantity Items

Projects requiring only small quantities of materials may not require standard acceptance sampling and testing. Items such as Commercial Plant Mix under 500 tons, paint less than 25 gallons and minor quantities of concrete are examples. When items are designated as small quantities by the Project Manager, their acceptance will be based upon proper documentation, such as concrete mix design approvals, air and slump test results, aggregate gradation results, etc. The Project Manager will document in SiteManager (in the Contract Sampling and Testing window) the reason items or materials are accepted on small quantities. Buy America requirements apply to items designated as Small Quantities.

3.1.2 Optional Samples

All materials incorporated into the project, whether represented by actual samples or by certification, are subject to final field inspection and acceptance by the Project Manager. MDT’s Project Manager has the option to obtain more than the required minimum number of samples and to submit as many additional samples as deemed necessary to ensure conformance to specifications.

3.1.3 Maintenance Samples

Assure the material to be incorporated into the work is sampled at the appropriate interval and/or certification of materials provided meet requirements of the maintenance contract.

3.1.4 Preconstruction Samples

Samples taken prior to contract work beginning for the planning and developing of construction projects.

3.2 Sample/Test Results and Certification

Assure that the material to be incorporated into the work is sampled at the appropriate interval and the contractor is responsible for taking a representative sample. Contractor provided certification of material is required for project acceptance.

3.3 Qualified Products (Approved Materials)

The Materials Bureau maintains the Qualified Products List (QPL). MDT confirms the materials appearing on the QPL meet the specifications described in the product specific item. Some

2

MT 601-18 (03/31/18)

materials may be accepted through the QPL or by product specific testing. Materials that are required to be on the QPL are highlighted in yellow within the table. Specifics on the QPL program can be found at the following link: MDT's Qualified Products List.

3.4 Certification/Visual Inspection

Acceptance of an established product may be made by the field, based on Certificate of Compliance (Cert of Comp) or Product Data Sheet (Data Sheet), visual inspection of the material’s condition and/or previous satisfactory field performance. When a Cert of Comp or Data Sheet is required, the inspector must verify that the material received matches the Cert of Comp or Data Sheet and meets the contract requirements.

• Certificates of Compliance – state the material meets the contract requirements. A

manufacturer’s authorized representative must sign the certificate. Clearly identify each lot of certified materials or assemblies delivered to the work in the Certificate of Compliance. Materials or assemblies used on the basis of Certificates of Compliance may be sampled and tested at any time. Materials not meeting contract requirements will be rejected.

• Product Data Sheets – describes the mechanical, thermal, physical, chemical, and

specific properties of the product. Product Data Sheets must contain relevant standards, test methods, and results for applicable materials and subcomponents showing products to be in compliance with contract requirements.

3.4.1 Buy America

Standard Specification 106.09, 23 USC Section 313, and 23 CFR 635.410 apply to all steel and iron items designated for permanent incorporation into all MDT projects. Items designated as Category 1 or 2 will be verified as described below. For all other items documentation will be required upon request.

• Items designated as Category 1 require supporting documentation showing all steps of

manufacturing as being completed in the U.S. This includes the Mill Test Report from the original producing steel mill and certifications documenting the manufacturing processes for all subsequent fabrication, including coatings.

• Items designated as Category 2 must have all manufacturing processes completed in the U.S.; however, to address concerns with excessive documentation, products may be certified as domestic by the fabricator. Certification by the fabricator must consist of a statement that all materials have been melted and manufactured in the U.S. and are required to be signed by a fabricator representative. The Department reserves the right to request additional information and documentation to verify accuracy of statement.

Material requirements for Buy America are identified on the Index table and are highlighted in gray within the table. Tests labeled as Steel Cert Category 1 and 2 are linked to MDT’s Form 406 - Contractors Certificate of Compliance for Miscellaneous Steel and Iron Items.

3.5 Final Records Final Record (FR) - Samples must be taken by or under the direct supervision of the Materials Supervisor or their authorized representative and must not be scheduled on such an inflexible and regular routine that its frequency can be predicted, but sufficient samples must be submitted to satisfy the frequency intended. FR samples are to be taken in accordance with the following link: MT 602 Acceptance, Independent Assurance and Final Record Sampling.

3.6 Pre-Inspection

Pre-Inspected items consist of products that undergo detailed inspections at the point of manufacture or products that are fabricated by Department Certified Plants as listed on the QPL. The purpose of Pre-Inspection is to verify that processes and materials used during fabrication meet Department requirements. One process the Department uses to accomplish this is by

3

MT 601-18 (03/31/18)

having a Department representative present during production to witness, sample, and test materials used. Another process the Department uses is Department Certified Plants. Department Certified Plants are producers employing internal quality control measures with an acceptable track record relating to product quality. The Department assures quality products are being produced at Department Certified Plants by implementing a combination of plant inspections, quality control system reviews, and Department witnessed or Department performed sampling and testing.

The Department representative performing pre-inspection of precast concrete products and prefabricated steel products verifies the fabricator is maintaining the supporting documentation regarding steel materials. Pre-inspected precast and prefabricated products delivered to the project must be accompanied by certification from the manufacturer stating all steel used in the product has been melted and manufactured in the United States and the fabricator has maintained supporting documentation. The Contractor is required to submit a Form 406 is when inspection of the product is made at the point of production and with certification by the plant that all steel incorporated has been melted and manufactured in the United States. All supporting documentation must be maintained by the fabricator.

Pre-inspection does not constitute project acceptance. The field is responsible for final inspection and acceptance; pre-inspected products identified as not meeting contract requirements may be subject to rejection.

3.7 Mix Designs Mix designs are submitted to MDT Helena Materials Bureau for verification and/or approval. Samples are submitted to determine if the quality of the materials and mix proportions conform to the plans and specifications. Mix Designs are highlighted within the tables in green.

4 Submittals, Documentation and Reports

A Sampling Checklist Report in SiteManager will be generated at the beginning of each contract. This report will show the material to bid item association. It will also show who is responsible for witnessing/sampling and testing the material, the sample size per unit, how many samples need to be taken, how many samples have been taken, and if there are any sample deficiencies. Once an individual takes or witnesses a sample, a sample record is created using the Sample Information window in SiteManager. When a sample or certification must be sent to the District/Area lab or the Helena Materials Bureau, a screenshot of the “Basic Sample Data” tab is printed out and included with/or attached to the material and/or any required certification sheets . Materials are tested and the results are entered in the Test tab of the Sample Information window in SiteManager. Once the sample record is authorized, a report will be generated containing the test results. These reports are e-mailed to the appropriate personnel per a distribution list.

4

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

C - Requires Certificate of Compliance

D - Requires Product Data Sheet

BAC1 - Requires Buy America Category 1 Certification

BAC2 - Requires Buy America Category 2 Certification

QPL - Accepted only from the Qualified Products List

Material Code Aggregate (AGGR) Page

701.01 Concrete Aggregate - During Production 13

701.01.01.01 Fine Concrete Aggregate - Source 13

701.01.02.01 Coarse Concrete Aggregate Grade 2 - Source 14

701.01.02.02 Coarse Concrete Aggregate Grade 4 - Source 14

701.01.03.01 Combined/Intermediate Concrete Aggregate - Source 14

701.04.01.01 Bedding Material 14

701.04.02.01 Foundation Material 15

701.05.00.01 Filter Material Number 1 15

701.05.00.02 Filter Material Number 2 15

701.06.02.01 Rip Rap Class 1 15

701.06.02.02 Rip Rap Class 2 16

701.06.02.03 Rip Rap Class 3 16

701.07.00.01 Bank Protection Type 1 16

701.07.00.02 Bank Protection Type 2 16

701.07.00.03 Bank Protection Type 3 16

701.07.00.04 Bank Protection Type 4 17

701.08.00.01 Sand - Gravel Cushion 17

701.10.00.01 Drain Aggregate 17

C 701.11.00.01 Glass Cullet 17

701.09.00.01 Retaining Wall Backfill 18

701.09.00.02 MSE Wall Backfill 19

701.13.00.01 Bridge End Backfill Type 1 20

701.13.00.02 Bridge End Backfill Type 2 20

701.13.00.03 Bridge End Backfill Type 3 21

PC 1 Proposed Surfacing (Gravel Pit) 22

PC 2 Soils for Soil Survey 23

Material Code Aggregate Surfacing (AGGS) Page

301.03.06.01 Shoulder Gravel 24

302.03.01.01 Pulverize/Milled Bituminous Pavement 24

Traffic Gravel 24

701.02.03.01 Sand Surfacing Grade 4 25

701.02.04.01 Crushed Base Coarse Grade 5A 26

701.02.04.02 Crushed Base Coarse Grade 6A 27

701.02.06.01 Crushed Top Surfacing Grade 2A 28

701.02.07.01 Crushed Top Surfacing Grade 3B 29

701.02.08.01 Crushed Cover Aggregate Type 2 (old Grade 2A) 30

701.02.08.02 Crushed Cover Aggregate Type 1 (old Grade 4A) 31

701.02.08.05 Crushed Cover Aggregate Type 3 32

701.02.08.03 Slurry Seal Aggregate 33

MATERIAL INDEX

5

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL INDEX701.02.08.06 Microsurfacing Aggregate Type 2 33

701.02.08.04 Microsurfacing Aggregate Type 3 33

701.02.09.01 Cement Treated Base 34

Material Code Bearing Devices (BEAR) Page

D BAC2 565.02.00.01 Elastomeric Bearing Devices 35

D 565.02.00.02 Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) 35

D 565.02.00.03 Fiber Reinforced Pads 35

Material Code Bituminous (BITM) Page

C 702.02.01.01 Anionic Slow Set Emulsion SS-1 36

C 702.02.01.02 Cationic Slow Set Emulsion CSS-1 36

C 702.02.01.03 Cationic Slow Set Emulsion CSS-1h 37

C 702.02.01.04 Anionic Slow Set Emulsion SS-1h 37

C 702.02.05.01 Medium Curing Liquid Asphalt MC-800 38

C QPL 702.02.05.02 Medium Curing Liquid Asphalt MC-70 38

C 702.02.07.01 High Float Emulsion HF-100 39

C 702.02.07.02 High Float Emulsion HF-300 39

C 702.02.07.03 Polymer Mod. Cat. High Float Rapid Set Emulsion CHFRS-2p 40

C 702.02.08.01 Polymer Mod. Cat. Rapid Set Emulsion CRS-2p 40

C 702.02.08.02 Cationic Rapid Setting Emulsion CRS-2 41

C 702.02.08.03 Cationic Quick Setting Emulsion CQS-1h 41

C 702.02.08.04 Polymer Mod. Cat. Quick Set Emulsion CQS-1hP 42

C 702.02.08.05 Polymer Mod. Cat. Quick Set Emulsion CQS-1p 42

C 702.02.08.06 Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion 43

C 702.02.09.06 Performance Graded Asphalt Binder 58-28 44

C 702.02.09.09 Performance Graded Asphalt Binder 64-22 45

C 702.02.09.10 Performance Graded Asphalt Binder 64-28 46

C 702.02.09.12 Performance Graded Asphalt Binder 70-28 47

Material Code Bituminous Prime and Tack Coat (BPTC) Page

407.02.02.01 Blotter Material 4848

Material Code Concrete and Structures (CONC) Page

D QPL 551.02.01.01 Portland Cement 49

D QPL 551.02.01.02 Blended Cement 49

D QPL 551.02.03.01 Concrete Admixture 49

D 551.02.04.01 Epoxy Adhesives 49

D QPL 551.02.10.01 Fly Ash 49

D QPL 551.02.11.01 Microsilica/Silica Fume 49

D QPL 551.02.12.01 Metakaolin 50

D QPL 551.02.13.01 Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) 50

551.03.02.01 Shotcrete 50

551.03.02.02 Class General Concrete 51

551.03.02.03 Class Pave Concrete 52

551.03.02.04 Class Pre Concrete 54

551.03.02.05 Class SCC Concrete 55

551.03.02.06 Class Deck Concrete 57

551.03.02.07 Class Overlay-SF Concrete 58

551.03.02.08 Class Overlay-LM Concrete 60

551.03.02.09 Class Structure Concrete 61

551.03.02.10 Class Drilled Shaft Concrete 62

551.03.02.11 Controlled Low Strength Material-Excav 63

6

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL INDEX551.03.02.12 Controlled Low Strength Material-Non-Excav 63

D 551.03.02.13 Pre-Packaged Concrete 64

551.03.02.14 Lean Concrete 64

D 552.02.01.01 Epoxy Resin Grout 64

552.03.16.01 Deck Drains 64

C BAC2 553.02.08.01 Precast Prestressed Deck Sections 65

C BAC2 553.02.09.01 Prestressed Beam 65

C BAC2 554.04.03.01 Precast Concrete Bridge Members 66

BAC2 554.04.04.01 Cattle Guard Bases 66

C BAC2 554.04.06.01 Precast Concrete Product - Structural 67

BAC2 554.04.06.02 Precast Concrete Product - Non Structural 67

D 563.02.01.08 Waterproof Membrane 67

Material Code Concrete Sealant (CONS) Page

D QPL 717.01.03.01 Liquid Membrane-Forming Concrete Curing Compound 68

D QPL 717.01.04.01 Concrete Cure and Seal Compounds 68

D QPL 717.02.02.01 High Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM) 68

D QPL 717.02.03.01 Epoxy Bridge Deck Crack Sealant 68

D QPL 717.02.01.01 Silane Sealer 69

D 717.02.04.01 Deck Sealant Sand 69

Material Code Crack Sealing (CRKS) Page

D QPL 403.02.00.01 Crack Sealant 70

D QPL 403.02.00.02 Backer Rod 70

Material Code Excavation (EXC) Page

203.01.01.02 Special Borrow 71

203.01.02.01 Embankment 72

203.03.01.01 Stemming Aggregate for Blasting 73

Material Code Fencing (FNC) Page

607.02.01.01 Snow Fence Material 74

D BAC2 712.01.02.01 Chain Link Fabric 74

D BAC2 712.01.03.01 Chain Link Steel Post 74

D 712.01.03.03 Chain Link Aluminum Post 74

D BAC2 712.01.06.01 Cable/Tie/Brace Wire 75

D BAC2 712.01.08.01 Chain Link Gate 75

D BAC2 712.02.00.01 Fence Wire 75

D BAC2 712.02.07.01 Steel Fence Post 75

712.02.08.01 Wood Fence Post/Brace Rail 76

D BAC2 712.02.09.01 Metal Gate 76

D 712.02.12.01 Deadman/Anchor 76

Material Code Geotextile (GEOT) Page

C 622.01.01.01 Geogrid - Subgrade/Foundation 77

C 622.01.01.02 Geogrid - Slope Reinforcement 77

C 622.01.01.03 Geogrid - Wall Reinforcement 77

C 622.02.01.01 Geocomposite Drain 77

D 713.06.00.01 Weed Control Mat 78

C/D QPL 713.12.00.04 Turf Reinforcement Mat - Synthetic Fiber 78

C/D QPL 713.12.00.05 Turf Reinforcement Mat - Natural Fiber 78

C/D QPL 713.12.00.06 Short Term Rolled Erosion Control Blanket 78

C/D QPL 713.12.00.07 Long Term Rolled Erosion Control Blanket 78

7

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL INDEX

C/D QPL 713.12.00.08 High Performance Rolled Erosion Control Blanket 79

C 716.02.00.01 Geotextile Separation High Survivability 79

C 716.02.00.02 Geotextile Separation Moderate Survivability 79

C 716.03.00.01 Geotextile Stabilization - High Survivability 80

C 716.04.00.01 Geotextile Sub Drain Class A-High Survivability 80

C 716.04.00.02 Geotextile Sub Drain Class B-High Survivability 80

C 716.04.00.03 Geotextile Sub Drain Class C-High Survivability 81

C 716.04.00.04 Geotextile Sub Drain Class A-Moderate Survivability 81

C 716.04.00.05 Geotextile Sub Drain Class B-Moderate Survivability 81

C 716.04.00.06 Geotextile Sub Drain Class C-Moderate Survivability 82

C 716.04.00.07 Geosynthetic Clay Liner 82

C 716.04.00.08 Geomembrane Liner 82

C 716.05.00.01 Geotextile Permanent Erosion Control Class-A High Survivability 82

C 716.05.00.02 Geotextile Permanent Erosion Control Class-B High Survivability 83

C 716.05.00.03 Geotextile Permanent Erosion Control Class-C High Survivability 83

C 716.05.00.04 Geotextile Permanent Erosion Control Class-A Moderate Survivability 83

C 716.05.00.05 Geotextile Permanent Erosion Control Class-B Moderate Survivability 84

C 716.05.00.06 Geotextile Permanent Erosion Control Class-C Moderate Survivability 84

D 716.06.00.00 Temporary Silt Fence 84

Material Code Guardrail (GRD) Page

D BAC1 705.01.01.01 Box Beam Guardrail 85

D BAC2 705.01.01.02 Wire Rope 85

D BAC1 705.01.01.03 Steel Beam Guardrail 85

D BAC2 705.01.01.05 Miscellaneous Guardrail 85

705.01.02.01 Wood Guardrail Post/Blockouts 86

C 705.01.02.02 Non-Wood Blockouts 86

C BAC2 705.01.05.01 Steel Guardrail Post 86

D QPL 606.02.00.01 Mash W-Beam Terminal Section 86

C 606.03.00.01 Cert of Comp for Guardrail Items 87

Material Code Joint Material (JNT) Page

D QPL 707.01.01.01 Expansion Joint Fillers - Cork 88

D QPL 707.01.01.02 Joint Sealing Material 88

D 707.01.02.02 Silicone Joint Seal 88

D 707.01.02.03 Fabric Reinforced Neoprene Joint Seal 88

C/D BAC2 707.01.02.04 Expansion Joint System 88

D 707.01.02.05 Expansion Joint Asphalt Plug 89

D 707.01.03.01 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler 89

D 707.02.01.01 Gasket 89

D 707.02.02.01 Flexible Joint Sealer 89

Material Code Lighting, Signals & Communication (LSM) Page

D Variable Message Sign 90

D Antenna 90

D Varies 703.01.00.01 Electrical Submittal 90

D PVC Conduit 90

D HDPE Conduit 90

BAC2 Steel Conduit 90

D BAC2 Pull Boxes 91

D BAC2 Signal Standards Type 2/3 91

D BAC2 Luminaire Standard Type 10 91

8

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL INDEX

D BAC2 Signal Standards Type 1 91

D Conductor 92

D Cable 92

D Service & Control Assembly 92

D Traffic Signal Cabinet 92

D Traffic Signal Indication 92

D LED Traffic Signal 92

D Pedestrian Signal Indication 92

D Detector Loop 93

D Pedestrian Push Buttons 93

D Luminaire Assembly 93

D Emergency Vehicle Preemption 93

703.16.00.01 Class 4 Treated Wood Poles 93

D Guys & Anchors 93

Material Code Maintenance (MAIN) Page

D MT 1 8A-R Salt (Maintenance) 94

D MT 3 8A-B Salt (Maintenance) 94

D MT 10 8B Salt (Maintenance) 95

MT 2 Salt Brine - NaCl (Maintenance) 95

D MT 6 Corrosion Inhibitor (Maintenance) 96

D MT 7 De-Icer - MgCl2 (Maintenance) 97

D MT 8 De-Icer - CaCl2 (Maintenance) 98

D MT 11 De-Icer - KCH3COO (Maintenance) 99

D MT 4 Sanding Material 99

D MT 9 Cold Mix Asphalt Patching Material 100

D MT 5 Engine Oil Analysis 100

Material Code Miscellaneous (MISC) Page

D 405.01.01.01 Quick Lime 101

D BAC2 QPL 608.03.02.01 Detectable Warning Devices 101

C BAC2 611.02.04.01 Cattle Guard (Grate) 101

D 613.03.05.01 Concrete Filled Bag/Scrim Bag 101

D QPL 623.02.00.01 Mail Box 102

706.01.00.01 Structural Timber 102

D 710.02.00.01 Miscellaneous Paint 102

D 710.02.00.02 Aluminum Epoxy 102

D 710.02.00.03 Pipe Pile Epoxy 102

D 710.02.03.01 Zinc Rich Primer 103

C 710.03.00.01 Powder Coating 103

D QPL 710.04.00.01 Anti-Graffiti Coating 103

C/D 713.00.00.00 Miscellaneous Material Accepted on Cert 103

713.01.00.01 Water for Concrete 103

D 713.02.00.01 Hydrated Lime 104

D 713.03.00.01 Calcium Chloride 104

D 713.03.00.02 Magnesium Chloride 104

D 713.04.01.01 Mortar Sand 105

D 713.04.01.02 Cement Grout 105

713.05.02.01 Topsoil 105

713.05.02.02 Landscape Grade Topsoil 105

D 713.08.01.01 Seed 106

9

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL INDEX

D 713.09.00.01 Fertilizer 106

C/D QPL 713.10.01.01 Mulch 106

713.10.03.01 Fabricated Netting 106

D 713.11.00.01 Sod 106

C/D QPL 713.13.01.01 Compost 107

MCS 1 Dyed Diesel 107

Material Code Pavement Markings (PMM) Page

D QPL 714.03.00.02 Temporary Paint 108

D QPL 714.04.00.03 Waterborne Paint (previously 714.07.01.01) 108

D QPL 714.05.00.03 High Durable Waterborne Paint 108

D QPL 714.06.00.02 Epoxy Paint (previously 714.08.00.01) 108

D 714.07.00.01 Preformed Plastic (previously 714.03.00.01) 108

D QPL 714.08.00.02 Reflective Glass Beads - MT Type 1 109

D QPL 714.08.00.03 Reflective Glass Beads - MT Type 2 109

Material Code Pile (PILE) Page

C BAC2 559.04.06.01 Pile Driving Point 110

C BAC2 559.04.06.02 Pile Cutting Shoe 110

C BAC1 711.10.01.01 Structural Steel Piles 110

C BAC1 711.10.02.01 Steel Pipe Piles 111

C BAC1 711.10.03.01 Steel Fluted Piles 111

Material Code Pipes (PIPE) Page

BAC2 708.01.01.01 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 112

BAC2 708.02.00.01 Concrete Pressure Pipe 112

D 708.05 Plastic Pipe 112

D 708.06 Plastic Pipe 112

D 708.07 Plastic Pipe 112

D 708.08 Plastic Pipe 112

D BAC2 709.01.01.01 Ductile Iron Water Pipe 113

C/D BAC2 709.01.02.01 Steel Water Pipe 113

D BAC2 709.02.00.01 Corrugated Steel Pipe 113

D BAC2 709.03.00.01 Steel Structural Plate Pipe 113

D 709.07.00.01 Corr Aluminum Pipe Culvert 114

C/D BAC2 709.09.00.01 Seamless Steel Pipe 114

D 709.10.00.01 Copper Pipe 114

PC 3 Pipe Inspection for Pipe Survey 114

Material Code Plant Mix Pavement (PMP) Page

D QPL 401.02.04.01 Warm Mix Additives 115

D 401.02.05.01 Anti-Stripping Additive 115

D 401.02.05.02 Recycling Agent 115

401.03.01.01 Plant Mix Surfacing Grade S (3/4") 116

401.03.01.02 Plant Mix Surfacing Grade S (1/2") 119

401.03.01.06 Plant Mix Surfacing Grade S (3/8") 122

401.03.01.03 Plant Mix Surfacing Grade D 125

401.03.01.05 Plant Mix Seal Course 128

C 401.03.02.01 EPA Specification Used Oil Fuel 130

405.01.21.01 Cold Recycled Plant Mix 130

C 405.02.01.01 Cold In-Place Recycled - Engr Emulsion 130

PC 4 Cores for Stripping Analysis 130

10

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL INDEXMaterial Code Signing (SIGN) Page

D 619.03.08.02 Snow Pole 131

D 704.01.01.01 Signing Sheet Aluminum 131

D BAC2 704.01.04.01 Steel Sign Posts 131

D BAC2 704.01.04.02 Structural Steel Sign Posts 131

D 704.01.04.05 Aluminum Sign Posts 131

D BAC2 QPL 704.01.04.06 Breakaway Devices 132

704.01.06.01 Wood Posts & Poles 132

BAC1 704.01.08.01 Overhead Structures 132

D 704.01.10.01 Retro-Reflective Sheeting 132

D QPL 704.03.00.01 Surface Mount Flexible Delineators 133

D BAC2 QPL 704.03.00.02 Drivable Flexible Delineators 133

Material Code Steel (STL) Page

D BAC2 QPL 501.02.03.01 Smooth Dowel Bars 134

D 501.02.03.02 Dowel Bar Sleeve 134

D BAC2 QPL 501.02.04.01 Tie Bars, Grade 40 134

D BAC2 711.00.00.01 Steel Railing 134

D BAC2 QPL 711.01.01.01 Rebar Grade 40 134

D BAC2 QPL 711.01.01.02 Rebar Grade 60 135

D BAC2 QPL 711.01.01.04 Rebar Grade 75 135

D BAC2 711.01.01.03 Mechanical Rebar Connectors 135

D QPL 711.01.02.01 Rebar Epoxy Coating 135

D BAC2 QPL 711.01.03.01 Reinforcing Wire, Wire Mesh 135

C/D BAC1 711.02.00.01 Structural Steel 136

C/D BAC1 711.03.00.01 Structural Steel Tubing 136

D BAC1 711.04.00.01 Pins & Rollers 136

BAC2 711.06.00.01 High Tensile Strength Bolts 137

711.07.00.01 Bolts, Nuts, Threaded Rod 137

D BAC2 711.08.00.01 Galvanized Metal 137

C/D BAC2 711.09.00.01 Welded Stud Shear Connectors 138

D BAC2 711.11.00.01 Prestressing Steel 138

D BAC2 711.12.01.01 Steel Castings 138

D BAC2 711.12.03.01 Miscellaneous Drainage Castings 139

D BAC2 QPL 711.12.03.02 Cast Inlet Grates 139

D BAC2 711.13.00.01 Structural Anchor Bolts 139

D BAC2 711.17.00.01 Metal Bin-Type Retaining Walls 139

D BAC2 711.18.00.01 Rock/Soil Anchor 140

D BAC2 711.21.00.01 High Strength Wire Rockfall Mesh 140

D BAC2 711.22.00.01 Gabion Baskets - Wire and Wire Mesh 140

Material Code Stream Preservation (STPR) Page

C/D 208.02.00.01 Temporary Rolled Erosion Control 141

D 208.02.01.01 Plants - Trees & Shrubs 141

208.02.02.01 Log 141

208.02.02.02 Root Wad 141

208.02.02.03 Stream Preservation 141

208.02.03.01 Streambed Aggregate 141

Material Code Crash Testing (CRSH) Page

C 618.03.02.01 Cert of Comp for Traffic Control/Mailbox 142

11

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL INDEX

Material Code Structure Material (STR) Page

BM.699.01.01 Bird Spikes 143

D BM.699.01.02 Glue Laminated Beams 143

D BM.699.01.03 Insulation 143

D BAC2 BM.699.01.04 Metal Roofing 143

D BAC2 BM.699.01.05 Metal Siding & Soffit 143

D BM.699.01.06 Picnic Shelter (Non Precast) 144

D BM.699.01.07 Quarry Tile 144

D BAC2 BM.699.01.08 Roof Joist 144

D BM.699.01.09 Interior/Exterior Building Tape & Paint 144

BM.699.01.10 Masonry/Through Wall Flashing 145

D BM.699.01.11 Pre-Packaged Mortar 145

D BM.699.01.12 CMU 145

D BM.699.01.13 SRW Block 145

D BM.699.01.14 Masonry Siding 146

D BM.699.01.15 Interior/Exterior Glass and Glazing 146

Material Code Electrical/Mechanical (ELMC) Page

D BM.699.02.01 Electrical 146

D BM.699.02.02 HVAC System 146

BM.699.02.03 Interior Fixtures & Features 147

D BAC2 BM.699.02.04 Propane Tank 147

Material Code Plumbing (PLMB) Page

D BM.699.03.01 Irrigation System 147

D BM.699.03.02 Plumbing 147

D BM.699.03.03 Waste Water Treatment System 148

D BM.699.03.04 Waste Water Utility Pipe & Appurtenance 148

D BM.699.03.05 Waste Water Pumps, Fittings & Valves 148

D BM.699.03.07 Well Pumps, Fittings & Valves 148

Material Code Accessories (ACC) Page

D BM.699.04.01 Benches (Non Precast) 148

D BM.699.04.02 Picnic Tables (Non Precast) 149

D BM.699.04.03 Trash Receptacles (Non Precast) 149

D BM.699.04.04 Fire Extinguishers & Cabinets 149

D BM.699.04.05 Flag Poles (Aluminum) 149

BM.699.04.06 Toilet Room Accessories 149

Material Code Door/Display (DRDP) Page

D BM.699.05.01 Aluminum Storefront 150

D BM.699.05.02 Display Cases 150

BM.699.05.03 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 150

D BM.699.05.04 Overhead Garage Doors 150

Material Code Scale Site Specific (SSS) Page

D BAC2 BM.699.06.01 Scale Pit Structural Items 151

D BM.699.06.02 Scale Electronics, Transducers, and Displays 151

Building Materials (BM)

12

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

PAVING: ONE SAMPLE FOR EACH TWO LANE

MILE (1.6 KM), MINIMUM OF ONE SAMPLE

FOR PROJECTS LESS THAN ONE MILE

OTHER: AT LEAST ONE SAMPLE FOR EVERY 4

SAMPLES, MINIMUM OF ONE PER

PROJECT/CONTRACT

TEST TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

AASHTO T 21

ORGANIC

IMPURITIES IN FINE

AGGREGATE

If Requested

AASHTO T 104

SOUNDNESS

SODIUM SULFATE

(FINE AGG)

FINE CONCRETE

AGGREGATE -

SOURCE

701.01.01.01

PROPOSED SOURCE:

THREE 50 LB (23 KG) COMPOSITE SAMPLES

FROM EACH SOURCE TEST

50 LBS

(23 KG)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

CONCRETE

AGGREGATE -

DURING

PRODUCTION

701.01

30 LBS

(14 KG)

PAVING: ONE TEST PER EVERY

1000 CU YDS (750 M3)

OTHER: ONE SAMPLE FOR EACH 200 CU YDS

(150 M3) OF CONCRETE WITH A MINIMUM

OF ONE SAMPLE PER PROJECT

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

AGGREGATE

13

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

AASHTO T 104

SOUNDNESS

SODIUM SULFATE

AASHTO T 96

LOS ANGELES

ABRASION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/AMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER INSTALLATION

AND PER LIFTTEST

50 LBS

(23 KG)

PROPOSED SOURCE:

THREE 50 LB (23 KG) COMPOSITE SAMPLES

FROM EACH SOURCE TEST

BEDDING

MATERIAL

701.04.01.01

77 LBS

(35 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

TEST

COARSE AND

COMBINED/

INTERMEDIATE

CONCRETE

AGGREGATE

- SOURCE

701.01.02.01

701.01.02.02

701.01.03.01

AGGREGATE

14

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/AMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER INSTALLATION

AND PER LIFTTEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SPEC TABLE 701-21

RANDOM RIP RAPN/A ONE TEST PER PROJECT TEST

MDT FORM 127

RIP RAPN/A ONE TEST PER SOURCE TEST

FILTER MATERIAL

NUMBER 2

701.05.00.02

77 LBS

(35 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

FOUNDATION

MATERIAL

701.04.02.01

77 LBS

(35 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

TEST

RIP RAP CLASS 1

701.06.02.01

FILTER MATERIAL

NUMBER 1

701.05.00.01

30 LBS

(14 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

AGGREGATE

15

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SPEC TABLE 701-21

RANDOM RIP RAPN/A ONE TEST PER PROJECT TEST

MDT FORM 127

RIP RAPN/A ONE TEST PER SOURCE TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SPEC TABLE 701-21

RANDOM RIP RAPN/A ONE TEST PER PROJECT TEST

MDT FORM 127

RIP RAPN/A ONE TEST PER SOURCE TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SPEC TABLE 701-22

BANK PROTECTIONN/A ONE TEST PER PROJECT TEST

CERT/VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE TEST PER SOURCE VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SPEC TABLE 701-22

BANK PROTECTIONN/A ONE TEST PER PROJECT TEST

CERT/VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE TEST PER SOURCE VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SPEC TABLE 701-22

BANK PROTECTIONN/A ONE TEST PER PROJECT TEST

CERT/VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE TEST PER SOURCE VISUAL

RIP RAP CLASS 2

701.06.02.02

RIP RAP CLASS 3

701.06.02.03

BANK PROTECTION

TYPE 1

701.07.00.01

BANK PROTECTION

TYPE 2

701.07.00.02

BANK PROTECTION

TYPE 3

701.07.00.03

AGGREGATE

16

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SPEC TABLE 701-22

BANK PROTECTIONN/A ONE TEST PER PROJECT TEST

CERT/VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE TEST PER SOURCE VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/A MINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER INSTALLATION TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

GLASS CULLET

701.11.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT

CERT OF

COMP

DRAIN AGGREGATE

701.10.00.01

77 LBS

(35 KG)ONE TEST PER PROJECT

SAND - GRAVEL

CUSHION

701.08.00.01

77 LBS

(35 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

TEST

BANK PROTECTION

TYPE 4

701.07.00.04

AGGREGATE

17

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISAASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

AASHTO T 335

FRACTUREAASHTO M 145

SOIL CLASSMT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTORMT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

AASHTO T 104

SOUNDNESS

SODIUM SULFATE

SAMPLE

AASHTO T 267

ORGANIC CONTENT

IN SOILS

AASHTO T 288

SOIL RESISTIVITYAASHTO T 289

pH OF SOIL

AASHTO T 290

SULFATE CONTENT

IN SOIL

AASHTO T 291

CHLORIDE IN SOIL

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/AMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER INSTALLATION

AND PER LIFTTEST

RETAINING WALL

BACKFILL

701.09.00.01

77 LBS

(35 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

TEST

30 LBS

(14 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE TEST

TEST MAY BE REQUIRED PER SPECIAL

PROVISION

AGGREGATE

18

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISAASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

AASHTO T 335

FRACTUREAASHTO M 145

SOIL CLASSMT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTORMT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

AASHTO T 104

SOUNDNESS

SODIUM SULFATE

SAMPLE

AASHTO T 267

ORGANIC CONTENT

IN SOILS

AASHTO T 288

SOIL RESISTIVITYAASHTO T 289

pH OF SOIL

AASHTO T 290

SULFATE CONTENT

IN SOIL

AASHTO T 291

CHLORIDE IN SOIL

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/AMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER INSTALLATION

AND PER LIFTTEST

30 LBS

(14 KG)

SAMPLE

MUST

INCLUDE A

MINIMUM

OF 6 KG OF

MINUS 10

MESH

ONE TEST PER SOURCE TESTTEST MAY BE REQUIRED PER SPECIAL

PROVISION

MSE WALL BACKFILL

701.09.00.02

77 LBS

(35 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

TEST

AGGREGATE

19

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/AMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER INSTALLATION

AND PER LIFTTEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/AMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER INSTALLATION

AND PER LIFTTEST

BRIDGE END

BACKFILL

TYPE 1

701.13.00.01

77 LBS

(35 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

TEST

BRIDGE END

BACKFILL

TYPE 2

701.13.00.02

ONE TEST PER SOURCE

TEST

77 LBS

(35 KG)

AGGREGATE

20

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

AASHTO M 145

SOIL CLASS

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/AMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER INSTALLATION

AND PER LIFTTEST

BRIDGE END

BACKFILL

TYPE 3

701.13.00.03

77 LBS

(35 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

TEST

AGGREGATE

21

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

TESTSSAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 58

PREPARATIONVISUAL

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

AASHTO M 145

SOIL CLASS

AASHTO T 96

LOS ANGELES

ABRASION

AASHTO T 112

CLAY LUMPS &

FRIABLE PARTICLES

AASHTO T 327

MICRO-DEVAL

MT 305

VOLUME SWELL-

CALIPER/MERCURY

MT 322

ADHESION

AASHTO T 104

SOUNDNESS

SODIUM SULFATE

AASHTO T 190

R-VALUE

TEST

PROPOSED

SURFACING

(GRAVEL PIT)

PC 1

SAMPLE

PER MT

201

ONE TEST PER SOURCE

TEST

AGGREGATE

22

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 58

PREPARATIONVISUAL

MT 207

CENTERLINE

SOIL SURVEY

MT 201

SAMPLING

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

AASHTO M 145

SOIL CLASS

AASHTO T 100

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

OF SOILS

MT 232

SOILS CORROSION

AASHTO T 190

R-VALUE

THIS INFORMATION IS FOR DESIGN

SAMPLE

SOILS FOR SOIL

SURVEY

PC 2

SAMPLE

PER

MT 207

ONE TEST PER LOCATION TEST

TEST

AGGREGATE

23

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER PROJECT VISUAL

VISUALLY INSPECT SO THAT 100% OF

MATERIAL PASSES 2-INCH (50 MM) SIEVE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS VISUALLY INSPECT UNLESS QUESTIONABLE TEST

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

TWO TESTS PER MATERIAL TYPE

RESAMPLE IF MATERIAL CHANGESSAMPLE TEST

MT 219

CONTROL-STRIP

TEST SECTION

N/A

WHEN RATIO OF BLENDED MATERIAL

CHANGES BY MORE THAN 20%

OR CHARACTERISTICS OR SITE CONDITIONS

CHANGE

TEST

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/A 10 TESTS PER 2000 FT (610 M) TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

TRAFFIC GRAVEL77 LBS

(35 KG)

ONE TEST PER PROJECT

RESAMPLE IF MATERIAL CHANGES

PULVERIZED/

MILLED

BITUMINOUS

PAVEMENT

302.03.01.01

77 LBS

(35 KG)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

SHOULDER GRAVEL

301.03.06.01C

301.03.06.01T

30 LBS

(14 KG)

ONE TEST PER PROJECT

RESAMPLE IF MATERIAL CHANGES

AGGREGATE SURFACING

24

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/A 10 TESTS PER 2000 FT (610 M) TEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 5 LOTS, MINIMUM OF

1 SAMPLE PER SOURCETEST TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

SAND SURFACING

GRADE 4

701.02.03.01

30 LBS

(14 KG)

ONE TEST PER PROJECT

RESAMPLE IF MATERIAL CHANGESTEST

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 2,500 TONS (MT)

(1,250 CU YDS (M3)),

1 LOT = 5 SAMPLES OR APPROX. 12,500

TONS (MT) (6,250 CU YDS (M3))

AGGREGATE SURFACING

25

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/A 10 TESTS PER 2000 FT (610 M) TEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

CRUSHED BASE

COURSE

GRADE 5A

701.02.04.01C

701.02.04.01T

77 LBS

(35 KG)

TWO TESTS PER MATERIAL TYPE

RESAMPLE IF MATERIAL CHANGESSAMPLE TEST

1 SAMPLE PER PROJECT PER SOURCE

TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 5 LOTS, MINIMUM OF

1 SAMPLE PER SOURCE

TEST TEST

77 LBS

(35 KG)

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 2,500 TONS (MT)

(1,250 CU YDS (M3)), 1 LOT = 5 SAMPLES OR

APPROX. 12,500 TONS (MT)

(6,250 CU YDS or (M3))

AGGREGATE SURFACING

26

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/A 10 TESTS PER 2000 FT (610 M) TEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

CRUSHED BASE

COURSE

GRADE 6A

701.02.04.02C

701.02.04.02T

77 LBS

(35 KG)

TWO TESTS PER MATERIAL TYPE

RESAMPLE IF MATERIAL CHANGESSAMPLE TEST

77 LBS

(35 KG)

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 2,500 TONS (MT)

(1,250 CU YDS (M3)), 1 LOT = 5 SAMPLES OR

APPROX. 12,500 TONS (MT)

(6,250 CU YDS or (M3)) TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 5 LOTS, MINIMUM OF

1 SAMPLE PER SOURCE

TEST TEST

1 SAMPLE PER PROJECT PER SOURCE

AGGREGATE SURFACING

27

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

SPEC 701.02.6

DUST RATIO

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMITAASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/A 10 TESTS PER 2000 FT (610 M) TEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTUREAASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

30 LBS

(14 KG)

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 2,500 TONS (MT)

(1,250 CU YDS (M3)), 1 LOT = 5 SAMPLES OR

APPROX. 12,500 TONS (MT)

(6,250 CU YDS or (M3))TEST

CRUSHED TOP

SURFACING

GRADE 2A

701.02.06.01C

701.02.06.01T

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 5 LOTS, MINIMUM OF

1 SAMPLE PER SOURCE

TEST TEST

1 SAMPLE PER PROJECT PER SOURCE

30 LBS

(14 KG)

TWO TESTS PER MATERIAL TYPE

RESAMPLE IF MATERIAL CHANGESSAMPLE TEST

AGGREGATE SURFACING

28

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

SPEC 701.02.7

DUST RATIO

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/A 10 TESTS PER 2000 FT (610 M) TEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTUREAASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

30 LBS

(14 KG)

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 2,500 TONS (MT)

(1,250 CU YDS (M3)), 1 LOT = 5 SAMPLES OR

APPROX. 12,500 TONS (MT)

(6,250 CU YDS or (M3))TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 5 LOTS, MINIMUM OF

1 SAMPLE PER SOURCE

TEST TEST

1 SAMPLE PER PROJECT PER SOURCE

CRUSHED TOP

SURFACING

GRADE 3B

701.02.07.01C

701.02.07.01T

30 LBS

(14 KG)

TWO TESTS PER MATERIAL TYPE

RESAMPLE IF MATERIAL CHANGESSAMPLE TEST

AGGREGATE SURFACING

29

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER SOURCE MIX DESIGN

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN.

APPLICATION RATES AND COMPATIBILITY

TEST RESULTS ARE SUBMITTED IN THE

CONTRACTOR'S MIX DESIGN. ADHESION

RESULTS (MT 322) ARE AN ACCEPTABLE

METHOD FOR COMPATABILITY.

Mix Design

CRUSHED COVER

AGGREGATE

TYPE 2

(OLD GRADE 2A)

701.02.08.01

30 LBS

(14 KG)

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH

38,500 SQ YDS (32,000 M2),

5 SAMPLES = 1 LOT OR

APPROX. 192,500 SQ YDS (160,000 M2) TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE TEST FOR EACH LOT TEST TEST

AGGREGATE SURFACING

30

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER SOURCE MIX DESIGN

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN.

APPLICATION RATES AND COMPATIBILITY

TEST RESULTS ARE SUBMITTED IN THE

CONTRACTOR'S MIX DESIGN. ADHESION

RESULTS (MT 322) ARE AN ACCEPTABLE

METHOD FOR COMPATABILITY.

CRUSHED COVER

AGGREGATE

TYPE 1

(OLD GRADE 4A)

701.02.08.02

30 LBS

(14 KG)

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH

38,500 SQ YDS (32,000 M2),

5 SAMPLES = 1 LOT OR

APPROX. 192,500 SQ YDS (160,000 M2) TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE TEST FOR EACH LOT TEST TEST

Mix Design

AGGREGATE SURFACING

31

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER SOURCE MIX DESIGN

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN.

APPLICATION RATES AND COMPATIBILITY

TEST RESULTS ARE SUBMITTED IN THE

CONTRACTOR'S MIX DESIGN. ADHESION

RESULTS (MT 322) ARE AN ACCEPTABLE

METHOD FOR COMPATABILITY.

CRUSHED COVER

AGGREGATE

TYPE 3

701.02.08.05

30 LBS

(14 KG)

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH

38,500 SQ YDS (32,000 M2),

5 SAMPLES = 1 LOT OR

APPROX. 192,500 SQ YDS (160,000 M2) TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE TEST FOR EACH LOT TEST TEST

Mix Design

AGGREGATE SURFACING

32

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER SOURCE MIX DESIGN

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER SOURCE MIX DESIGN

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN

SLURRY SEAL

AGGREGATE

701.02.08.03

30 LBS

(14 KG)

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH

38,500 SQ YDS (32,000 M2),

5 SAMPLES = 1 LOT OR

APPROX. 192,500 SQ YDS (160,000 M2)TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE TEST FOR EACH LOT TEST TEST

Mix Design

Mix Design

MICROSURFACING

AGGREGATE

TYPE 2

701.02.08.06

TYPE 3

701.02.08.04

30 LBS

(14 KG)

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH

300 TONS (MT),

5 SAMPLES = 1 LOT OR

APPROX. 1,500 TONS (MT)TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE TEST FOR EACH LOT TEST TEST

AGGREGATE SURFACING

33

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

AGGREGATE SURFACING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMITAASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEXAASHTO T 134

MOISTURE -

DENSITY

RELATIONS OF MT 216

SAMPLE CTBSAMPLE

ASTM D1633

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH OF

MOLDED SOIL-

CEMENT CYLINDERS

TEST

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/A1 TEST PER 750 CU YDS (575 M3)

5 SAMPLES = 1 LOTTEST

IF COMPACTION TEST FAILS, 2 ADDITIONAL

TESTS ARE TO BE COMPLETED AND THE

AVERAGE OF 3 TESTS IS THE RECORDED

RESULTS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH 5 LOTS, MINIMUM OF

1 SAMPLE PER SOURCE

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMITAASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER SOURCE MIX DESIGN

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (COMPARISON TESTING)

USE

FIELD

TESTED

SAMPLE

TEST TEST

1 SAMPLE PER PROJECT PER SOURCE

CEMENT TREATED

BASE

701.02.09.01

30 LBS

(14 KG)

1 SAMPLE FOR EACH

1,500 TONS (MT) (750 CU YDS (575 M3)),

5 SAMPLES = 1 LOT

ONE TEST PER PROJECT

RESAMPLE IF MATERIAL CHANGESSAMPLE TEST

Mix Design

30 LB

(14 KG)

1 SET OF CYLINDERS

PER 750 CU YDS (575 M3)

5 SAMPLES = 1 LOT

AGGREGATE SURFACING

34

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/ITEM DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

POLYTETRAFLUORO

ETHYLENE (PTFE)

565.02.00.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

AND ATTACH APPLICABLE CERT

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

FIBER REINFORCED

PADS

565.02.00.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

AND ATTACH APPLICABLE CERT

BEARING DEVICES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

ELASTOMERIC

BEARING DEVICES

565.02.00.01

BEARING DEVICES

35

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

ANIONIC

SLOW SET

EMULSION

SS-1

702.02.01.01

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

CATIONIC

SLOW SET

EMULSION

CSS-1

702.02.01.02

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

BITUMINOUS

36

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

CATIONIC

SLOW SET

EMULSION

CSS-1H

702.02.01.03

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

TEST

ANIONIC

SLOW SET

EMULSION

SS-1H

702.02.01.04

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

BITUMINOUS

37

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 201

KINEMATIC

VISCOSITY

AASHTO T 78

DISTILLATION OF

CUTBACK ASPHALT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MEDIUM CURING

LIQUID ASPHALT

MC-70

702.02.05.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MEDIUM CURING

LIQUID ASPHALT

MC-800

702.02.05.01

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN METAL

CANS

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

BITUMINOUS

38

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PARTICLE CHARGE TEST IS PERFORMED

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PARTICLE CHARGE TEST IS PERFORMED

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

HIGH FLOAT

EMULSION

HF-100

702.02.07.01

HIGH FLOAT

EMULSION

HF-300

702.02.07.02

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

BITUMINOUS

39

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

TESTING

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PARTICLE CHARGE TEST IS PERFORMED

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

TESTING

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PARTICLE CHARGE TEST IS PERFORMED

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

POLYMER MODIFIED

CATIONIC

RAPID SET

EMULSION

CRS-2P

702.02.08.01

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

POLYMER MODIFIED

CATIONIC HIGH

FLOAT RAPID SET

EMULSION

CHFRS-2P

702.02.07.03

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

TEST

BITUMINOUS

40

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

TESTING

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PARTICLE CHARGE TEST IS PERFORMED

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

TESTING

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PARTICLE CHARGE TEST IS PERFORMED

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

CATIONIC

RAPID SETTING

EMULSION

CRS-2

702.02.08.02

CATIONIC

QUICK SETTING

EMULSION

CQS-1h

702.02.08.03

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

BITUMINOUS

41

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

TESTING

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PARTICLE CHARGE TEST IS PERFORMED

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

TESTING

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PARTICLE CHARGE TEST IS PERFORMED

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

TEST

POLYMER MODIFIED

CATIONIC

QUICK SET

EMULSION

CQS-1HP

702.02.08.04

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

POLYMER MODIFIED

CATIONIC QUICK SET

EMULSION

CQS-1P

702.02.08.05

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

BITUMINOUS

42

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 72

SAYBOLT VISCOSITYMINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER PROJECT

AASHTO T 49

PENETRATION OF

BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 59

TESTING

EMULSIFIED

ASPHALTS

PARTICLE CHARGE TEST IS PERFORMED

PRIMARY TEST METHOD

EVAPORATIVE DISTILLATION

SECONDARY TEST METHOD

HIGH TEMPERATURE DISTILLATION

POLYMER MODIFIED

REJUVENATING

EMULSION

702.02.08.06

2 - 1 QT

(2 - 1 L)

SPECIMEN

IN PLASTIC

BOTTLES

ONE SAMPLE PER TANKER OR TRAILER

TEST

BITUMINOUS

43

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 316

VISCOSITY BY

ROTATIONAL

VISCOMETERAASHTO T 48

CLEVELAND

OPEN CUPAASHTO T 228

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

OF ASPHALT

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 315

DYNAMIC SHEAR

RHEOMETER

AASHTO T 240

ROLLING

THIN-FILM OVENAASHTO R 28

PRESSURIZED AGING

VESSEL

AASHTO T 313

BENDING BEAM

RHEOMETER

AASHTO T 51

DUCTILITY OF

ASPHALT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LAB

MT 302

SAMPLINGN/A

1 PER 5 LOTS, MINIMUM OF 1 PER PROJECT

(750 TONS OF ASPHALT BINDER)CHECK

2 - 1 PINT

(2-500 mL)

SPECIMEN

IN METAL

CANS

1 SAMPLE PER 25 TONS (MT) OF

ASPHALT BINDER

(1 LOT = 150 TONS (MT) OF ASPHALT

BINDER)

COMMERCIAL MIXES

1 SAMPLE PER 450 TONS (MT) OF PLANT

MIX SURFACING

(1 LOT = 2700 TONS (MT) OF PLANT MIX

SURFACING)

TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

PERFORMANCE

GRADED

ASPHALT BINDER

58-28

702.02.09.06

BITUMINOUS

44

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 316

VISCOSITY BY

ROTATIONAL

VISCOMETER

AASHTO T 48

CLEVELAND

OPEN CUP

AASHTO T 228

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

OF ASPHALT

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 315

DYNAMIC SHEAR

RHEOMETER

AASHTO T 240

ROLLING

THIN-FILM OVEN

AASHTO R 28

PRESSURIZED AGING

VESSEL

AASHTO T 313

BENDING BEAM

RHEOMETER

AASHTO T 51

DUCTILITY OF

ASPHALT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LAB

MT 302

SAMPLINGN/A

1 PER 5 LOTS, MINIMUM OF 1 PER PROJECT

(750 TONS OF ASPHALT BINDER)CHECK

2 - 1 PINT

(2-500 mL)

SPECIMEN

IN METAL

CANS

1 SAMPLE PER 25 TONS (MT) OF

ASPHALT BINDER

(1 LOT = 150 TONS (MT) OF ASPHALT

BINDER)

COMMERCIAL MIXES

1 SAMPLE PER 450 TONS (MT) OF PLANT

MIX SURFACING

(1 LOT = 2700 TONS (MT) OF PLANT MIX

SURFACING)

TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

PERFORMANCE

GRADED

ASPHALT BINDER

64-22

702.02.09.09

BITUMINOUS

45

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 316

VISCOSITY BY

ROTATIONAL

VISCOMETER

AASHTO T 48

CLEVELAND

OPEN CUP

AASHTO T 228

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

OF ASPHALT

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 315

DYNAMIC SHEAR

RHEOMETER

AASHTO T 240

ROLLING

THIN-FILM OVEN

AASHTO R 28

PRESSURIZED AGING

VESSEL

AASHTO T 313

BENDING BEAM

RHEOMETER

AASHTO T 51

DUCTILITY OF

ASPHALT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LAB

MT 302

SAMPLINGN/A

1 PER 5 LOTS, MINIMUM OF 1 PER PROJECT

(750 TONS OF ASPHALT BINDER)CHECK

2 - 1 PINT

(2-500 mL)

SPECIMEN

IN METAL

CANS

1 SAMPLE PER 25 TONS (MT) OF

ASPHALT BINDER

(1 LOT = 150 TONS (MT) OF ASPHALT

BINDER)

COMMERCIAL MIXES

1 SAMPLE PER 450 TONS (MT) OF PLANT

MIX SURFACING

(1 LOT = 2700 TONS (MT) OF PLANT MIX

SURFACING)

TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

PERFORMANCE

GRADED

ASPHALT BINDER

64-28

702.02.09.10

BITUMINOUS

46

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BITUMINOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

CERT OF

COMP

MT 302

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO T 316

VISCOSITY BY

ROTATIONAL

VISCOMETER

AASHTO T 48

CLEVELAND

OPEN CUP

AASHTO T 228

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

OF ASPHALT

MATERIALS

AASHTO T 315

DYNAMIC SHEAR

RHEOMETER

AASHTO T 240

ROLLING

THIN-FILM OVEN

AASHTO R 28

PRESSURIZED AGING

VESSEL

AASHTO T 313

BENDING BEAM

RHEOMETER

AASHTO T 51

DUCTILITY OF

ASPHALT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LAB

MT 302

SAMPLINGN/A

1 PER 5 LOTS, MINIMUM OF 1 PER PROJECT

(750 TONS OF ASPHALT BINDER)CHECK

2 - 1 PINT

(2-500 mL)

SPECIMEN

IN METAL

CANS

1 SAMPLE PER 25 TONS (MT) OF

ASPHALT BINDER

(1 LOT = 150 TONS (MT) OF ASPHALT

BINDER)

COMMERCIAL MIXES

1 SAMPLE PER 450 TONS (MT) OF PLANT

MIX SURFACING

(1 LOT = 2700 TONS (MT) OF PLANT MIX

SURFACING)

TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

PERFORMANCE

GRADED

ASPHALT BINDER

70-28

702.02.09.12

BITUMINOUS

47

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

BITUMINOUS PRIME & TACK COAT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

BLOTTER MATERIAL

407.02.02.01C

407.02.02.01T

30 LBS

(14 KG)ONE TEST PER PROJECT

TEST

BITUMINOUS PRIME TACK COAT

48

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PORTLAND CEMENT

551.02.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER GRIND/BIN/SHIPMENT

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE QUALIFIED

PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

BLENDED CEMENT

551.02.01.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER GRIND/BIN/SHIPMENT

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY MATERIAL USED IS INCLUDED

IN THE CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CONCRETE

ADMIXTURE

551.02.03.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER TYPE OF ADMIXTURE

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY MATERIAL USED IS INCLUDED

IN THE CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

EPOXY ADHESIVES

551.02.04.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EPOXY TYPE

DATA

SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

FLY ASH

551.02.10.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER GRIND/BIN/SHIPMENT

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY MATERIAL USED IS INCLUDED

IN THE CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MICROSILICA

/SILICA FUME

551.02.11.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER GRIND/BIN/SHIPMENT

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY MATERIAL USED IS INCLUDED

IN THE CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 49

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

METAKAOLIN

551.02.12.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER GRIND/BIN/SHIPMENT

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY MATERIAL USED IS INCLUDED

IN THE CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

GROUND

GRANULATED

BLAST FURNACE

SLAG (GGBFS)

551.02.13.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER GRIND/BIN/SHIPMENT

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY MATERIAL USED IS INCLUDED

IN THE CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

ASTM C1140

SHOTCRETE

PANELS

AASHTO T 24

OBTAIN & TEST

CONCRETE CORES

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENT

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

ONE TEST FOR THE FIRST LOAD

AND ONE TEST

EVERY 16 CU YDS (12 M3)

TEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS

NEEDED ONLY WHEN CONCRETE

REQUIREMENTS VARY.

SHOTCRETE

551.03.02.01

24"X24"X4"

(600 MM X

600 MM X

100 MM)

PANEL

TWO SETS OF THREE CORES PER LOT

(1 LOT = 100 CU YDS (75 M3))

(SMALL QUANTITES TESTED

EVERY 25 CY (M3))

MINIMUM OF ONE TEST/PANEL PER

INSTALLATION

SAMPLE TEST

Mix Design

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 50

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH CYLINDERS

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

MINIMUM OF 2 SETS PER LOT

(200 YD3 (150 M3) OR EACH DAY'S POUR

WHICHEVER IS LESS)

SAMPLE TEST1 SET MAY REPRESENT POURS OF 30 YD

3

(23 M3) OR LESS [551.03.8(B)(1)(a)]

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENTINCLUDE IN QA

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

AASHTO T 309

TEMPERATURE OF

FRESHLY MIXED

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 121

UNIT WEIGHTFOR INFORMATION ONLY

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENT

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH CYLINDERS

ONE SET OF FOUR CYLINDERS PER

400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM OF

ONE SET PER PROJECT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS

NEEDED ONLY WHEN CONCRETE

REQUIREMENTS VARY.

PROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED

BY THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

ONE TEST EVERY 24 YD3 (18 M3) AND

WHEN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

CYLINDERS ARE MADE

SAMPLE

TEST

CLASS GENERAL

CONCRETE

551.03.02.02

Mix Design

TEST EACH LOAD WHEN

INCONSISTENT OR FAILING TEST RESULTS

ARE ENCOUNTERED

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

USE

FIELD TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE PER 400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM

OF ONE PER PROJECT

CHECK CHECK

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 51

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

MINIMUM OF 2 SETS PER LOT

(1000 YD3 (750 M3) OR EACH DAY'S POUR

WHICHEVER IS LESS)

SAMPLE TEST1 SET MAY REPRESENT POURS OF 30 YD

3

(23 M3) OR LESS [551.03.8(B)(1)(a)]

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENTINCLUDE IN QA

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

AASHTO T 309

TEMPERATURE OF

FRESHLY MIXED

CONCRETE

MT 103

THICKNESS OF

CONCRETE USING A

THICKNESS GAUGE

PRIMARY TEST

AASHTO T 148

MEASURING

LENGTH OF CORES

AASHTO T 24

OBTAIN AND TEST

CONCRETE CORES

AASHTO T 121

UNIT WEIGHTFOR INFORMATION ONLY

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

ONE TEST EVERY 24 YD3 (18 M3) AND

WHEN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

CYLINDERS ARE MADE

SAMPLE

TESTTEST EACH LOAD WHEN

INCONSISTENT OR FAILING TEST RESULTS

ARE ENCOUNTERED

N/A

MIN OF ONE TEST PER 1000 FEET

(300 M) OF TRAFFIC LANE OF PAVEMENT

PLACED

SAMPLE

TEST

CLASS PAVE

CONCRETE

551.03.02.03

SECONDARY TEST

NOTE: USE ONLY IF THIN SECTIONS ARE

IDENTIFIED PER MT 103

DEFICIENCIES ARE IDENTIFIED IN MDT

STANDARD SPECS SECTION 501.03.20

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 52

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETEAASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENTAASHTO T 119

SLUMP

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH CYLINDERS

ONE SET OF FOUR CYLINDERS PER

5000 CU YDS (M3) OR A MINIMUM OF

ONE SET PER PROJECT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS NEEDED ONLY

WHEN CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS VARY.

Mix Design

CLASS PAVE

CONCRETE

551.03.02.03

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

USE

FIELD TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE PER 5000 CU YDS (3800 M3) OR A

MINIMUM OF ONE PER PROJECT

CHECK CHECKPROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED

BY THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 53

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

MINIMUM OF ONE SET OF THREE

CYLINDERS PER ITEM

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENT

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

AASHTO T 309

TEMPERATURE OF

FRESHLY MIXED

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 121

UNIT WEIGHTFOR INFORMATION ONLY

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS NEEDED

ONLY WHEN CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS VARY.

ONE TEST FOR THE FIRST LOAD

AND ONE TEST

EVERY 16 CU YDS (12 M3)

PRE-INSPECTION

CLASS PRE

CONCRETE

551.03.02.04

TEST EACH LOAD WHEN

INCONSISTENT OR FAILING TEST RESULTS

ARE ENCOUNTERED

Mix Design

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 54

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

MT 117

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH

CYLINDERS OF SCC

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

MINIMUM OF 2 SETS PER LOT

(200 YD3 (150 M3) OR EACH DAY'S POUR

WHICHEVER IS LESS)

SAMPLE TEST1 SET MAY REPRESENT POURS OF 30 YD

3

(23 M3) OR LESS [551.03.8(B)(1)(a)]

MT 118

AIR CONTENT SCCINCLUDE IN QA

AASHTO T 347

SLUMP FLOW SCC

AASHTO T 345

PASSING ABILITY

OF SCC BY J-RING

AASHTO T 309

TEMPERATURE OF

FRESHLY MIXED

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 351

VISUAL STABILITY

INDEX (VSI)

DETERMINE VSI EVERY TIME A SLUMP FLOW

TEST IS CONDUCTEDVISUAL

AASHTO T 121

UNIT WEIGHT

SAMPLE

TESTFOR INFORMATION ONLY

ONE TEST EVERY 24 YD3 (18 M3) AND

WHEN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

CYLINDERS ARE MADE

SAMPLE

TEST

TEST EACH LOAD WHEN

INCONSISTENT OR FAILING TEST RESULTS

ARE ENCOUNTERED

CLASS SCC

CONCRETE

551.03.02.05

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 55

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

MT 118

AIR CONTENT SCC

AASHTO T 347

SLUMP FLOW SCC

AASHTO T 345

PASSING ABILITY

OF SCC BY J-RING

AASHTO T 351

VISUAL STABILITY

INDEX

MT 117

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH

CYLINDERS OF SCC

ONE SET OF FOUR CYLINDERS PER

400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM OF

ONE SET PER PROJECT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS NEEDED ONLY

WHEN CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS VARY.

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

CLASS SCC

CONCRETE

551.03.02.05

USE

FIELD TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE PER 400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM

OF ONE PER PROJECT

CHECK CHECKPROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED

BY THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

Mix Design

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 56

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH CYLINDERS

MINIMUM OF 2 SETS PER LOT

(200 YD3 (150 M3) OR EACH DAY'S POUR

WHICHEVER IS LESS)

1 SET MAY REPRESENT POURS OF 30 YD3

(23 M3) OR LESS [551.03.8(B)(1)(a)]

AASHTO T 358

RESISTIVITY

TEST 3 - 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENTINCLUDE IN QA

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

AASHTO T 309

TEMPERATURE OF

FRESHLY MIXED

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 121

UNIT WEIGHTFOR INFORMATION ONLY

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENT

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH CYLINDERS

ONE SET OF FOUR CYLINDERS PER

400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM OF

ONE SET PER PROJECT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS

NEEDED ONLY WHEN CONCRETE

REQUIREMENTS VARY.

ONE TEST EVERY 24 YD3 (18 M3) AND

WHEN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

CYLINDERS ARE MADE

SAMPLE

TEST

TEST EACH LOAD WHEN

INCONSISTENT OR FAILING TEST RESULTS

ARE ENCOUNTERED

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

USE

FIELD TESTED

SAMPLE

PROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED

BY THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

SAMPLE TEST

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

ONE PER 400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM

OF ONE PER PROJECTCHECK CHECK

Mix Design

CLASS DECK

CONCRETE

551.03.02.06

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 57

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH CYLINDERS

MINIMUM OF 2 SETS PER LOT

(200 YD3 (150 M3) OR EACH DAY'S POUR

WHICHEVER IS LESS)

1 SET MAY REPRESENT POURS OF 30 YD3

(23 M3) OR LESS [551.03.8(B)(1)(a)]

AASHTO T 358

RESISTIVITY

TEST 3 - 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENTINCLUDE IN QA

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

AASHTO T 309

TEMPERATURE OF

FRESHLY MIXED

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 121

UNIT WEIGHTFOR INFORMATION ONLY

CLASS

OVERLAY-SF

CONCRETE

551.03.02.07

TEST EACH LOAD WHEN

INCONSISTENT OR FAILING TEST RESULTS

ARE ENCOUNTERED

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

SAMPLE TEST

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

ONE TEST FOR THE FIRST LOAD

AND THEN ONE TEST

EVERY 16 CU YDS (12 M3) THEREAFTER

SAMPLE

TEST

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 58

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENT

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH CYLINDERS

ONE SET OF FOUR CYLINDERS PER

400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM OF

ONE SET PER PROJECT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS

NEEDED ONLY WHEN CONCRETE

REQUIREMENTS VARY.

USE

FIELD TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE PER 400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM

OF ONE PER PROJECTCHECK CHECK

PROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED

BY THE DISTRICT/AREA LABCLASS

OVERLAY-SF

CONCRETE

551.03.02.07

Mix Design

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 59

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH

DATA

SHEET

VERIFY LATEX MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

AND ATTACH APPLICABLE CERT

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

MINIMUM OF 2 SETS PER LOT

(200 YD3 (150 M3) OR EACH DAY'S POUR

WHICHEVER IS LESS)

1 SET MAY REPRESENT POURS OF 30 YD3

(23 M3) OR LESS [551.03.8(B)(1)(a)]

AASHTO T 358

RESISTIVITY

TEST 3 - 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENT

AASHTO T 121

UNIT WEIGHTFOR INFORMATION ONLY

CLASS

OVERLAY-LM

CONCRETE

551.03.02.08

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

ONE TEST PER EACH MOBILE MIXERSAMPLE

TEST

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

SAMPLE TEST

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 60

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

MINIMUM OF 2 SETS PER LOT

(200 YD3 (150 M3) OR EACH DAY'S POUR

WHICHEVER IS LESS)

1 SET MAY REPRESENT POURS OF 30 YD3

(23 M3) OR LESS [551.03.8(B)(1)(a)]

AASHTO T 358

RESISTIVITY

TEST 3 - 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

ONLY REQUIRED WHEN CLASS STRUCTURE

IS SPECIFIED BY CONTRACT IN LIEU OF

CLASS DECKAASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENTINCLUDE IN QA

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

AASHTO T 309

TEMPERATURE OF

FRESHLY MIXED

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 121

UNIT WEIGHTFOR INFORMATION ONLY

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENT

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

ONE SET OF FOUR CYLINDERS PER

400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM OF

ONE SET PER PROJECT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS NEEDED ONLY

WHEN CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS VARY.

TEST EACH LOAD WHEN

INCONSISTENT OR FAILING TEST RESULTS

ARE ENCOUNTERED

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

USE

FIELD TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE PER 400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM

OF ONE PER PROJECTCHECK CHECK

PROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED

BY THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

CLASS STRUCTURE

CONCRETE

551.03.02.09

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

SAMPLE TEST

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

ONE TEST EVERY 24 YD3 (18 M3) AND

WHEN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

CYLINDERS ARE MADE

SAMPLE

TEST

Mix Design

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 61

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENTINCLUDE IN QA

AASHTO T 119

SLUMPAASHTO T 309

TEMPERATURE OF

FRESHLY MIXED

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 121

UNIT WEIGHTFOR INFORMATION ONLY

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

AASHTO T 152

AIR CONTENT

AASHTO T 119

SLUMP

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

ONE SET OF FOUR CYLINDERS PER

400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM OF

ONE SET PER PROJECT

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS NEEDED ONLY

WHEN CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS VARY.

1 SET MAY REPRESENT POURS OF 30 YD3

(23 M3) OR LESS [551.03.8(B)(1)(a)]

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

ONE TEST EVERY 24 YD3 (18 M3) AND

WHEN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

CYLINDERS ARE MADE

SAMPLE

TEST

TEST EACH LOAD WHEN

INCONSISTENT OR FAILING TEST RESULTS

ARE ENCOUNTERED

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

CLASS

DRILLED SHAFT

CONCRETE

551.03.02.10

MT 101

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH

CYLINDERS

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

MINIMUM OF 2 SETS PER LOT

(200 YD3 (150 M3) OR EACH DAY'S POUR

WHICHEVER IS LESS)

SAMPLE TEST

USE

FIELD TESTED

SAMPLE

ONE PER 400 CU YDS (300 M3) OR A

MINIMUM

OF ONE PER PROJECTCHECK CHECK

PROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED

BY THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

Mix Design

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 62

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

ASTM D4832

PREPARATION AND

TESTING OF CLSM

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

ONE SET PER PROJECT SAMPLE TEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS NEEDED ONLY

WHEN CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS VARY.

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 60

SAMPLING FRESH

CONCRETE

REFER TO

TEST FOR

SIZE

SAMPLE

ASTM D4832

PREPARATION AND

TESTING OF CLSM

1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

ONE SET PER PROJECT SAMPLE TEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE MIX DESIGN PER BID ITEM

MIX

DESIGNAPPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN. SEPARATE MIX DESIGNS NEEDED ONLY

WHEN CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS VARY.

Mix Design

Mix Design

CONTROLLED LOW

STRENGTH

MATERIAL - EXCAV

551.03.02.11

CONTROLLED LOW

STRENGTH

MATERIAL - NON-

EXCAV

551.03.02.12

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 63

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PRE-PACKAGED

CONCRETE

551.03.02.13

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT, PER TYPE

DATA

SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

LEAN CONCRETE

551.03.02.14

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER LOAD VISUAL VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

EPOXY RESIN

GROUT

552.02.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH

DATA

SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

DECK DRAINS

552.03.16.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT, PER TYPE OF DRAIN VISUAL

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 64

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER DECK SECTION

CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MT 111

PRESTRESSED

STRUCTURAL

MEMBERS

PER

MT 111ONE PER DECK SECTION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER BEAM

CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MT 111

PRESTRESSED

STRUCTURAL

MEMBERS

PER

MT 111ONE PER BEAM

PRECAST

PRESTRESSED

DECK SECTIONS

553.02.08.01

PRE-INSPECTION

PRESTRESSED BEAM

553.02.09.01

PRE-INSPECTION

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 65

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER MEMBER

CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

ASTM A416

SEVEN WIRE

STRAND

8 FT

(3 M)ONE PER LOT SAMPLE TEST

REQUIRED ONLY WHEN MEMBER

IS POST-TENSIONED

MT 110

RCP AND

ASSOCIATED ITEMS

PER

MT 111ONE PER MEMBER

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH VISUAL

PRE-INSPECTION IS NOT REQUIRED IF ITEM

IS PRODUCED AT A

CERTIFIED PLANT (QPL)

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MT 110

RCP AND

ASSOCIATED ITEMS

N/AREFER TO MT 110 FOR SAMPLE/TEST

FREQUENCY

PRECAST

CONCRETE

BRIDGE MEMBERS

554.04.03.01

PRE-INSPECTION

CATTLE GUARD

BASES

554.04.04.01

PRE-INSPECTION

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 66

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MT 110

RCP AND

ASSOCIATED ITEMS

N/AREFER TO MT 110 FOR SAMPLE/TEST

FREQUENCY

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER EACH VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MT 110

RCP AND

ASSOCIATED ITEMS

N/AREFER TO MT 110 FOR SAMPLE/TEST

FREQUENCY

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

WATERPROOF

MEMBRANE

563.02.01.08

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT, PER TYPE

DATA

SHEET

PRECAST CONCRETE

PRODUCT -

NON STRUCTURAL

554.04.06.02

PRE-INSPECTION

PRECAST CONCRETE

PRODUCT -

STRUCTURAL

554.04.06.01

PRE-INSPECTION

CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES 67

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

LIQUID MEMBRANE-

FORMING

CONCRETE CURING

COMPOUND

717.01.03.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CONCRETE CURE

AND SEAL

COMPOUNDS

717.01.04.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MT 535

BRIDGE DECK CRACK

SEALANT

IR TEST

2 - 4 OZ

(2 - 120

mL)

PLASTIC

BOTTLES

SAMPLE TESTSAMPLE REQUIRED TO BE TAKEN FROM JOB

SITE

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

EPOXY BRIDGE DECK

CRACK SEALANT

717.02.03.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH NUMBER

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

CONCRETE SEALANT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

HIGH MOLECULAR

WEIGHT

METHACRYLATE

(HMWM)

717.02.02.01

ONE PER LOT/BATCH NUMBER

CONCRETE SEALANT

68

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

CONCRETE SEALANT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SILANE SEALER

717.02.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

DECK SEALANT

SAND

717.02.04.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT

DATA

SHEET

CERTIFICATION IS THE GRADATION ON THE

CONTAINER

CONCRETE SEALANT

69

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D6690

JOINT AND CRACK

SEALANTS

30 LBS AS REQUESTED SAMPLE TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

BACKER ROD

403.02.00.02L

403.02.00.02W

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

DATA

SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

CRACK SEALING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

CRACK SEALANT

403.02.00.01L

403.02.00.01W

CRACK SEALING

70

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

AASHTO M 145

SOIL CLASS

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

AASHTO T 190

R-VALUETEST

TEST REQUIRED IF SPECIFIED IN THE SPECIAL

PROVISIONS

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

MT 218

RELATIVE

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/A

ONE PER EACH MILE

OR ONE PER

EVERY 100,000 CU YDS (75,000 M3)

CHECK

EXCAVATION SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

SPECIAL

BORROW

203.01.01.02

N/A

MINIMUM OF ONE TEST

PER 2000 CU YDS (1500 M3)

AND A MINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER LIFT

TEST

77 LBS

(35 KG)

EACH SOURCE OF SPECIAL BORROW IS

SUBJECT TO APPROVAL PRIOR TO

PLACEMENT

(ONE BORROW SOURCE

PER 65,000 CU YDS (50,000 M3))

MINIMUM EIGHT SAMPLES PER BORROW

SOURCE

85% OF THE TESTS MUST MEET SOILS

CLASSIFICATION OR R-VALUE

REQUIREMENT

TEST

EXCAVATION

71

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

EXCAVATION SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

AASHTO M 145

SOIL CLASS

MT 229

ZERO AIR VOIDS

SECONDARY TEST

INTERIM MEASURE UNTIL A PROCTOR

CAN BE PERFORMED

MT 210

(5.5LB) PROCTOR

MT 230

(10LB) PROCTOR

AASHTO T 100

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

MT 218

RELATIVE

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 212

COMPACTION AND

% MOISTURE

(IN-PLACE DENSITY)

N/A

ONE PER EACH MILE

OR ONE PER

EVERY 100,000 CU YDS (75,000 M3)

CHECK

N/A

MINIMUM OF ONE TEST

PER 2000 CU YDS (1500 M3)

AND A MINIMUM OF ONE TEST PER LIFT

TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

EMBANKMENT

203.01.02.01

77 LBS

(35 KG)

TEST MATERIAL AS NEEDED FOR SOILS

CLASSIFICATION AND/OR PROCTORTEST

EXCAVATION

72

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

EXCAVATION SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

STEMMING

AGGREGATE

FOR BLASTING

203.03.01.01

30 LBS

(14 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

TEST

EXCAVATION

73

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER LOT VISUAL

VERIFY SEAL NUMBERS CORRESPOND

WITH PRE-INSPECTION RECORDS

MT 404

INSPECTING WOOD

PRODUCTS

20

BORINGSONE PER CHARGE

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CHAIN LINK

ALUMINUM POST

712.01.03.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

AND ATTACH APPLICABLE CERT

FENCING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

SNOW FENCE

MATERIAL

607.02.01.01PRE-INSPECTION

CHAIN LINK FABRIC

712.01.02.01

CHAIN LINK STEEL

POST

712.01.03.01

FENCING

74

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

FENCING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

CABLE/TIE/BRACE

WIRE

712.01.06.01

CHAIN LINK GATE

712.01.08.01

FENCE WIRE

712.02.00.01

STEEL FENCE POST

712.02.07.01

FENCING

75

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

FENCING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER LOT VISUAL

VERIFY SEAL NUMBERS CORRESPOND

WITH PRE-INSPECTION RECORDS

MT 404

INSPECTING WOOD

PRODUCTS

20

BORINGSONE PER CHARGE

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

DEADMAN/

ANCHOR

712.02.12.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER FABRICATOR

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

AND ATTACH APPLICABLE CERT

PRE-INSPECTION

METAL GATE

712.02.09.01

WOOD FENCE

POST/BRACE RAIL

712.02.08.01

FENCING

76

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

ASTM D6637

TENSILE PROPERTIES

OF GEOGRID

3 FT (1 M)

X WIDTHONE PER 10,000 SQ YD (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

ASTM D6637

TENSILE PROPERTIES

OF GEOGRID

3 FT (1 M)

X WIDTHONE PER 10,000 SQ YD (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

ASTM D6637

TENSILE PROPERTIES

OF GEOGRID

3 FT (1 M)

X WIDTHONE PER 10,000 SQ YD (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

GEOCOMPOSITE

DRAIN

622.02.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

SUBMIT SAMPLE OF MATERIAL TO

GEOTECHNICAL SECTION FOR REVIEW

GEOTEXTILE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

GEOGRID -

SUBGRADE/

FOUNDATION

622.01.01.01

GEOGRID -

SLOPE

REINFORCEMENT

622.01.01.02

GEOGRID -

WALL

REINFORCEMENT

622.01.01.03

GEOTEXTILE

77

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)GEOTEXTILE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

WEED CONTROL

MAT

713.06.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

DATA

SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

TURF

REINFORCEMENT

MAT - SYNTHETIC

FIBER

713.12.00.04

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

OR

DATA

SHEET

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE IS REQUIRED

FOR ALL EROSION CONTROL THAT

CONTAINS STRAW

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE QUALIFIED

PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

TURF

REINFORCEMENT

MAT - NATURAL

FIBER

713.12.00.05

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

OR

DATA

SHEET

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE IS REQUIRED

FOR ALL EROSION CONTROL THAT

CONTAINS STRAW

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE QUALIFIED

PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SHORT TERM

ROLLED EROSION

CONTROL BLANKET

713.12.00.06

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

OR

DATA

SHEET

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE IS REQUIRED

FOR ALL EROSION CONTROL THAT

CONTAINS STRAW

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE QUALIFIED

PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

LONG TERM ROLLED

EROSION CONTROL

BLANKET

713.12.00.07

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

OR

DATA

SHEET

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE IS REQUIRED

FOR ALL EROSION CONTROL THAT

CONTAINS STRAW

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE QUALIFIED

PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

78

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)GEOTEXTILE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

HIGH

PERFORMANCE

ROLLED EROSION

CONTROL BLANKET

713.12.00.08

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

OR

DATA

SHEET

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE IS REQUIRED

FOR ALL EROSION CONTROL THAT

CONTAINS STRAW

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE QUALIFIED

PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

SEPARATION -

MODERATE

SURVIVABILITY

716.02.00.02

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

SEPARATION -

HIGH SURVIVABILITY

716.02.00.01

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

GEOTEXTILE

79

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)GEOTEXTILE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

GEOTEXTILE

SUB DRAIN

CLASS B - HIGH

SURVIVABILITY

716.04.00.02

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

STABILIZATION -

HIGH SURVIVABILITY

716.03.00.01

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

SUB DRAIN

CLASS A - HIGH

SURVIVABILITY

716.04.00.01

GEOTEXTILE

80

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)GEOTEXTILE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

SUB DRAIN

CLASS C - HIGH

SURVIVABILITY

716.04.00.03

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

SUB DRAIN

CLASS A -

MODERATE

SURVIVABILITY

716.04.00.04

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

GEOTEXTILE

SUB DRAIN

CLASS B -

MODERATE

SURVIVABILITY

716.04.00.05

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

81

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)GEOTEXTILE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

GEOSYNTHETIC CLAY

LINER

716.04.00.07

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

GEOMEMBRANE

LINER

716.04.00.08

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

SUBMIT SAMPLE OF MATERIAL TO

GEOTECHNICAL SECTION FOR REVIEW

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

SUB DRAIN

CLASS C -

MODERATE

SURVIVABILITY

716.04.00.06

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

GEOTEXTILE

PERMANENT

EROSION CONTROL

CLASS A - HIGH

SURVIVABILITY

716.05.00.01

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

82

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)GEOTEXTILE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

PERMANENT

EROSION CONTROL

CLASS B - HIGH

SURVIVABILITY

716.05.00.02

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

PERMANENT

EROSION CONTROL

CLASS C - HIGH

SURVIVABILITY

716.05.00.03

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

PERMANENT

EROSION CONTROL

CLASS A -

MODERATE

SURVIVABILITY

716.05.00.04

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

GEOTEXTILE

83

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)GEOTEXTILE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMPQUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

ASTM D4491

PERMITTIVITY

ASTM D4751

OPENING SIZE

ASTM D4355

DETERIORATION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

TEMPORARY SILT

FENCE

716.06.00.00

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

DATA

SHEET

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

PERMANENT

EROSION CONTROL

CLASS B -

MODERATE

SURVIVABILITY

716.05.00.05

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

GEOTEXTILE

PERMANENT

EROSION CONTROL

CLASS C -

MODERATE

SURVIVABILITY

716.05.00.06

PER

MT 421ONE PER 10,000 SQ YDS (8,000 M2) SAMPLE TEST

GEOTEXTILE

84

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

DATA

SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 11 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION FOR EACH HEAT #

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

DATA

SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

DATA

SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 11 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION FOR EACH HEAT #

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA

SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

GUARDRAIL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

BOX BEAM

GUARDRAIL

705.01.01.01

WIRE ROPE

705.01.01.02

STEEL BEAM

GUARDRAIL

705.01.01.03

MISCELLANEOUS

GUARDRAIL

705.01.01.05

GUARDRAIL

85

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

GUARDRAIL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER LOT OR BATCH VISUAL

VERIFY SEAL NUMBERS CORRESPOND

WITH PRE-INSPECTION RECORDS

MT 404

INSPECTING WOOD

PRODUCTS

20

BORINGSONE PER CHARGE

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

NON-WOOD

BLOCKOUTS

705.01.02.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MASH W-BEAM

TERMINAL SECTION

606.02.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE QUALIFIED

PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL GUARDRAIL

POST

705.01.05.01

WOOD GUARDRAIL

POST/BLOCKOUTS

705.01.02.01 PRE-INSPECTION

GUARDRAIL

86

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

GUARDRAIL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT OF COMP FOR

GUARDRAIL ITEMS

606.03.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT

MDT-CON-

606_03

GUARDRAIL

87

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

EXPANSION JOINT

FILLERS - CORK

707.01.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE QUALIFIED

PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

JOINT SEALING

MATERIAL

707.01.01.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE QUALIFIED

PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SILICONE JOINT SEAL

707.01.02.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

FABRIC REINFORCED

NEOPRENE JOINT

SEAL

707.01.02.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

DATA SHEET

OR CERT OF

COMP

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

JOINT MATERIAL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

EXPANSION JOINT

SYSTEM

707.01.02.04

JOINT MATERIAL

88

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)JOINT MATERIAL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

EXPANSION JOINT

ASPHALT PLUG

707.01.02.05

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PREFORMED

EXPANSION JOINT

FILLER

707.01.03.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

GASKET

707.02.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

FLEXIBLE JOINT

SEALER

707.02.02.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

JOINT MATERIAL

89

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

VARIABLE MESSAGE

SIGN

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ANTENNAELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ELECTRICAL

SUBMITTAL

703.01.00.01

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT DATA SHEET

SEE INDIVIDUAL MATERIALS FOR

STEEL REQUIREMENTS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PVC CONDUITELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER SIZE DATA SHEET

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

HDPE CONDUITELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER SIZE DATA SHEET

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLISTN/A ONE PER LOT VISUAL

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

LIGHTING, SIGNALS & COMMUNICATION SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

STEEL CONDUIT

LIGHTING, SIGNALS COMMUNICATION

90

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

LIGHTING, SIGNALS & COMMUNICATION SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM/LOT DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

NO CERTIFICATION IS REQUIRED IF

THIS ITEM IS SUPPLIED BY MDT

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM/LOT DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

NO CERTIFICATION IS REQUIRED IF

THIS ITEM IS SUPPLIED BY MDT

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM/LOT DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

NO CERTIFICATION IS REQUIRED IF

THIS ITEM IS SUPPLIED BY MDT

SIGNAL STANDARDS

TYPE 1

SIGNAL STANDARDS

TYPE 2/3

PULL BOXES

LUMINAIRE

STANDARD

TYPE 10

LIGHTING, SIGNALS COMMUNICATION

91

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

LIGHTING, SIGNALS & COMMUNICATION SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CONDUCTORELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER LOT DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CABLEELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER LOT DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SERVICE & CONTROL

ASSEMBLY

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

TRAFFIC SIGNAL

CABINET

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

TRAFFIC SIGNAL

INDICATION

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

LED TRAFFIC SIGNAL ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL

INDICATION

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

LIGHTING, SIGNALS COMMUNICATION

92

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

LIGHTING, SIGNALS & COMMUNICATION SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

DETECTOR LOOPELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PEDESTRIAN PUSH

BUTTONS

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

LUMINAIRE

ASSEMBLY

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

EMERGENCY

VEHICLE

PREEMPTION

ELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER CHARGE VISUAL

VERIFY SEAL NUMBERS CORRESPOND

WITH PRE-INSPECTION RECORDS

MT 404

INSPECTING WOOD

PRODUCTS

20

BORINGSONE PER CHARGE

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

GUYS & ANCHORSELECTRICAL ITEM

CHECKLIST1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

VERIFY ITEM SUPPLIED MATCHES

APPROVED SUBMITTAL

CLASS 4 TREATED

WOOD POLES

703.16.00.01 PRE-INSPECTION

LIGHTING, SIGNALS COMMUNICATION

93

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER TRUCK LOAD

VISUAL

DATA SHEETVISUALLY EVALUATE FOR CONTAMINATION

*PNS METHOD 13

SALT GRADATIONAS REQUESTED *GRADATION - MUST BE HAND SHAKEN

MT 526

MOISTURE OF

PNS SALT

ONE PER TRUCK LOAD - TEST EACH SAMPLE -

EXCEPT MISSOULA AND KALISPELL TEST

EACH 5TH SAMPLE -

IN CASE OF A FAILURE, TEST EACH SAMPLE

TESTING OF MOISTURE CONTENT

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER TRUCK LOAD

VISUAL

DATA SHEETVISUALLY EVALUATE FOR CONTAMINATION

*PNS METHOD 13

SALT GRADATIONAS REQUESTED *GRADATION - MUST BE HAND SHAKEN

MT 526

MOISTURE OF

PNS SALT

TESTING OF MOISTURE CONTENT

SAMPLE TEST

MAINTENANCE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

8A-B SALT

(MAINTENANCE)

MT 3SAMPLE TEST

8A-R SALT

(MAINTENANCE)

MT 1

AIR TIGHT

CONTAINER

(1 GAL

SEALABLE

BAG)

AIR TIGHT

CONTAINER

(1 GAL

SEALABLE

BAG)

MAINTENANCE

94

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MAINTENANCE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER TRUCK LOAD

VISUAL

DATA SHEETVISUALLY EVALUATE FOR CONTAMINATION

*PNS METHOD 13

SALT GRADATIONAS REQUESTED *GRADATION - MUST BE HAND SHAKEN

MT 526

MOISTURE OF

PNS SALT

ONE PER TRUCK LOAD - TEST EACH SAMPLE -

EXCEPT MISSOULA AND KALISPELL TEST

EACH 5TH SAMPLE

IN CASE OF A FAILURE, TEST EACH SAMPLE

TESTING OF MOISTURE CONTENT

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 501

pH

INSOLUBLE MTRL

C.R.

TOTAL SETTLEABLE

SOLIDS

PERCENT PASSING

#10 SIEVE

C.R. = CORROSION RATE

MT 502

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

MT 504

CYANIDE

AIR TIGHT

CONTAINER

(1 GAL

SEALABLE

BAG)

8B SALT

(MAINTENANCE)

MT 10SAMPLE TEST

SALT BRINE - NaCl

(MAINTENANCE)

MT 2

1 GALLON

(4 LITERS)

ONE SAMPLE FOR EVERY

100,000 GALLONSSAMPLE TEST

MAINTENANCE

95

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MAINTENANCE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER TRUCK LOAD DATA SHEET

MT 408

SAMPLING LIQUID

DEICING MATERIAL

SAMPLE

MT 501

pH

INSOLUBLE MTRL

C.R.

TOTAL SETTLEABLE

SOLIDS

PERCENT PASSING

#10 SIEVE

C.R. = CORROSION RATE

MT 502

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

MT 504

CYANIDE

TEST

CORROSION

INHIBITOR

(MAINTENANCE)

MT 6 1 GALLONONE SAMPLE FOR EVERY

100,000 GALLONS

MAINTENANCE

96

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MAINTENANCE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER TRUCK LOAD DATA SHEET

MT 408

SAMPLING LIQUID

DEICING MATERIAL

SAMPLE

MT 501

pH

INSOLUBLE MTRL

C.R.

TOTAL SETTLEABLE

SOLIDS

PERCENT PASSING

#10 SIEVE

C.R. = CORROSION RATE

MT 502

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

MT 504

CYANIDE

DE-ICER MgCl2

(MAINTENANCE)

MT 7 1 GALLON

TEST

ONE SAMPLE FOR EVERY

100,000 GALLONS

MAINTENANCE

97

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MAINTENANCE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER TRUCK LOAD DATA SHEET

MT 408

SAMPLING LIQUID

DEICING MATERIAL

SAMPLE

MT 501

pH

INSOLUBLE MTRL

C.R.

TOTAL SETTLEABLE

SOLIDS

PERCENT PASSING

#10 SIEVE

C.R. = CORROSION RATE

MT 502

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

MT 504

CYANIDE

1 GALLON

DE-ICER CaCl2

(MAINTENANCE)

MT 8 ONE SAMPLE FOR EVERY

100,000 GALLONS

TEST

MAINTENANCE

98

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MAINTENANCE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER TRUCK LOAD DATA SHEET

MT 408

SAMPLING LIQUID

DEICING MATERIAL

SAMPLE

MT 501

pH

INSOLUBLE MTRL

C.R.

TOTAL SETTLEABLE

SOLIDS

PERCENT PASSING

#10 SIEVE

C.R. = CORROSION RATE

MT 502

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

MT 504

CYANIDE

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH DATA SHEET

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 19

UNIT WEIGHT

DE-ICER KCH3COO

(MAINTENANCE)

MT 11 1 GALLONONE SAMPLE PER CONTRACT

AND AS REQUESTED

TEST

SANDING

MATERIAL

MT 430 LBS ONE PER 2,000 TONS

TEST

MAINTENANCE

99

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MAINTENANCE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH DATA SHEET

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURESAMPLE TEST

MT 322

PERCENT ADHESIONTEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY

FIELD

MAINT

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH DATA SHEET

MT 520

ENGINE OIL

ANALYSIS

50 mL YEARLY/AS NEEDED SAMPLE TEST

ENGINE OIL

ANALYSIS

MT 5

COLD MIX ASPHALT

PATCHING

MATERIAL

MT 9

ONE PER CONTRACT

30 LBS

MAINTENANCE

100

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

AASHTO T 27

SIEVE ANALYSIS

5 LBS

(3 KG)ONE TEST PER PROJECT SAMPLE TEST

ASTM C25

CHEMICAL

ANALYSIS

50 GRAM

(2 OZ)

AIRTIGHT

ONE TEST PER PROJECT TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

CERT OF

COMP

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CONCRETE FILLED

BAG/SCRIM BAG

613.03.05.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

CATTLE GUARD

(GRATE)

611.02.04.01

MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

QUICK LIME

405.01.01.01

SEE SPECIAL PROVISIONS 713.1

DETECTABLE WARNING

DEVICES

608.03.02.01

MISCELLANEOUS

101

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MAIL BOX

623.02.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MAILBOX PACKAGING/DATA SHEET MUST

DISPLAY "MADE IN THE USA"

MAILBOX CLUSTERS ARE NOT REQUIRED TO

BE ON THE QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER CHARGE VISUAL

VERIFY SEAL NUMBERS CORRESPOND

WITH PRE-INSPECTION RECORDS

MT 404

INSPECTING WOOD

PRODUCTS

20 BORINGS ONE PER CHARGE

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MISCELLANEOUS PAINT

710.02.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

SUBMIT CERT OF COMP WHEN REQUIRED

PER SPECIFICATION 710.02

CATTLE GUARDS REQUIRE VISUAL

INSPECTION ONLY

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ALUMINUM EPOXY

710.02.00.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

SUBMIT CERT OF COMP WHEN REQUIRED

PER SPECIFICATION 710.02

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PIPE PILE EPOXY

710.02.00.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

SUBMIT CERT OF COMP WHEN REQUIRED

PER SPECIFICATION 710.02

STRUCTURAL TIMBER

706.01.00.01PRE-INSPECTION

MISCELLANEOUS

102

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ZINC RICH PRIMER

710.02.03.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

SUBMIT CERT OF COMP WHEN REQUIRED

PER SPECIFICATION 710.02

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

POWDER COATING

710.03.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ANTI-GRAFFITI

COATING

710.04.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MISCELLANEOUS

MATERIAL ACCEPTED

ON CERT

713.00.00.00

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SOURCE

CERT OF

COMP

OR

DATA SHEET

CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE IF

REQUIRED BY CONTRACT PROVISIONS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER SOURCE VISUAL

AASHTO M 157

READY MIX

CONCRETE

1 QT

(1 LITER)ONE PER SOURCE TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF

NON-POTABLE SOURCE

WATER FOR CONCRETE

713.01.00.01

MISCELLANEOUS

103

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER GRIND/BIN/SHIPMENT DATA SHEET QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

AASHTO M 303

LIME FOR ASPHALT

MIXTURES

TEST

AASHTO T 219

CHEMCIAL

ANALYSIS OF

HYDRATED LIME

50 GRAM

(2 OZ)

AIRTIGHT

SAMPLE

TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOAD DATA SHEET QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MT 408

SAMPLING LIQUID

DEICING MATERIAL

MT 502

CHEMICAL

ANALYSIS

SAMPLE

TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOAD DATA SHEET QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MT 408

SAMPLING LIQUID

DEICING MATERIAL

MT 502

CHEMICAL

ANALYSIS

SAMPLE

TEST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

SAMPLE REQUIRED ONLY IF NOT ON THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

CALCIUM CHLORIDE

713.03.00.01

HYDRATED LIME

713.02.00.01

5 LBS

(3 KG)ONE PER PROJECT/

CONTRACT

MAGNESIUM

CHLORIDE

713.03.00.02

1 PINT

(500 mL)ONE PER PROJECT

1 PINT

(500 mL)ONE PER PROJECT

MISCELLANEOUS

104

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT DATA SHEET

CERTIFICATION IS THE GRADATION ON THE

CONTAINER

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

5 LBS

(3 KG)ONE PER SOURCE

SAMPLE

TEST

REQUIRED WHEN PRODUCT IS NOT

PREPACKAGED

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

CERTIFICATION IS THE MIXTURE AND

GRADATION ON THE CONTAINER

AASHTO R 64

CUBE SPECIMENS

USING

GROUT/MORTAR

SAMPLE

AASHTO T 106

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH OF

MORTARS

TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

TOPSOIL

713.05.02.01

MT 412

TOP SOIL

5 LBS

(3 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

SAMPLE

TEST

TESTING REQUIRED ON IMPORTED TOPSOIL

ONLY

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

LANDSCAPE GRADE

TOPSOIL

713.05.02.02

MT 412

TOP SOIL

5 LBS

(3 KG)ONE TEST PER SOURCE

SAMPLE

TEST

TESTING REQUIRED ON IMPORTED TOPSOIL

ONLY

MORTAR SAND

713.04.01.01

CEMENT GROUT

713.04.01.02 1 CU FT

(0.03 M3)

TWO SETS OF THREE CUBES

PER EACH DAYS POUR

MISCELLANEOUS

105

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER BLEND DATA SHEET

CERTIFICATION IS AN APPROVED SEED

BLEND REPORT

MT 403

GRASS SEED

1 QT

(1 LITER)ONE PER BLEND PRE-INSPECTION NOT REQUIRED FOR

BLENDS LESS THAN 10 LBS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

FERTILIZER

713.09.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER BLEND DATA SHEET MUST MEET MT FERTILIZING LAWS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MULCH

713.10.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION 1 EACH ONE PER BLEND

CERT OF

COMP

OR

DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE IS REQUIRED

FOR ALL MULCH THAT CONTAINS STRAW

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

FABRICATED NETTING

713.10.03.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A VISUAL INSPECTION ONLY VISUAL EPM'S DISCRETION

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SOD

713.11.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SUPPLIER DATA SHEET

SEED

713.08.01.01PRE-INSPECTION

MISCELLANEOUS

106

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

COMPOST

713.13.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION 1 EACH ONE PER SUPPLIER

CERT OF

COMP

OR

DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE IS REQUIRED

FOR ALL COMPOST THAT CONTAINS STRAW

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

DYED DIESEL

MCS 1

MT 521

TEST FOR

RED DYE 26

3 - 125mL

SAMPLES

MINIMUM

MINIMUM ONE PER OFFICER PER

QUARTER/AS NEEDED

MCS

SAMPLETEST

MISCELLANEOUS

107

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

TEMPORARY PAINT

714.03.00.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

WATERBORNE

PAINT

714.04.00.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

HIGH DURABLE

WATERBORNE

PAINT

714.05.00.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

SPEC TABLE 714-4

EPOXY PAINT

COMPOSITION

1 QT

(1 LITER)

OF EACH

PIGMENT

AS REQUESTED SAMPLE TEST

ONE QUART (LITER) SAMPLE OF BOTH

PIGMENT (COLOR) AND RESIN (CATALYST)

WILL BE TAKEN FROM THE THOROUGHLY

MIXED CONTENTS OF A STRIPING MACHINE

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER TYPE DATA SHEET

ASTM D638

TENSILE PROPERTIES

4" X 1'

(100 mm x

300 mm)

ONE PER TYPE SAMPLE TEST

PAVEMENT MARKINGS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

PREFORMED

PLASTIC

714.07.00.01

EPOXY PAINT

714.06.00.02

PAVEMENT MARKINGS

108

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

PAVEMENT MARKINGS SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

AASHTO T 346

SAMPLING GLASS

BEADS

AASHTO PP 74

GRADATION AND

ROUNDNESS OF

GLASS BEADS

SAMPLE FROM BULK CONTAINER WITH

THIEF/PROBE IN ACCORDANCE WITH

AASHTO T 346. SAMPLE THIEF/PROBE

MAY NOT FILL SAMPLE BOTTLES.

WHEN SAMPLING FROM A BULK

CONTAINER IS NOT POSSIBLE, SAMPLES

MAY BE COLLECTED FROM THE BEAD GUN

ON THE TRUCK.

REFLECTIVE GLASS

BEADS

MT TYPE 1

714.08.00.02

MT TYPE 2

714.08.00.03

1 QT

(1 LITER)

CONSTRUCTION

ONE PER PROJECT

MAINTENANCE

AS REQUESTED

SAMPLE TEST

PAVEMENT MARKINGS

109

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

CERT OF

COMP

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PRODUCT

CERT OF

COMP

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 11 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION FOR EACH HEAT #

IF RECYCLED MATERIAL, BUY AMERICA

CATEGORY 2 REQUIREMENTS APPLY

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

PILE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

PILE DRIVING POINT

559.04.06.01

PILE CUTTING SHOE

559.04.06.02

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PILES

711.10.01.01A

711.10.01.01L

PILE

110

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

PILE SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 11 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION FOR EACH HEAT #

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 11 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION FOR EACH HEAT #

STEEL FLUTED PILES

711.10.03.01

STEEL PIPE PILES

711.10.02.01

PILE

111

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT VISUAL

PRE-INSPECTION IS NOT REQUIRED IF ITEM

IS PRODUCED AT

A CERTIFIED PLANT (QPL)

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MT 110

RCP AND

ASSOCIATED ITEMS

N/A MONTHLYPLANTS NEED TO BE INSPECTED MONTHLY,

INCLUDING CERTIFIED PLANTS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT VISUAL

PRE-INSPECTION IS NOT REQUIRED IF ITEM

IS PRODUCED AT

A CERTIFIED PLANT (QPL)

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MT 110

RCP AND

ASSOCIATED ITEMS

N/A MONTHLYPLANTS NEED TO BE INSPECTED MONTHLY,

INCLUDING CERTIFIED PLANTS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PLASTIC PIPE

708.05

708.06

708.07

708.08

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH

DATA

SHEET

PIPES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

REINFORCED

CONCRETE PIPE

708.01.01.01

PRE-INSPECTION

CONCRETE

PRESSURE PIPE

708.02.00.01

PRE-INSPECTION

PIPES

112

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

PIPES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA

SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA

SHEET

OR CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA

SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA

SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

DUCTILE IRON

WATER PIPE

709.01.01.01

STEEL WATER PIPE

709.01.02.01

CORRUGATED

STEEL PIPE

709.02.00.01

STEEL

STRUCTURAL

PLATE PIPE

709.03.00.01

PIPES

113

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

PIPES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CORR ALUMINUM

PIPE CULVERT

709.07.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA

SHEET

VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA

SHEET

OR CERT OF

COMP

VISUAL

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

COPPER PIPE

709.10.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA

SHEET

VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 207

WATER CORROSION

1 QT

(1 LITER)SAMPLE TEST

MT 232

SOILS CORROSION

5 LB

(3 KG)SAMPLE TEST

PROBABLE, PROPOSED OR EXISTING

CENTERLINE OF PIPE, CHANNEL BOTTOM,

BRIDGE LOCATIONS AND PROBABLE

BORROW AREAS

SEAMLESS

STEEL PIPE

709.09.00.01

PIPE INSPECTION

FOR PIPE SURVEY

PC 3

PIPES

114

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

WARM MIX

ADDITIVE

401.02.04.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE QUALIFIED

PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ANTI-STRIPPING

ADDITIVE

401.02.05.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

RECYCLING AGENT

401.02.05.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 115

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 303

SAMPLING

BITUMINOUS PAVING

MIXTURES

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 329

MOISTURE CONTENTMINIMUM ONE PER DAY

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT BY

IGNITION METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE ANALYSIS

TEST

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 332

GYRATORY

COMPACTION

MT 334

HAMBURG WHEEL-

TRACK

SAMPLE

MT 335

LINEAR KNEADING

COMPACTION

DENSITY BY CORE 2 - 4" CORES ONE EVERY 600 TONS (MT) PMP SAMPLE TEST SPECIAL PROVISION SECTION 401.03.21

MT 602

FINAL RECORD2 CORES

PER TWO LANE MILE TAKEN AT

1/2 MILE (1 KM) INTERVALS

SAMPLE

TEST

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE S (3/4")

401.03.01.01

SUFFICIENT

QUANTITY

IN

2-10 QUART

(9.5 LITER)

GALVANIZED

BUCKETS

ONE EVERY 1000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT

COMMERCIAL MIXES

ONE EVERY 2000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT WITH A MINIMUM OF

ONE SAMPLE FOR PROJECTS

OVER 500 TONS (MT)

(NO TESTS ARE REQUIRED FOR

CONTRACTS UNDER 500 TONS (MT))

SAMPLE

TEST

ONE EVERY 1000 TONS (MTONS) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT

COMMERCIAL MIXES

ONE EVERY 2000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT WITH A MINIMUM OF

ONE SAMPLE FOR PROJECTS

OVER 500 TONS (MT)

(NO TESTS ARE REQUIRED FOR

CONTRACTS UNDER 500 TONS (MT))

45 LBS

(20 KG)

ONCE INITIAL JOB MIX TARGETS ARE

ESTABLISHED OR FOR START-UP MIX

WITH TEST RESULTS OUTSIDE THE BROADBAND

LIMITS

TESTADDITIONAL SAMPLES MAY BE TAKEN AT EPM'S

DISCRETION

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 116

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT BY

IGNITION METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE ANALYSIS

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 332

GYRATORY

COMPACTION

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE S (3/4")

401.03.01.01

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

N/A ONCE PER PROJECT CHECK CHECK

PROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED BY

THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

OR MDT HQ LAB

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 117

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 96

L.A. ABRASION

AASHTO T 176

SAND EQUIVALENTPRIMARY

MT 305

VOLUME SWELL

CALIPER/MERCURY

SECONDARY

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

AASHTO T 304

FINE AGGREGATE

ANGULARITY

ASTM D4791

FLAT & ELONGATED

PARTICLES

AASHTO T 84

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

FINE AGG

AASHTO T 85

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

COARSE AGG

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 332

GYRATORY COMPACTION

MT 334

HAMBURG WHEEL-TRACK

MT 335

LINEAR KNEADING

COMPACTION

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT BY

IGNITION METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE ANALYSIS

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE S (3/4")

401.03.01.01

Mix Design

800 LBS

(636 KG)ONE PER PLANT MIX DESIGN VERIFICATION

TEST

USED FOR PLANT MIX DESIGNS CONTAINING RAP

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 118

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 303

SAMPLING

BITUMINOUS PAVING

MIXTURES

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 329

MOISTURE CONTENTMINIMUM ONE PER DAY

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT BY

IGNITION METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE ANALYSIS

TEST

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 332

GYRATORY

COMPACTION

MT 334

HAMBURG WHEEL-

TRACK

SAMPLE

MT 335

LINEAR KNEADING

COMPACTION

DENSITY BY CORE 2 - 4" CORES ONE EVERY 600 TONS (MT) PMP SAMPLE TEST SPECIAL PROVISION SECTION 401.03.21

MT 602

FINAL RECORD2 CORES

PER TWO LANE MILE TAKEN AT

1/2 MILE (1 KM) INTERVALS

SAMPLE

TEST

TESTADDITIONAL SAMPLES MAY BE TAKEN AT EPM'S

DISCRETION

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE S (1/2")

401.03.01.02

SUFFICIENT

QUANTITY

IN

2-10 QUART

(9.5 LITER)

GALVANIZED

BUCKETS

ONE EVERY 1000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT

COMMERCIAL MIXES

ONE EVERY 2000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT WITH A MINIMUM OF

ONE SAMPLE FOR PROJECTS

OVER 500 TONS (MT)

(NO TESTS ARE REQUIRED FOR

CONTRACTS UNDER 500 TONS (MT))

SAMPLE

TEST

ONE EVERY 1000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT

COMMERCIAL MIXES

ONE EVERY 2000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT WITH A MINIMUM OF

ONE SAMPLE FOR PROJECTS

OVER 500 TONS (MT)

(NO TESTS ARE REQUIRED FOR

CONTRACTS UNDER 500 TONS (MT))

45 LBS

(20 KG)

ONCE INITIAL JOB MIX TARGETS ARE

ESTABLISHED OR FOR START-UP MIX

WITH TEST RESULTS OUTSIDE THE BROADBAND

LIMITS

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 119

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT

BY IGNITION

METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE

ANALYSIS

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

MT 332

GYRATORY

COMPACTION

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE S (1/2")

401.03.01.02

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

N/A ONCE PER PROJECT CHECK CHECKPROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED BY

THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

OR MDT HQ LAB

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 120

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 96

L.A. ABRASION

AASHTO T 176

SAND EQUIVALENTPRIMARY

MT 305

VOLUME SWELL

CALIPER/MERCURY

SECONDARY

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

AASHTO T 304

FINE AGGREGATE

ANGULARITY

ASTM D4791

FLAT & ELONGATED

PARTICLES

AASHTO T 84

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

FINE AGG

AASHTO T 85

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

COARSE AGG

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 332

GYRATORY COMPACTION

MT 334

HAMBURG WHEEL-TRACK

MT 335

LINEAR KNEADING

COMPACTION

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT BY

IGNITION METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE ANALYSIS

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE S (1/2")

401.03.01.02

Mix Design

800 LBS

(636 KG)ONE PER PLANT MIX DESIGN VERIFICATION

TEST

USED FOR PLANT MIX DESIGNS CONTAINING RAP

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 121

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 303

SAMPLING

BITUMINOUS PAVING

MIXTURES

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 329

MOISTURE CONTENTMINIMUM ONE PER DAY

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT BY

IGNITION METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE ANALYSIS

TEST

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 332

GYRATORY

COMPACTION

MT 334

HAMBURG WHEEL-

TRACK

SAMPLE

MT 335

LINEAR KNEADING

COMPACTION

DENSITY BY CORE 2 - 4" CORES ONE EVERY 600 TONS (MT) PMP SAMPLE TEST SPECIAL PROVISION SECTION 401.03.21

MT 602

FINAL RECORD2 CORES

PER TWO LANE MILE TAKEN AT

1/2 MILE (1 KM) INTERVALS

SAMPLE

TEST

TESTADDITIONAL SAMPLES MAY BE TAKEN AT EPM'S

DISCRETION

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE S (3/8")

401.03.01.06

SUFFICIENT

QUANTITY

IN

2-10 QUART

(9.5 LITER)

GALVANIZED

BUCKETS

ONE EVERY 1000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT

COMMERCIAL MIXES

ONE EVERY 2000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT WITH A MINIMUM OF

ONE SAMPLE FOR PROJECTS

OVER 500 TONS (MT)

(NO TESTS ARE REQUIRED FOR

CONTRACTS UNDER 500 TONS (MT))

SAMPLE

TEST

ONE EVERY 1000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT

COMMERCIAL MIXES

ONE EVERY 2000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT WITH A MINIMUM OF

ONE SAMPLE FOR PROJECTS

OVER 500 TONS (MT)

(NO TESTS ARE REQUIRED FOR

CONTRACTS UNDER 500 TONS (MT))

45 LBS

(20 KG)

ONCE INITIAL JOB MIX TARGETS ARE

ESTABLISHED OR FOR START-UP MIX

WITH TEST RESULTS OUTSIDE THE BROADBAND

LIMITS

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 122

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT

BY IGNITION

METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE

ANALYSIS

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

MT 332

GYRATORY

COMPACTION

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE S (3/8")

401.03.01.06

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

N/A ONCE PER PROJECT CHECK CHECKPROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED BY

THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

OR MDT HQ LAB

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 123

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 96

LOS ANGELES ABRASION

AASHTO T 176

SAND EQUIVALENT TESTPRIMARY

MT 305

VOLUME SWELL

CALIPER/MERCURY

SECONDARY

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

AASHTO T 304

FINE AGGREGATE

ANGULARITY

ASTM D4791

FLAT & ELONGATED

PARTICLES

AASHTO T 84

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

FINE AGG

AASHTO T 85

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

COARSE AGG

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 332

GYRATORY COMPACTION

MT 334

HAMBURG WHEEL-TRACK

MT 335

LINEAR KNEADING

COMPACTION

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT BY

IGNITION METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE ANALYSIS

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE S (3/8")

401.03.01.06

Mix Design

800 LBS

(636 KG)ONE PER PLANT MIX DESIGN VERIFICATION

TEST

USED FOR PLANT MIX DESIGNS

CONTAINING RAP

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 124

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 303

SAMPLING

BITUMINOUS PAVING

MIXTURES

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 329

MOISTURE CONTENTMINIMUM ONE PER DAY

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT BY

IGNITION METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE ANALYSIS

TEST

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC GRAVITY

AASHTO T 245

MARSHALL METHOD

MT 334

HAMBURG WHEEL-

TRACK

SAMPLE

MT 335

LINEAR KNEADING

COMPACTION

DENSITY BY CORE 2 - 4" CORES ONE EVERY 600 TONS (MT) PMP SAMPLE TEST SPECIAL PROVISION SECTION 401.03.21

MT 602

FINAL RECORD2 CORES

PER TWO LANE MILE TAKEN AT

1/2 MILE (1 KM) INTERVALS

SAMPLE

TEST

TESTADDITIONAL SAMPLES MAY BE TAKEN AT EPM'S

DISCRETION

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE D

401.03.01.03

SUFFICIENT

QUANTITY

IN

2-10 QUART

(9.5 LITER)

GALVANIZED

BUCKETS

ONE EVERY 1000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT

COMMERCIAL MIXES

ONE EVERY 2000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT WITH A MINIMUM OF

ONE SAMPLE FOR PROJECTS

OVER 500 TONS (MT)

(NO TESTS ARE REQUIRED FOR

CONTRACTS UNDER 500 TONS (MT))

SAMPLE

TEST

ONE EVERY 1000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT

COMMERCIAL MIXES

ONE EVERY 2000 TONS (MT) OF

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT WITH A MINIMUM OF

ONE SAMPLE FOR PROJECTS

OVER 500 TONS (MT)

(NO TESTS ARE REQUIRED FOR

CONTRACTS UNDER 500 TONS (MT))

45 LBS

(20 KG)

ONCE INITIAL JOB MIX TARGETS ARE

ESTABLISHED OR FOR START-UP MIX

WITH TEST RESULTS OUTSIDE THE BROADBAND

LIMITS

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 125

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT

BY IGNITION

METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE

ANALYSIS

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC

GRAVITY

AASHTO T 245

MARSHALL METHOD

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE D

401.03.01.03

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

N/A ONCE PER PROJECT CHECK CHECKPROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED BY

THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

OR MDT HQ LAB

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 126

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLING

800 LBS

(636 KG)SAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 84

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

FINE AGG

AASHTO T 85

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

COARSE AGG

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

AASHTO T 166

BULK SPECIFIC GRAVITY

MT 321

RICE SPECIFIC GRAVITY

AASHTO T 245

MARSHALL METHOD

MT 334

HAMBURG WHEEL-TRACK

MT 335

LINEAR KNEADING

COMPACTION

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT BY

IGNITION METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 283

MODIFIED LOTTMANN/A VERIFY

VERIFY TEST RESULTS FROM

CONTRACTOR/CONSULTANT PROVIDING

MIX DESIGN

PLANT MIX

SURFACING

GRADE D

401.03.01.03

Mix Design

ONE PER PLANT MIX DESIGN VERIFICATIONTEST

USED FOR PLANT MIX DESIGNS

CONTAINING RAP

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 127

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

MT 303

SAMPLING

BITUMINOUS

PAVING MIXTURES

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT BY

IGNITION METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE

ANALYSIS

TEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

AASHTO R 47

REDUCING SAMPLES

MT 319

BINDER CONTENT

BY IGNITION

METHOD

MT 320

IGNITION OVEN

AGGREGATE

ANALYSIS

PLANT MIX

SEAL COURSE

401.03.01.05

20 LBS

(9 KG)ONE EVERY 600 TONS (MT) PMSC

SAMPLE

TEST

INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (PROCEDURAL CHECK)

N/A ONCE PER PROJECT CHECK CHECK

PROCEDURAL CHECK MAY BE PERFORMED

BY THE DISTRICT/AREA LAB

OR MDT HQ LAB

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 128

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSIS

AASHTO T 84

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

FINE AGG

AASHTO T 85

SPECIFIC GRAVITY

COARSE AGG

AASHTO T 89

LIQUID LIMIT

AASHTO T 90

PLASTIC LIMIT &

PLASTICITY INDEX

AASHTO T 96

LOS ANGELES

ABRASION

AASHTO T 176

SAND EQUIVALENT

TEST

AASHTO T 335

FRACTURE

MT 305

VOLUME SWELL

CALIPER/MERCURY

AASHTO T 304

FINE AGGREGATE

ANGULARITY

ASTM D4791

FLAT & ELONGATED

PARTICLES

ASTM D6390

DRAIN DOWN

MT 332

GYRATORY

COMPACTION

VERIFY

PLANT MIX

SEAL COURSE

401.03.01.05

Mix Design

800 LBS

(363 KG)

ONE PER PLANT MIX SEAL COURSE

MIX DESIGN

TEST

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 129

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)PLANT MIX PAVEMENT SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

EPA SPECIFICATION

USED OIL FUEL

401.03.02.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT

CERT OF

COMP

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER PROJECT VISUAL VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

AASHTO T 329

MOISTURE

CONTENT

MINIMUM

2.2 LB

(1 KG)

MOISTURE

PROOF

CONTAINER

ONE EVERY 3000 FT PAVER PATH SAMPLE TEST

FIELDDISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH

ONE PER COLD RECYCLED

PLANT MIX DESIGNMIX DESIGN APPROVAL

CERTIFICATION IS THE CONTRACTOR'S

MIX DESIGN

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

COLD IN-PLACE

RECYCLED -

ENGR EMULSION

405.02.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT OR BATCH

CERT OF

COMP

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS SAMPLE SIZE SAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CORES FOR

STRIPPING ANALYSIS

PC 4

MT 331

SAMPLING &

EVALUATING

STRIPPING

PAVEMENTS

1 EACH SEE MT 331 SAMPLE TEST

COLD RECYCLED

PLANT MIX

405.01.21.01

Mix Design

PLANT MIX PAVEMENT 130

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SNOW POLES

619.03.08.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SIGNING SHEET

ALUMINUM

704.01.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ALUMINUM SIGN

POSTS

704.01.04.05

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT DATA SHEET

SIGNING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

STEEL SIGN POSTS

704.01.04.01

STRUCTURAL STEEL

SIGN POSTS

704.01.04.02

SIGNING

131

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)SIGNING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER LOT/BATCH VISUAL

VERIFY SEAL NUMBERS CORRESPOND

WITH PRE-INSPECTION RECORDS

MT 404

INSPECTING WOOD

PRODUCTS

20

BORINGSONE PER CHARGE

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER EACH VISUAL

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 11 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION FOR EACH HEAT #

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

RETRO-REFLECTIVE

SHEETING

704.01.10.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH DATA SHEET

OVERHEAD

STRUCTURES

704.01.08.01

PRE-INSPECTION

BREAKAWAY

DEVICES

704.01.04.06

WOOD

POSTS & POLES

704.01.06.01 PRE-INSPECTION

SIGNING

132

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)SIGNING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SURFACE MOUNT

FLEXIBLE

DELINEATORS

704.03.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/BATCH

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

DRIVABLE

FLEXIBLE

DELINEATORS

704.03.00.02

SIGNING

133

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

DOWEL BAR SLEEVE

501.02.03.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT DATA SHEET VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

STEEL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

SMOOTH DOWEL

BARS

501.02.03.01

TIE BARS, GRADE 40

501.02.04.01

REBAR GRADE 40

711.01.01.01

STEEL RAILING

711.00.00.01

STEEL

134

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

STEEL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

REBAR EPOXY

COATING

711.01.02.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

DATA SHEET

VISUAL

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

REBAR GRADE 60

711.01.01.02

REBAR GRADE 75

711.01.01.04

MECHANICAL REBAR

CONNECTORS

711.01.01.03

REINFORCING WIRE,

WIRE MESH

711.01.03.01

STEEL

135

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

STEEL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

DATA SHEET

OR

CERT OF

COMP

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 11 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION FOR EACH HEAT #

REQUIRED ONLY IF MATERIAL HAS NOT

BEEN PRE-INSPECTED

MT 415

STRUCTURAL STEEL1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA SHEET

OR

CERT OF

COMP

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 11 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION FOR EACH HEAT #

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 11 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION FOR EACH HEAT #

PINS & ROLLERS

711.04.00.01

PRE-INSPECTION

STRUCTURAL STEEL

TUBING

711.03.00.01

STRUCTURAL STEEL

711.02.00.01

STEEL

136

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

STEEL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MT 407

HIGH STRENGTH

BOLTS

1 BOLT ONE TEST PER LOT/BATCH

ASTM F959

DIRECT TENSION

INDICATORS

1 DTI ONE TEST PER LOT/BATCH

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

BOLTS, NUTS,

THREADED ROD

711.07.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE TEST PER LOT/BATCH VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE TEST PER LOT/BATCH DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

HIGH TENSILE

STRENGTH BOLTS

711.06.00.01SAMPLE TEST

GALVANIZED METAL

711.08.00.01

STEEL

137

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

STEEL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER SHIPMENT

DATA SHEET

OR

CERT OF

COMP

IF WELDING OCCURS, CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE IS SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 624.03.3

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09 REQUIRED ONLY IF MATERIAL

HAS NOT BEEN PRE-INSPECTED

MT 409

WELDED STUD

SHEAR CONNECTORS

1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

ASTM A416

SEVEN WIRE

STRAND

8 FT

(3 M)ONE TEST PER LOT SAMPLE TEST

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/ITEM DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

WELDED STUD

SHEAR

CONNECTORS

711.09.00.01

PRE-INSPECTION

PRESTRESSING

STEEL

711.11.00.01

STEEL CASTINGS

711.12.01.01

STEEL

138

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

STEEL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/ITEM DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/ITEM DATA SHEET

ACCEPTANCE ONLY FROM THE

QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/ITEM DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

METAL BIN-TYPE

RETAINING WALLS

711.17.00.01

MISCELLANEOUS

DRAINAGE

CASTINGS

711.12.03.01

STRUCTURAL

ANCHOR BOLTS

711.13.00.01

CAST INLET GRATES

711.12.03.02

STEEL

139

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

STEEL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/ITEM DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

DOES NOT APPLY TO BIT

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/ITEM DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER LOT/ITEM

DATA SHEET

OR CERT OF

COMP

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

GABION BASKETS -

WIRE AND WIRE

MESH

711.22.00.01

HIGH STRENGTH

WIRE ROCKFALL

MESH

711.21.00.01

ROCK/SOIL ANCHOR

711.18.00.01

STEEL

140

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

TEMPORARY

ROLLED EROSION

CONTROL

208.02.00.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

CERT OF

COMP

OR

DATA

SHEET

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE IS REQUIRED

FOR ALL EROSION CONTROL THAT

CONTAINS STRAW

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PLANTS -

TREES & SHRUBS

208.02.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER ITEM

DATA SHEET

VISUALVERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

LOG

208.02.02.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER ITEM VISUAL VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ROOT WAD

208.02.02.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER ITEM VISUAL VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

STREAM

PRESERVATION

208.02.02.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER ITEM VISUAL VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTIONN/A ONE PER MATERIAL TYPE VISUAL VERIFY ITEM MEETS MDT REQUIREMENTS

MT 201

SAMPLINGSAMPLE

MT 202

SIEVE ANALYSISTEST

STREAM PRESERVATION SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

STREAMBED

AGGREGATE

208.02.03.01

SAMPLE

PER

MT 201

ONE PER SOURCE

STREAM PRESERVATION

141

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CSB618_02 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

CERT OF

COMP

OTHER MATERIAL SUCH AS MAILBOX

SUPPORT

CERT OF COMP FOR

TRAFFIC CONTROL/

MAILBOX

618.03.02.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT

CRASH TESTING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

CRASH TESTING

142

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

BIRD SPIKES

BM.699.01.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH TYPE VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

GLUE LAMINATED

BEAMS

BM.699.01.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER BEAM DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

INSULATION

BM.699.01.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

BUILDING MATERIALS

STRUCTURE MATERIAL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

METAL ROOFING

BM.699.01.04

METAL SIDING &

SOFFIT

BM.699.01.05

BUILDING MATERIALS

143

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BUILDING MATERIALS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PICNIC SHELTER

(NON PRECAST)

BM.699.01.06

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

QUARRY TILE

BM.699.01.07

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

INTERIOR/

EXTERIOR BUILDING

TAPE & PAINT

BM.699.01.09

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

STRUCTURE MATERIAL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

ROOF JOIST

BM.699.01.08

BUILDING MATERIALS

144

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BUILDING MATERIALS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MASONARY/

THROUGH WALL

FLASHING

BM.699.01.10

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PRE-PACKAGED

MORTAR

BM.699.01.11

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT, PER TYPE DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CMU

BM.699.01.12

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT, PER TYPE DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SRW BLOCK

BM.699.01.13

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT, PER TYPE DATA SHEET

STRUCTURE MATERIAL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

BUILDING MATERIALS

145

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BUILDING MATERIALS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

MASONRY SIDING

BM.699.01.14

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER PROJECT, PER TYPE DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

INTERIOR/

EXTERIOR GLASS

AND GLAZING

BM.699.01.15

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ELECTRICAL

BM.699.02.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

HVAC SYSTEM

BM.699.02.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH

ONE PER EACH COMPONENT,

PER TYPE, PER PROJECTDATA SHEET

STRUCTURE MATERIAL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

BUILDING MATERIALS

146

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BUILDING MATERIALS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

INTERIOR FIXTURES

& FEATURES

BM.699.02.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

IRRIGATION SYSTEM

BM.699.03.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PLUMBING

BM.699.03.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

PROPANE TANK

BM.699.02.04

PLUMBING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

BUILDING MATERIALS

147

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BUILDING MATERIALS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

WASTE WATER

TREATMENT

SYSTEM

BM.699.03.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

WASTE WATER

UTILITY PIPE &

APPURTENANCE

BM.699.03.04

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

WASTE WATER

PUMPS, FITTINGS &

VALVES

BM.699.03.05

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

WELL PUMPS,

FITTINGS & VALVES

BM.699.03.07

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

BENCHES

(NON PRECAST)

BM.699.04.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

PLUMBING SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

ACCESSORIES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

BUILDING MATERIALS

148

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BUILDING MATERIALS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

PICNIC TABLES

(NON PRECAST)

BM.699.04.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

TRASH RECEPTACLES

(NON PRECAST)

BM.699.04.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

& CABINETS

BM.699.04.04

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

FLAG POLES

(ALUMINUM)

BM.699.04.05

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

TOILET ROOM

ACCESSORIES

BM.699.04.06

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH VISUAL

ACCESSORIES SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

BUILDING MATERIALS

149

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BUILDING MATERIALS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

ALUMINUM

STOREFRONT

BM.699.05.01

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

DISPLAY CASES

BM.699.05.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

HOLLOW METAL

DOORS & FRAMES

BM.699.05.03

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH VISUAL

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

OVERHEAD GARAGE

DOORS

BM.699.05.04

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

DOOR/DISPLAY SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

BUILDING MATERIALS

150

MDT MATERIALS SAMPLING, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE GUIDE MT 601 (03/31/18)

BUILDING MATERIALS

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

IF MATERIAL IS STEEL OR PRECAST, A STEEL

CERT IS REQUIRED

STEEL CERT

CATEGORY 21 EACH ONE PER FORM 406 FORM 406

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL OF

DOCUMENTATION PER

SPECIFICATION 106.09

MATERIAL/

MATERIAL CODETESTS

SAMPLE

SIZESAMPLE/TEST FREQUENCY FIELD

DISTRICT/

AREA LAB

MDT

HQ LABNOTES

SCALE ELECTRONICS,

TRANSDUCERS, AND

DISPLAYS

BM.699.06.02

CERT/ VISUAL

INSPECTION1 EACH ONE PER EACH DATA SHEET

SCALE SITE SPECIFIC SPECIALS, SUPPLEMENTAL AND STANDARD SPECS, DETAILED DWGS

SCALE PIT

STRUCTURAL ITEMS

BM.699.06.01

BUILDING MATERIALS

151

MT 602-16 (06/30/2017)

1 of 6

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 602-17

ACCEPTANCE, INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE AND FINAL RECORD SAMPLING 1 SCOPE 1.1 Samples are to be obtained on a random basis for materials specified in MT 601 and in specified

quantities as related to yards, tons or other units of measurement. This test method documents the use of and the rates and frequencies associated with the acceptance of samples, independent assurance of procedures, and final records. Classes of Samples and Tests: Three classes of samples and tests are required for each project. They are "Acceptance samples and tests," "Independent Assurance samples and tests," and "Final Record samples and tests."

2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

ASTM D5821 Determining the Percentage of Fractured Particles in Coarse Aggregate AASHTO T 89 Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils T 90 Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils T 335 Determining the Percentage of Fracture in Coarse Aggregate

MT Materials Manual MT 202 Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate MT 226 Maximum Acceptable Deviations in Sieve Analysis of IA Samples MT 601 Materials Sampling, Testing and Acceptance Guide MT 606 Random Sampling Techniques

3 ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING

Random sampling and testing in accordance with MT 601 to ensure the quality of materials being incorporated or proposed for incorporation into a construction project. Acceptance sampling and testing are the principal means to assure materials and workmanship are in accordance with the contract. The number of samples and the distribution of the locations from which they are taken should be such as to ensure the materials incorporated are acceptable and in accordance with the contract requirements. Sampling and testing frequencies listed are a minimum. As job conditions vary, such as the uniformity of materials at the source, the methods and equipment used, and weather conditions, further sampling and testing can be done. Acceptance sampling and testing may be any of the following:

Samples of materials witnessed, taken and/or tested by MDT personnel or delegated

inspection agency. Samples taken and/or tested by the manufacturer or supplier with test results or

certificates submitted to the Department. 4 INDEPENDENT ASSURANCE (IA)

Per 23 CFR 637, Independent Assurance Program is defined as activities that are an unbiased and independent evaluation of all the sampling and testing procedures used in the acceptance program. IA results are not used directly for determining the quality and acceptability of the materials and workmanship on a project, but serve as checks on the reliability of the results obtained in project acceptance sampling and testing.

The elements of the Department’s IA Program are as follows:

IA sampling and testing frequencies as established in MT 601 Prompt comparison and documentation of test results obtained from split sample and

MT 602-16 (06/30/2017)

2 of 6

proficiency sample evaluations Department established tolerances for the comparison of test results Evaluation of testing personnel procedures through observations and results of split

samples and proficiency samples Testing equipment evaluation using calibration checks, split samples and proficiency

samples 4.1 Independent Assurance Comparison (IAC)

Description – IAC tests (also known as split samples) are performed to verify conformance with testing criteria through review of test results on equivalent samples. Purpose – IAC’s are used to eliminate materials and sampling variability from the analysis so only the variability due to the testing procedures and the equipment are evaluated. Frequency – MT 601 lists the minimum frequencies at which Independent Assurance Comparison samples are taken. These are reviewed and approved by the FHWA. Responsibility – IAC’s are a joint effort between Field Construction technicians, District/Area Materials Lab technicians, and MDT Materials Headquarter technicians. IAC requirements apply to all persons conducting acceptance sampling and testing on behalf of MDT. Sampling – These samples are taken at random per MT 606 from materials or from construction work in progress and are not necessarily intended to check compliance with specifications. They are taken and tested to provide an independent spot check of the adequacy and effectiveness of the results obtained in acceptance sampling and testing. If differences are discovered between acceptance samples and Independent assurance samples, it must be determined immediately why deviations exist and corrective measures taken to assure proper testing techniques and equipment are being utilized. If independent assurance samples are to accomplish the purpose for which they are intended, they must be the same sample or taken at the same place, by the same method and at the same time as routine acceptance samples. When an IAC sample is required, the technician performing acceptance testing obtains a sample, performs the initial acceptance test and documents the results. This sample then becomes the IAC sample that will be tested by the District/Area Materials Lab technician or MDT Materials Headquarters technician or both. To maintain the integrity of the sample, it is critical that all materials used for testing (with the exception of the wash sample) be recombined to their original configuration prior to transferring to the next testing facility. Sampling concrete aggregate shall be done by the District Laboratory Supervisor or a designated representative. Independent assurance samples are selected by MDT personnel who are not associated with the taking of acceptance samples on the project, or from samples taken for acceptance purposes provided such samples have been taken under their observation and control. Independent assurance samples are to be continuously in the custody or under the observation of properly trained personnel not associated with acceptance sampling until they are shipped or delivered to the District/Area Laboratory or the Materials Bureau for testing. Testing IAC Samples – The IAC sample must be taken to the laboratory and tested without delay. The results obtained for each of the required tests are to be delivered promptly to the Project Manager. Results should be compared with acceptance test results obtained on similar material and an evaluation made as to the accuracy of the acceptance sampling and testing. Project personnel should be notified if improved procedures, closer inspection and control, or possible corrective action are required.

MT 602-16 (06/30/2017)

3 of 6

Controlling test results – IAC results are not used directly for determining the quality and acceptability of the materials on a project. Acceptance test results take precedence in the event of conflicting results unless extenuating circumstances are identified. Tolerance – Department IAC tolerances are identified per the following table:

MATERIAL CATEGORY TEST METHOD REFERENCE DOCUMENT TOLERANCE

AGGREGATE MT 202 SIEVE ANALYSIS MT 226 REFER TO MT 226 FOR

ACCEPTABLE DEVIATION

AGGREGATE SURFACING MT 202 SIEVE ANALYSIS MT 226 REFER TO MT 226 FOR

ACCEPTABLE DEVIATION

AGGREGATE SURFACING AASHTO T 89 N/A MULTILABORATORY RESULTS

DIFFER BY MORE THAN 13% OF THEIR MEAN

AGGREGATE SURFACING AASHTO T 90 N/A MULTILABORATORY RESULTS

DIFFER BY MORE THAN 18% OF THEIR MEAN

AGGREGATE SURFACING AASHTO T 335 ASTM D5821 MULTILABORATORY RESULTS

DIFFER BY MORE THAN 14.7% OF THEIR MEAN

IAC results that are considered unsatisfactory must be investigated by the appropriate District Materials Supervisor to identify the cause and any corrective action needed. Document corrective action taken for the project file with copies sent to the Inspection Operations Supervisor. Unsatisfactory IACs should be brought to the attention of the corresponding Project Manager. Failure to demonstrate the following are typical causes of an unsatisfactory IAC.

Test results within the tolerance Proper equipment to conduct sampling and testing Equipment properly calibrated and in good working order Sampling and testing conducted according to prescribed MT methods Willingness to participate in an IAC (Indicate refusal in remarks section of the IAC report)

Every effort should be made to correct equipment or procedural problems immediately. A follow-up IAC investigation must be initiated within five working days to ensure that equipment and procedures are satisfactory. The IAC must be repeated until the problem is corrected and a satisfactory IAC is completed. Reporting – Results of IAC’s including corrective action is recorded in SiteManager.

4.2 Independent Assurance Procedural (IAP)

Description – IAP checks are performed to verify conformance with contract standards and testing criteria through review of test procedures. The IAP will be conducted on the jobsite while the tester is in the process of running normal acceptance testing for job control. Purpose – A key part of the IAP is witnessing the sampling and testing to verify that proper procedures are being followed. The calibration and condition of sampling and testing equipment used should be carefully checked.

MT 602-16 (06/30/2017)

4 of 6

Frequency – The frequencies at which IAP checks are performed should conform in general to MT 601. These frequencies have been reviewed and approved by the FHWA. Rigid conformity with a frequency pattern established as a guide for general application is not expected. In general, the given frequencies are set at a minimum. Each IAP assessment performed on a project may fulfill the same IAP requirement for other projects when performed by the same technician within 30 days. Responsibility – IAP’s are a joint effort between the District/Area Materials Lab Supervisors, Area Lab Coordinators, District and Area Lab Technicians and MDT Materials Headquarter personnel. IAP requirements apply to all persons conducting acceptance sampling and testing on behalf of MDT. IAP’s must be performed by personnel not normally involved in the acceptance testing for the project. Acceptability – IAP results that are considered unsatisfactory must be investigated by the appropriate District Materials Supervisor or MDT Materials Headquarter personnel to identify the cause and corrective action needed. Document any corrective action for the project file with copies sent to the Inspection Operations Supervisor. Unsatisfactory IAP’s should be brought to the attention of the corresponding Project Manager. Failure to demonstrate the following are typical causes of an unsatisfactory IAP.

Proper equipment to conduct sampling and testing Equipment properly calibrated and in good working order Sampling and testing conducted according to prescribed MT methods Willingness to participate in an IAC (Indicate refusal in the remarks section of the IAP

report)

The personnel proctoring the IAP will explain to the tester why the test was unsatisfactory and how it needs to be corrected. Every effort should be made to correct equipment or procedural problems at this time. The IAP should then be repeated until the problem is corrected and a satisfactory IAP is completed. If a satisfactory IAP cannot be achieved due to tester deficiencies, notification and documentation will be provided to the WAQTC coordinator and additional training or revocation of certification may be required.

Reporting – Results of IAC’s, including corrective action, is recorded in SiteManager.

4.3 Proficiency Samples

Description – Proficiency testing is an outline designed to test accuracy of District/Area Laboratories and MDT Materials Headquarter Laboratories. Purpose – Laboratories can judge their testing results by comparing them to a large body of results performed on the same material. The quality of test results can be demonstrated, thereby reducing the risk of disputes due to testing errors. The program also provides laboratories with the means to check both the testing apparatus and the operator under actual testing conditions. Processing Material and Sample Distribution – Homogeneity of samples is controlled during the production process. Materials are selected from known sources and are inspected when received. The materials are thoroughly blended in accordance with established schemes. The sample is then reduced for the multiple-testing process. Frequency – Proficiency samples are distributed to participants once per year, with a pair of unique samples provided each time. When testing is complete, laboratories submit their testing results for analysis.

MT 602-16 (06/30/2017)

5 of 6

Tests – Proficiency tests are performed on the following procedures:

AASHTO T 85 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate AASHTO T 89 Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils AASHTO T 90 Determining the Plastic Limit & Plasticity Index of Soils AASHTO T 166 Bulk Specific Gravity (Gmb) of Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Using

Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens AASHTO T 335 Determining the Percentage of Fracture in Coarse Aggregate MT 202 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate MT 210 Proctor (5.5 LB) MT 230 Proctor (10 LB) MT 305 Volume Swell of Bituminous Mixtures – Caliper Method MT 319 Asphalt Binder Content of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) by Ignition Method MT 320 Mechanical Analysis of Aggregate Recovered from Ignition Oven Burn MT 321 Determining Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures – “Rice

Method” MT 332 Gyratory Compaction of Bituminous Mixtures

Responsibility – The Inspection Operations Unit of the Physical Testing Section is responsible for composition, distribution, analysis and reporting of proficiency samples. Reporting – When an individual laboratory completes the proficiency sample testing, the technician reports results to the Inspection Operations Unit. Results from all laboratories are then compiled and reports are distributed to each individual laboratory. If corrective actions are required, a notification will be sent out by the Inspection Operations Unit to laboratories with deficient results. The District Material Laboratory Supervisor is responsible for responding to the deficiency.

4.4 Lab and Equipment Inspections

Description – The Physical Testing Section conducts annual inspections on District, Area, and MDT Materials Headquarters Laboratories and equipment used for acceptance testing. Purpose – Laboratory and equipment inspections are performed to demonstrate competency in the performance of specific test procedures and that testing equipment is within procedural requirements. Frequency – Equipment and procedural inspections are performed annually. Responsibility – The Inspection Operations Unit conducts and reports procedural inspections performed in District and Area Laboratories. MDT Materials Headquarters Laboratory Supervisors conduct procedural inspections on technicians performing testing under their supervision. Equipment calibrations and verifications are a joint effort between the Inspection Operations Unit and MDT Materials Laboratory Supervisors. Reporting – Procedures observed by the Inspection Operations personnel are entered into SiteManager and summarized in a hard copy report that is sent to the District Administrator and Materials Bureau Engineer. Equipment calibrations and verifications are entered into SiteManager by the applicable Materials Laboratory Supervisor or a designated representative. Each laboratory is responsible for sustaining up to date calibration/verification of testing equipment. An equipment status report may be generated by Oracle.

MT 602-16 (06/30/2017)

6 of 6

5 FINAL RECORD (FR) Description – FR samples are physical comparisons between design plan dimensions and those actually achieved during construction. Purpose – FR core samples are taken and analyzed for the following purposes:

To determine adequacy of pavement thickness and other construction requirements but not for the purpose of checking compliance with specification requirements. These samples are taken to verify conformity with plans and specification requirements applicable to the completed construction.

To furnish information relative to the amounts of change in properties of the material used

in the work. FR samples and tests are for physical research purposes to ascertain the need and basis for possible improvements in future designs and specifications.

To determine if corrective measures may be necessary. FR samples and tests serve to

indicate whether previously unknown or unsuspected conditions may exist on the project that may have a detrimental effect on the completed construction.

Frequency of Sampling – The frequency of FR samples is stated in MT 601. Responsibility – Samples must be witnessed by or under the direct supervision of the District/Area Lab Supervisor or their designated representative and must not be scheduled on such an inflexible and regular routine that its frequency can be predicted. Sufficient samples must be submitted to satisfy the frequency intended. Sampling and Testing – These samples are taken at random per MT 606 from completed construction work or completed portions thereof. FR samples should be taken at each individual stage of the construction work as it is completed and before it is covered or disturbed by a subsequent construction stage. This minimizes damage to finished work and facilitates the satisfactory procurement of samples. FR core sample locations will be referenced to centerline. Whenever test results indicate that significant changes have occurred (because of processing, contamination, or other reasons, after the materials were incorporated into the construction), these changes should be reported with an explanation. Reporting – Results of FR samples including corrective action are recorded in SiteManager.

MT 603-16 (12/28/16)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 603-16

DEFINITIONS 1. SOIL ENGINEERING TERMS

Dust Ratio – The ratio of the portion passing the 200 mesh sieve to the portion passing the 40-mesh

sieve and shall be no greater than two-thirds. Degradation Value – A specification set for each project using aggregate and is defined as a value

from 100 to 0 indicating the quality of fines produced by self-abrasion of aggregate in the presence of water. (100 is superior and below 35 is poor).

Gradation – A term used to describe the range and the relative distribution of particle sizes in a

material.

Well-graded soils – Those soils, which have a good representation of all particle sizes from the largest to the smallest but with a very small percentage of fines.

Poorly-graded soils – Those soils in which the range of particle sizes is very small or soils having

a deficiency in some of the intermediate sizes or soils containing excessive fines. Liquid Limit – The moisture content, which is the boundary between the liquid and plastic states for

the minus No. 40 fraction of a soil. For laboratory purposes it may be defined as the moisture content at which that soil fraction will close a standard groove for a length of 1/2 inch when subjected to 25 blows in a liquid limit device.

Moisture Content – The weight of water in a given soil mass divided by the oven dry weight of the soil

and is expressed in percent. Optimum Moisture – The moisture content, which will permit maximum-dry-unit weight to be obtained

for a given comp active effort. Plastic Limit – The moisture content, which is the boundary between the plastic and semi-solid states

for the minus No. 40 fraction of the soil. For laboratory purposes, it may be defined as the minimum moisture content at which the soil fraction can be rolled into a thread 1/8 inch in diameter without crumbling.

Plastic Index – The numerical difference between the moisture content of the Liquid Limit and the

moisture content of the Plastic Limit. R-Value – The resistance value (R-value) test is a material stiffness test. The test procedure

expresses a materials resistance to deformation as a function of the ratio of transmitted lateral pressure to applied vertical pressure. R-value is expressed as a numerical value from 0 to 100 with 0 being easily deformed by light loads. R-value, along with traffic volumes, are used in the pavement design process to determine the proper surfacing structure for a given project.

Wear Value – A specification set for each project using aggregate and is defined as the percentage of

dry weight lost during the abrasion of coarse aggregate in a Los Angeles Machine with an abrasive charge.

2. DENSITY

Absolute (of solids and liquids) – The mass of a unit volume of a material at a specified temperature

(grams per milliliter, grams per cubic centimeter, pounds per cubic foot, etc. at x temperature). Absolute (of gases) – The mass of a unit volume of a gas at a stated temperature and pressure

(grams per milliliter, grams per cubic centimeter, pounds per cubic foot, etc. at x temperature, y pressure).

1 of 7

MT 603-16 (12/28/16)

Apparent (of solids and liquids) – The weight in air of a unit volume of a material at a specified temperature.

Bulk (of solids) – The weight in air of a unit volume of a permeable material (including both

permeable and impermeable voids normal to the material) at a stated temperature.

3. SPECIFIC GRAVITY TERMS Absolute – The ratio of the weight of a given volume of solids to the weight of an equal volume of

water at a stated temperature. Apparent – The ratio of the weight of a given volume of impermeable material (the solid matter

including impermeable pores) to the weight of an equal volume of water. Bulk – The ratio of the weight of a given volume of permeable material (including both permeable and

impermeable voids) to the weight of an equal volume of water. Permeability – A measure of the facility of a soil to transmit liquids, largely dependent upon grain size

distribution. “Rice” Gravity – Defined as the maximum specific gravity (absolute) of the uncompacted bituminous

mixture.

4. HIGHWAY TERMS Base – Foundation for pavement. Base Course – A term used to include the layers of relatively high quality materials placed above the

sub-grade as a stress distribution medium to insure that the stress induced in the sub-grade will not exceed its strength.

Binder Course – The course, in sheet asphalt and bituminous concrete pavements, placed between

base and surface courses. Bleeding – The upward migration of bituminous material resulting in a film of bitumen on the surface. Blow-Up – Localized buckling or shattering of rigid pavement caused by excessive longitudinal

pressure. Cement Treated Base (CTB) – A mixture of a well graded aggregate and measured amounts of

Portland cement and water, compacted to a high density to provide a durable base for paving. Construction Joint – The vertical or notched plane of separation in pavement. Contraction Joint – A full depth or weakened plane type joint designed to establish the position of

any crack caused by contraction while providing no space for expansion of the pavement beyond its original length.

Corrugations – The regular transverse undulations in a pavement surface consisting of alternate

valleys and crests. Cracks – The approximately vertical cleavage due to natural causes or traffic action. Crazing – A pattern of cracking extending only through the surface layer, a result of more drying

shrinkage in the surface than the interior of plastic concrete. “D” Lines – Disintegration characterized by successive formation of a series of fine cracks at rather

close intervals paralleling edges, joints and cracks and usually curving across slab corners, initial cracks forming very close to slab edges and additional cracks progressively developing, ordinarily filled with calcareous deposits.

2 of 7

MT 603-16 (12/28/16)

Disintegration – Deterioration into small fragments from any cause. Distortion – Any deviation of pavement surface from the original shape. Expansion Joints – A joint permitting the pavement to expand in length. Faulting – The differential vertical displacement of slabs adjacent to joints or cracks. Flecking – The dislodgement of a thin film of mortar from the outermost portion of occasional coarse

aggregate particles on concrete surfaces, generally attributable to lack of bond between mortar and aggregate.

Flexible Base and Pavements – A bituminous pavement consisting of a well-graded aggregate

combined with asphalt cement and with sufficiently low bending resistance to maintain intimate contact with the underlying structure and to distribute loads to the foundation by aggregate interlock, particle friction, or surface tension. Principle elements of flexible pavements are wearing surface, base, sub-base and sub-grades.

Frost Heave – The lifting and distortion of a surface due to internal action of frost resulting from

subsurface ice formation; affects soil, rock, pavement, and other structures. Joints – Constructed junctions between adjacent sections of pavement or between pavement and

structures. Leveling Course – A course of variable thickness constructed immediately on top of base material or

existing pavement to remove large irregularities prior to super-imposed treatment or construction. (Binder course may function as leveling course and be called Binder course, Leveling course or Binder-Leveling course).

Longitudinal Joint – Either a full depth or weakened-plane type joint constructed parallel to or along

the centerline to control longitudinal cracking. Map Cracking – Disintegration in which cracking of the slab surface develops in a random pattern;

may develop over the entire surface or localized areas. Pitting – The displacement of aggregate particles from the pavement surface due to the action of

traffic or disintegration, without major displacement of cementing material. Plane of Failure – The depth at which the voids in the wheel path and/or between the wheel path are

comparable to the voids in the passing lane. Progressive Scale – Concrete disintegration that at first appears as surface scaling but gradually

progresses deeper. Pumping – Displacement and ejection of water and suspended fine particles at joints, cracks and

edges. Raveling – The progressive disintegration of aggregate particles, by dislodgement, from the surface

downward or edges inward. Resurfacing – Supplemental surface placed on existing pavement to improve surface conformation or

increase strength. Rigid base and Pavements – A term applied to that type of pavement that is constructed with

Portland Cement Concrete. Those, which due to high bending resistance, distribute loads to foundations over comparatively large areas.

Rutting – The formation of longitudinal depressions by wheel tracking. Scaling – The peeling away of the surface of Portland Cement Concrete.

3 of 7

MT 603-16 (12/28/16)

Scratch or Wedge Course – A course, separate from the binder course, placed on the base to overcome deficiencies as lack of or too much crown, or to adjust grade or super-elevation.

Settlement – The reduction in elevation of short sections of pavement or structures. Shoving – The displacement of bituminous pavement due to the action of traffic, generally resulting in

bulging of the surface. Shoulder – A portion of the roadbed between the traffic lane and the top of the ditch in cuts and the

top of the slope in embankments. Spalling – The breaking or chipping of rigid pavement at joints, cracks or edges, usually resulting in

fragments with feather edges. Stripping – The separation of asphalt from aggregate particles due to the presence of moisture in

asphalt pavements. Sub-base – Specified or select material, of a planned thickness, placed as a foundation for pavement. Subgrade – The material in cuts, fills and fill foundations immediately below the first layer of sub-base,

base ore pavement. Subsealing or Undersealing – The placing of waterproof material under existing pavement to prevent

the vertical flow of water or suspended solids that fill the voids under pavement. Surface Course – The top course of a pavement providing a surface resistant to traffic abrasion or

imparting structural value to pavement. Surface Scale – A peeling away of the surface mortar of Portland Cement Concrete exposing sound

concrete, even though the scale extends into the mortar surrounding coarse aggregate. Surface Texture – The surface character of pavement that depends on size, shape, arrangement and

distribution of aggregates and cement or binder. Thrust – The pressure exerted by a rigid pavement against other pavements or structures. Warping – The deviation of pavement surface from its original shape caused by temperature and

moisture differentials within the slab. Warping Joints – A joint permitting then warping of pavement slabs when moisture and temperature

differentials occur in pavement, i.e., longitudinal or transverse joints with bonded steel or tie bars passing through them.

5. CONCRETE TERMS

Admixtures – Materials other than cement, aggregate and water in concrete used or entrain air,

retard setting or accelerate setting. Anchorage – That portion of a reinforcing bar, and any attachment thereto, designed to resist pulling

out or slipping of the bar when subjected to stress. Bleeding – The natural separation of a liquid from a liquid-solid or semisolid mixture; for example,

water from freshly poured concrete. Consistency – The degree of solidity or fluidity of freshly mixed concrete and commonly described as

slump. Curing Period – A period provided to prevent the formation of surface cracks due to the rapid loss of

water while the concrete is plastic and to ensure attainment of the specified strength.

4 of 7

MT 603-16 (12/28/16)

Fineness Modulus – The fineness modulus (FM) is an index of the fineness of an aggregate – the higher the FM, the coarser the aggregate. FM is the summation of the cumulative percentages of the material retained on the standard sieves divided by 100.

Honeycomb – A surface or interior defect in a concrete mass characterized by the lack of mortar

between the coarse aggregate particles. Laitance – Weak material, consisting principally of lime, which is formed on the surface of concrete,

especially when excess water is mixed with the cement. Saturated Surface Dry – A term used to describe the condition of an aggregate in which the pores of

all the particles are completely filled with water, but their surfaces are free from moisture. Slump – A measure of concrete consistency. Yield – The cubic feet of concrete produced per sack of cement.

6. ASPHALT TERMS Asphalt Cement – Fluxed or un-fluxed asphalt especially prepared for use in making bituminous

pavements. Batch – The quantity of mix discharged from the mixer in one complete operation of the plant before

additional materials are introduced. Bleeding – The presence of an excessive amount of asphalt on the surface due to either to an

excessive amount of prime or tack coats or excessive asphalt in the mix. C-Factor – Determined by the change in viscosity of asphalt cement during the mixing process

relative to that during the Thin-Film Oven test and is used to determine whether incomplete combustion of or contamination by burner fuel is causing or could cause asphalt concrete pavement tenderness.

Cutback Asphalt – Asphalt cement that has been rendered liquid by fluxing with a petroleum

distillate. (includes: RCs – Rapid Curing; MCs – Medium Curing; SCs – Slow Curing.) Emulsion – An emulsion of asphalt cement and water with a small quantity of an emulsifying agent. Prime Coat – The initial application of low viscosity liquid asphalt to an absorbent base prior to placing

asphalt concrete. Tack Coat – A thin layer of bitumen, road tar, or emulsion laid on a road to enhance adhesion of the

course above it.

7. ASPHALT MIX DESIGN TERMS Volume Swell – The increase in volume of compacted aggregate, soil, sand, or a combination of

aggregates passing the 10 mesh sieve (2.0 mm) and stabilized with bituminous material, when soaked in water for a standard length of time.

Acceptance Samples and Tests – These are samples taken and tests made to ascertain on a day-

to-day basis whether the quality of the materials being incorporated or proposed for incorporation into the construction conform to the plans and specifications.

Air Voids – The total volume of the small pockets of air between the coated aggregate particles

throughout a compacted paving mixture, expressed as a percent of the bulk volume of the compacted paving mixture.

5 of 7

MT 603-16 (12/28/16)

Anti-Rutting Specification – Defined as a series of specifications to reduce rutting. It requires a minimum of 70% mechanical fracture on at least one face of the 4 mesh fraction of material, revised aggregate gradation specification to conform to maximum density gradation curve. It allows a 1.05 pay factor as an incentive to stay closer to maximum density line and maintain greater uniformity. The temperature of the mix upon discharge from all mixers including drum dryers id specified in the mix design memorandum. Also, a Quality Assurance Plan is required.

Coarse Aggregate Angularity – The percentage (by mass) of aggregates larger than 4 mesh (4.75

mm) with one or more fractured faces. Final Record Samples and Tests – These samples and tests are taken at random from completed

construction work or completed portions thereof. They are to provide an independent spot-check of the adequacy and the effectiveness of the results obtained in Acceptance sampling and testing and to supplement theses test results.

Fine Aggregate Angularity – The percent air voids present in loosely compacted aggregates smaller

than No. 8 mesh (2.36 mm). Flat and Elongated Particles – The percentage (by mass) of coarse aggregates that have a

maximum to minimum dimension ratio greater than 5. Immersion Compression – A method for measuring the loss of cohesion resulting from the action of

water on compacted bituminous mixtures containing penetration graded asphalts. Independent Assurance Samples and Tests – These are samples taken and tests made to provide

an independent spot check of the adequacy and effectiveness of the results obtained in Acceptance sampling and testing and to supplement these test results. The samples are split in the field either into two or three portions that are tested by the field, district, or area, and the Materials Bureau in the case of a three-way split. These test results are used to compare testing procedures between the three laboratories.

Marshall Method of Asphalt Mix Design – A method that uses the measurement of resistance to

plastic flow of cylindrical specimens of bituminous paving mixtures loaded on the lateral surface by means of the Marshall apparatus to achieve the following characteristics; sufficient asphalt, sufficient mix stability, sufficient voids and sufficient workability.

Marshall Stability – The stability measured during loading in the Marshall apparatus and is used to

determine whether the compacted bituminous mixture will satisfy the demands of traffic without distortion or displacement.

Marshall Flow – The lateral deformation of the specimen at the point of maximum stability during

loading in the Marshall apparatus, measured in hundredths of an inch and recorded as a whole number (0.15 inches becomes 15).

Quality Assurance – Defined as a contractual method used to monitor the quality of material

incorporated into Plant Mix Surfacing and Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, and in the case of Plant Mix Surfacing, the density of the finished pavement. This is achieved by random sampling and or testing of contractor produced materials that will be used to establish price adjustments on a statistical basis.

Sand Equivalent (Clay Content) – Clay content is the percentage of clay material contained in the

aggregate fraction that is finer than a 4 mesh (4.75 mm) sieve. SuperpaveTM – Superior Performing Asphalt Pavements incorporates performance-based, asphalt

materials characterization with the design environmental conditions to improve performance by controlling rutting, low temperature cracking and fatigue cracking.

Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA) – The volume of intergranular void space between the

aggregate particles of a compacted paving mixture that includes the air voids and the effective asphalt content, expressed as a percent of the total volume of the sample.

6 of 7

MT 603-16 (12/28/16)

Voids Filled with Asphalt (VFA) – The percentage portion of the volume of intergranular void space between the aggregate particles that is occupied by the effective asphalt.

8. ACRONYMS

The following are some of the more common symbols used in highway construction: AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AC Asphalt Cement ASTM American Society for Testing Materials BST Bituminous Surface Treatment BTB Bituminous Treated Base CAPAC Corrugated Aluminum Pipe Arch Culvert CAPC Corrugated Aluminum Pipe Culvert CSPAC Corrugated Steel Pipe Arch Culvert CSPC Corrugated Steel Pipe Culvert CTB Cement Treated Base FHPM Federal-aid Highway Program Manual FM Fineness Modulus FR Final Record HMA Hot Mix Asphalt IA Independent Assurance LTB Lime Treated Base MT Montana Test PC Portland Cement PCCP Portland Cement Concrete Pavement PG Performance Grade PMB Plant Mix Base PMS Plant Mix Surfacing PSI Pounds Per Square Inch QA Quality Assurance RCPAC Reinforced Concrete Pipe Arch Culvert RCPC Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert RMS Road Mix Surfacing SC Seal Coat SG Specific Gravity SPPAC Structural (Sectional) Plate Pipe Arch Culvert SPPC Structural (Sectional) Plate Pipe Culvert

7 of 7

MT 604-04 (06/01/04)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 604-04

CONVERSION TABLES

Water Volume Measurements 7.5 gal. water = 1 cu. ft. 1 cu. in. = 0.000579 cu. ft. 1 cu. ft. water = 62.4 lbs. 1 cu. ft. = 1728 cu. in. 3785 cc water = 1 gal. 1 cu. yd. = 27 cu. ft. 8.32 lbs. Water @ 25°c = 1 gal. 1 cu. meter = 35.31445 cu. ft. 231 cu. in. water = 1 gal. 1 cu. centimeter = 0.0000353 cu. ft. 1728 cu. in. water = 1 cu. ft.

Weight Measurements 1 oz. = 28.35 grams 1 lb. = 453.59 grams = 0.454 kilograms 1 oz. = 0.0625 lbs. 1 lb. = 16 oz. 1 kilogram = 2.2 lb. = 1000 grams

Length Measurements Area 1 in. = 0.0833 ft. = 2.54 cm. Circle = 3.1416 * R2 1 yd. = 3 ft. = 36 in. 1 sq. mile = 640 acres 1 rod = 16.5 ft. = 198 in. 1 acre = 43560 sq. ft. 1 chain = 66 ft. = 792 in. 1 sq. yd. = 9 sq. ft. 1 mile = 5280 ft. = 1760 yd. 1 sq. yd. = 1296 sq. in. 1 cm = 0.032808 ft. = 0.3937 in. 1 sq. ft. = 144 sq. in.

Estimated Equivalents 1 cu. ft. concrete = 150 lbs. 1 cu. ft. clay, undisturbed = 110 lbs. dry; 135 lbs. wet 1 cu. ft. sand = 100 lbs. loose; 115 lbs. consolidated 1 cu. yd. compacted clay = 3500 lbs. (wet weight) 1 cu.yd. compacted stabilized gravel = 3800 lbs. cu. yds. * 1.9 = tons compacted stabilized gravel 1 mile * 1 ft. * 1 in. compacted stabilized gravel = 30.8 tons Miscellaneous Multiply by To obtain ft. per second 0.68182 miles per hour miles per hour 88 feet per min. pounds of water per min. 0.016021 cu. ft. per min. cu. ft. per min. 0.12468 gal. per second

1 of 1

MT 605-04 (06/01/04)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 605-04

SAMPLES AND CERTIFICATIONS (Montana Method)

1 Scope 1.1 This procedure is intended as a general guide to assist in determining whether material

designated for use on a highway project should be sampled or should be accepted on certification.

2 Referenced Documents

MT Materials Manual MT 601 Materials Sampling, Testing and Acceptance Guide

3 Samples and Certifications 3.1 In general, every item used must be sampled and an acceptance received before it can be

incorporated into the work unless acceptance can be made based on the manufacturer’s certification , field tests, or field inspection reports.

3.2 All major items to be sampled and tested and most items that may be accepted on the

manufacturer’s certification or label are listed in alphabetical order in MT 601 with instructions for sampling, testing, and acceptance.

4 Small Quantities 4.1 Projects requiring only small quantities of materials may not require sampling and testing of

certain items such as surfacing aggregates for projects under 500 tons, plant mix aggregate for projects under 500 tons, etc. MT 601 covers most of the commonly used items included in this small quantity category.

5 Optional Samples 5.1 Should there be any question relative to the quality or validity of a material or the Project Manager

chooses to obtain more samples than the minimum required, he has the option to submit a s many additional samples as may be necessary to insure that specification material is being used. All materials incorporated into the project, whether represented by actual samples or certification, are subject to final field inspection and acceptance by the project Manager.

6 Official Samples 6.1 Samples of material to be incorporated into the work must be either sampled by, or the sampling

must be witnessed by, a representative of the engineer in order to be considered official samples. 7 Report Form 7.1 Most major materials to be tested have a report form designed for their exclusive use. It is of the

utmost importance that these forms be completed as fully as possible. 7.2 All other materials not covered by a particular report form, whether represented by a sample or a

certification, must be accompanied by a miscellaneous report form No. 45. It is equally important that this report be fully completed. This form should show the name of the product, quantity involved, name and address of the manufacturer and / or supplier, etc. In the case of an acceptance on the basis of a certification, a remark must be made that no sample is being submitted and the acceptance is being made on the basis of pre-test, manufacturer’s certification or label, Division Laboratory report, etc.

1 of 1

MT 606-04 (06/01/04)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 606-04

PROCEDURE FOR SELECTING SAMPLING LOCATIONS BY RANDOM SAMPLING TECHNIQUE

1 Scope 1.1 The following is a method of selecting sampling locations of various materials from roadways and

trucks hauling asphalt mixture. 2 Definitions 2.1 Lot – a quantity of material that one desires to control. It may represent a day's production, a

specified tonnage, a specified number of truckloads, a specified time period during production. 2.2 Sample – a segment of a lot chosen to represent the total lot. It may represent any number of

sub-samples. 2.3 Sub-sample – a segment of a sample, taken from a unit of the lot, i.e., specified ton, a specified

time, a specified truckload. 2.4 Sample Unit – a portion of sub-sample taken from a unit of a lot and combined with one or more

other sample units to make up a sub-sample. 3 Selecting Sampling Locations from Roadways 3.1 Table X-1, pages 5 to 8, contains random numbers for the general sampling procedures. To use

this table for selecting locations for collecting samples, the following steps are necessary: 3.1.1 Determine the number of sampling locations within a section by selecting the maximum average

longitudinal distance desired between samples and dividing the length of the section by the maximum average longitudinal distance.

3.1.2 Select a column of random numbers in Table X-1 by placing 28 one inch square pieces of

cardboard, numbered 1 thru 28, into a container, shaking them to get them thoroughly mixed, and drawing out one.

3.1.3 Go to the column of Random Numbers identified with the number drawn from the container. In

sub-column A, locate all numbers equal to and less than the number of sampling locations desired.

3.1.4 Multiply the total length of the section by the decimal values in sub-column B, found opposite the

numbers located in sub-column A. Add the results to the station number at the beginning of the section to obtain the station of the sampling location.

3.1.5 Multiply the total width of the pavement in the section by the decimal values found in sub-column

C, opposite the numbers in sub-column A, to obtain the offset distance from the left edge of the pavement to the sampling location.

4 Example 4.1 Given: A completed plant mix surfacing project, 24 feet wide, 16,500 feet long, running from

Station 100+00 to 265+00. 4.1.1 For sampling purposes it is desired to take one pavement core for each 2-lane mile. The number

of sampling locations for this section, then are:

16,5005,280

= 3.1 = 3 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙

1 of 8

MT 606-04 (06/01/04)

4.1.2 The number 16 drawn from a container identifies this column of random numbers in Table X-1 to use.

4.1.3 The numbers selected from column 16 are:

Col. A Col. B Col. C 3 0.548 0.688 2 0.739 0.298 1 0.331 0.925

4.1.4 Station number of sampling location:

Length of Section,

Feet X Col. B

=

Distance from

Beginning of

Section, Feet

+

Station at Beginning of section

=

Station Number of Sampling Location

16,500 0.548 9042 100+00 190+42 16,500 0.739 12190 100+00 221+90 26,500 0.331 546 100+00 105+46

4.1.5 Offset distance from left edge of pavement to sampling location, feet.

Width of Pavement, Feet

X Col. C

=

Offset Distance From Left Edge of Pavement

to Sampling Location, Feet

24 0.688 16.5 24 0.298 7.2 24 0.925 22.2

4.1.6 Sampling locations are:

Station Number Distance From Left Edge, Feet

190+42 16.5 221+90 7.2 105+46 22.2

5 Selecting Sampling Locations in Trucks Hauling Asphalt Mixture 5.1 In this procedure, the following steps are necessary to select the sampling locations: 5.1.1 Select lot size--it can be time (hours), an average day's production (tons), a selected tonnage

[example: 2,000 tons (1815 mg)] or a selected number of truckloads. (A lot size of a day's production is recommended for this procedure as being convenient and easy to randomize.)

5.1.2 Select the number of samples desired per lot. One sample per lot, made up of four sub-samples,

is the minimum recommended. 5.1.3 Select the number of locations in each truckload from which sampling units of asphalt mixtures

will be taken to combine into one sub-sample. Two sampling units per sub-sample are recommended.

5.1.4 Assign each truckload of mixture in the lot a number, beginning with 1 for the first truckload and

number them successively to the highest number in the lot. Find the truckload numbers for sampling by the following procedure:

2 of 8

MT 606-04 (06/01/04)

5.1.4.1 Place consecutively numbered [1 through _____ one-inch (25 mm)] square pieces of cardboard, equal to the number of truckloads in the lot, into a container (such as a bowl). Mix them thoroughly before each drawing.

5.1.4.2 Draw a number of cardboard squares from the container equal to the number of sub-samples

desired for the lot. The numerals on the cardboard squares will be the truckloads to be sampled. 5.1.5 Choose for each sub-sample desired the location in the truckload for each of the sampling units.

Use the following steps: 5.1.5.1 Divide the truck beds into equal quadrants and number them 1 through 4 in any order desired. 5.1.5.2 Place four consecutively numbered [1 through 4, one-inch (25 mm)] square pieces of cardboard

into a container (such as a bowl). Mix them thoroughly before each drawing. 5.1.5.3 Draw out an amount of cardboard squares equal to the number of sample units desired. The

numerals on each square drawn represent the quadrants from which the sample will be taken. Replace the cardboard squares and repeat this step for each sample unit of each sub-sample to be taken.

Note – The principles involved may be applied to any other type of sampling of various materials which

use the measurements of time, quantity, depth or other distinctive measurements of a construction phase. There are other random methods such as using a watch or deck of cards that are readily adaptable to obtaining roadway samples and they may be used provided the full benefit of obtaining random samples is accomplished.

3 of 8

MT 606-04 (06/01/04)

4 of 8

MT 606-04 (06/01/04)

5 of 8

MT 606-04 (06/01/04)

6 of 8

MT 606-04 (06/01/04)

7 of 8

MT 606-04 (06/01/04)

8 of 8

MT 607-04 (06/01/04)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 607-04

PROCEDURE FOR REDUCING FIELD SAMPLES OF AGGREGATE TO TESTING SIZE

(Modified AASHTO R 76) 1 Scope 1.1 These methods cover the reduction of field samples of aggregate to the appropriate size for

testing, and applies to fine aggregate (FA), coarse aggregate (CA), and mixes of the two, and employ techniques that are intended to minimize variations in measured characteristics between the test samples and the field sample.

Note 1 – Under certain circumstances, reduction in size of the field sample prior to testing is not

recommended. Substantial differences between the selected test samples sometimes cannot be avoided, as for example, in the case of an aggregate having relatively few large size particles in the field sample. The laws of chance dictate that these few particles may be unequally distributed among the reduced size test samples. Similarly, if the test sample is being examined for certain contaminants occurring as a few discrete fragments in only small percentages, caution should be used in interpreting results from the reduced size test sample. Chance inclusion or exclusion of only one or two particles in the selected sample may importantly influence interpretation of the characteristics of the field sample. In these cases, the entire field sample should be tested.

2 Referenced Documents

AASHTO R 76 Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size T 84 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate MT Materials Manual MT 201 Sampling Roadway Materials

3 Selection of Method 3.1 Fine Aggregates – Field samples of fine aggregate (FA) that are drier than the saturated-surface-

dry (SSD) condition (Note 2) shall be reduced to test size by a mechanical splitter according to Method A. Field samples of FA that are wetter than SSD may be reduced to test size by quartering according to Method B, or the entire field sample may be dried to drier than SSD, using temperatures that do not exceed those specified for any of the tests contemplated, and then reduced to test sample size using Method A.

3.1.1 Field samples of fine aggregate wetter than SSD may be reduced to testing size by treatment as

a miniature stockpile as described in Method C. 3.1.2 If a moist field sample is very large, a preliminary split may be made by quartering according to

Method B to reduce the sample to not less than 5000 g, the portion obtained is then dried and reduced to test sample size using Method A.

3.1.3 Mixtures of FA and CA that are wetter than SSD shall be reduced to test sample size according to

Method B. Note 2 – The method of determining the saturated-surface-dry condition is described in paragraph 7.2 of

AASHTO T 84. As a quick approximation, if the fine aggregate will retain its shape when molded in the hand, it may be considered to be wetter than saturated-surface-dry.

3.2 Coarse Aggregate – Use of a mechanical splitter in accordance with Method A is preferred,

however, the field sample may be reduced by quartering in accordance with Method B. 4 Field Sample Size 4.1 The size of the field sample shall conform to paragraph 3 of MT 201.

1 of 3

MT 607-04 (06/01/04)

METHOD A – MECHANICAL SPLITTER 5 Apparatus 5.1 Sample Splitter – Sample splitters shall have an even number of equal width chutes, but not less

than a total of eight for coarse aggregate or twelve for fine aggregate which discharge alternately to each side of the splitter. The minimum width of the individual chutes shall be approximately 50 percent larger than the largest particles in the sample to be split (Table 1). The splitter shall be equipped with two receptacles to hold the two halves of the sample following splitting. It shall also be equipped with a hopper or straight-edged pan, which has a width equal to or slightly less than the overall width of the assembly of chutes by which the sample may be fed at a controlled rate to the chutes. The splitter and accessory equipment shall be so designed that the sample will flow smoothly without restriction or loss of material.

Table 1

Size Passing - 100% Splitter Opening

2 in. 3 in. or 6 bars 1½ in. 2¼ in. or 6 bars 1 in. 1½ in. or 3 bars ¾ in. 1½ in. or 3 bars ½ in. ¾ in. or 2 bars ⅜ in. 9/16 in. or 2 bars 4M ½ in. or 1 bar

Each bar = ½ inch

Example – When splitting 1½ inch Crushed Base Course, the total sample would require 2¼ inches or 6

bars and the minus 4M would require ½ inch or 1 bar. 6 Procedure 6.1 Place the field sample in the hopper or pan and uniformly distribute it from edge to edge, so that

when it is introduced into the chutes, approximately equal amounts will flow through each chute (Note 3). The rate at which the sample is introduced shall be such as to allow free flowing through the chutes into the receptacles below. Reintroduce the portion of the sample in one of the receptacles into the splitter as many times as necessary to reduce the sample to the size specified for the intended test. The portion of the material collected in the other receptacle may be reserved for reduction in size for other tests.

Note 3 – A sample splitter that has a hopper equipped with a dumping device may be filled and leveled

with a straightedge prior to dumping into the chutes. A sample splitter that has a free-flowing hopper shall be filled by a container, which has a width equal to or slightly less than the overall width of the assembly of chutes. The side of the container shall be placed against the edge of the hopper and dumped in a single motion into the hopper. In no case shall the material be poured into the hopper from the end of the container, scoop, or shovel.

2 of 3

MT 607-04 (06/01/04)

METHOD B – QUARTERING 7 Apparatus 7.1 The apparatus shall consist of a straightedge, scoop, shovel, or trowel; a broom or brush; and a

canvas blanket approximately 6 x 8 ft (2 x 2.5 m). 8 Procedure 8.1 Place the field sample on a hard, clean, level surface where there will be neither loss of material

nor the accidental addition of foreign material. Mix the material thoroughly by turning the entire sample over three times. With the last turning, shovel the entire sample into a conical pile by depositing each shovelful on top of the preceding one. Carefully flatten the conical pile to a uniform thickness and diameter by pressing down the apex with a shovel so that each quarter sector of the resulting pile will contain the material originally in it. The diameter should be approximately four to eight times the thickness. Divide the flattened mass into four equal quarters with a shovel or trowel and remove two diagonally opposite quarters, including all fine material, and brush the cleared spaces clean. Successively mix and quarter the remaining material until the sample is reduced to the desired size.

8.2 As an alternate method when the floor surface is uneven, the field sample may be placed on a

canvas blanket and mixed with a shovel as described above or by alternately lifting each corner of the canvas and pulling it over the sample toward the diagonally opposite corner causing the material to be rolled. Flatten the pile as described in paragraph 8.1. Divide the sample as also described in paragraph 8.1 or if the surface beneath the blanket is uneven, insert a stick or pipe beneath the blanket and under the center of the pile, then lift both ends of the stick dividing the sample into two equal parts. Remove the stick leaving a fold of the blanket between the divided portions. Insert the stick under the center of the pile at right angles to the first division and again lift both ends of the stick, dividing the sample into four equal parts. Remove two diagonally opposite quarters, being careful to clean the fines from the blanket. The remaining two quarters shall be successively remixed and quartered until the sample is reduced to the desired size.

METHOD C – MINIATURE STOCKPILE SAMPLING 9 Apparatus 9.1 The apparatus shall consist of a small sampling thief, small scoop, or spoon. 10 Procedure 10.1 Place the field sample on a hard, clean, level, non-absorbent surface. Thoroughly mix the

sample and form a miniature stockpile. Obtain a sample for each test by selecting at least five increments of material at random locations from the miniature stockpile, using any of the devices described in paragraph 9.

3 of 3

MT 608-04 (06/01/04)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 608-04

VOIDS TABLE

Percent Voids SG x 6.7.355 – wt. X 100 SG x 62.3555

Voids shown to the nearest one-tenth (1/10)

S.G. 2.55 2.26 2.57 2.58 2.59 2.60 2.61 2.62 2.63 2.64 2.65 2.66 2.67 2.68 2.69 2.70

Wt/Ft3

90 43.4 43.6 43.9 44.1 44.3 44.5 44.7 44.9 45.1 45.3 45.5 45.7 45.9 46.1 46.3 46.5 91 42.8 43.0 43.2 43.4 43.6 43.9 44.1 44.3 44.5 44.7 44.9 45.1 45.3 45.5 45.7 45.9

92 42.1 42.4 42.6 42.8 43.0 43.2 43.5 43.7 43.9 44.1 44.3 44.5 44.7 44.9 45.1 45.4 93 41.6 41.7 42.0 42.2 42.4 42.6 42.9 43.1 43.3 43.6 43.7 43.9 44.1 44.3 44.5 44.8

94 40.9 41.1 41.3 41.6 41.8 42.0 42.2 42.5 42.7 42.9 43.1 43.3 43.5 43.7 44.0 44.2

95 40.2 40.5 40.7 40.9 41.2 41.4 41.6 41.8 42.1 42.3 42.5 42.7 42.9 43.1 43.4 43.6 96 39.6 39.9 40.1 40.3 40.6 40.8 41.0 41.2 41.5 41.7 41.9 42.1 42.3 42.5 42.8 43.0

97 39.0 39.2 39.5 39.7 39.9 40.2 40.4 40.6 40.8 41.1 41.3 41.5 41.7 42.0 42.2 42.4

98 38.4 38.6 38.8 39.1 39.3 39.5 39.8 40.0 40.2 40.5 40.7 40.9 41.1 41.4 41.6 41.8 99 37.7 38.0 38.2 38.5 38.7 38.9 39.2 39.4 39.6 39.9 40.1 40.3 40.5 40.8 41.0 41.2

100 37.1 37.4 37.6 37.8 38.1 38.3 38.6 38.8 39.0 39.2 39.5 39.7 39.9 40.2 40.4 40.6

101 36.5 36.7 37.0 37.2 37.5 37.7 37.9 38.2 38.4 38.6 38.9 39.1 39.3 39.6 39.8 40.0 102 35.8 36.1 36.3 36.6 36.8 37.1 37.3 37.6 37.8 38.0 38.3 38.5 38.7 39.0 39.2 39.4

103 35.2 35.5 35.7 36.0 36.2 36.5 36.7 36.9 37.2 37.4 37.7 37.9 38.1 38.4 38.6 38.8

104 34.6 34.8 35.1 35.3 35.6 35.8 36.1 36.3 36.6 36.8 37.1 37.3 37.5 37.8 38.0 38.2 105 34.0 34.2 34.5 34.7 35.0 35.2 35.5 35.7 36.0 36.2 36.5 36.7 36.9 37.2 37.4 37.6

106 33.3 33.6 33.8 34.1 34.4 34.6 34.9 35.1 35.4 35.6 35.8 36.1 36.3 36.6 36.8 37.0

107 32.7 33.0 33.2 33.5 33.7 34.0 34.2 34.5 34.8 35.0 35.2 35.5 35.7 36.0 36.2 36.4 108 32.1 32.3 32.6 32.9 33.1 33.4 33.6 33.9 34.1 34.4 34.6 34.9 35.1 35.4 35.6 35.8

109 31.4 31.7 32.0 32.2 32.6 32.8 33.0 33.3 33.5 33.8 34.0 34.3 34.5 34.8 35.0 35.3

110 30.8 31.1 31.4 31.6 31.9 32.1 32.4 32.7 32.9 33.2 33.4 33.7 33.9 34.2 34.4 34.7 111 30.2 30.5 30.7 31.0 31.3 31.5 31.8 32.1 32.3 32.6 32.8 33.1 33.3 33.6 33.8 34.1 112 29.6 29.8 30.1 30.4 30.6 30.9 31.2 31.4 31.7 32.0 32.2 32.5 32.7 33.0 33.2 33.5

Percent Solids = 1004.623/ xSGx

FtWt

1 of 1

MT 609-16 (02/01/16)

1 of 2

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 609-16

FIELD NUMBERING CONCRETE CYLINDERS (MONTANA METHOD)

1 Scope 1.1 The procedure outlined in this method has been adopted in order to establish a uniform, statewide

numbering system for concrete test specimens and entry of specimens in MDT’s SiteManager. 2 Terminology 2.1 Definitions 2.1.1 Lot – A single day’s pour or every 200 yd3 (150 m3) of concrete poured, whichever is less,

excluding Class Pave. A lot of Class Pave is a single day’s pour or every 1,000 yd3 (750 m3) of concrete poured, whichever is less.

2.2.2 Test – A set of four (4) cylinders for Compressive Strength testing. 3 Specimen Number Procedure 3.1 Each concrete cylinder for an entire project will have its own unique specimen number. 3.2 Specimen numbers are to contain the Lot# (L), the Test# (T), and the Cylinder# in this format:

L#T#_Cylinder# (e.g., L4T1_1, L4T1_2, etc). Cylinder numbers are to be in continuous consecutive order for each class of concrete for the entire project.

3.3 Example 3.3.1 Project A has a 24 yd3 pour on day 1. Cylinders from this pour would be Lot 1 and Specimen

Numbers for day 1 would be L1T1_1-4. 3.3.2 Project A has a much larger pour on day 2. The first 200 yd3 poured would be Lot 2. Assuming 4

Tests in Lot 2, Lot 2 will have 16 cylinders. Specimen Numbers for Lot 2 would be L2T1_5-8, L2T2_9-12, L2T3_13-16, and L2T4_17-20.

Note 1 – A Cylinder# for Compressive Strength testing for a specific class of concrete should never be

repeated. If 300 cylinders are cast for a specific class of concrete for a project, the cylinders should be numbered 1 through 300.

4 SiteManager Sample Record Procedure 4.1 Generate one (1) SiteManager Sample Record for each Lot of cylinders cast. The Sample Record

can contain as many as four Tests (four (4) sets of four (4) cylinders) for Compressive Strength testing. A unique Sample Record is not required for each Test that is in the same Lot. Enter the following data to generate a Sample Record:

a. Sample ID: Assigned by Site Manager b. Sample Date: The date the concrete was sampled in the field (not the logged date) c. Sample Type: Project Acceptance d. Acceptance Method: Test Results e. Material Code: Concrete Class Code (i.e., General, Pave, Pre, SCC, Deck, etc.) f. Witnessed by: Self explanatory g. Producer/Supplier: Supplier of the concrete (e.g., 99-FOSSUMR-SUPP for Fossum

Ready Mix) h. QPL/PIT/MILL: Source of aggregate (e.g., 42-031010 for Fossum Ready Mix (Belzer) pit)

MT 609-16 (02/01/16)

2 of 2

i. Qualified Product Name: Leave blank j. District/Area: Self explanatory k. Contract Descr: Contract ID and Job Name l. Specimen Number(s): As described in Section 3 (e.g., L1T1-4_1-16) m. Intended Use: Describe use and location sample represents

Save Sample Record. 4.2 Navigate to the Addt’l Sample Data tab. Enter data into Specimen Number(s) field, if blank. The

Specimen Number(s) should match the Specimen Number(s) on the Basic Sample Data tab. Enter Control Type “Lot Number” then enter the Lot# in the Number box and Save.

4.3 Navigate to the Contract tab and attach appropriate Contract Number. Enter the Represented

Quantity for the item associated with that sample (e.g. yd3 of concrete or yd2 of sidewalk) and Save.

4.4 Navigate to the Tests tab. Attach a Concrete Properties test template for each sample tested for

concrete properties in this Lot, whether or not it is was tested with the cylinders. The Sample Test Number (Sample Test Nbr) should match the Test# entered in the Specimen Number box on the Basic Sample Data tab when applicable. Enter the Received Date, Actual Start Date, and Actual Completion Date in the fields displayed in the bottom right hand corner. These dates need to be filled in by the inspector for each test template attached and should be the same date as the Sample Date shown on the Basic Sample Data tab.

Note 2 – For each test template, ensure that the User ID of the personnel actually performing the testing is

listed as the Tester. 5 Split Loads 5.1 On multiple structure jobs where one load of concrete is split and placed on more than one

structure on the project, one set of test specimens will suffice, providing the split load of concrete is not altered in any way such as delaying successive pours, introducing additional water into the mix, etc.

6 Marking Sides of Cylinder 6.1 All identifying markings on concrete cylinders shall be placed on the sides of the cylinder instead

of, or in addition to, markings being placed on the ends. Markings on the cylinders are to include at a minimum:

• Full Sample ID assigned by SiteManager. • Specimen Number as described in Section 3. • Sample Date.

Note 3 – If necessary, concrete cylinders, upon arriving at the Materials Bureau, are immediately capped

on both ends. If field personnel place the identifying numbers on the end of the cylinders only, it is necessary for the Materials Bureau to transfer the identifying numbers to the side of the cylinder before it is capped, as the original information will be covered by the caps. Transferring information increases the potential for errors.

MT 610-04 (06/01/04)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 610-04

METHOD OF NUMBERING SUBGRADE MATERIAL, SURFACING MATERIAL, BITUMINOUS TREATED MATERIAL AND LIQUID ASPHALT

(Montana Method) 1 Scope 1.1 This method is intended to standardize the procedure in assigning field numbers to subgrade,

surfacing, bituminous treated material and liquid asphalt. 2 Field Numbering Procedure 2.1 Sample numbers shall run consecutively throughout the project for each type and size of material.

This must be repeated for each new source of material used on the project. Only one set of consecutive numbers is needed for contracts which involve two or more projects. All projects shall be listed, however, and the project for which the material is designated shall be indicated with a check mark.

3 Sub-grade Material 3.1 In the case of sub-grade, each type of material would mean original ground, embankment, pipe

bedding, ramp, etc. Numbering shall be as outlined in paragraph 2. 4 Surfacing Material (Crushed Top Surfacing, Crushed Base Course, etc.) 4.1 Samples shall be numbered in accordance with paragraph 2. 5 Plant Mix Surfacing, Plant Mix Base, Road Mix Surfacing, Bituminous Surface Treatment

and Bituminous Treated Base 5.1 In addition to samples of surfacing aggregates, samples of bituminous mixtures, as prepared for

use in paving, shall be numbered as outlined in paragraph 2. 6 Liquid Asphalt 6.1 Samples shall be numbered in accordance with paragraph 2. When switching to a liquid asphalt

produced by a different company or to a different grade of liquid asphalt, the numerical sequence must return to number one. Refer to MT 601 for sample size and frequency of sampling.

6.2 When sampling liquid asphalt, sample numbers and lot numbers will run consecutively. If the

manufacturer changes and the grade remains the same, the sample numbers will start over but the lot numbers will continue. If the grade of asphalt changes, the sample number and lot number will both start over.

Example 1

Manufacturer Grade

MRC PG 64-22 Sample No. 1 – 24 Lot No. 1 – 4

EXXON PG 64-22 Sample No. 1 – 12 Lot No. 5 – 6

MRC PG 64-28 Sample No. 1 – 18 Lot No. 1 – 3

MRC PG 64-22 Sample No. 25 – 37 Lot No. 7 - 8

1 of 1

MT 611-04 (06/01/04)

METHODS OF SAMPLING AND TESTING MT 611-04

A GUIDE TO LABORATORY FORMS (Montana Form Nos.)

1 Scope 1.1 This is a guide for the selection of the proper laboratory form when submitting samples,

inspection reports, or certifications to the Materials Bureau. 2 General 2.1 The following listing is given in two parts. Part I is used when submitting materials for testing.

Part II tells which forms to use when submitting inspection reports or certifications for various types of materials. Each of these parts is further broken down into different classes of material (aggregate, asphalt, steel, etc.). Following each individual item is the number of the laboratory form to be used.

PART I

FORMS TO ACCOMPANY SAMPLES

Soil and Aggregates Steel Products Bedding Material – MBA 123 Reinforcing Bars – 45 Blending Sand – MBA 123 Pre-stress Strand – 45 Blotter Material – MBA 123 Wire Mesh – 45 Binder – MBA 123 Steel Pipe – 45 Borrow – MBA 123 Concrete Aggregate – MBA 124A Miscellaneous Materials Crushed Base Course – MBA 123 Crushed Cover Aggregate – MBA 123 Bark – MBA 123 Crushed Top Surfacing – MBA 123 Canvas Shims – 45 Cushion – MBA 123 Cement – 55 Filter Material – MBA 123 Conduit – 45 Mineral Filler – MBA 123 Delineators – 45 Plant Mix Base Course – MBA 123 Electrical Wire – 45 Plant Mix Surfacing – MBA 123 Expansion Joint Filler – 45 Proposed Surfacing – MBA 123 Fencing Items – 45 Proposed Concrete – MBA 124A Glass Beads – 45 Sand Surfacing – MBA 123 Mulch – 45 Selected Surfacing – MBA 123 Paint – 45 Soil and Water for Corrosion – 45 Peat Moss – 45 Soil for "R" Value – MBA 123 Plastic Pipe – 45 Topsoil – MBA 123 Protective Coating – 45 Riprap – 45 Asphalt Seed – 45 Signing Material – 45 All asphaltic materials will be U-posts – 45 submitted on the following laboratory Wood Cores – 45 forms; Wood Preservatives – 45 QA projects – CB-57 Wood Products – 45 Non QA projects and maintenance – 101-C Bituminous Mixtures Concrete Samples Plant Mix Material for Extraction – 45 Concrete Cores – 45 Plant Mix Material for Monitoring – 45 Concrete Cylinders – 93 Plant Mix Pavement – 45 Concrete Cylinders (AR) – 77 Concrete Flexural Beams – 93

1 of 2

MT 611-04 (06/01/04)

PART II FORMS FOR INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION

Certifications Contractor’s Certification of Compliance: Non-Structural Steel & Iron Items – Form 406 Contractor’s Certification of Compliance: Miscellaneous Items – Form 407 All certifications of materials should be accompanied by Lab. Form No. 46 Inspection Reports Corrugated Metal Pipe Culvert and Misc. Culvert Items – 102 Field Nuclear Density Tests – MBF 1000A Pre-cast Concrete Items (Culverts, Barrier Rail, etc.) – 19A Pre-stress Beam Inspection Report – 48 Pre-stress Beam Pre-tensioning Record – BR-12 Steel and Misc. Structural Materials

1) Fabrication Inspection – MB-2 2) Field Inspection – MBF 46

Welding Inspection 1) Pre-fabrication Welding – WI-1 2) Fabrication Welding – WI-2 3) Final Welding – WI-3 4) Miscellaneous Welding – WI-4

Wood Products – 45

2 of 2